IHIIiliili^ 


HX64069419 
R  K53  P93  1911       Dental  materia  medic 


RECAP 


SS    il  II    91  i|  il  !       I 

FORMULARY 


^  Ccftumbia  Winibetaitp 
in  ttie  Citp  of  j^eto  gorfe 

^cfjool  of  Bental  anb  d^ral  ^urgerp 


i^eference  2.itirarp 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 
Columbia  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/dentalformularypOOprin 


DENTAL  FORMULARY 


A  Practical  Guide  for  the  Preparation  of  Chemical 
and  Technical  Compounds  and  Accessories  as  Used  in 
the  Office  and  Laboratory  by  the  Dental  Practitioner 
r====^^===  WITH  : 

An  Index  to  Oral  Diseases  and  Their  Treatment 


D 


BY 

HERMANN  PRINZ.  M.  D..  D.  D.  S. 

Professor   of    Materia    Medica,    Therapeutics    and    Pathology;    Director  of  the  Research 

Laboratory,  Washington  University  Dental  School, 

St.  Louis,  Mo. 


Second  Edition,  Revised  and  Reioritten 


PITTSBURGH.  PA. 

LEE  S.  SMITH  &  SON  CO. 

1911 


!\ 


Copyrighted  1911 
by  Lee  S.  Stnith  4'  So7i  Co. 


The  lecturer  must  not  be  tlie  ant,  collecting  all 
things  indiscriminately  from  all  quarters,  as 
provender  for  his  discourses; 

Nor  the  spider,  seeking  no  materials  abroad, 
but  spinning  his  iveb  of  specidative  doctrine  from 
zvithin  himself; 

But  rather  the  bee,   extracting  crude  honey 

from  various  Horvers,  storing  it  up  in  the  recesses 

of  his  brain,  and  submitting  it  to  the  operation  of 

his   internal  faculties,    until    it   be    matured  and 

ready  for  use. 

Lord  Bacon. 


prelface  to  the  second  edition. 


The  reception  given  to  the  first  edition  of  the  Dental 
Formulary  was  most  gratifying,  not  only  in  this  country 
but  also  in  the  remainder  of  the  English  speaking  world. 
The  issue  practically  became  exhausted  within  a  few  months. 
Owing  to  many  duties,  the  second  edition  has  been  delayed 
for  some  time. 

The  text  for  the  new  edition  of  the  Dental  Formulary 
has  been  completely  rewritten ;  many  important  additions 
have  been  made,  especially  in  regard  to  recent  improvements 
concerning  the  preparation  of  investment  compounds,  im- 
pression waxes,  and  other  materials  used  in  the  construction 
of  metallic  inlays.  Some  of  the  matter  which  has  become 
obsolete  has  been  discarded.  A  number  of  recipes  has  been 
modified  according  to  present  needs,  and  many  tests  have 
been  carried  out  to  verify  the  composition  and  construction 
of  formulas.  Only  such  formulas  are  presented  which  have 
shown  to  possess  real  merit  and  to  be  worthy  of  an  extended 
trial  at  the  hands  of  the  profession.  An  earnest  efl:'ort  has 
been  made  to  present  the  whole  matter  in  a  thoroughly 
up-to-date  manner. 

The  author  wishes  to  thank  his  many  professional 
friends  who  have  assisted  him  most  generously  in  the 
preparation  of  the  second  edition  of  the  Dental  Formulary. 

H.  P. 
Washington  University  Dental  School. 
St.  Louisj  IMo.,  August..  loii. 


FROM  THE  PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 


The  many  inquiries  regarding  formulas  for  technical 
and  chemical  compounds,  or  special  methods  of  procedure 
relative  to  the  treatment  of  oral  diseases,  received  from 
dental  practitioners,  has  been  the  prime  incentive  to  the 
preparation  of  this  volume. 

Its  object  is  to  furnish  the  practitioner  and  student  with 
a  reliable  guide  of  technical  information  as  needed  in  the 
office  and  laboratory  of  a  busy  practice.  No  claim  of 
originality  is  made  for  all  the  recipes  and  formulas — such 
complexity  is  rarely  the  product  of  a  single  brain.  Due 
credit  has  been  given  wherever  originality  could  be  clearly 
established.  The  matter  has  been  gleaned  from  English, 
German   and   French  current  literature  and  other  sources. 

The  author  has  carefully  selected,  modified  when  neces- 
sary, and  in  the  majority  of  cases  made  tests  to  establish 
reliability.  Each  formula  as  represented  in  this  work  may 
be  simply  regarded  as  a  basis  ;  it  may  be  employed  as  such 
or  modified  to  suit  the  conditions  at  hand.  In  general, 
however,  it  should  be  remembered  that  most  of  these 
formulas  represent  the  practical  results  of  mature  minds 
who  are  known  as  experts  in  their  specific  branches. 
Formulas,  recipes,  and  special  processes  as  published  in  the 
dental  journals,  and  even  in  text  books,  are  frequently 
selected  at  random  without  due  consideration  of  their  prac- 
ticability or  their  trustworthiness ;  they  often  contain  mis- 
takes which  naturally  produce  unreliable  and,  under  cer- 
tain conditions,  dangerous  results. 


The  book  is  primarily  intended  to  be  a  practical  guide, 
consequently  all  scientific  theories  or  matters  of  controversy 
have  been  purposely  omitted.  While  the  author  feels  he  has 
covered  a  wide  field,  yet  he  is  aware  of  the  fact  that  the 
book  is  of  necessity  incomplete  in  many  respects.  This, 
however,  may  be  expected  of  any  work  of  its  size  and 
nature. 

For  most  of  the  illustrations  the  author  is  indebted  to 
his  friend  and  former  pupil,  Dr.  Jas.  A.  Brown,  who  has 
greatly  assisted  him  in  the  preparation  of  this  and  other 
matters.  The  author  further  wishes  to  thank  his  many 
friends  who  by  their  assistance  have  been  of  much  help 
to  him. 

Whether  a  book  of  the  nature  of  a  dental  formulary  is 
needed  by  the  English  speaking  practitioner,  the  future  has 
to  decide.  Similar  works  published  in  German  and  in  French 
have  been  successful.  It  is  the  intention  of  the  author  to 
continue  the  task  before  him,  keeping  the  book  up  to  date 
by  constantly  enlarging  and  modifying  future  editions 
according  to  need. 

May  the  little  volume  give  to  its  reader  an  equal  amount 
of  joy  as  the  author  has  experienced  in  preparing  the  same. 

H.  P." 
St.  Louis,  Mo.,  April,  1907. 
602  Century  Building. 


CONTENTS. 


L  Plaster  of  Paris  preparations,  separating 
media,  cast  varnishes,  investment  com- 
pounds for  metallic  plate  bases  and  cast 
inla3'S,  moulding  materials,  etc 11-27 

II.     Gutta-percha   preparations,   dental   rubbers, 
modeling   and   inlay   waxes,   plastic   im- 
,.    pression  compounds,  etc 28-45 

III.  Cements,  adhesives,  and  varnishes 46-65 

IV.  Hard    and    fusible    alloys,    solders,    fluxes, 

amalgams,   refining   of  precious   metals, 
tempering  of  metals,  metal  polishes,  etc.   66-127 

\'.     Plating,    coloring,    lacquering,    and    etching 

of  metals 128-153 

VL     Preparations  for  the  mouth  and  teeth 154-178 

VII.     Pharmaceutical  compounds 179-208 

\TII.  An  index  to  oral  diseases,  their  etiology, 
diagnosis  and  treatment ;  including  acci- 
dents of  general  and  local  anesthesia 
and  acute  poisoning.  Urine — and  saliva 
analysis   209-282 

IX.     Miscellaneous 283-328 

X.     Tables 329-342 


CHAPTER  I. 

PLASTER  OF  PARIS  PREPARATIONS.  SEPARA- 
TING MEDIA,  CAST  V-ARNISHES,  IXVEST- 
MEXT  COMPOUNDS  FOR  METALLIC  PLATE 
BASES  AND  CAST  INLAYS,  MOULDING  MA- 
TERIALS, ETC. 


TO  COLOR  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  IMPRESSIONS. 

Dissolve  a  few  crystals  of  red  aniline   (cosine)    in  the 
water  which  is  used  for  mixing  the  plaster  of  Paris. 

TO  INCREASE  THE   COHESION   OF  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  FOR 
IMPRESSION  PURPOSES. 

Add  to  the  freshly  mixed  plaster  of  Paris  a  small  quan- 
tity of  loose  fibers  of  absorbent  cotton. 

IMPROVED  IMPRESSION  MATERIAL. 

I. 

Plaster  of  Paris lO  parts 

Powdered  asbestos 12  parts 

Powdered  chalk   4  parts 

Marble  dust i  part 

X.  B. — P;nts  :is  used  in  this  Dental  Formulan/  moan  quantities 
by  ^A•ei2■llt. 
.  11 


12  DENTAL  FOUMULAEY 

2. 

Powdered  sand  3  parts 

Powdered  chalk    3  parts 

Marble  dust 3  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 6  parts 

The  compound  may  be  colored  with  Mineral  Red,  Crocus 
Martis,  etc.  Low  fusible  alloys  may  be  readily  poured  into 
the  dried  and  warmed  impression  made  of  these  compounds. 

TO  HARDEN  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  CASTS. 

I. 

Borax   i  part 

Water 50  parts 

Boil  the  dried  plaster  cast  in  the  solution. 


Prepare  a  saturated  solution  of  sodium  bicarbonate  and 
place  the  dried  cast  in  this  solution  until  it  is  saturated  with 
it.    Remove  and  dry. 

3- 

Barium  sulphate i  part 

Hot  water 10  parts 

Place  the  dried  cast  in  the  solution  for  about  fifteen  minutes. 
Remove  and  dry. 


Prepare  a  saturated  solution  of  boric  acid  in  hot  water 
and  add  sufficient  v/ater  of  ammonia  to  form  the  soluble 
ammonium  borate.     Mix  the  plaster  with  this  cold  solution 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  13 

or  saturate  the  dry  cast  with  it.  In  a  few  days  the  cast  will 
be  sufficiently  hard  to  allow  polishing-  with  a  soft  wheel 
brush. 

5- 

Freshly  slacked  lime,  sifted i   part 

Plaster  of  Paris 6  parts 

Mix  with  hydrant  water. 

The  thoroughly  dried  cast  made  of  this  mixture  is  placed 
in  a  fairly  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  zinc  sulphate  or 
iron  sulphate  and  kept  in  the  respective  solution  for  two 
hours.  It  is  then  removed  and  dried.  Zinc  sulphate  does 
not  alter  the  white  color  of  the  cast,  while  iron  sulphate 
produces  a  light  green  shade  which,  in  time,  gives  an 
"oxidized"  appearance  to  the  cast.  Casts  prepared  accord- 
ing- to  this  method  are  about  twenty  times  as  hard  as 
ordinary  plaster  casts. 


The  plaster  cast  is  dried  at  about  250°  F.  until  it  is 
deprived  of  all  moisture.  It  is  now  placed  in  a  heated 
aqueous  solution  of  barium  hydrate  (5%)  and  kept  there 
until  saturated.  The  cast  is  removed,  dried  and  smoothened 
with  fine  sandpaper  and  placed  in  a  10  percent  aqueous  solu- 
tion of  oxalic  acid,  in  which  it  remains  a  few  hours.  The 
color  of  the  cast  is  not  altered  by  this  treatment.  If  a  per- 
manent tint  is  required,  the  plaster  cast  is  placed,  prior  to 
the  above  treatment,  into  a  fairly  saturated  solution  of 
copper  sulphate,  or  iron  sulphate,  or  chrome  sulphate,  thus 
producing,  respectively,  bluish,  greenish,  and  orange  tints. 
(Wachsmuth's  process.) 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


14  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

7- 

Marbleized  Plaster  of  Paris  Casts. 

Powdered  alum 4  parts 

Ammonium  chloride    4  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 17  parts 

Mix  thoroughly,  stir  in  water,  and  cast  in  the 
ordinary  way. 

8. 

Encaustic  Plaster  of  Paris  Casts. 

Pleat  the  plaster  cast  to  about  175°  F. ;  place  into 
melted  stearic  acid  and  keep  in  this  liquid  from  three  to 
five  minutes ;  remove  and,  after  drying,  burnish  with  a  soft 
brush  until  an  even  polish  is  obtained.  Larger  plaster  casts 
may  be  saturated  with  a  solution  of 

Stearic  acid 3  parts 

Gasoline*    20  parts 

After  the  evaporation  of  the  gasoline  the  cast  is  treated 
as  outlined  above. 

9- 

Beerite. 

Very  fine  marble  dust 100  parts 

Very  fine  powdered  glass 15  parts 

\^ery  fine  freshly  slacked  lime 7  parts 

*  In  all  eases  where  gasoline  or  benzine  is  recommended  for  pre- 
paring solutions  of  fats,  oils,  resins,  rubber,  etc.,  for  technical  pur- 
poses, carbon  tetrachloride  is  preferably  employed.  Carbon  tetra- 
chloride (CCI4),  commercially  known  as  "Carbonna"  and  by  other 
proprietary  names,  is  a  non-inflammable  efficient  substitute  for  the 
above  hydrocarbons. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Foninihir//  mean  quantities 
by  weight 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  15 

The  carefully  mixed  and  sifted  powder  is  mixed  with  a 
thin  aqueous  solution  of  sodium  silicate  (dental  silex,  soluble 
g'lass)  and  immediately  cast  into  the  mould.  The  cast 
requires  from  three  to  four  hours  for  complete  hardening. 
Beerite  produces  very  hard  and  sharp  casts. 

TO  HASTEN  THE  SETTING,  AND  TO  PREVENT  EXPANSION 
OF  PLASTER  CASTS. 

One  part  of  potassium  sulphate,' or  sodium  chloride,  or 
alum,  dissolved  in  eight  parts  of  water  before  adding  the 
plaster  of  Paris,  hastens  its  setting  very  materially  and,  to 
some  extent,  prevents  expansion. 

TO  RETARD  THE  SETTING  OF  PLASTER  CASTS. 

I. 

Mix  the  plaster  of  Paris  with  from  two  to  four  percent 
of  powdered  marshmallow  root ;  the  addition  of  four  per- 
cent retards  the  setting  of  the  cast  about  one  hour. 


Very  small  quantities  of  citric  acid  (lemon  juice)  or 
acetic  acid  (vinegar),  added  to  the  water  before  mixing 
the  plaster  of  Paris,  will  retard  its  setting. 

TO  PREVENT  WARPAGE  OF  PLASTER  CASTS. 

The  prompt  separation  of  the  cast  from  the  impression 
will  largely  obviate  warpage. 

TO  DISSOLVE  "SET"  PLASTER  OF  PARIS. 

Prepare  a  cold  saturated  solution  of  sodium  hyposul- 
phate  (also  known  as  sodium  thiosulphate  or  as  the  "hypo" 
of   the   photographer)    in    water   and   place   the   plaster   of 

X.  B. — Parts  as  us'^d  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  we i gilt. 


16  DENTAL  FOUMULABY 

Paris  cast  or  article  covered  with  it  into  this  solution.  An 
ordinary  dental  cast,  when  placed  in  this  solution,  will 
become  completely  disintegrated  within  a  few  hours. 

TO  REMOVE  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  FROM  RUBBER  PLATES. 

Immerse  the  plate  for  a  half  hour  into  a  weak  solution 
of  hydrochloric  acid,  remove,  and  wash  in  a  weak  solution  of 
sodium  carbonate. 

A  SIMPLE  MEANS  OF  REMOVING  PLASTER  OF  PARIS 
BANDAGES. 

In  spite  of  the  use  of  special  instruments,  the  removal 
of  plaster  of  Paris  bandages,  etc.,  is  often  troublesome  and, 
in  case  of  a  recent  fracture,  may  cause  injury.  Methods  of 
softening  the  plaster  by  water,  either  alone  or  with  the  addi- 
tion of  salt,  are  rarely  successful,  as  the  bandage  becomes 
coated  with  a  layer  of  grease,  which  prevents  their  action. 
Satisfactory  results  have  been  obtained  by  thoroughly  mois- 
tening the  line  of  section  with  vinegar  applied  on  a  tampon 
of  cotton  wool.  After  a  minute  the  plaster  will  be  found 
completely  softened  so  that  it  may  be  easily  divided  with  a 
pocket-knife  or  ordinary  scissors — a  procedure  easy  for  the 
surgeon  and  painless  for  the  patient.  By  this  method  a 
plaster  case  for  fracture  of  the  femur,  consisting  of  80 
turns  of  bandage,  may  be  removed  in  about  a  minute  and  a 
half. 

TO  REPAIR  BROKEN  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  CASTS. 

(Model  Cements.) 

I. 

Celluloid I  part 

Acetone    2  parts 

Keep  well  corked  and  away  from  fire. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAET  17 


2. 


Solution  of  sodium  silicate  (dental  silex, 

soluble  glass) i  part 

Barium  sulphate,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

3- 

Zinc  oxyphosphate  cement,  mixed  to  a  thin  cream. 

P.  S. :    The  plaster  easts  must  be  perfectly  dry  before  any  cement 
can  be  used  successfully. 

SEPARATING  FLUIDS  FOR  PLASTER  OF  PARIS  CASTS. 

I. 

Powdered  shellac   2  parts 

Borax  i  part 

Hot  water — not  boiling 32  parts 

Water-soluble  aniline  dye,  enough  to  color. 
Put  the  ingredients  into  a  bottle  and  shake  well.    The 
solution  will  be  ready  for  use  in  two  or  three  days. 

2. 

Castor  oil 3  parts 

Alcohol I  part 

Alcohol-soluble  aniline  dye.  enougn  to  color. 
This  solution  is  ready  for  immediate  use. 

3- 

Scrubbing  soap i  part 

Hot  water 8  parts 

Dissolve  and  add 

Lard  oil 8  parts 

Shake  well  before  using. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formvlavy  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


18  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 


4- 


Boiled  linseed  oil  painted  very  thin  over  the  impression 
forms  a  good  separating  medium. 

IMPRESSION  VARNISHES. 

I. 

Sandarac    -. 2  parts 

Alcohol* 5  parts 

2. 

Shellac    2  parts 

Alcohol  6  parts 

VARNISHES  FOR  PLASTER  CASTS. 

I. 

Sandarac    4  parts 

Mastic    2  parts 

Venice  turpentine i   part 

Alcohol 10  parts 

The  varnish  is  colorless,  elastic  and  leaves  a  fine,  glossy 
surface.  Any  alcohol-soluble  aniline  dye  may  be  added  to 
give  the  desired  tint. 

2, 

Sandarac   Varnish. 

Sandarac i  part 

Rosin,  light  colored i  part 

Alcohol 2  parts 

*  Tax-free  denatured  alcohol,  i.  e.,  grain  alcohol  made  unfit  for 
internal  purposes  by  the  addition  of  small  quantities  of  wood  alcohol, 
etc..  may  be  successfully  substituted  for  the  high-priced  pure  grain 
alcohol  in  all  technical  preparations. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


CENTAL  FOJiMULAr^Y  19 

Shellac   Varnish. 

3- 

Shellac    i  part 

Alcohol 3  parts 

P.  S.:     Alcoholic  varnishes  may  be  made  elastic  by  the  addition 
of  2  or  3  parts  of  castor  oil  to  every  100  parts  of  the  finished  varnish. 

1 

4- 

Collodion   Varnish. 

To  four  parts  of  sulphuric  ether  add  two  parts  of  collo- 
dion and  two  parts  of  "Silver  Gloss"  (to  be  obtained  from 
dealers  in  painters'  supplies).  Let  the  mixture  stand  for 
48  hours,  and  shake  well  before  using.     Keep  well  corked. 

5- 
Dental  Silex. 

Solution  of  sodium  silicate,  also  known  as  liquid  or  solu- 
ble glass,  is  diluted  with  2  to  3  parts  of  warm  water.  Let 
stand  for  ten  days  and  pour  off  the  supernatant  solution. 


MOLDS  FOR  DUPLICATING  PLASTER  CASTS  FROM  ORIGINAL 
CASTS  OR  MODELS. 

I. 

Fresh  slacked  lime 10  parts 

Sugar   10  parts 

Glycerin   12  parts 

Dissolve  the  sugar  in  the  glycerin  by  heating  upon  a 
water  bath,  and  stir  in  the  lime. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantifies 
bv  ■^•eifirht. 


♦ 


20  DENTAL  FOBMULAHY 

2. 

Carpenter's  glue 25  parts 

Gelatin 25  parts 

Gh'cerin    35  parts 

Water 25  parts 

Olive  oil 20  parts 

Place  the  glue,  the  gelatin  and  the  water  in  an  enameled 
rice  boiler,  let  stand  for  twenty-four  hours,  heat  until  dis- 
solved and  add  the  glycerin  and  olive  oil  under  constant 
stirring. 

Directions :  Place  the  dry,  talc-coated  model  in  the 
moulding  flask  and  pour  the  warm  solution  over  it.  Let 
it  stand  until  perfectly  hard.  Carefully  remove  the  cast 
from  the  elastic  mould.  A  number  of  casts  may  be  obtained 
from  the  same  mould. 

PREPARATION  AND  PAINTING  OF  DURABLE  PLASTER  CASTS. 

Professor  Port,  of  the  Heidelberg  Dental  School,  has 
adopted  the  following  method :  Three  parts  of  plaster  of 
Paris  and  one  part  of  whiting  are  very  intimately  mixed  by 
running  this  mixture  through  a  fine  sieve.  For  a  binding 
fluid  a  solution  of  French  hare  or  any  other  good  quality 
of  carpenter's  glue,  in  water,  is  used.  This  is  prepared 
by  soaking  five  parts  of  the  glue  in  one  hundred  parts  of 
water  for  about  12  hours  and  heating  the  mixture  until 
solution  takes  place.  A  very  thick  mixture  of  the  powder 
and  the  liquid  glue  is  now  prepared  and,  as  this  cannot  be 
poured,  it  is  carefully  painted  into  the  impression  with  a 
fine  hair  pencil.  A  few  more  layers  are  added  with  the 
pencil,  rocking  the  tray  after  each  addition  to  prevent  air 
bubbles,  and  finally  the  tray  is  filled  up  with  a  spatula.  At 
least  twelve  hours  are  necessary  before  the  cast  is  separated. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULAEY 


21 


The  impression  should  be  well  soaped ;  no  oil  or  varnish 
must  be  used.  Modeling  compound  impressions  must  be 
perfectly  dry. 

After  separation,  the  cast  should  be  further  dried  for 
about  a  week,  when  it  is  ready  to  be  painted.  A  thin  coat  of 
boiled  linseed  oil  is  brushed  over  the  surface  and  after  this 
is  thoroughly  dry,  the  cast  is  then  painted  with  artist's  tube 
oil  colors,  thinned  down  with  oil  of  turpentine.  The  follow- 
ing list  of  colors  is  given  by  the  author: 


3iladder  lake  3,  dark  rose. 

Bright  English  red. 

Carmine  cinnabar. 

Light  ochre  No.  i. 

Brilliant  yellow,  light. 

Terra  di  Siena. 

Prussian  blue. 

Parisian  ultramarine. 

Green,  light  cinnabar. 

Burned  Terra  di  Siena. 

Ivory  black. 

Kremnitz  white. 
Kremnitz  white  (a  fine  quality  of  white  lead),  mixed 
with  carmine  cinnabar  is  to  be  used  to  represent  normal 
mucous  membrane,  while  inflamed  membrane  will  be  nicely 
represented  by  madder  lake  mixed  with  light  ochre;  white, 
slightly  blended  with  light  ochre,  produces  a  color  similar 
to  that  of  the  teeth.  The  balance  of  the  model  is  to  be 
painted  black. 

Water  colors  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose ;  the 
painted  casts  must  then  be  varnished. 


9 
10 
II 
12 


X.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Formuhui/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


22  DENTAL  FOEMULAHY 

x\luminum  enamel  paint  makes  a  good,  durable  cast 
varnish  and  paint  combined. 

TO  BRONZE  PLASTER  CASTS. 

Prepare  the  cast  by  sizing  it  once  or  twice  with  boiled 
linseed  oil.  The  dry  cast  is  now  bronzed  with  any  desirable 
shade  of  either  dry  or  wet  bronze. 

CLEANING  OF  PLASTER  CASTS. 

I. 
Make  a  thick  paste  of  powdered  cornstarch  and  hot 
water,  and,  with  a  soft  brush,  paint  the  hot  mixture  evenly 
over  the  cast.  The  layer  of  starch  must  be  cjuite  thick. 
After  drying  slowly,  the  starch  will  split  and  may  be  scalded 
ofif  with  the  dirt  without  injury  to  the  cast. 

2. 

Prepare  a  saturated  solution  of  boric  acid  in  ammonia 
water,  place  the  dried  cast  in  this  solution  until  thoroughly 
saturated ;  remove  and  dry. 

MOLDINE. 

Pure  dry  clay  is  mixed  with  sufficient  glycerin  to  make 
a  plastic  mass. 

TO  RESTORE  HARDENED   MOLDINE. 

Place  the  moldine  in  a  vessel  and  cover  with  a 
mixture  of 

Glycerin i  part 

Water 9  parts 

Boil,  under  constant  stirring,  until  the  water  is 
evaporated. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  23 

PLASTILINE. 

( Artificial   Modeling   Clay.) 

Lard    50  parts 

Washed  sulphur 30  parts 

Clay 14  parts 

Zinc  oxide 6  parts 

MOLDING  SAND. 

Molder's  sand,  a  fine  quality 3  parts 

Powdered   clay i  part 

Mix  with 

Glycerin    i  part  - 

Water 2  parts 

OILED  MOLDING  SAND. 

Best  dry  molding  sand 5  parts 

Sperm  oil ". i   pari. 

Thoroughly  mix  and  sift. 

INVESTMENT   COMPOUNDS   FOR   SOLDERING,    CHEOPLASTIC 
CASTINGS,   ETC. 

I. 

Plaster  of  Paris 4  parts 

Molding  sand 4  parts 

Fire   clay i  part 

Powder,  mix  and  pass  through  a  fine  brass  wire 
sieve. 

2. 

Anthracite  coal  ash 20  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 30  parts 

Powdered  soapstone 3  parts 

Mineral    red 2  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


24  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

3- 

Plaster  of  Paris 2  parts 

Asbestos  powder 5  parts 

Powdered   soapstone i  part 

4- 

Plumbago    i   part 

Calcined  marble  dust i  part 

Plaster  of  Paris 2  parts 

5- 

Powdered    soapstone i  part 

Plumbago    3  parts 

Asbestos,  grade  No.  3 5  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 7  parts 

P.  S.:  Pumice  stone  should  not  be  used  in  an  investment  com- 
pound. Pumice  stone  is  a  form  of  vulcanic  glass  which  readily  melts 
when  heated,  thereby  edging  the  enamel  of  the  artificial  teeth. 

Borax  and  silicates  in  the  form  of  sand,  etc.,  which  are  present  in 
many  investment  compounds,  readily  unite,  even  at  a  low  heat,  to 
form  a  low  fusing  glass  which  may  run  over  the  teeth  during  soldering. 
The  teeth  become  rough  and  covered  with  numerous  small  cracks. 

INVESTMENT  COMPOUNDS  FOR  GOLD  CAST  INLAYS,  ETC. 

I. 

English  China  clay 2  parts 

Powdered  pure  sand 2  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 3  parts 

2. 

Powdered  soapstone i  part 

Powdered  asbestos 9  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 10  parts 

Powdered  pure  sand lo  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 

\)y  weight. 


DENTAL  F0E21ULAIIY  25 

3- 

Plaster  of  Paris ' 12  parts 

Powdered  silex 5  parts 

Powdered  Ceylon  graphite 3  parts. 

4- 

Powdered  mica* i  part 

]\Iarble  dust i  part 

Plaster  of  Paris 2  parts 

5- 
Plaster  of  Paris 2  parts 

Powdered  silexf   (lithowhite) 3  parts 

6. 

Powdered   soapstone 2  parts 

]\[arble    dust 2  parts 

Graphite   2  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 6  parts 

7- 
Good  quality  of  ordinary  dental  plaster.  .     2  parts 

Powdered    mica i   part 

Marble  dust,  pulverized  fine i   part 

Quantities  are  by  measure,  Jiot  by  weight. 

The  mica  and  marble  dust  should  both  be  pow- 
dered as  fine  as  flour. 

*  Powdei'e<l  mica  may  be  obtained  from  the  United  States  Mica 
Mining  &  Milling  Company,  at  Micanite,  Colorado. 

t  Powdered  pure  sand,  silcr,  lithowhite,  "Kiesel, "  "Kiesel- 
guhr, "  are  names  given  to,  more  or  less,  the  same  substances,  i.  e., 
impure  preparations  of  silicon  oxide.  Silex,  or  lithowhite,  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Bridgeport  Wood  Finishing  Company,  72  W.  Lake 
Street,  Chicago,  111. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 

by  weight. 


26  DENTAL  FOBMULAHY 

BAKED   CLAY   MODELS. 

The  plaster  of  Paris  impression  is  filled  with  a  hot 
gelatin  or  glue  solution  (see  page  20).  After  cooling,  a 
perfect  thick  walled  impression  of  this  cast  in  hard  plaster 
of  Paris  is  prepared,  and  set  aside  for  a  few  hours  to  dry. 
.A  good  quality  of  potter's  clay  is  now  carefully  pressed  in 
this  impression  and  set  aside  in  a  warm  place  for  two  hours 
to  dry.  The  impression  is  now  carefully  removed  and  the 
clay  model  is  lightly  burned  at  about  1800°  F.  in  a  suitable 
furnace.  The  cold  model  is  now  coated  with  a  mixture  of 
!\[ajolika  enamel  and  water  and  burned  again.  Three 
colors  of  enamel  are  recjuired ;  pink  for  representing  the 
mucous  surfaces,  ivory  for  the  teeth  and  black  for  the 
body  of  the  model. 

FIRE  BRICKS. 

When  not  exposed  to  mechanical  injury  a  mixture  of 
one  part  (bulk)  of  fireclay  and  three  to  four  parts  (bulk) 
of  sawdust,  moistened  with  water  and  worked  into  form*  and 
burnt,  enables  a  very  much  higher  temperature  to  be  ob- 
tained in  a  furnace  then  can  be  obtained  with  ordinary  fire- 
bricks. In  building  a  furnace  of  firebricks  or  slabs,  fireclay 
must  be  used  as  cement  instead  of  mortar.  The  fireclay 
should  not  be  mixed  with  water  as  is  usually  the  case,  but 
with  a  solution  of  silicate  of  soda.  A  furnace  of  this  kind  is 
readily  adapted  to  muffles  for  continuous  gum  work,  cruci- 
bles, ladles,  etc.  If  the  furnace  is  required  for  muffles,  a 
ledge  should  be  left  at  the  back  about  five  inches  above  the 
top  of  the  fire  box  to  carry  the  muffle  and  the  front  will 
have  to  be  built  up,  leaving  a  hole  for  the  door  about  nine 
inches  above  the  top  of  the  muffle,  to  enable  fresh  fuel  to 
be  added  as  required.     If  the  shaft  is  nine  inches  wide  clear 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMVLAEY  27 

inside,  the  muffle  should  not  exceed  four  and  a  half  inches, 
as  room  is  required  on  each  side  to  allow  the  fuel  to  fall 
down  over  the  sides  of  the  muffle.  If  no  blower  is  used  a 
high  chimney  is  required  to  furnish  the  necessary  draught. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formidary  mean  quantities 
by  weigtit. 


CHAPTER  II. 

GUTTA-PERCHA  PREPARATIONS,  DENTAL  RUB- 
BERS, MODELING  AND  INLAY  WAXES,  PLAS- 
TIC IMPRESSION  COMPOUNDS,  ETC. 

SOLUTION  OF  GUTTA-PERCHA. 

Purified    gutta-percha lo  parts 

Chloroform 95  parts 

Absolute  alcohol 5  parts 

TRAUMATICINE. 

Purified    gutta-percha i  part 

Chloroform 9  parts 

Lead  carbonate  i  part 

Shake  the  mixture  frequently  until  complete  solution 
of  the  gutta-percha  has  taken  place.  Set  aside  for  a  few 
days  and  finally  decant  the  clear  liquid.  Keep  in  well  stop- 
pered bottles. 

CHLORO-PERCHA. 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 10  parts 

Chloroform,  a  sufficient  quantity. 

EUCA-PERCHA  COMPOUND   (BUCKLEY). 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 480  parts 

Menthol    16  parts 

Thymol 24  parts 

Kucalyptol    480  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formular/j  mean  quantities 
by  weigiic. 
28 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  29 

TEMPORARY  STOPPING. 

I. 

White  beeswax i  part 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 4  parts 

Prepared  chalk 4  parts 

Melt  the  wax  on  a  water  bath,  add  the  gutta-percha, 
stir  until  liquefied,  and  incorporate  the  chalk.  Knead  until 
thoroughly  mixed  and  pass  through  a  dental  rolling  mill, 
having  grooved  rolls. 

2. 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 2  parts 

Zinc  oxide 8  parts 

Calcium   sulphate i  part 

3- 

Flagg's. 

White  beeswax 2  parts 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 6  parts 

Powdered  silex 3  parts 

Powdered  feldspar 3  parts 

4- 

Hill's. 

Powdered  feldspar i  part 

Powdered  silex i  part 

Powdered    quickUme 2  parts 

Gutta-percha   base   plate,   a    sufficient   quantity   to 
make  a  stifif  mass. 

5- 
Jacob's. 

Gutta-percha  base  plate i  part 

Powdered    silex 4  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Denial  Funiiuhiri/  moan  quautities 
by  weight. 


30  DENTAL  FOFMULAFxY 

6. 
Coppered  Gutta-Percha. 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 6  parts 

Copper  oxide,   black 6  parts 

Zinc  oxide I2  parts 

7- 

Silver   Nitrate    Gutta-Percha. 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 2  parts 

Zinc  oxide '. lo'  parts 

Silver    nitrate i  part 

8. 

Aluminum  Gutta-Percha. 

White  gutta-percha  base  plate i6  parts 

Aluminum    powder lo  parts 

Zinc  oxide , 2  parts 

Prepared  chalk i  part 

9- 

Stanno-Percha. 

Equal  parts  by  weight  of  gutta-percha  base  plate  and 
sifted  sponge  tin  (see  page  71)  are  put  in  a  mortar,  the 
mortar  is  placed  in  a  heated  sand  bath  and  the  ingredients 
are  thoroughly  kneaded  until  a  grayish-blue  mass  is  obtained. 
The  mass  is  now  divided  into  two  equal  parts ;  the  first  por- 
tion is  reserved,  while  the  second  portion  is  again  kneaded 
with  an  equal  amount  of  sponge  tin.  The  first  portion  is 
soft  and  is  used  for  lining  the  cavity,  while  the  second 
(harder)  portion  is  used  for  the  body  of  the  filling. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


DENTAL  FOBMVLABY  31 

IMPRESSION  GUTTA-PERCHA. 

Gutta-percha    .  , 35  parts 

Zinc  oxide 9  parts 

Vermillion    56  parts 

IDEAL  BASE  PLATE. 

I. 

Black    gutta-percha i  part 

Shellac    18  parts 

2. 

Shellac i  part 

Perfection  impression  material  (Detroit),      i  part 

Melt  the  shellac  on  a  low  fire  and  gradually  add,  under 
constant  stirring,  the  impression  compound.  Pour  on  a 
glass  slab  and  roll  with  a  wet  rolling  pin  to  the  desired 
thickness. 

3- 

Artificial  shellac  fmetakaline)    i  part 

White  beeswax 4  parts 

DENTAL  RUBBERS. 

(After  Dr.  E.   Wildman.) 

Dark   Brown. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

Red. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

\^ermillion    36  parts 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  •neight. 


32  DENTAL  FOBMULABT 

Dark  Pink. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

Zinc  oxide 3'b  parts 

Vermillion   10  parts 

Grayish    White. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

Zinc  oxide 96  parts 

Black. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

Ivory,  or  drop  black 24  parts 

Jet   Black. 

Caoutchouc    48  parts 

Sulphur    24  parts 

Ivory,  or  drop  black 48  parts 

TO  RESTORE  HARDENED  DENTAL  RUBBER. 

Place  the  rubber  sheet  in  warm  water,  let  it  soften, 
remove  the  cloth  sheets  and  now  thoroughly  brush  the  rub- 
ber with  warm  soap  suds.  Wash  in  warm  water,  dry  the 
sheets  and  with  a  soft  sponge  dipped  in  oil  of  turpentine 
thoroughly  wash  over  the  sheets  on  both  sides.  After  the 
oil  of  turpentine  has  been  absorbed,  the  rubber  is  ready 
for  use. 

TO  MAKE  A  TRUE  RUBBER  SOLUTION. 

Ethylene  dichloride,  not  ethyl  chloride,  gives  a  true 
solution,  not  merely  a  diffusion  of  rubber,  and  has  the  ad- 
vantage  of  being  non-inflammable.      Its   solvent  power  is 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULABY  33 

greater  than  carbon  distilphide,  chloroform  and  carbon 
tetrachloride ;  it  has  a  boiling  point  of  130°  F.  and  is  more 
volatile  than  other  solvents,  and  its  vapors  are  non-explosive. 

COLD  VULCANIZATION. 

Sulphur    chloride i  part 

Carbon    disulphide 30  parts 

The  rubber  cast  is  plunged  in  this  solution  and  left  there 
from  60  to  70  seconds.  It  is  now  removed,  left  to  dry  in 
a  warm  room  (about  one  to  two  minutes)  and  washed  in  a 
weak  alkaline  solution,  i.e.,  a  2  percent  solution  of  sal  soda 
in  water. 

CONSERVATION   OF   VULCANIZED   RUBBER   GOODS. 

It  is  claimed  by  Hempe  that  the  gradual  hardening  and 
deterioration  of  vulcanized  India  rubber  goods  is  due  to  the 
spontaneous  evaporation  of  the  solvent  liquids  contained  in 
India  rubber  and  those  introduced  during  the  process  of 
vulcanization.  Other  observers  claim  that  the  evaporation 
of  the  solvents,  especially  in  the  presence  of  air  and  sun- 
light, or  in  cold  temperature,  causes  the  sulphur  present  in 
the  vulcanite  gradually  to  oxidize  and  finally  to  form  sul- 
phuric acid  which,  in  turn,  destroys  the  rubber.  Keeping 
the  rubber  goods  immersed  in  a  weak  alkaline  aqueous  solu- 
tion or  in  parafifin  oil,  stored  away  from  light  at  room  tem- 
perature, will  act  as  a  permanent  preservative. 

According  to  Larine,  there  are  only  three  solutions  of 
the  many  employed  in  experimental  work  which  have  shown 
themselves  to  be  of  practical  value,  namel}".  a  3  percent  solu- 
tion of  phenol,  a  3  percent  solution  of  aniline,  and  an  8 
percent  solution  of  glycerin,  with  an  equal  amount  of  alcohol, 
in  water 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  Aveight. 


34  DENTAL  FOFMULAEY 

Three  percent  phenol  is  the  best  method  of  all.  The 
author  has  seen  tubes  that  had  been  immersed  for  ten  years 
in  this  liquid  which  had  not  altered  a  particle  during  this 
long  period  ;  a  truly  remarkable  fact,  when  we  consider  the 
rapidity  with  which  such  articles  deteriorate  in  the  air.  The 
only  precaution  to  be  observed  is  to  have  the  containers  of 
such  size  as  to  prevent  kinks.  Another  advantage  is  that 
the  liquid  does  not  change  its  character.  The  flasks  may 
be  opened  at  any  time  Avithout  the  necessity  of  preparing  a 
fresh  solution. 

Three  percent  aniline  acts  in  a  similar  manner,  though  a 
slight  lengthening  and  increase  in  volume  is  noted  in  the 
case  of  black  rubber. 

Alcohol-glycerin  solution  has  no  effect  on  deteriorated 
articles,  but  new  rubber  goods  are  preserved  when  immersed 
therein. 

PRESERVING  RUBBER  DAM. 

Secure  only  such  rubber  as  is  in  the  best  possible  con- 
dition. Too  much  care  in  this  direction  can  not  be  exercised. 
Rubber,  being  an  organic  substance,  necessarily  undergoes 
a  changs  when  exposed  to  the  air  and  must,  therefore,  be 
protected  in  order  to  insure  its  usefulness.  To  accomplish 
this  end,  secure  a  number  of  Mason's  glass  jars,  filling  the 
same  with  pure  boiled  water  and  adding  to  each  jar  of 
water  a  few  drops  of  such  antiseptics  as  plienol  or  lysol. 
Then  immerse  a  loose  roll  of  fresh  rubber  dam  in  an  up- 
right position,  taking  the  precaution  to  shake  out  all  the 
air  between  the  folds  before  screwing  on  the  cover.  The 
jar  should  at  all  times  be  filled  with  water  to  the  point  of 
overflowing  in  order  to  exclude  all  air.  Rubber  preserved 
in  the  above  manner  can  be  kept  in  perfect  condition,  if 
necessary,  for  a  period  of  about  one  year.     For  use,  remove 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisecl  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOliAlUL.ir.Y  35 

the  desired  amount,  ,dry  the  rubber  and  rub  down  with 
talcum  powder. 

STICKY  WAX. 

I. 

Rosin i6  parts 

Yellow  beeswax 8  parts 

Vermillion    i   part 

Melt  on  a  water  bath  and  stir  together,  pour  on  a  glass  slab 
and  roll  with  wet  fingers  into  pencils  or  pour  in  molds 
(see  page  39). 

2. 

Yellow  beeswax 4  parts 

Rosin    I  part 

Gum  dammar    i  part 

3- 

Yellow  beeswax i  part 

Rosin    3  parts 


4- 

Gum  dammar i  part 

White  beeswax 4  parts 

Light  yellow  rosin 7  parts 

5- 

Yellow  beeswax 48  parts 

Light   rosin 84  parts 

Gum  dammar.  . 12  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Benin}  Forinulari/  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


-36  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

PINK  BASE  PLATE  WAX. 

I. 

White  beeswax 50  parts 

Paraffin 25  parts 

Alkanet  root,  whole i  part 

Melt  the  wax  and  the  paraffin  and  add  the  alkanet  root. 
Leave  on  the  fire  until  the  desired  shade  of  pink  is  obtained, 
strain  through  cheese  cloth  into  tin  molds,  about  1-32  or 
I -16  inch  thick.  Have  the  molds  coated  with  a  film  of 
gl3xerin.  The  lids  of  the  tin  boxes  in  which  dental  rubber 
is  sold  make  good  molds. 

To  polish  the  sheet  wax,  pass  between  the  rubber 
rollers  of  a  wash  wringer. 

2. 

White  beeswax 40  parts 

Gum   turpentine 10  parts 

Cotton  seed  oil 3  parts 

Vermillion    , 4  parts 

3- 

(To   be   used   in   hot  weather.) 

White  beeswax 20  parts 

Crude    turpentine ,.  .  .  4  parts 

Cotton  seed  oil i  part 

Vermillion    2  parts 

4- 

(To  be  used  in  cold  weather.) 

White  beeswax 20  parts 

Crude   turpentine 6  parts 

Cotton  seed  oil 2  parts 

Vermillion    2  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Forrmdary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  37 

5- 

Hard  Base  Plate  Wax. 

Yellow  beeswax 50  parts 

Gum  mastic 6  parts 

Prepared  chalk 3  parts 

Vermillion    4  parts 

6. 

Rosin    I  part 

Ceresin   3  parts 

Paraffin    , 6  parts 

MAKING  SHEET  WAX. 

I. 

Melt  the  wax  in  a  rather  narrow  vessel ;  fill  a  round, 
smooth  pint  bottle  with  cold  water,  coat  the  outer  surface 
with  a  film  of  glycerin  or  soap  suds  and  dip  the  bottle  in  the 
melted  wax.  quickly  remove  it  and.  if  the  wax  coat  is  not 
sufficiently  thick,  dip  again.  Cut  the  sheet  with  a  sharp 
pen  knife  and  immediately  flatten  out. 


Take  two  pieces  of  ordinary  glass:  have  both  warm. 
dr_\-  and  oiled.  Place  the  first  piece  upon  a  flat  surface  and 
at  each  corner  place  a  small  block  of  wood  of  the  thickness 
of  the  wax  desired.  Pour  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  melted 
wax  upon  the  plate  and  quickly  lay  the  second  glass  over  the 
first,  pressing  the  same  until  each  corner  touches  the  gauge 
blocks. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


38  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 


A  porous  cell,  made  for  electric  batteries,  about  3^  by 
7  inches,  is  filled  with  cold  water,  and  thoroughly  wet  all 
over.  Wipe  the  cell  with  a  damp  sponge  or  cloth  to  re- 
move superfluous  moisture  ;  then  with  a  steady  hand  plunge 
the  cell  down  into  the  wax,  and  remove  rather  slowly.  The 
wax  should  not  be  too  hot — the  cooler  it  becomes  the 
thicker  the  sheets  will  be.  If  very  thick  sheets  are  desired 
a  second  plunge  may  be  made.  Quickly  cut  the  sheets  on 
opposite  sides  of  the  cylinder,  remove,  and  place  in  a  pan 
of  cold  water.  After  three  or  four  plunges  put  fresh  cold 
water  in  the  cell.  The  sheets  may  be  trimmed  by  shearing 
before  they  become  too  cold  and  brittle. 

GOLD  INLAY  IMPRESSION  WAXES. 

I. 

Yellow  beeswax 10  parts 

Gum  dammar 10  parts 

Yellow   ceresin 20  parts 

Hard  paraffin  (120°  F.  melting  point) ...  30  parts 

Carnauba  wax 30  parts 

Dye  stuff,  to  suit. 

Melt  the  beeswax,  ceresin,  paraffin  and  carnauba  wax  in  a 
porcelain  dish  on  a  water  bath,  add  the  gum  dammar  in 
small  portions  and  stir  constantly  until  a  uniform  mass 
is  obtained.  Remove  from  the  fire  and  add  the  dye  stufif. 
Gold  inlay  waxes  should  be  colored  deeply  with  a  dye 
especially  suitable  to  the  needs  of  the  operator.  L^mp 
black  or  an  oil-soluble  aniline  dye  are  best  suited  for  this 
purpose.     (The  red  and  Ijlue  "Cerasine"  aniline  dyes  are  to 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 

liy  \\eight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  39 

be  recommended).     Gold  inlay  wax  may  be  cast  into  sticks 
as  outlined  below. 

2. 
Inlay   Impression   Wax,    W.    A.   Price. 

White  gum  dammar no  parts 

Tamarack* lo  parts 

Paraffin    15  parts 

Stearic  acid . 2  parts 

3- 
White  beeswax i  part 

Hard   paraffin i  part 

4. 

Yellow  beeswax 10  parts 

Carnauba    wax 30  parts 

Hard   paraffin 50  parts 

CASTING  STICKS   OF   STICKY-WAX,   INLAY   IMPRESSION 
WAX,  ETC. 

Obtain  glass  tubing  of  convenient  length ;  the  tubing 
should  have  fairl\-  thick  walls.  The  bore  may.be  of  any 
diameter,  three-sixteenths  to  one-fourth  inch  gives  con- 
venient sticks  of  wax.  The  ends  of  the  tubes  should  be 
ground,  not  melted  smooth,  as  melting  lessens  the  bore  at 
the  point  of  fusion.  Thoroughly  clean  the  tul)cs  and  dry  the 
inside  by  pushing  pieces  of  cotton  wool  through  them.  The 
tubes  must  then  be  lubricated  to  prevent  the  wax  from 
sticking.  Do  not  lubricate  with  oils ;  glycerin  forms  a  very 
effective  lubricant   for  this  purpose :   and   is  easily  applied 


*  Tamarack  is  a  trade  name  for  American  larch  turpentine. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Fonniilary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


40  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

by  saturating  pieces   of  cotton   wool  with   it  and  pushing 
them  through  the  tubes. 

Having  the  wax  melted  and  the  tubes  lubricated,  fill 
each  of  the  tubes  as  follows :  Attach  a  piece  of  rubber 
tubing  to  one  end  of  the  glass  tube ;  take  the  other  end  of 
the  rubber  tubing  in  the  mouth.  Dip  the  free  end  of  the 
glass  tube  into  the  melted  wax  and  suck  the  wax  up  until 
the  tube  is  full.  Pinch  the  rubber  tubing  close  to  the  glass 
tube,  and  the  tube,  full  of  wax,  can  then  be  lifted  and  laid 
in  a  horizontal  position.  Then  release  and  remove  the 
rubber  tubing.  The  wax  will  not  run  out.  Repeat  the 
process  until  all  the  tubes  are  filled.  When  cool,  the  sticks 
of  wax  can  readily  be  pushed  out  of  the  tubes.  If  a  piece 
of  wax  should  stick  in  a  tube,  it  is  either  because  the  tube 
was  not  properly  lubricated  or  because  its  bore  was  not 
uniform.  Pink  wax  base  plate  may  be  cast  into  sticks  for 
"waxing  up"  in  the  same  manner,  but  owing  to  the  much 
greater  fluidity  of  pink  wax  when  melted,  it  is  more  difficult 
to  manipulate. 

ENGRAVER'S  WAX. 
I. 

Yellow  beeswax i  part 

Tallow    I  part 

Burgundy  pitch 2  parts 

2. 

Cottonseed  oil i  part 

Rosin    I  part 

Beeswax " 2  parts 

IMPRESSION  WAX. 

Yellow  beeswax  7  parts 

Hard  paraffin i  part 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight.  • 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  41 

MODELING  WAX. 

I. 

Lard    15  parts 

Venice  turpentine 25  parts 

Yellow  beeswax 200  parts 

White  bole 1 50  parts 

!\Ielt  the  wax,  turpentine  and  lard  together,  then  incor- 
porate the  white  bole.  \\'hen  a  uniform  mass  is  obtained, 
pour  the  mixture  into  cold  water.  Knead  the  mass  under 
fche  water  until  it  assumes  a  uniform  degree  of  plasticity. 

2. 

Olive  oil I  part 

A'enice  turpentine 4  parts 

Cornstarch 8  parts 

Yellow  beeswax 16  parts 

Vermilion i  part 

FLOOR,  OR  FURNITURE  WAX. 

\'enice  turpentine i  part 

Rosin    4  parts 

Yellow  beeswax 16  parts 

TO   CLARIFY  WAX  REMNANTS. 

I. 

Melt  the  wax  remnants,  bring  to  a  boil,  and  break  a 
fresh  egg  in  the  boiling  wax :  stir  for  3  to  4  minutes,  until 
the  egg  is  coagulated,  and  strain  through  cheesecloth. 


In  a  flat  vessel,  having  sloping  sides,  melt  a  pound  of 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


42  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

wax  remnants  in  an  equal  amount  of  water;  stir  a  table- 
spoonful  of  sulphuric  acid,  added  in  a  slow  stream,  into 
the  hot  wax ;  let  it  cool,  and  cut  oft'  the  lower  sediment. 


The  wax   remnants   are   melted   and   strained  through 

cheesecloth  and  boiled  in 

Oxalic  acid i  part 

Water 50  parts 

After  cooling,  the  wax  is  separated   from  the  oxalic  acid 

solution. 

TO  FILTER  WAX. 

The  wax  may  be  dissolved  in  chloroform,  carbon  disul- 
phate  or  other  solvents,  and  then  filtered  through  paper  in 
a  well-covered  heated  glass  funnel.  A  simpler  method  con- 
sists in  heating  the  wax  with  5  percent  of  its  own  weight 
with  sodium  sulphate  on  a  water-bath  for  about  15  minutes 
and  then  filtering  through  a  cotton  plug  inserted  into  a 
glass  funnel  surrounded  by  a  hot  water  jacket. 


TO  DETERMINE  THE  MELTING  POINT  OF  WAXES,  FATS, 
RESINS,  ETC. 

The  material  whose  melting  point  is  to  be  determined 
is  carefully  melted  in  a  small,  perfectly  dry  beaker,  and  a 
capillar}-  tul)e  is  dipped  into  the  liquefied  substance,  and, 
when  filled,  one  end  of  the  tube  is  sealed  in  the  flame  and 
it  is  then  put  aside  in  a  cool  place  for  several  hours.  At  the 
end  of  this  time  the  tube  is  tied  to  the  bulb  of  a  delicate 
thermometer,  the  length  of  the  tube  being  the  same  as 
the  thermometer  bulb.     The  thermometer  and  attached  tube 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOimULARY  43 

are  placed  in  water  and  gently  warmed  until  the  capillary 
column  of  the  wax,  fat.  etc.,  becomes  transparent.  At  this 
moment  the  thermometric  reading  is  made,  which  indicates 
the  melting  point  of  the  substance  under  observation. 


MODELING  COMPOSITION. 

I. 

Stearin    25  parts 

Gum  dammar '. 50  parts 

Powdered  soapstone 85  parts 

Carmine,  enough  to  color. 

Melt  the  stearin  on  a  water-bath,  add  the  gum  dammar, 

and  when  melted  stir  in  the  powdered  soapstone,  tinted  with 

the  carmine. 

2. 

Stearic   acid  . .  .^ 20  parts 

Oleic  acid 4  parts 

Gum  copal 19  parts 

Kraplac 17  parts 

Powdered    soapstone 40  parts 


3; 

Manila  copal,  golden  yellow 30  parts 

Light-colored  rosin 30  parts 

Carnauba  wax 10  parts 

Stearic  acid 5  parts 

'    Powdered  soapstone 75  parts 

Carmine,  enough  to  color. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FurinnVarii  inoau  quautities 
by  weight.  ■ 


44  DENTAL  FOBMULABT 


4- 


Best  light-colored  rosin 50  parts 

Gum  copal 2  parts   ' 

Yellow  ceresin 8  parts 

Gum  turpentine 5  parts 

Powdered  soapstone 50  parts 

Menthol    I  part 

Fresh  slacked  lime ' 10  parts 

Coloring. — Red :  Florentine  lake.    Brown  :  Crocus 
martis  (iron  hydroxide). 

■  5- 

Stearin    25  parts 

Semi-solid  gum  copal 25  parts 

Powdered  soapstone 50  parts 

Carmine,  enough  to  color. 

CARVING  COMPOUND  FOR  CROWN  CUSPS. 
(Metalloid   Compound.) 

Powdered  Ceylon  graphite i  part 

Perfection  impression  material  (Detroit)     4  parts 
Melt  the  perfection  impression  material  in  a  porcelain 

capsule  on  a  water-bath,  add  the  graphite  under  constant 

stirring,  and  roll  or  mould  into  sticks. 

ELASTIC  COMPOUND  FOR  CROWN  AND  PLATE  SWAGER. 

Gelatin    250  parts 

Zinc  oxide 175  parts 

Glycerin   400  parts 

Water  300  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weigiit. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  45 

]\Hx  the  zinc  oxjde  with  200  parts  of  glycerin  to  a 
smooth  paste  ;  boil  the  gelatin  in  the  water  and  the  remaining 
glycerin  until  dissolved,  and  stir  it  into  the  zinc  oxide  paste. 
After  12  hours  the  mass  becomes  solid,  resembling  unvul- 
canized  rubber. 

LIQUID  CONTINUOUS  GUM  ENAMEL. 

Pink  celluloid 15  parts 

Oil  of  cedar  wood 5  parts 

Acetone    30  parts 

Paint  the  solution  two  or  three  times  over  that  portion 
of.  the  vulcanite  plate  which  is  usually  occupied  by  pink 
rubber.  Each  coat  must  be  thoroughly  dry  before  the  next 
is  added.    Polish  with  prepared  chalk. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  Aveisrht. 


CHAPTER  III. 
CEMENTS,  ADHESIVES,  AND  VARNISHES. 

DENTAL  CEMENTS. 

Dental  cements  may,  according  to  their  chemical  nature, 
be  divided  into : 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cements, 
Oxy-chloride  of  zinc  cements, 
Oxy-sulphate  of  zinc  cements,  and 
Silicate  cements. 

The  Oxy-Phosphate  of  Zinc  Cements. 

The  oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cements  were  introduced 
into  dentistry  in  1878  by  the  Rostaing  Brothers,  of  Dresden, 
by  the  name  "Dentinogen."  On  account  of  their  superiority 
regarding  their  wearing  qualities  over  the  other  dental 
cements,  they  at  once  gained  great  popularity,  and  in  reality 
they  have  become  an-  indispensable  medium  for  certain 
phases  of  reconstruction  of  tooth  substances,  the  attachment 
of  artificial  substitutes  to  natural  teeth,  etc. 

The  liquid  of  the  oxy-phosphate  cements  consists  of  a 
more  or  less  concentrated  phosphoric  acid  solution,  to  which 
some  manufacturers  have  added  zinc  phosphate,  aluminum 
phosphate,  or  strontium  phosphate,  in  various  proportions, 
more  or  less,  to  the  point  of  saturation. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 
46 


DENTAL  FOmWLAT.Y  47 

Commerciall} ,  three  forms  of  phosphoric  acids  are 
met  with  : 

i.  Urthophosphoric  acid,  U.  S.  P.,  H.,PO^.  It  is  a 
colorless,  inodorous,  strong!}-  acid  liquid  of  a  svrup\-  con- 
sistency which  is  miscible  with  water  and  alcohol  in  all 
proportions.  It  has  a  specific  gravity  of  1.710  and  con- 
tains about  85  percent  of  absolute  orthophosphoric  acid. 
Besides  this  acid,  weaker  solutions  (a  50  percent  and  a 
10  percent  solution)  are  also  found  in  the  market.  On 
standing,  the  acid  gradually  deposits  crystalline  prisms, 
which  are  readily  redissolved  when  slightly  heated.  Ortho- 
phosphoric  acid  readily  absorbs  water  from  the  atmosphere. 

2.  ]\Ietaphosphoric  acid  or  glacial  phosphoric  acid; 
HPO,,.  It  is  found  in  commerce  in  glassy  sticks  or  lumps, 
containing  from  10  to  15  percent  sodium  metaphosphate, 
which  is  added  to  give  tenacity,  transparency  and  hardness 
to  the  sticks.  The  acid  is  readily  soluble  in  water,  the  solu- 
tion gradually  changes  to  orthophosphoric  acid.  The  acid  is 
very  hygroscopic. 

3.  Pyrophosphoric  acid  ;  H^PoO^.  It  is  a  white,  hygro- 
scopic, glassy  mass  which  gradually  changes  to  orthophos- 
phoric acid. 

A  satisfactory  acid  for  dental  cement  powders  may  be 
prepared  in  the  following  manner :  One  part  of  pure  zinc 
phosphate,  twent\'  parts  of  glacial  phos]5h6ric  acid  in  sticks, 
and  ten  parts  of  distilled  water,  all  quantities  bv  weight,  are 
placed  in  a  glass  stoppered  bottle  and  set  aside  in  a  mod- 
erately warm  place  and  occasionally  shaken  until  the  solu- 
tion is  completed.  The  acid  is  then  filtered  through  a  cone 
of  glass  wool  placed  tightly  into  the  neck  of  a  glass  funnel. 
The  first  portions  of  the  filtrate  are  returned  to  the  funnel 
until    the    solution    runs   ofl:'    perfectly    clear.      The    acid    is 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornudarii  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


48  DENTAL  FOBMULARY 

immediately  transferred  to  small  glass  bottles  and  tightly 
corked.  Care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  bottles  perfectly 
dry.  If  the  cement  powder  when  mixed  with  the  acid 
hardens  too  quickly,  the  latter  should  be  shghtly  concen- 
trated on  a  sand  bath ;  if  the  cement  sets  too  slowly,  a  very 
small  quantity  of  distilled  water  should  be  added  to  the 
acid.  Occasionally  it  will  be  found  that  the  last  part  of 
the  acid  gives  poor  results  when  mixed  with  the  powder ; 
it  is  then  best  to  discard  the  fluid  instead  of  trying  to 
remedy  the  evil  by  heating,  etc.  A  small  office  preparation 
bottle  with  a  ground  glass  cap  makes  a  good  container  for 
the  acid  for  office  use. 

The  powder  of  the  oxy-phosphate  cements  consists 
principally  of  a  pure  zinc  oxide  prepared  especially  for 
this  purpose,  and  it  is  usually  referred  to  as  a  basic  zinc 
oxide.  This  basic  zinc  oxide  may  be  employed  in  its  pure 
form  or  more  or  less  tinted  with  various  metallic  oxides  to 
produce  the  desired  shades.  Some  makers  add  small  amounts 
of  specially  prepared  Portland  cement  to  the  zinc  oxide. 
It  is  claimed  that  the  well-known  Harvard  cement  repre- 
sents a  mixture  of  this  kind.  Various  analyses  made  have 
shown  that  the  powder  of  the  Harvard  cement  contains 
approximately  87  percent  of  basic  zinc  oxide  and  13  percent 
of  Portland  cement.  A  Portland  cement  for  such  purposes 
may  be  prepared  by  carefully  mixing 

Calcined  tripoli 60  parts 

Pure  dry  aluminum  oxide 30  parts 

Pure  dry  calcium  oxide 10  parts 

A  pure  zinc  oxide  may  be  prepared  by  dissolving  pure 
metallic  zinc  in  nitric  acid,  U.  S.  P.  The  solution  is  evapo- 
rated in  a  porcelain  vessel  until  it  solidifies  on  cooling.   The 

N.  B. — Parts  as  nsorl  in  tliis  Dental  Formulary  moan  quantities 
]>y  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABT  49 

basic  zinc  oxide  may  be  prepared  as  follows :  A  pound  of 
pure  zinc  oxide,  prepared  as  above,  or  one  of  the  English 
preparations  known  as  Hubbuck's  or  Wilson's,  is  thor- 
oughly mixed  with  a  quarter  of  an  ounce  of  boric  acid 
previously  dissolved  in  water  or  alcohol.  The  mixture  is 
tightly  packed  into  a  Hessian  crucible  covered  with  a  fire- 
clay slab  and  put  into  a  warm  place  to  dry,  and  then  exposed 
to  a  white  heat  for  several  hours.  After  cooling,  the  crucible 
is  broken,  the  vitrified  zinc  oxide  is  powdered,  passed 
through  fine  bolting-cloth,  and  bottled  for  use.  The  cement 
powder  thus  prepared  should  not  be  exposed  to  the  atmos- 
phere, as  it  readily  absorbs  moisture.  Cement  powder  may 
also  be  prepared  by  using  a  mixture  of 

Pure  zinc  oxide 250  parts 

Pure  magnesium  oxide 50  parts 

Boric  acid 5  parts 

or  by  mixing  pure  zinc  oxide  with  a  2  percent  nitric  acid 
solution  well  diluted  with  water.  The  process  of  vitrifica- 
tion is  the  same  as  referred  to  above.  Much  of  the  basic 
zinc  oxide  used  for  dental  cements  in  the  United  States  is 
imported  from  Germany ;  deHaen's  Chemical  Works,  in 
List,  near  Hanover,  enjoy  a  wide  reputation  for  making  a 
very  pure  article,  especially  adapted  for  such  purposes. 

The  tinting  of  the  basic  zinc  oxide  is  best  accomplished 
by  adding  suitable  mineral  colors.  Black  oxide  of  man- 
ganese, cadmium  sulphide  and  cobalt  blue  are  useful  to 
produce  the  various  shades  desired.  Only  very  small  quan- 
tities are  needed.  Yellow  ochre  and  Terra  di  Siena  are  also 
used  for  such  purposes,  but  with  less  success.  By  keeping 
on  hand  small  quantities  of  the  colors  referred  to  above, 
the    various    shades    may    be    extemporaneously    prepared. 

N,  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Foi-mulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


50  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

(See  Appended  Formulas  for  details  in  preparing  the  color 
materials.) 

For  mixing  the  cement,  a  large,  thick,  polished  glass 
slab  and  a  stiff,  non-corroding  spatula  are  best  adapted. 
The  spatula  should  be  of  German  silver;  steel  spatulas  dis- 
color the  cement,  due  to  the  action  of  the  phosphoric  acid. 
The  best  results,  however,  are  obtained  by  using  an  agate 
spatula.  "The  manipulator  who  becomes  familiar  with  the 
proper  conditions  during  the  mixing  of  cement  as  felt 
under  the  spatula  will  obtain  far  better  results  than  one 
relying  on  the  incorporating  of  definite  proportions.  In 
mixing  any  oxy-phosphate,  the  beginning  must  be  a  clean 
slab  and  spatula.  Then  the  powder  and  liquid  must  be 
placed  thereon  sufficiently  apart  to  render  it  possible  to 
cut  in  a  small  addition  of  powder  in  a  cleanly  manner,  and 
incorporate  it  thoroughly  with  the  liquid,  without  having  a 
borderland  half-mixed,  to  help  impart  a  clotty  condition. 
Each  addition  of  powder  must  be  manipulated  until  there 
is  the  feeling  and  appearance  of  a  thorough  mixture  before 
more  powder  is  added  in  the  same  manner.  Take  plenty  of 
time,  making  the  additions  of  powder  compare  to  the  volume 
of  the  mix,  i.  e.,  as  many  separate  additions  in  making  a 
small  mix  as  a  larger  one."     (Ames.) 

The  temperature  of  the  glass  slab  should  be  approxi- 
mately 60°  F. ;  a  little  warmer  in  a  cold  room,  and  vice  versa 
in  a  warm  room.  The  humidity  of  the  air  also  materially 
influences  the  setting  of  the  cement. 

In  connection  with  the  application  of  oxy-phosphate 
cements  the  question  is  frequently  asked :  Why  do  pulpa 
die  under  an  oxy-phosphate  cement  filling?  Analyses  made 
of  various  cement  powders  revealed  the  presence  of  certain 
arsenical  compounds   in  very  small   quantities  which  were 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAHY  51 

apparently  demonstrated  b>'  the  arsenical  mirror.  This  test 
is  seeming'!}-  erroneous,  as  Mauser  has  shown.  Cement  pow- 
ders are  frequentl}'  tinted  with  ultramarine,  a  fine  blue  pig- 
nlent  which  is  artificiall_\-  prepared  from  a  mixture  of 
Glauber's  salt,  charcoal,  soda  and  sulphur.  The  presence  of 
small  quantities  of  this  pigment  in  the  cement  powder  gives 
a  sulphur  mirror  which  closel\-  resembles  that  of  the  arsen- 
ical mirror.  It  should  Ije  remembered  that  arsenical  com- 
pounds, if  present  in  the  oxide,  are  probably  completely 
volatilized  during  the  vitrifying  process  of  the  latter,  or 
they  are  changed  to  some  inert  compound.  The  dying  of 
the  pulps  under  an  ox}'-phosphate  cement  filling  is  probably 
better  explained  by  attributing  it  to  the  chronic  irritation 
resulting  from  the  free  phosphoric  acid  present  in  an  incom- 
pletely mixed  cement,  or  to  a  poorly  excavated  cavity. 
Careful  excavation  and  varnishing  of  the  cavity  prior  to 
inserting  the  filling  materially  reduces  the  danger. 

Hydraulic  cements,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  used  for  inlay 
work,  give  better  results,  according  to  Ames,  if  the  cavity 
prepared  for  their  reception  is  slightlv  moistened  with  water 
after  it  has  been  previously  dehydrated  with  alcohol. 

The   Oxy-chloride   of   Zinc   Cements. 

The  powder  of  these  cements  consists  principally  of 
pure  white  zinc  oxide;  it  is  rarely  colored.  The  English 
zinc  oxide  (  Hubbuck's  or  \Mlson's)  is,  in  general,  to  be  pre- 
ferred for  cement  powders.  The  oxide  should  be  thoroughly 
dried  before  it  is  employed,  and  kept  in  well-stoppered 
bottles  to  prevent  absorption  of  moisture  from  the  air. 

The  liquid  of  the  zinc  ox\--chloride  cements  is  usually 
composed  of  a  concentrated  solution  of  zinc  chloride  in 
water.     A   suitable   liquid   may   be   prepared  by   dissolving 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


52  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

one  ounce  of  zinc  chloride  in  half  an  ounce  of  distilled 
water;  after  standing  a  few  days,  it  is  filtered  and  the 
solution  is  then  ready  for  use.  To  reduce  the  quick  setting 
of  the  cement,  a  small  quantity  of  borax  may  be  added  to 
the  powder.  The  so-called  "Sorel"  cement  is  a  good  example 
of  this  class  of  filling  materials.  (See  Appended  Formulas 
for  details  in  preparing  the  cement.) 

The   Oxy-Sulphate    of    Zinc    Cement. 

The  oxy-sulphate  of  zinc  cement  is  probably  best  known 
in  dentistry  as  "Fletcher's  Artificial  Dentine."  The  cement 
consists  of  a  powder  which  is  usually  composed  of  a  pure 
dry  zinc  oxide  to  which  small  amounts  of  dehydrated  zinc 
sulphate  and,  sometimes,  powdered  gum  mastic  are  added. 
The  fluid  is  composed  of  a  40  percent  solution  of  gum  arable 
in  water.  (See  Appended  Formulas  for  details  in  preparing 
the  cement.) 

The   Silicate   Cements. 

Within  recent  years  much  interest  has  been  manifested 
here  and  abroad  in  a  new  form  of  dental  cements  known- 
as  silicate  cements.  These  cements  are  primarily  intended 
to  replace  gold  and,  to  some  extent,  porcelain  as  employed 
for  filling  purpose  in  the  anterior  teeth.  On  account  of 
the  translucency  of  the  finished  plug,  these  fillings  resemble 
tooth  structure  closely,  and  this  is  probably  the  reason  why 
they  are  so  extensively  used  in  England  and  on  the  Euro- 
pean continent.  Cultured  Europeans  object  seriously  to 
visible  gold  fillings.  The  silicate  cements  have  been  in  use 
for  about  six  years,  and  of  late  they  have  been  materially 
improved.  Silicate  cements  are  by  no  means  of  recent 
origin.  For  technical  purposes,  they  are  prepared  by  mixing 
liquid  sodium  or  potassium  silicate  (dental  silex)  with  pre- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod  in  this  Dental  Formvlary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  53 

pared  chalk,  calcium  oxide,  zinc  oxide  and  other  suitable 
chemicals.  As  a  dental  filling  material  such  mixtures  are 
not  suitable,  although  they  have  been  experimented  with 
extensively ;  they  require  too  much  time  for  hardening. 
Manufacturing  chemists  have  endeavored  to  incorporate 
into  the  powder  of  these  new  cements  certain  silicates,  in 
conjunction  with  other  suitable  compounds,  which  when 
properly  mixed  with  the  ordinary  cement  liquid  (acid  phos- 
phate of  zinc  solution  or  liquid  orthophosphoric  acid)  form 
a  comparatively  quick-setting  cement.  The  resulting  filling 
possesses  the  hardness  of  the  ordinary  phosphate  of  zinc 
cement,  with  an  increased  resistency  to  the  fluids  of  the 
mouth  and  a  peculiar  porcelain-like  translucency.  A  number 
of  analyses  have  been  published  relative  to  the  composition 
of  the  silicate  cement  powders,  which,  with  a  reasonable 
percentage  of  errors,  show  the  following  approximate 
composition  : 

Quartz 28  to  35  percent 

Kaolin   50  to  55  percent 

Lime    10  to  12  percent 

Magnesia    i  to    2  percent 

Some  manufacturers,  in  the  circulars  accompanying 
their  cements,  lay  special  stress  upon  the  fact  that  the 
extraordinary  qualities  of  their  products  depend  upon  cer- 
tain rare  metals,  especially  ber\llium.  Beryllium,  also 
known  as  glucinum,  is  a  rare  metal  belonging  to  the  mag- 
nesium group.  Its  natural  oxides  are  found  in  certain 
parts  of  France  and  of  Norway,  and  they  also  occur  in 
crystalline  form  as  emerald,  a  gem  of  pure  green  color,  and 
in  opals.  The  kaolin  mined  in  St.  Yricux.  France,  of  which 
the  celebrated  Limoges  porcelain  is  made,  contains  beryllium 
oxide;  and  this  verv  kaolin,  on  account  of  its  purity,  enters 

N^  B." — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Fornuilari/  moan  (juantities 
bv  Aveicrht. 


54  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

largely  into  the  make-up  of  some  of  the  silicate  cement 
powders. 

According  to  a  German  patent,  Ascher's  artificial 
enamel  is  prepared  as  follows :  A  solution  of  basic  beryl- 
lium nitrate,  Be(  XOo)o.2BeO,  is  precipitated  with  sodium 
silicate,  NaoSiO,.  The  precipitate  is  kept  under  water 
for  some  time.  It  is  then  filtered,  washed,  dried,  and  lightly 
calcined.  The  resultant  preparation  is  ground  very  fine  and 
mixed  with  powdered  glass  or  pure  china  clay. 

Schoenbeck's  process  consists  in  taking  sodium- 
aluminum  fluoride  (cryolite),  silicic  acid  and  calcium  oxide, 
fusing  the  same  with  a  beryl  admixture  up  to  5  percent, 
cooling  and  pulverizing,  and  then  adding  to  the  resultant 
powder  a  phosphoric  acid  (meta-,  ortho-  or  pyro-)  con- 
taining a  little  aluminum  hydroxide  in  suspension,  until  a 
plastic  mass  ensues. 

The  making  of  cements  of  the  silicate  group  as  well  as 
of  the  oxy-phosphate  group  requires  a  great  deal  of  tech- 
nical knowledge  which  is  imperative  for  its  ultimate  success. 
An  intimate  knowledge  of  the  manufacture  of  these  cements 
is  of  less  importance  to  the  user  than  certain  definite  details 
regarding  its  manipulation.  For  this  reason  the  detailed 
instructions  accompanying  the  various  cements  should  be 
closely  observed  to  insure  success.  Test  fillings  made  in 
extracted  teeth  are  the  best  means  to  acquire  the  necessary 
technique.  For  mixing  the  cement,  nothing  but  a  spatula 
made  of  some  non-metallic,  impervious  material  will  do ; 
an  agate  spatula  gives  by  far  the  best  service.  A  few 
burnishers  and  round-headed  instruments  made  of  agate, 
bloodstone,  or  of  platinum,  gold,  nickel  and  tantulum,  or 
plated  therewith,  arc  essential.  Aletal  instruments  should 
be   coated   with    a   thin    film    of   vaseline.      Silicate    cement 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Formulart/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  55 

possesses  much  less  adhesiveness  than  the  oxy-phosphate 
cements,  consequently  the  suitable  preparation  of  the  cavity 
should  be  duly  considered.  It  should  not  be  packed  into 
the  cavity  in  small  pellets,  but  rather  the  entire  bulk  of  the 
filling  should  be  placed  at  once,  pressed  into  position,  and 
shaped  accordingi}-.  Ample  time  must  be  allowed  for 
thorough  setting  under  the  rubber  dam.  The  filling  is 
polished  with  strips  and  discs  well  vaselined,  and  after  the 
filling  is  finished  it  should  be  well  coated  with  melted 
paraffin. 

To  avoid  discoloration  of  the  cement  in  mixing  and 
filling,  Ascher  has  issued  the  following  instructions  for  the 
manipulation  of  his  '^'Artificial  Enamel" : 

Discoloration  is  absolutely  impossible  if  the  enamel  is 
rightly  treated.  If  the  material  were  at  fault,  every  filling 
inserted  would  discolor — not  an  occasional  one,  as  is  gener- 
ally the  case.  There  are  three  reasons  for  discoloration 
existing. 

First — The  entering  of  foreign  pigments  or  secretions 
into  the  filling.  If  the  enaniel  is  properly  mixed  and  intro- 
duced under  sufficient  pressure,  there  is  not  the  slightest 
porosity  (as  exact  measurements  have  proven)  and  an 
intrusion  of  foreign  matter  is  impossible.  If,  however,  the 
material  has  been  indifferently  mixed  and  not  properly  con- 
densed, it  contains  loose  particles  of  powder  that  have  not 
been  compounded,  and  spaces  which,  in  mixing,  being 
pressed  into  the  tough  mass,  are  filled  with  air.  The  enamel 
is  porous  and  liable  to  absorb  foreign  matter.  To  avoid 
this,  mix  quickly,  incorporating  all  powder  possible,  until 
the  mass  curls  from  the  slab  when  the  flat  side  of  the  spatula 
is  run  lightly  over  it ;  then  thoroughly  mix  with  heavy  spatu- 
lation  to  force  out  the  air  particles.     Introduce  under  heavy 

X.  B. — Parts  as  uschI  in  this  Dental  Formularij  luoau  quantities 
by  weight. 


56  DENTAL  :F0BMULABY 

pressure,  for  the  same  reason.  If  the  pulp  is  nearly  exposed, 
use  cavity  lining  to  avoid  strangulation.  As  long  as  the 
material  is  plastic,  everything  coming  in  contact  with  it 
must  be  non-metallic  and  absolutely  clean. 

Second — If  the  surface  of  the  filling  is  rough  or  poor 
margins  exist,  foreign  pigments,  which  change  the  color 
of  the  whole  tooth  by  deposits,  will  influence  the  surface 
and  boundaries.  The  deposits  of  the  pigments  on  a  rough  sur- 
face are  much  more  intense  and  stay  considerably  stronger. 
The  roughness  is  caused  by  using  coarse  strips  and  discs, 
by  insufficient  polishing,  and  by  destroying  the  upper  sur- 
face in  cases  where  the  filling  is  exposed  to  the  saliva  too 
soon.  To  avoid  this,  construct  an  exact  and  nicely  finished 
margin.  The  filling  must  not  come  below  the  margin  of 
the  cavity.  A  very  smooth,  highly  polished  surface  must 
be  obtained,  and  there  must  be  sufficiently  long  protection 
against  saliva,  so  much  more  the  thinner  the  enamel  was 
mixed.  Stir  liquid  thoroughly  each  time,  discard  residue  of 
bottle,  and  keep  rubber  dam  on  for  at  least  twenty  minutes. 

Third — The  enamel  in  itself  contains  no  substances 
which  through  any  reaction  could  shape  any  pigment.  It 
does  contain  pigments  usually  found  in  all  silicates  and 
other  cements,  and  these  are,  of  course,  sensible  to  certain 
influences.  Sulphureted  hydrogen  and  proceeds  of  reduction 
can  be  observed  as  causes  of  darkening.  But  the  forming 
of  sulphureted  hydrogen  and  proceeds  of  reduction  are 
hardly  possible,  and  one  can  scarcely  attach  much  impor- 
tance to  them.  Should  they  appear,  however,  they  could 
only  cause  a  superficial  discoloration — "a  slight  indication" — 
which  may  be  easily  removed  by  a  toothbrush  or,  eventually, 
by  a  little  tooth  powder.  In  this  case  a  deeper  or  stronger 
discoloration  is  impossible. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Vrnlal  Formvlarij  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENIAL  FOKMULAH'i  57 

In  the  darkening  of  lingual  fillings  one  thing  must  be 
observed.  Discoloratio'n  of  the  surface  in  consequence  of 
roughness  is  more  liable  here,  as  the  lingual  side  of  the  teeth 
cannot  be  kept  clean.  In  addition,  in  a  mirror  a  filling 
always  appears  considerably  darker  on  account  of  the  optical 
difference  of  the  tooth  substance. 

AMALGAM  CEMENT. 

Freshly  mixed  amalgam  and  oxy-phosphate  of  zinc 
cement,  mixed  to  a  thick  creamy  consistency,  about  equal 
parts,  are  thoroughly  incorporated  and  inserted  into  the 
cavity. 

OXYPHOSPHATE  OF  ALUMINUM. 

Powder. 

Aluminum  powder 40  parts 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  powder.  .  .   60  parts 

Liquid. 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  liquid. 

OXYPHOSPHATE  OF  COPPER. 

Powder. 

Black  oxide  of  copper 50  parts 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  powder.  .  .    50  parts 

Liquid. 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  liquid. 

Is.  B. — r.-irts  ;iN  usiMi  ill  iliis  Denial  Furmulary  moau  quantities 
by  weight. 


58  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

OXYPHOSPHATE  OF  GOLD. 
Powder. 

Precipitated  gold  powder 2  parts 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  powder.  . .      i  part 

Liquid. 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  liquid. 

OXYSULPHATE  OF  ZINC  CEMENT. 
(Artificial   dentine.) 

Powder. 

Powdered  mastic  • 7^  parts 

Calcined  zinc  oxide 100  parts 

Calcined  zinc  sulphate 12  parts 

Liquid. 

Gum  arable 25  parts 

Water  65  parts 

Alcohol 10  parts 

Liquid  phenol 0.2  parts 

OXYCHLORIDE  OF  ZINC  CEMENT. 

(Sorel's    Dental    Cement.) 

I. 

Powder. 

Zinc  sulphate,  exsiccated i  part 

Zinc  oxide 3  parts 

Mix  and  calcine  in  a  sand  crucible  at  a  red  heat 
for  about  to  minutes ;  remove,  powder,  and  bolt 
through  fine  cheesecloth.  Keep  in  well-stoppered 
bottles. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod   in  this  Denial  Fnrmvlarri  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOJUHLAUY  59 

Liquid. 

Zinc  chloride 50  parts 

Water 25  parts 

Let  stand  for  24  liours  and  filter. 


2. 

Powder. 

Powdered  white  glass. 3  parts 

Zinc  oxide,  calcined 9  parts 

Liquid. 

Borax   ^  part 

Zinc  chloride 20  parts 

Hot  water 6  parts 

TIN  CEMENT. 
Powder. 

Sponge  tin  powder  (see  page  71) i  part 

Oxy-phosphate  of  zinc  cement  powder.  .      i  part 

Liquid. 

Oxy-phosphatc  of  zinc  cement  liquid. 

GUTTA  PERCHA   CEMENT  FOR  SETTING   CROWNS, 
BRIDGES,   ETC. 

Aristol    10  parts 

Oil  of  eucalyptus 30  parts 

Chloroform    30  parts 

Pink  base  plate  gutla  percha,  enough  to  make  a 
stiff  paste. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Furmularj/  moan  qiiantitie-j 
by  weight. 


60  DENTAL  fOBMULAEY 

CEMENT  FOR  REPAIRING  CELLULOID. 

The  broken  surfaces  are  brushed  with  a  mixture  of 
three  parts  alcohol  and  four  parts  ether,  and  as  soon  as  the 
celluloid  has  softened  the  pieces  are  firmly  pressed  together. 
Instead  of  the  alcohol-ether  mixture  the  following  solution 
may  be  employed : 

Camphor    i  part 

Shellac    5  parts 

Alcohol 20  parts 


Or, 


Camphor i  part 

Shellac i^  parts 

Alcohol 30  parts 


CEMENT  FOR  PORCELAIN,   GLASS,   ALABASTER,   ETC. 
(Diamond   Cement.) 

Isinglass 60  parts 

Water 200  parts 

Alcohol 20  parts 

Cut  the  isinglass  into  small  pieces  and  soak  in 
the  mixed  liquids  for  24  hours ;  apply  gentle  heat 
until  fully  dissolved. 

Make  a  solution  of 

Gum  ammoniac 10  parts 

Alcohol 25  parts 

Water 25  parts 

and  a  solution  of 

Gum  mastic 20  parts 

Absolute  alcohol 120  parts 


X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  Formulary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOFMCLAFY  61 

Mix  the  gum  ammoniac  solution  with  the  isin- 
glass solution  ;  boil  and  strain  through  flannel ;  add 
the  gum  mastic  solution  and  evaporate  on  a  water- 
bath  until  the  whole  weighs  240  parts,  and  pour  in 
small  wide-mouthed  bottles. 

To  use  the  cement,  place  the  bottle  in  hot  water  until 
the  cement  becomes  liquid.  Apply  with  a  wooden  stick  upon 
the  broken  surface  and  tie  together  for  24  hours. 

PULP  CAPPING  CEMENT. 

Powder. 

Calcium  oxide 5  parts 

Zinc  oxide 95  parts 

Liquid. 

Solution  of  formaldehyde ^  part 

Phenol  cr\'stals 5  parts 

Eugenol    95  parts 

CEMENT    FOR    HOLDING    SMALL    OBJECTS    IN    PLACE    FOR 
FILING,  ENGRAVING,  ETC. 

(Jeweler's    Cement.) 

Burgundy  pitch 4  parts 

Rosin    4  parts 

Yellow  beeswax 2  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 2  parts 

Melt  the  pitch,  rosin  and  wax  over  a  low  fire  and 
stir  in  the  plaster  of  Paris.  Roll  into  sticks  with 
wet  fingers. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornuilari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


62  DENTAL  FOEMULART 

RUBBER   CEMENT  FOR  DENTAL  BASE  PLATES. 

I. 

Caoutchouc lO  parts 

Carbon  disulpliide,  enough  to  make  a  thick  Hquid 
Keep  in  well-stoppered  bottles. 

2. 

Unvulcanized  dental  rubber lo  parts 

Chloroform,  enough  to  make  a  thick  liquid. 

LIQUID  GLUE. 

Best  glue 50  parts 

Water  30  parts 

Let    stand    over    night ;    apply    gentle    heat    until    dis- 
solved, and  add  to  the  hot  solution : 

Nitric  acid .• 3  parts 

Glycerin   4  parts 


PULP  VARNISHES. 

I. 

Phenol,  crystals i  part 

Collodion 10  parts 

Yellow  rosin 10  parts 

Ether    40  parts 

2. 

Gum  mastic 2  parts 

Balsam  of  Peru .  2  parts 

Chloroform 6  parts 

•N.  B.-^Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formuldry  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAHY  63 

CAVITY   VARNISHES. 

I. 

Select  gum  copal 50  parts 

Ether 50  parts 

Betanaphthol 5  parts 

Dissolve,  filter  through  a  well-covered 
filter,  and  add  enough  ether  to  make 
the  whole  measure 75  parts 

2. 

Gum  dammar i  part 

Rosin,  light-colored. 6  parts 

Ether 4  parts 

Alcohol 4  parts 

3- 

Gum  camphor 6  parts 

Gum  copal 25  parts 

Ether    50  parts 

4. 

Gum  copal 2  parts 

Acetone    3  parts 


5- 

(CarboHzed   Rosin.) 

Rosin    4  parts 

Phenol  crystals ■ 4  parts 

Chloroform    3  parts 

N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


64  DENTAL  FOUMULABY 

TO  PREPARE  A  CLEAR  VARNISH. 

The  filtering  of  alcoholic  varnishes  is  accomplished  with 
many  difficulties.  A  satisfactory  clear  varnish  is  readil> 
obtained  by  thoroughly  shaking  the  varnish  with  about 
5  percent  perfectly  dry  kaolin  and  setting  aside  in  a  warm 
place  until  the  impurities  have  been  carried  to  the  bottom 
of  the  vessel  by  the  heavy  kaolin  particles.  Shellac  var- 
nishes are  clarified  by  adding  about  25  percent  of  gasoline 
to  dissolve  certain  waxy  compounds  present  in  the  shellac. 
The  supernatent  gasoline  solution  has  to  be  drawn  ofif  from 
the  transparent  shellac  varnish  before  the  latter  is  ready 
for  use. 

CEMENT  FOR  STEAM  FITTINGS. 

Red  lead 4  parts 

White  lead 10  parts 

Powdered   clay 8  parts 

Boiled  linseed  oil,  enough  to  make  a  stiff  paste. 

TO  CEMENT  IRON  TO  IRON. 

Pieces  of  iron  can  be  cemented  so  firmly  together  as  to 
withstand  a  blow  of  considerable  force,  by  the  following 
process,  which  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  mending  of 
cracked  and  broken  iron  mortars :  Mix  intimately  six  parts 
each  of  sulphur  and  white  lead  and  one  part  of  powdered 
borax.  Wet  the  mass  with  strong  sulphuric  acid  and  apply 
at  once  a  thin  layer  of  it  co  the  edge  of  each  of  the  surfaces 
to  be  united.  Bring  the  pieces  together  by  strong  pressure 
and  leave  them  at  rest,  placing  in  such  a  position  that  they 
cannot  fall  apart. 

In  repairing  a  cracked  mortar,  insert,  if  possible,  a  thin 
wedge  at  the  initial  point  of  the  crack,  pushing  it  in  care- 

jSr.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  65 

fully  so  as  not  to  fracture  the  iron.  Then  place  the  cement 
in  the  crack,  beginning-  at  the  lower  end,  and.  when  the 
fissure  is  fille,d  up  remove  the  wedge.  Xow  wind  a  few ' 
rolls  of  strong  copper  wire  around  the  object  and.  with  a 
pair  of  forceps,  tighten  the  wire  so  as  to  bring  the  fractured 
edges  into  intimate  contact.  In  a  short  time  the  joint  will 
be  as  firm  as  any  other  part  of  the  object. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

HARD  AND  FUSIBLE  ALLOYS,  SOLDERS,  FLUXES, 
AMALGAMS,  REFINING  OF  PRECIOUS  MET- 
ALS, TEMPERING  OF  METALS,  METAL  POL- 
ISHES, ETC. 

ALLOYING  OF  GOLD  PLATE  OF  VARIOUS  CARATS. 
(After  William   H.   Dorrance.) 

Pure  gold  may  be  alloyed  for  dental  purposes  with  an 
alloy  consisting  of 

Pure  silver 40  parts 

Pure  copper 60  parts, 

according  to  the  following  equation  : 

Present  weight  X  present  carat 

=  whole  mass  ; 

Required  carat 

or,  in  figures,  for  making  i8-carat  gold, 

100  grs.  pure  gold 
100  grs.  X  24  carats  20  grs.  pure  copper    (60%) 

=.18)2400  =  1331/3  gr.  =    131/3  grs.  pure  silver  (40%) 

18  carats  

133%  grs.  =  whole  mass. 

COIN  GOLD. 

An  American  ten-dollar  goldpiece  weighs  258  grains 
and  is  21.6-carat  fine.     It  consists  of 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 
66 


DENTAL  FOFMrLATlY  67 

Pure  ,8:ol(l .' 90  parts 

Pure  copper  .  .  .  .' 9  parts 

Pure  silver I  part 

A^arious  carat  dental  gold  plate  may  be  made  as  follows, 
according  to  the  above  formula  : 

18  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

Coin  gold 100  parts 

Pure  copper 9  parts 

Pure  silver 1 1  parts 

19  Carat  Gold  Plate, 

Coin  gold 100     parts 

Pure  copper 5|-  parts 

Pure  silver 8:1  parts 

20  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

Coin  gold loo.o  parts 

Pure  copper  1.8  parts 

Pure  silver   6.2  parts 

22  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

Coin  gold , .  , 100      parts 

Pure  gold 75  parts 

Pure  silver 5  parts 

GOLD  ALLOYS. 

14   Carats. 

YcIIoTi'  Pale  Red           Red 

Pure  gold 14  parts  14  parts  14  parts 

Pure  silver 6  parts  3  parts           i  part 

Pure  copper.  ...   4  parts  7  parts  9  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  meau:  quantities 
by  weight.  ,■.. 


68  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

16   Carats. 

Yelloiv  Red 

Pure  gold i6     parts  i6     parts 

Pure  silver 4f  parts  if  parts 

Pure  copper 3-^^  parts  6f  parts 

18    Carats. 

Yellozv  Red 

Pure  gold 18     parts  ■  18     parts 

Pure  silver 3^  parts  2^  parts 

Pure  copper 2|  parts  3^  parts 

20   Carats. 

Pure  gold 20  parts 

Pure  silver 2  parts 

Pure  copper 2  parts 

GOLD  PLATE  FOR  SEAMLESS  CROWNS;  EVANS. 

Coin  gold 5     parts 

Pure  gold 13^  parts 

Pure  silver i-|  parts 

CROWN  GOLD;   EVANS. 

Coin  gold 5  parts 

Pure  gold 9  parts 

Pure  silver - i  part 

CLASP  METAL;  EVANS. 

Pure  gold 10  parts 

Copper 2  parts 

Silver    i   part 

Platinum i   part 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENIAL  FOUMULAEY  69 

SUBSTITUTES  FOR  GOLD. 

I. 

Copper 1 1. 71  parts 

Platinum .   2.40  parts 

Silver 3.53  parts 

2. 

Zinc I  part 

Copper 7  parts 

Platinum 16  parts 

SILVER  ALLOY. 

Pure  silver .     9  parts 

Pure  copper i  part 

ALLOYS    FOR    CHEOPLASTIC    CASTINGS. 
Lower   Denture   Alloy. 

Gold    I  part 

Silver    2  parts 

Tin    o 20  parts 

Samsioe's   Alloy. 

Platinum    . 3^  parts 

Gold    2i-  parts 

Silver    29  parts 

Tin    65  parts 

Watt's    or   Weston's   Alloy. 

Silver    i  part 

Tin    5  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Denial  FormuJari/  moan  quantities 
by  \veight. 


i70  DENTAL  FOSMULAEY 

ALUMINUM  ALLOY. 

I. 

Silver    5  parts 

Aluminum    95  parts 

[A'otc. — Aluminum  base  plates  should  not  be  invested 
in  plaster  of  Paris  which  has  been  mixed  with  salt  water. 
Sodium  chloride  in  the  presence  of  organic  or  inorganic 
acids  will  destroy  aluminum.] 

2. 

Copper    I  part 

Silver    6  parts 

Aluminum    93  parts 

ALUMINUM  BRONZE. 

Copper 90  parts 

Aluminum    10  parts 

This  alloy  is  used  as  a  substitute  for  low-carat  gold 
plate,  and  is  extensively  employed  at  present  in  the  manu- 
facture of  regulating  appliances.  It  possesses  a  color  similar 
to  gold,  is  tenacious,  ductible  and  malleable,  and  melts  at 
about  1800°  F.  It  may  be  soldered  with  16 — 18  carat  gold 
.solder.  Clasps  may  be  made  from  this  bronze.  They  should 
be  thoroughly  annealed  and  very  slowly  cooled,  so  as  to 
retain  a  strong  spring  temper. 

DENTAL  ALLOY. 

Platinum     i  part 

vSilver    3  to  5  parts 

It  melts  at  about  1800°  F.     It  is  soft  and  pliable  and  in 

N.  B. — Parts  as  nsfcl  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  qnaritities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOjRMULAEY  71 

many  respects  superior  to  pure  silver.  Dental  rubber  may 
be  vulcanized  to  dental  alloy  without  destroying  its  integ- 
rity. It  may  be  soldered  with  i8  carat  gold  solder  or  with 
silver  solder. 

MAGNALIUM. 

An  alloy  of  aluminum  with  lo — 15  percent  of  mag- 
nesium, having  a  specific  gravity  2.4  to  2.6.  It  has  a  silver- 
white  color,  is  tenacious  and  ductible,  and  is  recommended 
as  a  superior  substitute  for  aluminum  intended  for  plate 
work.  Magnalium  plate,  No.  20  gauge,  has  a  tensile 
strength  of  about  30.000  pounds  per  square  inch.  Mag- 
nalium resists  oxidation  more  readily  than  aluminum,  and  is 
almost  unafifected  by  dry  or  damp  air,  water,  gaseous 
ammonia,  carbonic  acid,  sulphureted  hydrogen,  and  most 
organic  acids.  The  thermal  conductivity  of  magnalium  is 
much  greater  than  that  of  aluminum. 

VICTORIA  METAL. 

An  alloy  composed  of  copper,  nickel  and  zinc.  It  is  in 
many  respects  equal  to  aluminum  bronze,  but  softer,  and 
possesses  no  elasticity. 

SPONGE  TIN;  SCHEURER. 

A  solution  of  pure  stannic  chloride  is  precipitated  with 
pure  zinc,  and  the  resultant  sponge-tin  is  thoroughly  washed 
in  boiling  water,  until  free  from  all  acidity,  and  dried  in  a 
drying-room.  The  sponge-tin  appears  as  a  gray  felt,  con- 
sisting partly  of  light,  dustlike  tin  particles,  partly  of 
metallic  fibers  and  scales.  It  is  used  for  filling  teeth  much 
like  moss-fiber  gold.  Pluggers  as  used  for  sponge-gold 
are  advised  for  making  fillings. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


72  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

PLATINOID. 

Copper    60  parts 

Nickel 15  parts 

Zinc 24  parts 

Tungsten    i   part 

ENGLISH  "GERMAN"  SILVER;  BIRMINGHAM. 

Nickel    72.00  parts 

Silver 23.40  parts 

Bismuth    4.20  parts 

Gold 0.75  part 

GERMAN  SILVER. 

Copper    60  parts 

Zinc     25  parts 

Nickel 15  parts 

COMMERCIAL  ALLOYS. 
Bidery   Alloy. 

Zinc     31   parts 

Copper    2  parts 

Lead    2  parts 

Magnolia   Alloy. 

Lead 40  parts 

Antimony 7^  parts 

Tin    2}  parts 

Bismuth    ^  part 

Aluminum    l  part 

Graphite  :1  part 

Gauge   Alloy. 

Copper    60  parts 

Zinc     40  parts 

Iron 1 2  parts 

Tin    I  part 

X.  B. — Piirts  ;is  uk?'(1   in  lliis  DcnUil  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  73 

Alpaca    Alloy. 

Copper    40  parts 

Zinc     32  parts 

Nickel 8  parts 

Alger  Alloy. 

Tin    90  parts 

Antimony • 10  parts 

Argusoid  Alloy. 

Copper    55.5  parts 

Zinc    23.2  parts 

Nickel 13.4  parts 

Lead 3.5  parts 

Tin 4.0  parts 

Ashberry   Alloy. 

Tin    80  parts 

Antimony 18  parts 

Copper    2  parts 

Bibra  Alloy. 

Lead    40  parts 

Tin    9  parts 

Bismnth    8  parts 

Boudoin   Alloy. 

Copper 72.0  parts 

Nickel 16.6  parts 

Cobalt    1.8  parts 

Zinc    T.o  part 

Aluminum 0.5   part 

jST.  B. — Parts  ns  iiscil   in   this  Drntal  Fornnihirii  moan  qnantilios 
by  weight. 


74,  DENTAL  F0E2IULAEY 

Ruoltz   Alloy. 
Silver  . 20  parts 

Copper 50  parts 

Nickel    30  parts 

Reetz  Alloy. 
Copper 15.00  parts 

Tin 2.34  parts 

Lead     1.82  parts 

Antimony    i.oo  part 

LOW  FUSION  ALLOYS. 

Anti-  Cad-  Bis-     Melts  at, 

mony  Lead  Tin         mlum        mutli       deg.  F. 

Brophy's  o  2f         2-i  o  3  240 

Berry's    4  10  16  o  16 

Crouse's    o  5           5  i  8  190 

Erman's    o  i            i  o  2  199 

Harper's    o  4           4  i  7  180 

Hodgen's    2  5           3  o  8  224 

Melotte's    o  3           5  o  8  205 

Merck's o  25  25  20  55  .        1.62 

Molyneau's o  3           2  2  5  140 

Newton's   o  2           3  o  5  212 

Richmond's    o  5           3  o  8  202 

Rose's    o  8          3  o  8  203 

Simpson's   o  19  20  13  48 

Wood's  I o  4           2  I  7  158 

Wood's  2 o  20  40  26  96  135 

Note:  The  metals  have  to  be  melted  accordinq-  to  the 
above  arrangement,  i.  e.,  melt  the  antimony  first,  when  com- 
pletely melted,  add  the  lead,  then  the  tin,  then  the  cadmium 
and  finally,  under  constant  stirring  (with  a  low  flame) 
the  bismuth. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Drnial  Formvlarj/  mean  qnantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMCLJFY 


75 


LOW  FUSING  ALLOYS  FOR  VALVE  PLUGS. 


Melting  Point 

Lead 

Tin 

Bism 

°F. 

212 

125 

125 

75 

257 

100 

100 

100 

293 

200 

200 

100 

3" 

280 

300 

50 

335 

200 

240 

50 

347 

300 

200 

50 

.  374 

100 

100 

c 

DIE-  AND  COUNTER-DIE  METALS. 
Die    Metals. 

Copper  Antimony  Zinc 

I 3                     o  39 

2 6                    3     .  48 

3.   (.Haskell's) i                      2  O 

Counter-Die   Metals. 

Lead  Tin 

1 4  I 

2 3  I 

3.   ( Haskell's)    5  i 


Tin 


10 


Bismuth 
o 
2 
o 


BABBITT  METAL;  HASKELL. 

This  is  the  only  metal  having'  all  the  fine  requirements 
for  a  dental  die.  which  arc  (  i)  non-shrinkage;  (2)  hardness, 
so  as  not  to  batter:  (3)  toughness,  so  as  not  to  break;  (4) 
a  smooth  surface;  (5)  melting  at  a  low  temperature.  The 
proper  formula  is  copper,  i  part;  antimony,  2  parts;  tin.  8 

N.  B. — Ports  as  used  in  this  DrntaJ  Formulari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


76  DENTAL  FOSMULAEY 

parts :  melting  in  the  order  named.     Do  not  overheat,  as  it 
will  oxidize  the  tin. 


SPENCE  METAL. 

(Invented  by  Berger  Spence,  London.) 

Sulphur    I   part 

Native  iron  pyrites,  in  very  fine  powder .  .      2  parts 

Melt  the  sulphur  in  an  iron  or  earthenware  pot  and 
stir  in  the  pyrites.  Spence  metal  melts  at  about  260°  F. ;  it  is 
very  hard  and  contracts  slightly  on  cooling.  It  gives  sharp 
impressions  and  may  be  cast  into  oiled  plaster  of  Paris 
impressions.  It  is  largely  used  as  a  die  metal  in  the  dental 
laboratories   of   England    and   on   the   European    continent. 

SOLDERS. 

Gold  Solder  Alloy;   Dorrance. 

Pure    silver.  .  .■ i  part 

Pure  zinc 2  parts 

Pure    copper 3  parts 

The  silver  and  copper  are  melted  together  in  a  sand  or 
graphite  crucible  lined  with  borax ;  the  zinc,  wrapped  in 
tissue  paper  to  prevent  oxidation,  is  f|uickly  thrust  into  the 
molten  mass  and  the  whole  is  stirred  together  with  a  clay- 
pipe  stem  held  in  a  ])air  of  tongs.  To  prepare  solder,  melt 
one  part  of  this  allo\-  with  seven  parts  of  clippings  of  the 
gold  plate  under  construction. 

N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formnlonj  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOl^MULAEY  77 

GOLD  SOLDERS. 

I. 

For   14  carat      16  carat  18  carat  20  carat 

gold             gold  gold  gold 

Coin  gold 13                  15  17  19 

Silver    7                   5  4  4 

Copper    3                   3  2  2 

Brass*   i                    i  i  i 


Melt  together  from  five  to'seven  parts  of  scraps  of  the 
g"old  plate  under  construction  with  one  part  of  brass  pins. 

LOW  FUSING  GOLD  SOLDER. 

14  carat  gold  solder i  part 

Silver    solder i   part 

GOLD  SOLDERS  MADE  FROM   COIN  GOLD. 
For  20  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

$5.00  gold   piece 

15  grains  cadmium. 

For  18  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

$5.00  gold  piece 

16  grains  copper 
16  grains  cadmium 


*  Englisli   brass    jiins    furnish   a    good    quality    of    brass    for   such 
purposes. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formiilarj/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


78 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

For  14  Carat  Gold  Plate. 

$5.00  gold  piece 
16  grains  silver 
48  grains  copper 

16  grains  cadmium 


5- 

Gold  Solders;  Zinc  Type. 

For    14  carat       18  carat  20  carat  22  carat 

gold             gold  gold  gold 

Pure  gold    50               65.5  73.7  82.5 

Pure  silver   26               19.0  12.0  8.0 

Pure  copper 18               lo.o  9.1  4.3 

Pure  zinc 8                 7.0  7.0  7.0 


Gold  Solders; 

Zinc-Cadmium 

Type. 

For    14  carat 

16  carat       i 

8  carat 

20  carat 

gold 

gold 

gold 

gold 

Pure   gold    .  .  .  .•  57.5 

65.0 

74.0 

82.3 

Pure    silver.  .  .  .    13.0 

9-5 

6.5 

3-8 

Pure  copper.  .  .  .    22.0 

18.0 

12.0 

8.3 

Pure  zinc 1.8 

1.8 

1.8 

1.8 

Pure  cadmium.  .    12.0 

10.5 

,10.0 

8.5 

.Small  crevices,  holes,  etc.,  may  be  easily  covered  with 
solder  by  first  filling  these  cavities  with  sponge  gold. 

PLATINUM  SOLDER. 

Platinum    25  parts 

Gold    75  parts 


K  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fnrmiilarji  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  79 

IRIDIO-PLATINUM  SOLDER. 

I. 

Use  Platinum  Solder. 


Watt's  Crystal  Gold  and  Platinum  makes  an  easy  flow- 
ing; lo  percent  platinum  solder  for  uniting  the  frame-work 
in  inlay — crown — bridge — or  continuous  gum  work.  It 
flows  almost  as  easily  as  pure  gold.  It  should  be  used  with 
a  fiux.     (W.  L.  Fickes). 

SILVER  SOLDERS. 

I. 

Pure    silver 6  parts 

Pure    copper 3  parts 

Pure    zinc i   part 

2. 

Coin    silver , 90  parts 

Zinc    10  parts 

3- 

Pure    silver 12  parts 

Brass  (English  brass  pins) 5  parts 

4- 

Pure    silver 12  parts 

Brass  (English  brass  pins)   6  parts 

SOLDER   FOR   NICKEL   OR    GERMAN   SILVER. 

Use  Silver  Solder. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formularj/  mean  quantities 
by  AA-eight. 


80  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

ALUMINUM  SOLDER;  MONREY. 

I.  2.  3. 

Tin 80  85  88 

Copper    8  6  5 

Aluminum    I2  9  7 

SOFT  SOLDER. 

Low  Medium  High 

Lead    2  i  i 

Tin I  I      '  2 

FLUXES. 
For  Hard  Soldering. 

I. 

Calcined  borax   .  , i  part 

Yellow    vaseline 2  parts 

Rub  up  in  a  mortar  into  a  uniform,  smooth  paste. 

2. 

Borax   16  parts 

Boric  acid 8  parts 

Ammonium    chloride 4  parts 

Potassium  carbonate ^'  part 

Hot  water 125  parts 

3.;  DodeL 

Borax   7  parts 

Boric  acid 7  parts 

Distilled   cold    water 50  parts 

Shake,  until  dissolved. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULaEY  81 

4- 

Calcined  borax .  .' 4  parts 

Calcined  sodium  chloride 3  parts 

Calcined  potassium  carbonate 2  parts 

5- 

Calcined  borax 7  parts 

Ammonium    chloride , I  part 

6. 

Phosphoric  acid,  U.  S.  P 5  parts 

Water 5  parts 

Alcohol 5  parts 

For   Soft   Soldering. 

I. 

Dental  cement  liquid  (Phosphoric  acid.) .  .      i  part 
Alcohol    I   part 


Zinc    5  parts 

Hydrochloric    acid 10  parts 

Dissolve,  and.  after  reaction  has  ceased,  add 

Ammonium    chloride . .     3  parts 

Water  10  parts 

3- 

Pieces  of  zinc  are  dissolved  in  hydrochloric  acid  until 
the  acid  is  saturated.  The  resultant  solution  of  zinc  chloride 
is  mixed  with  an  equal  amount  of  a  mixture  of  water  of 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


82  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

ammonia  and  alcohol.    After  standing  a  few  days  the  solu- 
tion is  filtered  and  is  then  ready  for  use. 

4- 

Zinc  chloride 2  parts 

Water 4  parts 

Alcohol 4  parts 

5- 

Rosin    45  parts 

Suet    45  parts 

Melt,  and  add,  with  constant  stirring 

Ammonium    chloride lo  parts 

FLUX  FOR  SOLDERING  ALUMINUM. 

Stearic   acid 8o  parts' 

Zinc  chloride lo  parts 

Tin   chloride lo  parts 

SOLDERING  FOR  REPAIRING  BROKEN  METAL,  FINE  INSTRU- 
MENTS, ETC.,  WHEN  HEAT  WOULD  BE  INJURIOUS. 

(Cold  Solder.) 

Flux — Metallic    sodium i   part 

Mercury    50  parts 

(Keep  in  glass  stoppered  bottle.) 

Solder — Silver    8  parts 

Tin 10  parts 

Bismuth    i   part 

Platinum    i   part 

Melt   together,   cast   in   an    ingot   and    rasp   to   filings. 
Mix  filing,  3  parts,  and  flux,  i  part,  to  a  smooth  paste  when 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABI  83 

about  to  use.  Omitting  the  bismuth  gives  a  granular  mass 
suitable  for  filling  crevices  :  omitting  the  platinum  reduces 
the  strength  and  requires  an  hour  to  harden. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  DENTAL  AMALGAM  ALLOYS. 

(N.  K.  Garhart.) 

The  metal  formulas  of  all  dental  amalgam  alloys  that 
are  usually  found  on  the  market  are  composed  of  two  or 
more  of  the  following  four  metals :  silver,  tin.  copper  and 
zinc.  Silver,  tin  and  copper  are  the  metals  most  com- 
monly used,  although  zinc  in  conjunction  with  these  three  is 
becoming  more  frequently  used.  Gold  and  platinum  are 
not  used  to  any  appreciable  extent.  Only  minute  traces  of 
these  metals  can  be  found  in  the  so-called  gold  and  platina 
alloys.  It  is  not  the  expense  of  making  the  allo}"  that  con- 
cerns the  average  manufacturer,  but  the  expense  of  market- 
ing his  products  precludes  the  use  of  such  expensive  metals. 
Simple  silver  and  tin  formulas  are  rarely  used  nowadays. 
The  test  of  time  has  proven  that  such  simple  formulas  make 
very  poor  alloys.  Copper  and  zinc  have  an  effect  of  con- 
trolling the  shrinking  factor  of  an  alloy,  also  hastening  its 
setting  properties.  That  copj^er  toughens  and  increases  the 
edge-strength  has  been  known  for  many  years.  It  also  is 
well  known  that  it  causes  discoloration  when  present  in 
large  quantities.  Aluminum,  bismuth  and  antimony  have 
been  exploited  for  the  purpose  of  adding  some  special  virtue 
to  alloys.  I  must  admit  that  I  have  never  found  any  advant- 
ages in  using  any  of  these  metals.  Alloys  containing  ap- 
preciable amounts  of  bismuth  and  antimony'  discolor  the 
hand  to  an  unusual  degree  while  aluminum  can  never  be 
used  in  quantities  beyond  one  percent.     If  larger  amounts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  ^Yeight. 


84  DENTAL  FOEMULARY 

of  aluminum  are  used  the  amalgam  will  suddenly  decom- 
pose, setting  free  the  mercury  and  converting  -the  other 
metals  to  oxides.  Various  forms  of  hronze  have  been  sug- 
gested for  imparting  a  beneficial  action  to  alloys.  My  ob- 
servation and  experience  has  been  that  such  beneficial  results 
are  mainly  due  to  copper,  which  constitutes  about  80  to 
90  percent  of  the  bronze.  Most  amalgam  authorities  claim 
that  silver  is  the.  expanding  element  and  tin  the  contracting 
element  of  all  amalgamating  alloys.  Hereinafter  my 
experiments  will  prove  that  this  is  not  altogether  true. 

We  have  heard  a  great  deal  of  discussion  in  regard 
to  the  so-called  white  alloys,  and  the  question  is  daily 
asked  us  if  our  alloy  will  maintain  its  color  indefinitely  in 
the  mouth.  Since  I  believe  that  the  discussion  of  color 
should  come  under  the  head  of  formulas,  I  propose  to  dis- 
pose of  this  matter  now.  Amalgams  either  oxidize  or  sul- 
phidize  in  the  mouth.  I  actually  believe  that  most  of  the 
discoloration  is  due  to  oxidation.  We  all  know  that  any 
form  of  gold  under  i8k  will  rapidly  discolor  in  the  mouth; 
hence  if  it  requires  pure  gold  from  80  to  90  percent  fine 
to  prevent  discoloration,  why  should  it  not  require  the  same 
amount  of  gold  to  prevent  amalgam  from  discoloring? 
You  will  readily  appreciate  the  fact  that  it  is  impossible 
to  use  such  a  high  percentage  of  gold,  and  experience  has 
proven  that  even  15  percent  of  gold  will  not  prevent  dis- 
coloration in  amalgam  fillings.  Of  course  manufacturers 
say  that  they  make  alloys  that  will  not  discolor,  but  you  may 
believe  as  much  of  this  story  as  you  wish.  We  know  that 
some  alloys  discolor  more  easily  than  others.  You  can 
always  attribjLite  this  cause  to  the  presence  of  too  much  tin 
or  copper  and  sometimes  both  metals.  The  reason  why 
a  great  many  alloy  fillings  retain  their  bright  color  in  the 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  85 

mouth  is  clue  to  the  constant  poHshing  that  the}-  receive 
from  the  mastication  of  food.  You  cannot  attribute  the 
retention  of  color  to  any  other  cause,  inasmuch  as  minute 
quantities  of  other  metals  and  special  methods  of  preparing 
the  alio}-  will  not  protect  the  amalgam  from  discoloring. 
In  chemistry  we  have  certain  fixed  and  immutable  laws 
v^hich  are  beyond  the  control  of  man. 

It  is  common  belief  that  the  smelting  of  alloys  is  a 
simple  procedure.  All  that  is  required  is  a  crucible,  the 
metals,  some  borax  and  a  furnace  in  which  we  are  to  liquify 
the  metals  with  heat.  To  the  competent  metallurgist  the 
proper  smelting  of  alloys  is  not  a  difficult  proceeding. 
That  it  requires  technique  and  skill  is  perfectly  true.  Not 
all  formulas  are  melted  alike  ;  hence  a  full  knowledge  of  the 
chemistry  of  metals  is  required.  ]\Iost  metals  have  a  great 
affinity  for  oxygen  when  in  a  molten  state,  and  some  of 
them  are  volatile  at  certain  temperatures.  To  preserve 
the  integrity  of  the  formulas  so  that  loss  due  to  volatiliza- 
tion and  liquation,  or  separation  of  the  metals  will  not  occur 
during  the  smelling  and  pouring  process  are  a  few  of  the 
important  features  to  which  the  metallurgist  must  give 
careful  attention.  In  regard  to  the  furnace  work  I  will  say 
that  the  gas  and  air  must  be  under  perfect  control.  This 
requires  the  use  of  delicate  regulators.  Both  gas  and  air 
should  be  under,  pressure  and  so  proportionately  mixed  as 
to  always  maintain  a  deoxidizing  atmosphere  in  the  furnace. 
Powdered  carbon  as  a  preventative  for  oxiilation  is  far  pre- 
ferable to  borax.  If  by  any  accident  some  of  the  molten 
mass  should  o.xidize,  borax  will  dissolve  the  oxides,  while 
carbon  will  reduce  theni  to  the  metallic  state.  Carbon  has 
a  greater  affinity  for  oxygen  than  that  possessed  by  any 
of  the  nietals  most  cnmmonl\-  used   for  amalgam  purposes. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  FoiDiuhiri/  inrau  (juautities 
by  weight. 


86  DENTAL  FOEMVLARY 

It  is  quite  necessary  that  the  metals  must  be  treated  in  the 
furnace  for  some  time  so  that  their  chemical  union  may 
be  completed.  Graphite  crucibles  are  most  generally  used 
.  for  holding"  the  metals.  The  use  of  crucible  covers  is  neces- 
sary for  preventing  oxidation  during  the  smelting  process. 
Simply  liquifying  the  metals,  stirring  and  pouring  them  will 
not  produce  a  homogenous  product.  The  use  of  iron  rods 
for  stirring  should  be  abandoned,  and  compressed  carbon 
rods  substituted  in  their  place.  Molten  alloy  -Will  dissolve 
iron,  and  it  will  also  attack  the  ingot  mould,  which  is  usually 
made  from  cast  iron.  The  ingot  moulds  should  be  covered 
with  a  thin  film  of  carbon,  which  is  readily  accomplished 
by  smoking  it  over  a  coal-oil  flame.  I  have  always  con- 
sidered it  a  wise  policy  to  smelt  each  ingot  separately,  and 
so  have  my  furnaces  designed  to  hold  a  number  of  small 
crucibles. 

The  cutting  process  is  the  method  employed  for  reduc- 
ing the  ingot  to  a  fine  state  of  division,  so  that  the  alloy 
will  readily  combine  with  mercury.  This  process  is  one 
of  the  most  important  branches  of  this  industry.  Most 
makers  cut  or  shave  their  alloys  on  an  ordinary  lathe.  The 
lathe  tool  is  usual!}-  fed  by  hand.  The  self-feeding  mechan- 
ism of  an  ordinary  lathe  is  entirely  too  coarse  for  this  pur- 
pose. Five  years  ago  I  abandoned  the  hand  process  of 
cutting  alloys,  and  had  designed  for  my  use  a  special  ma- 
chine provided  with  an  automatic  tool-feeding  mechanism. 

The  filing  process  is  not  a  scientific  way  of  cutting 
alloys.  The  filings  are  not  \miform  and  there  is  no  method 
for  sharpening  the  file.  A  cylindrical  file  is  generally  used, 
and  because  of  their  great  expense  they  are  used  until  they 
are  well  worn  out.  When  the  file  is  new  small  particles  of 
steel  break  off  with   tlie  alloy.     Tliesc  steel  particles  must 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Formulary  mean  quaatities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULAEY  87 

be  carefully  removed  with  the  aid  of  an  electro-magnet.  It 
requires  but  a  short  time  for  the  file  to  become  dull ;  hence 
the  alloy  thereafter  is  torn  off  by  friction.  Since  heat  is  a 
product  of  friction,  it  is  very  apparent  that  filings  take  up 
oxygen  from  the  atmosphere. 

The  shaving  method  requires  the  use  of  keen-edged 
tools,  and  is  by  far  the  most  scientific  way  to  cut  alloys. 
The  tools  are  sharpened  from  time  to  time,  thereby  produc- 
ing a  clean  and  even  cut.  The  finest  grade  of  steel  is 
employed  ancf  they  are  carefully  tempered  to  the  required 
degree  of  hardness,  in  keeping  with  the  character  of  alloy 
to  be  cut.  Alloys  containing  large  quantities  of  copper  and 
silver  are  very  brittle.  The  quick-setting  alloys  are  so 
brittle  that  they  are  very  difficult  to  shave.  They  are 
usually  cut  in  the  form  of  a  needle-like  shaving.  In  this 
state  they  combine  more  readily  with  mercury  than  w^hen 
they  are  in  a  flake-like  form. 

The  failure  of  a  manufacturer  to  imitate  another's  pro- 
duct is  not  due  to  the  formula,  but  to  the  cutting  process. 
Chemical  analyses  will  reveal  the  exact  metal  formula  of 
anv  alloy.  It  is  not  the  formula  but  the  exact  method  of 
cutting  that  bothers  imitators.  So  it  will  be  observed 
that  the  personality  of  the  alloy  can  be  readily  changed 
by  the  cutting  process.  We  may  take  two  alloys  of  the 
same  formulas,  one  cut  in  thin  shavings,  and  the  other  in 
thick  ones.  They  will  mix  and  set  so  differently  that  the 
average  practitioner  would  conclude  that  they  were  widely 
different  from  each  other  in  formula.  It  is  this  variation 
in  the  thickness  of  the  shavings  that  has  a  wonderful  influ- 
ence upon  shrinkage,  expansion,  edge-streno^th  and  setting- 
factors  of  an  alloy.  The  hand  method  of  feeding  the  tool 
in  cutting  allovs  will  always  produce  an   mi-uniform   pro- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Venial  FormuJarij  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


88  DENTAL  FOEMVLARY 

duct.  Amalgams  made  from  such  alloys  will  always  show 
variable  results  in  the  mouth. 

The  annealing  process  is  the  means  employed  by  vari- 
ous manufacturers  for  artificially  aging  their  alloys.  Dr. 
Black  advanced  the  idea  of  heating  fresh  cut  alloys  for 
several  days  at  a  temperature  of  120  degrees  F.  Other 
investigators  have  since  shortened  the  length  of  time  re- 
quired for  artificially  aging  by  using  boiling  water.  The 
various  makers  of  thick-setting  alloys  claim  that  their 
products  will  not  change  from  further  aging.  These  claims 
are  distinctly  false  and  misleading.  All  quick-setting  alloys 
will  set  slower  after  they  have  stood  in  your  office  for  one 
year.  These  alloys  are  only  partly  annealed  and  very 
slightly  so  at  that.  Any  quick-setting  alloy  can  be  annealed 
so  as  to  be  extremely  slow-setting  if  subjected  to  the  boiling 
water  process  for  a  considerable  length  of  time.  Fresh 
quick-setting  alloys  when  properly  cut  possess  several  points 
of  expansion.  The  annealing  process  will  remove  this  ex- 
pansion ;  hence  they  are  treated  until  they  only  show  from 
y2  to  I  point  of  expansion.  So  you  will  note  that  quick- 
setting  alloys  are  only  partly  annealed,  and  they  will  change 
when  left  in  your  office  for  any  length  of  time. 

The  manufacturer  is  in  a  better  position  to  judge  of 
the  merits  of  alloys  than  the  average  dentist.  He  has  the 
entire  clinical  experience  of  his  trade  to  rely  upon  and  he 
gains  much  valuable  information  from  his  competitor's 
trade  as  well.  The  old  saying  that  "two  heads  are  better 
than  one"  aptly  applies  to  this  case. 

The  question  of  testing  alloys  is  one  which  has  con- 
cerned the  dental  profession  ever  since  amalgams  first 
came  into  practical  use.  The  results  that  I  have  obtained 
from  using  the  micrometer  have  led  me  to  believe  that  it 

N,  B. — Parts  as  usod  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULAEY  89 

is  the  onlv  reliable  and  accurate  means  for  determining 
the  preserving  properties  of  amalgam  fillings.  I  do  not 
wish  to  ignore  the  "test  of  time,"  nor  do  I  care  to  ignore 
the  great  number  of  cases  of  faulty  manipulation  upon 
which  a  great  number  of  these  tests  have  been  uncon- 
sciously based..  As  far  as  the  accuracy  of  the  micrometer 
is  concerned,  it  has  proven  conclusively  that  alloys  which 
show  the  best  results  on  this  instrument  always  give  the 
best  results  in  the  mouth.  It  records  every  particle  of 
shrinkage  and  expansion  with  great  delicacy  and  accuracy. 
Fillings  made  from  slightly  expanding  quick-setting  alloys 
will  not  fail  in  the  mouth.  Should  a  failure  happen  you 
can  safely  attribute  the  cause  to  faulty  manipulation,  or 
preparation  of  the  cavity,  or  else  to  a  condition  of  the  tooth 
structure,  which  must  be  of  such  a  degenerate  character 
that  it  could  not  be  saved  by  any  artificial  means. 

According  to  my  estimation  the  glass  tube  test  is  a 
very  unreliable  and  inaccurate  method  for  ascertaining  the 
tooth-preserving  qualities  of  amalgam.  The  walls  of  any 
artificial  matrix  should  compare  favorably  with  those  of  the 
dentine.  The  walls  of  the  tooth  are  left  rough  by  the 
action  of  the  bur.  and  thus  afford  an  ideal  surface  for 
an  amalgam  or  a  cr}staline  compound  to  adhere.  Amal- 
gams are  nothing  more  than  metal  cements,  of  which  the 
copper  and  the  silver  are  the  hardening  agents.  Take  any 
cement  which  does  not  leave  a  polished  surface  and  it  will 
not  adhere  to  a  polished  surface  like  that  of  glass.  Port- 
land and  lime  cements  will  not  adhere  to  glass,  but  when 
applied  to  an\-  roughened  material  like  brick  the  adhesion 
is  complete.  The  greatest  obstacle  in  the  way  of  properly 
filling  a  glass  tube  with  amalgam  is  the  removal  of  excess 
niercury.      There    is    no    mechanical    method    for    securing 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulan/  moan  quantities 
!}y  weight. 


90  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

the  tube  so  that  the  proper  pressure  can  be  appHed  to  con- 
dense the  fining  in  place.  Only  a  downward  pressure  can 
be  exerted  which  forces  the  mercury  to  the  inner  walls  of 
the  tube.  This  surplus  mercury  is  reabsorbed  again  after 
vour  work  has  been  completed,  thereby  producing  shrinkage, 
especially  at  the  periphery  of  the  filling.  Lateral  pressure 
is  necessary  to  force  the  dry  amalgam  to  the  periphery  of 
the  filling.  The  existence  of  these  grave  faults  in  using 
this  test  no  operator  can  deny.  I  consider  any  test  unre- 
liable that  cannot  be  duplicated  with  some  degree  of  accur- 
acy. It  is  impossible  to  fill  six  tubes  with  the  same  make  of 
alloy  and  obtain  the  same  results  in  all  cases.  ^ 

I  firmly  believe  in  the  microscope  for  examining  mar- 
gins. The  best  plan  is  to  photograph  your  work  from 
month  to  month.  These  photographs  are  your  records  of 
any  changes  that  might  have  occurred. 

The  flow  and  the  crushing  tests  of  alloys  are  of  no 
practical  importance,  inasmuch  as  these  factors  are  amply 
great  enough  in  all  alloys.  It  is  an  easy  matter  to  make 
a  poor  alloy  with  a  good  edge  strength.  Spheroiding  or 
changing  of  form  is  nothing  more  than  excessive  shrinkage. 
This  condition  of  aflfairs  can  be  directly  attributed  to  faulty 
manipulation  of  the  alloy.  Dr.  Black  could  have  given 
some  valuable  information  on  this  subject  had  he  submitted 
some  spheroidal  fillings  to  a  chemical  analysis.  Had  the 
quantity  of  mercury  been  estimated,  he  could  have  proven 
the  presence  of  surplus  mercury.  An  alloy  containing  as 
low  as  45  percent  silver  when  properly  manipulated  and 
inserted  in  the  cavity  will  not  flow  to  an  appreciable  degree. 
Nearly  every  high  grade  alloy  will  stand  any  strain  that 
masticating  stress  can  impose  upon  it. 

Dr.    Black    deserves    great    credit    for    presenting    the 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  T)rnlal  FormnJarn  nioan  quantities 
Yij  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMVLAIIY  91 

practical  utility  of  the  micrometer  to  us.  It  certainl}-  fills 
a  long-felt  want,  and  'attords  a  scientific  means  for  stand- 
ardizing our  products  without  relying  upon  the  conflicting 
data  that  we  are  in  the  habit  of  receiving  from  our  trade. 
I  have  compiled  some  important  tests  which  will  throw  some 
light  upon  the  subject  of  allo\s.  Before  presenting  these 
tests  to  you  I  desire  to  call  }Our  attention  to  some  conclu- 
sions of  Dr.  Black's  work.  He  stated  that  it  was  impossible 
for  the  manufacturer  to  produce  an  alloy  which  would  give 
uniform  results  from  any  set  formula.  At  the  time  that 
he  made  these  statements  there  was  a  great  deal  of  truth  in 
his  remarks,  and  it  was  that  which  led  me  to  take  up  this 
work  of  investigation.  It  occurred  to  me  that  we  should 
look,  for  some  fault  in  our  smelting,  annealing  or  cutting 
processes  as  being  the  probable  cause  of  variation  in  our 
finished  product.  My  theory  has  been,  if  like  conditions 
prevailed  throughout  the  entire  process  of  making  alloys 
that  like  results  would  always  be  obtained.  I  will  after- 
wards prove  that  this  fault  was  mainly  due  to  a  variation 
in  the  thickness  of  cut.  as  a  result  of  using  the  hand  process 
of  cutting  our  alloys.  This  variation  in  the  thickness  of 
cut  produced  a  like  variation  in  the  shrinking  and  expanding 
factors  of  the  resulting  amalgam.  It  was  for  this  reason 
alone  that  I  adopted  the  use  of  a  special  automatic  machine 
for  cutting  mv  alloA'S. 

There  is  one  more  thing  that  Dr.  Black  stated  which 
did  not  seem  practical  to  me.  He  claimed  that  filed  alloys 
gave  better  results  than  the  shaved  variety.  He  never 
presented  a  scientific  explanation  of  this  assertion.  Had  I'C 
carried  his  investigations  further  he  would  have  found  that 
filed  alloys  are  coarse  cut  products,  while  the  shaved  alloys 
were  invariably  cut  very  thin  at  the  time  that  he  made  his 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dottal  FormuJart/  meau  qiiuutities 
by  weight. 


92  DENTAL  FOBMULAllY 

experiments.  When  he  was  carrying  on  these  experiments, 
the  various  makers  of  alloys  were  in  the  habit  of  cutting 
their  alloys  in  extremely  thin  shavings,  which  were  very 
popular  with  their  trade.  Had  alloys  been  cut  in  much 
thicker  shavings  there  would  have  been  no  difference  in 
his  results. 

Having  called  your  attention  to  these  important  facts 
we  will  carefully  compare  the  results  of  my  tests  of  various 
formulas  with  them.  Each  formula  was  annealed  for  15 
minutes  in  boiling  water,  and  they  were  cut  in  four  different 
thicknesses  of  shavings.  No.  i  cut  is  the  thinnest.  The 
others  are  progressively  25  percent  thicker.  The  test  plugs 
of  amalgam  measured  ^4  inch  in  diameter  and  yi  inch  in 
depth.  They  weighed  2.3  grammes,  or  about  35.5  grains. 
The  fillings  were  inserted  in  a  hardened  steel  matrix  or 
tube.  The  alloy  was  carefully  weighed  and  mixed  with  an 
exact  quantity  of  mercury  sufficient  to  produce  a  stiff  plastic 
mass.  The  usual  precautions  were  taken  in  regard  to 
wafering  the  amalgam,  and  these  tests  were  made  under 
the  same  conditions,  so  far  as  it  was  within  my  power  to  ac- 
complish it.  Each  sample  was  subjected  to  a  24  hour  test, 
and  usually  after  the  sixth  hour  no  further  movement  could 
l3e  detected. 

FORMULA  NO.   1. 

Silver  45,  copper  10,  tin  45  percent. 
Shrinkage,     cut  i — 9.5 

2—7-5 

3—6-5 

4 — 4.5  points 

No.  I  required  equal  parts  of  mcrcur\-  and  alloy ;  No.  2, 
1.4  parts  mercury  to  1.5  parts  alloy;  No.  3,  1.3  parts  mer- 

N.  B. — Parts  sis  used  in  tliis  Dnilal  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  wcij^ht. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  93 

cury  to  1.5  parts  alloy;  No.  4,  1.2  parts  of  mercury  to  1.5 
parts  of  alloy. 

FORMULA  NO.   2. 

Silver   50,   tin  45,   copper   5   percent. 
Shrinkage,   cut   i — 14.5 
2—11-5 

3—  7-5 

4 —  6.0  points 

Proportions  of  mercury   and   alloy   required   were  the 
same  as  in  formula  No.  i. 

FORMULA  NO.   3. 

Silver   55,   tin  40,   copper  5   percent. 
Shrinkage,   cut  i — 11.5 
2—10.5 

3—  7-0 

4—  50 

Proportions  of  mercury  and   alloy   same   as  in  No.   i 
formula. 

FORMULA  NO.  4. 

Silver  60,  tin  38,  copper  I,  zinc  i  percent. 
Shrinkage,     cut   i — 8.5 
2 — 7.0 

3—5-5 
4— 3-0 

Proportions  of  mercury  and  alloy  used  same  as  in  No. 
I    formula. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


94  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

FORMULA  NO.   5. 

Silver   68,   tin   2^   percent. 
Shrinkage,   cut   i — 12.0 
2 — 10.5 

3-  8.0 

4—  4-5 

Portions  of  alloy  and  mercury  used  were  5  of  alloy 
and  6  of  mercury  for  i  and  2,  equal  parts  for  3  and  4. 

FORMULA  NO.   6. 

Silver  68,  tin  28,  copper  2.5,  zinc  1.5  percent. 
Shrinkage,     cut   i — 3.5 
2 — 2.0 
Expansion  3 —  .5 

4—1.5  Points    - 

Proportions  of  mercury,  7  of  mercury  and  5  of  alloy 
for  I  and  2 ;  6  of  mercury  and  5  of  alloy  for  3  and  4. 

FORMULA  NO.  7. 

Silver  60,  tin  35,  copper  5  percent. 

Only  No.  4  cut  measured.  Shrinkage  3.5  points.  Mer- 
cury 1.2  to  1.5  of  alloy. 

We  will  see  what  these  tests  prove  in  regard  to  for- 
mulas. Your  attention  is  called  to  the  various  cuts  of  No.  i 
formula.  Carefully  compare  these  shrinking  factors  with 
those  of  Nos.  2,  3  and  5.  You  will  note  that  the  shrinking 
factors  are  much  less  in  No.  i  formula  than  in  Nos.  2,  3 
and  5.  The  silver  factor  of  Nos.  2,  3  and  5  formulas  is 
much  higher  than  that  of  No.  i,  and  yet  the  former  alloys 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMrLAT^Y  95 

show  a  greater  percentage  of  shrinkage.  The  slirinkage 
factors  are  greater  with  one  exception,  and  that  is  the  No.  4 
cut  of  No.  5  fornnila.  If  silver  is  the  expanding  element, 
and  tin  the  contracting  element,  then  formulas  2.  3  and  5 
should  show  the  best  results.  Your  attention  is  next 
called  to  the  percentage  of  copper  in  Nos.  2  and  3  for- 
mulas. It  will  be  seen  that  it  is  just  50  percent  less  than 
the  amount  contained  in  No.  i  formula.  It  is  quite  evident 
that  copper  overcomes  shrinkage  to  a  wonderful  degree. 
While  silver  possesses  this  property,  it  may  be  regarded 
that  the  combination  of  the  two  metals  are  the  elements 
of  an  alloy.  Let  us  compare  the  shrinking  factor  of  No.  4 
cut  of  formula  No.  i  with  that  of  No.  4  cut  of  formula 
No.  7.  The  results  show  us  that  there  is  i  point  in  favor 
of  No.  7.  The  percentage  of  copper  is  50  percent  less  in 
No.  7  than  in  No.  i.  The  silver  required  to  overcome  this 
reduction  is  three  times  that  of  the  copper,  or  just  15 
percent.  These  results  prove  to  us  that  the  expanding 
influence  of  the  copper  is  much  greater  than  that  of  the 
silver.  Your  attention  is  called  to  No.  5  formula.  Please 
note  the  very  high  percentage  of  silver  that  it  contains. 
This  formula  contains  no  copper  in  its  composition.  It  car- 
ries just  23  percent  more  silver  than  No.  i  formula.  A 
careful  comparison  of  the  shrinking  factors  of  the  No.  5 
formula  with  that  of  No.  i,  and  including  the  shrinking  and 
expanding  factors  of  formula  No.  6,  will  prove  conclusively 
that  simjjle  tin  and  silver  combinations  are  the  worst  for- 
mulas that  any  manufacturer  can  use.  We  will  now  com- 
pare the  shrinkage  factor  of  No.  4  cut  of  formula  No.  7  with 
that  of  No.  4  cut  of  formula  No.  4.  It  will  be  seen  that 
the  results  are  slightly  more  favorable  for  the  No.  4  formula 
than  for  the  No.  7.     You  will  particularly  note  that  No.  4 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Formulary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


96  DENTAL  FOTtMULAEY 

formula  only  contains  i  percent  each  of  copper  and  zinc, 
while  No.  7  formula  contains  full  5  percent  copper.  Sum- 
ming' up  these  results,  we  are  led  to  believe  that  a  four-metal 
formula  is  the  best  that  any  manufacturer  can  adopt  for  his 
alloy.  By  using  such  a  formula  the  percentage  of  copper 
can  be  greatly  reduced  simply  by  the  addition  of  a  small 
percentage  of  zinc.  The  four-metal  formula  eliminates  the 
factor  of  rapid  discoloration  of  the  amalgam,  since  only  a 
small  percentage  of  copper  is  required  wdien  zinc  is  em- 
ployed. So  it  will  be  seen  that  the  manufacturer  is  con- 
fined to  the  use  of  these  four  metals  for  the  formulas  of  his 
medium-priced  alloys,  since  the  extremely  high  price  of 
gold  and  platina  metals  precludes  their  use  entirely. 

These  tests  prove  that  the  quick-setting  formula  is  the 
best  tooth  preserver.  You  will  recognize  No.  6  formula 
to  be  Dr.  Black's,  and  which  is  used  by  all  makers  of  quick- 
setting  alloys.  Owing  to  its  very  quick-setting  features 
this  amalgam  has  never  been  very  popular.  In  a  great 
many  instances  have  fillings  failed  that  were  made  from 
quick-setting  alloys.  The  lack  of  edge-strength  and  crum- 
bling nature  of  these  fillings  proved  conclusively  that  they 
had  failed  due  to  premature  setting  or  crystallization  of 
the  amalgam.  Many  operators  are  in  the  habit  of  working 
the  soft  amalgam  in  the  palm  of  the  hand  to'  prevent  it 
from  setting.  In  many  cases  they  carry  this  operation  too 
far,  and  the  result  is  a  filling  which  soon  crumbles  to  pieces. 
As  a  matter  of  precaution,  where  large  fillings  are  to  be 
inserted  it  is  the  best  policy  to  make  two  mixes  when  using 
quick-setting  alloys. 

All  medium  and  slow-setting  alloys  produce  slightly 
shrinking  amalgams.  The  very  best  medium-setting  alloys 
average  from  8  to    16  points  shrinkage.     My  experiments 

N.  B. — Parts  as  userl  in  this  Drvlol  Formulnri/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABT  97 

have  aided  me  in  producing  a  medium  setting-.  60  percent 
silver  alloy,  having  from  2  to  3  points  of  shrinkage. 

By  carefully  annealing  my  68  percent  silver  formula  I 
have  produced  a  medium-setting  alloy  that  will  show  neu- 
tral results  on  the  micrometer.  I  have  yet  to  find  other 
medium-setting  alloys  that  will  show  such  efficient  results. 

Again  referring  to  my  tests,  you  will  note  that  for  each 
increase  in  the  thickness  of  shaving  there  is  a  corresponding 
decrease  in  the  shrinkage  factor  of  the  amalgam.  You 
must  bear  in  mind  that  there  is  a  limit  to  the  cutting  process 
and  that  No.  4  cut  is  entirely  too  coarse  for  quick-setting 
alloys.  Less  mercury  is  required  to  make  a  perfect  mix 
of  the  No.  4  cut  than  for  the  No.  i.  When  wafering  the 
amalgam,  more  mercury  can  be  expressed  from  cut  No.  4 
than  from  cut  No.  i.  These  facts  account  for  the  greater 
amount  of  shrinkage  in  the  thinner  shaved  alloys.  It  all 
depends  upon  the  nature  of  the  formulas  as  to  how  thick 
the  shavings  should  be  cut. 

In  conclusion,  I  will  state  that  it  is  impossible  for  any 
manufacturer  to  better  his  product  without  the  use  of  the 
micrometer.  This  delicate  instrument  is  just  as  necessary 
to  the  alloy  maker  as  the  Analytical  Balance  is  to  the 
chemist.  Every  batch  of  alloy  should  be  standardized, 
and  the  micrometer  is  the  only  practical  instrument  for 
this  purpose.  They  are  regarded  as  an  expensive  luxury 
by  most  manufacturers,  therefore  they  have  not  come  into 
general  use. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


98 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 


MODERN  AMALGAM  ALLOYS. 


Silver  Tin  Copper 

Acme 65.00  29.00  5.00 

Ash  &  Son's 66.54  27.16  5.02 

Black's 68.5  25.5  ... 

Davis'    42.41  5142  3-21 

Eureka    55-00  40.00  3.00 

Fellowship    67.71  27.95  3.18 

Fidelity   67.76  26.30  4.71 

Flagg's  submarine  ..  .60.00  35.00  5.00 

Flagg's  contour  ....  .64.00  32.00 

Fletcher's    40.00  56.00 

Gibraltar 68.50  25.50  5.00 

Globe 44-89  51.90 

Hedstrom's  ...  , 66.00  27.00  5.00 

Herbst's    53.85  38.46  . . . 

Hodgen's    53.00  42.3  4.7 

Justi's  Superior 35-20  69.10  3.50 

Lawrence's   44.06  50.43  5.51 

Lorenz's    49-79  48-87  .70 

Odontographic  ......66.87  26.48  6.21 

Micrometric   67.14  26.64  4.31 

Rego   66.54  28.14  4.21 

Sauer's    41-67  50.00 

Skogsborg's    56.00  40.00 

Sterion    61.89  31-85  4.16 

20th  Century 67.03  27.13  4.87 

True  Dentalloy 65.91  27.13  5.21 

Welch's  46.00  51.90 

Witzel's 53-00  40.00  5.00 

Zsigmondy's   50.00  33.33 


Gold 


5.00 
3-2 


Zinc 
1. 00 
0.9 
1. 00 

2.00 
1. 16 
1.23 


.  .  .  4.00 

.  .  .  4.00 
I.OO 

.50  2.71 

2.00 

. . .  7.69 

1.80  .32    o 

.  •  •  -37 

...  .28 
1.91 
1 .06 

..-  8.33 

. . .  4.00 
2.10 
1. 10 

1.52  ... 
1 .70 

. . .  2.00 

.  . .  16.67 


Plati- 
num 


40 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

COMPENSATION   AMALGAM   ALLOY. 

(A.    Fenchel.) 

I. 

Silver    55  parts  ] 

Tin    45  parts  >■  Cut  into  fine  filings 

Copper    3  partsj 


99 


Silver    40  parts  | 

Tin    55  parts  > 

Copper    3  partsj 


Cut  into  fine  filings 


Cut  into  coarse  filinsfs 


Silver    50  parts 

Tin    45  parts 

Platinum 2  parts 

Gold    3  parts 

Zinc 3  parts 

Copper    3  parts 

Mix    the    above    cut    alloys    without    further    melting 
according  to  the  following  formula : 

No.   I 3  parts 

No.  2 3  parts 

No.   3 I  part 


TO  PREVENT  AMALGAMATION  OF  GOLD  IN  THE  MOUTH. 

Coat  the  gold  with  a  quick-drying  mastic-  or  sandarac 
varnish. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Drnfal  Fnntutlnrii  mean  quantities 
by  Tveight. 


100  DENTAL  FOEMULARY 

REFINING  OF  PRECIOUS  METALS. 

The  refining  of  precious  metals  requires  an  intimate 
chemical  knowledge  and  an  extended  experience  with  the 
various  methods  involved.  To  refine  small  quantities  of 
gold,  silver  or  platinum  is  not  a  profitable  process  for  the 
busy  dentist.  It  is  far  more  economical  to  collect  the 
precious  metal  scraps,  fillings,  etc.,  until  a  hundred  dollars' 
worth  are  accumulated.  They  may  then  be  melted  and 
sent  to  a  United  States  sub-treasury,  which  in  due  time 
will  remit  a  check  representing  the  actual  value  of  the 
material,  or  the  gold  may  be  sold  to  a  reliable  refiner. 

The  refining  of  gold  in  the  dental  laboratory  may  be 
successfully  carried  out  by  a  number  of  methods,  of  which 
the  following  are  especially  adapted  to  the  needs  of  the 
practitioner.  The  dry  method,  the  quartation  method,  and 
the  wet  method  are  available  for  this  purpose. 

The   Dry   Method. 

1.  Remove  particles  of  plaster,  wood,  base  metals, 
platinum  pins,  etc.,  from  the  scraps. 

2.  Pass  a  magnet  through  the  scraps  to  remove  iron 
particles. 

3.  Wash  the  gold  scraps  in  boiling  water  and  dry  them 
upon  filter  paper. 

4.  Place  the  scraps  in  a  crucible  lined  with  borax, 
and  cover  with  a  mixture  of  three  parts  of  borax  and  one 
part  of  saltpeter.  Heat  and  keep  in  a  molten  state  for  half 
an  hour,  adding  small  amounts  of  sal  ammoniac  from  time 
to  time.  Stir  thoroughly  with  a  compressed  carbon  rod 
(electric  light  carbon)  and  pour  into  a  suitable  ingot  mold. 
If  the  gold  is  still  too  brittle  when  passed  through  the 
rolling  mill,  certain  base  metals  have  not  been  fully  removed. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
'by  height. 


DENTAL  FOBMULARY  101 

The  gold  is  again  melted  and  small  quantities  of  mercuric 
chloride  (corrosive  sublimate)  are  added.  Extreme  care 
should  be  exercised  not  to  inhale  the  very  poisonous  fumes 
of  the  sublimate.  The  dry  method  of  refining  gold  pro- 
duces good  results  if  the  gold  scraps  are  fairly  uniform  in 
character ;  platinum  and  iridium  remain  unchanged  in  the 
gold,  while  all  the  base  metals  are  removed  as  oxides  or 
chlorides.  A  few  Dixon  black  lead  crucibles,  a  small 
Fletcher  injector  furnace,  and  a  hood  to  carry  off  the  fumes, 
constitutes  the  simple  outfit.  Very  small  quantities  of  gold 
scraps  may  be  fairly  well  refined  by  employing  the  above 
process  upon  a  piece  of  charcoal,  using  a  good  compound 
blow-pipe  for  melting  the  gold. 

The   Quartation   Method. 

It  consists  in  melting  the  gold  scraps  with  about  three 
times  their  weight  of  pure  silver :  the  alloy  is  poured  into 
a  bar  ingot  mold  and  the  cast  ingot  is  rolled  out  into  thin 
ribbons.  These  ribbons  are  then  coiled  in  a  spiral  and 
placed  into  hot  commercial  sulphuric  acid.  The  silver  and 
base  metals  are  dissolved  and  the  gold  remains  in  a  porous 
mass  which,  after  washing  in  water,  may  be  melted  and 
])Oured  into  molds.  Platinum  and  iridium  are  not  removed 
by  the  quartation  method.  The  gold  produced  in  this  way  is 
about  995  percent  pure. 

The    Wet   Method, 

Not  less  than  one  ounce  oi  gold  scraps  or  precipitated 
waste  gold  should  be  used  in  refining  by  the  wet  method. 
To  prepare  waste  gold  for  refining,  precipitate  the  waste 
gold  solution  with  iron  sulphate,  dissolved  in  water.  Eight 
parts  of  the  washed  and  dried  sediments  are  mixed  with 

jST.  B. — Parts  as  ust'd  in  this  Denial  Farnuildri/  moan  qiianiities 
by  weight. 


102  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Potassium  carbonate 4  parts 

Sodium  chlorate 2  parts 

Powdered  common  bottle  glass 2  parts 

Place  in  a  crucible  and  melt.  Stir  with  a  compressed  carbon 
rod  and  pour  into  a  mold. 

Gold  scraps  for  refining  by  this  method  are  prepared  as 
outlined  in  the  dry  method. 

Place  an  ounce  of  the  prepared  gold  in  a  porcelain  dish 
and  cover  it  with  aqua  regia ;  four  ounces  of  the  acid  are 
required  for  each  ounce  of  gold.  Aqua  regia  for  such  pur- 
poses should  be  freshly  prepared  by  mixing  one  ounce  of 
nitric  acid  with  three  ounces  of  hydrochloric  acid  ;  only  C.P. 
acids  are  to  be  used.  Place  the  dish  in  a  sand-bath  and 
apply  heat  until  the  gold  is  dissolved.  Care  should  be  taken 
to  allow  the  poisonous  fumes  to  be  carried  ofif,  as  they  are 
dangerous  to  the  health  of  the  operator  and  especially  de- 
structive to  metal  instruments,  etc.  Decant  the  clear  solu- 
tion from  the  sediment,  evaporate  it  to  a  syrupy  consistency, 
and  carefully  add,  with  constant  stirring,  about  one-half 
ounce  of  hydrochloric  acid.  Again  heat  until  the  acid  is 
removed.  Dilute  the  solution  with  one-half  gallon  of  dis- 
tilled water,  heat  for  an  hour,  and  set  aside  for  twenty-four 
hours  to  allow  the  freshly  formed  silver  chloride  to  settle. 
Filter  through  paper  into  a  large  glass  bottle  and  wash  the 
remaining  silver  chloride  three  or  four  times  with  hot  dis- 
tilled water,  running  the  washings  into  the  original  filtrate. 
Add  to  the  contents  of  the  bottle  one  and  one-half  ounces 
of  ammonium  chloride,  shake  well  until  dissolved,  and  set 
aside  for  twenty-four  hours.  Any  platinum  present  is  pre- 
cipitated as  platinic  sal  ammoniac. 

The  liquid  is  now  filtered  through  a  wet  paper  filter 
and  the  remaining  platinic  sal  ammoniac  is  washed  with  a 

^^.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Fornnildri/  iiiciiii  qiiantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  103 

pint  of  boiling  distilled  water  to  which  two  drachms  of  sal 
ammoniac  have  been  added.  The  whole  precipitate  is  now 
poured  into  the  filter  and  the  liquid  is  drained  off. 

To  precipitate  the  gold  from  the  solution,  oxalic  acid, 
sulphurous  acid,  ferrous  sulphate,  and  other  chemicals  are 
used.  Iron  sulphate  is  well  suited  for  working  with  small 
quantities.  For  every  ounce  of  the  original  gold,  four 
ounces  of  ferrous  sulphate  are  required.  The  iron  sulphate 
is  dissolved  in  a  pint  of  distilled  water  and  filtered  into  the 
gold  solution ;  the  gold  will  be  precipitated  in  the  form  of  a 
brown  powder.  About  twenty  drops  of  hydrochloric  acid 
are  added,  the  bottle  is  vigorously  agitated  and  set  aside  for 
twenty-four  hours  to  allow  complete  precipitation.  The 
gold  magma  is  now  filtered  through  paper  and  repeatedly 
washed  with  hot  distilled  water.  After  the  filter  containing 
the  gold  has  become  perfectly  dry,  it  is  placed  in  a  crucible, 
covered  with  a  mixture  of  two  parts  of  borax  and  one  part 
of  saltpeter,  and  heated  until  the  gold  becomes  fluid,  and 
it  is  then  poured  into  a  suitable  ingot  mold  which  has  been 
previously  slightly  oiled  and  heated. 

To  recover  the  silver,  place  the  dry  filter  containing 
the  silver  chloride  in  a  crucible  and  cover  with  a  mixture 
of  six  parts  sodium  carbonate  and  one  part  powdered 
charcoal ;  heat  until  the  silver  becomes  fluid,  and  then  pour 
into  a  suitable  ingot  mold  which  has  been  previously  slightly 
oiled  and  heated.  After  melting,  the  silver  will  be  found  in 
the  bottom  of  the  crucible. 

Platinum  is  recovered  from  the  platinic  sal  ammoniac 
by  burning  the  dried  filter  in  a  porcelain  capsule.  The 
capsule  is  subjected  to  a  slow  continuous  red  heat  until  all 
ammonium  chloride  is  driven  off.  The  platinum  will  remain 
in  the   form  of  a   grayish  black  nias'^,  known   as  platinum 

X.  B. — Parts  as  iisctl  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  -weight. 


104  ,  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

Sponge.  The  platinum  sponge  is  now  melted  on  a  piece  of 
soft  charcoal  with  the  oxy-hydrogen  blow-pipe  into  a  bottom 
of  pure  platinum. 

REFINING  OF  MERCURY. 

I. 

Two  pounds  of  mercury  are  placed  in  a  strong  bottle 
with  four  ounces  of  water  and  one  ounce  of  ferric  chloride 
solution  and  mixed  by  agitation  until  the  mixture  becomes  a 
grayish  magma.  Let  stand  in  a  cool  place  for  two  to  three 
days,  remove  the  watery  portion,  wash  the  mercury  with 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  hot  water  until  it  assumes  a 
bright  color.  Dry  the  mercury  by  placing  a  few  thicknesses 
of  filter  paper  in  a  large  porcelain  dish,  pouring  the  mercury 
over  it  and  repeating  the  operation  two  or  three  times. 
Finally  run  the  mercury  through  a  cone  of  filter  paper  with 
pinholes  at  its  apex. 

2;  Boom. 

Place  the  mercury  with  finely  powdered  loaf  sugar  and 
water  in  a  strong  bottle,  cork,  and  shake  vigorously.  Then 
by  means  of  a  bellows  blow  air  into  the  bottle,  again  corking 
and  shaking  the  bottle,  repeating  this  process  several  times. 
Finally  run  the  mercury  into  a  cone  of  stiff  paper  with  a 
pinhole  at  the  apex.  The  mercury  filters  clear  from  the 
metallic  oxides  produced  by  the  action  of  air  and  sugar  upon 
the  debasing  metals  in  the  impure  mercury. 

The  distillation  of  commercial  mercury  from  an  ordi- 
nary glass  retort  provided  with  a  Liebig  condenser  produces 
chemically  pure  mercury. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulfirj/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMVLAT.Y  l05 

THE  WORKING  OF  STEEL. 
(Dr.   C.    C.   Allen.) 

The  giving"  of  a  certain  desired  degree  of  hardness  to  a 
piece  of  steel  has  come  generally  to  be  called  tempering,  but, 
scientifically  speaking,  the  tempering  of  a  piece  of  steel 
does  not  refer  to  any  particular  degree  of  hardness  it  may 
have  at  any  particular  time,  but  refers  to  the  percentage  of 
carbon  contained  therein.  Thus  two  specimens  of  steel, 
each  containing  a  different  percentage  of  carbon,  might 
both  be  brought  by  proper  manipulation  to  an  equal  hard- 
ness ;  but  the  term  "temper"  is  so  universally  used  in  refer- 
ring to  the  process  of  obtaining  some  desired  degree  of 
hardness  that  it  has  come  to  be  correct.  The  ordinary 
method  of  tempering  steel  is  to  heat  the  articles  to  be 
tempered  to  a  bright  red  heat,  but  not  above  the  point  of 
recoalescence.  and  plunge  into  wafer,  oil,  mercury,  or  some 
tempering  solution,  thereby  depriving  the  heated  metal  of 
its  heat  more  or  less  suddenly ;  and  the  quicker  the  heat  is 
extracted  fron.i  the  metal,  the  harder  it  will  be.  After  this 
is  done,  most  articles  are  found  to  be  harder  than  is  desired 
and  too  brittle  to  be  useful,  but  a  part  of  the  hardness  is 
removed  from  the  steel  by  resorting  to  the  process  known 
as  drawing  the  temper.  This  is  accomplished  by  reheating 
to  a  less  degree  and  quenching  when  the  color  of  the  piece 
indicates  to  the  experienced  eye  that  the  desired  degree  of 
hardness  has  been  reached.  These  colors  run  from  almost 
a  dead  white  to  what  is  generally  known  as  a  steel  blue — 
thus  a  range  of  degrees  of  hardness  from  the  natural 
annealed  condition  of  the  metal  to  the  utmost  hardness 
which  it  is  capable  of  receiving.  A  list  of  the  colors  as 
generally  given  is  as  follows:  Pale  yellow,  straw  yellow, 
brownish  yellow,  purplish  brown,  purple,  light  blue,   dark 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  moau  quantities 
by  weight. 


106  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

blue,  blackish  blue.  Temperatures  range  from  430°  to  600° 
Fahrenheit. 

Where  great  accuracy  in  temper  is  desired  for  a  number 
of  articles,  such  as  burs,  excavators,  etc.,~  they  are  heated 
in  large  quantities,  and  great  precaution  is  taken  to  heat 
only  to  such  a  degree  as  will. give  the  best  temper  for  the 
purpose. 

No  two  lots  of  steel  are  exactly  alike  in  the  percentage 
of  carbon  contained,  and  therefore  it  may  be  determined 
beforehand  what  particular  degree  of  heat  is  best  suited  to 
the  material  to  be  worked.  The  hardening  of  steel  articles 
is  always  accompanied  by  a  certain  amount  of  change  of 
form,  and  this  change  of  form,  while  slight  and  of  no 
moment  in  such  cases  as  burs  and  excavators,  is  very  serious 
in  many  other  articles.  Various  schemes  are  employed  to 
obviate  this  working  in  delicate  pieces  of  work.  Thus 
sheets  of  metal  are  liable  to  curl  up  to  such  a  degree  as  to 
be  useless,  and  are  sometimes  hardened  between  plates  of 
cold  steel,  which  keeps  them  straight.  Many  articles  are 
straightened  with  wooden  mallets  after  having  been  har- 
dened —  this  is  the  case  with  such  things  as  small  files, 
ribbon  saws,  etc. ;  but  an  article  once  tempered  does  not 
admit  of  much  further  manipulation. 

Again,  many  articles  are  ground  into  shape  after  hav- 
ing been  hardened.  This  is  always  the  case  when  hard  steel 
bearings  are  made  for  fine  machinery. 

The  art  of  tempering  is  one  which  requires  much  expe- 
rience in  order  to  obtain  the  best  results,  but  it  is  an  inter- 
esting thing  and  everyone  should  know  something  about  it. 
In  addition  to  tempering  tool  steel  or  steels  which  contain  a 
sufficient  amount  of  carbon  to  make  it  practicable  to  harden 
them  in  the  usual  way,  we  have  a  method  known  as  case- 

N.  E. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Drnial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  107 

hardening.  Case-hardening  may  be  employed  in  low-grade 
steels  or  in  wrought  iron  or  cast  iron,  and  frequently  is  so 
treated  where  it  is  practicable  to  have  the  surface  only  of 
an  article  hardened.  The  process  consists  in  converting 
the  surface  of  the  metal  into  steel,  which  surface  is,  of 
course,  hardened  as  other  steel  is.  The  layer  of  steel  thus 
produced  is  usually  very  thin.  This  may  be  accomplished 
in  a  number  of  wa}s.  One  way  which  is  used  a  great  deal 
is  the  heating  together  of  yellow  prussiate  of  potash  and 
some  substance  which  contains  a  great  deal  of  carbon,  such 
as  leather  shavings.  This,  combined  with  the  articles  to  be 
hardened,  is  heated  in  a  closed  vessel  to  a  red  heat  and  held 
at  this  heat  for  some  length  of  time,  when  the  articles  are 
taken  out  and  plunged  into  cold  water.  If  this  process  is 
properly  carried  out  the  metal  will  be  found  to  have  a 
surface  too  hard  to  be  filed.  Another  and  a  cleaner  way. 
and  one  better  adapted  to  our  wants,  is  to  heat  the  article 
or  articles  to  be  case-hardened  with  cyanide  of  potash  in 
an  iron  vessel  to  a  good  bright  red,  then  remove  the  articles 
with  pliers  and,  while  still  red  hot,  plunge  them  into  water. 
The  result  noted  before  will  l:e  obtained.  In  each  case  a 
part  of  the  carbon  of  the  mixture  combines  with  the  iron 
to  make  steel.  Potassium  cyanide  melts  and  will  bear  a 
red  heat  without  change ;  but  it  should  always  be  borne  in 
mind  that  this  is  a  very  dangerous  poison. 

In  working  steel  and  fashioning  it  into  its  desired  form 
it  is  nearly  always  desirable  that  it  shall  be  soft,  and  many 
times  it  is  also  desirable  that  the  finished  article  should  be 
soft.  The  process  of  softening  steel  or  any  other  metal  is 
called  annealing.  To  anneal  steel  it  is  necessary  to  bring 
it  to  a  red  heat  and  then  cool  it  very  slowly — the  opposite, 
in  fact,  to  the  process  of  hardening.     Large  articles  of  steel 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Vnifal  Fnrmiilarii  mean  qnantities 
by  weight. 


108  DENTAL  FOEMULABT 

may  be  fairly  well  softened  by  heating  as  mentioned  and 
allowing  to  cool  in  the  atmosphere ;  they  should,  however, 
be  buried  in  some  material  which  retards  the  radiation  of 
heat.  One  of  the  best  ways  is  to  pack  in  sawdust ;  lime 
is  sometimes  used,  also  powdered  charcoal.  Small  articles, 
such  as  broaches,  needles,  etc.,  to  be  annealed,  must  be 
protected  from  the  atmosphere  after  heating,  or  they  will 
be  found  to  be  brittle.  This  is  because  the  atmosphere  itself 
robs  them  of  their  heat  so  quickly  that  they  are  hardened. 
The  slow  cooling  of  articles  to  be  annealed  is  supposed  to 
be  necessary  to  give  the  molecules  time  for  rearrangement. 
But,  unfortunately  for  this  theory,  there  are  metals  which 
are  best  annealed  by  sudden  cooling. 

Steel,  besides  being  rendered  softer  by  annealing,  is 
made  more  malleable  and  ductible.  One  great  change  in  it 
is  its  loss  of  tensile  strength.  A  piece  of  steel  which  is 
properly  tempered  and  will  bear  a  strain  of  225,000  pounds 
per  square  inch  is  not  safe  under  a  greater  strain  than 
85,000  pounds  if  it  is  well  annealed.  A  familiarity  with 
steel  and  iron  is  well  worth  the  while  of  any  dentist. 

TEMPERING  STEEL. 

Steel  of  a  grade  suitable  for  tools,  hardened  by  heating 
to  a  hardening  heat  and  cooled  in  cold  water,  and  then 
reheated  to  about  425°  F.,  is  of  just  about  the  right  hardness 
for  engraving  tools,  small  lathe  tools,  etc.  Reheated  to 
500°  F.,  it  is  suitable  for  taps,  dies,  drills,  etc. ;  550°  F. 
makes  it  just  about  right  for  cold-chisels,  saws,  etc. ;  575°  F. 
leaves  but  little  hardness  in  the  steel,  but  enough  to  make  it 
suitable  for  springs.  At  about  650°  F.  the  effect  of  harden- 
ing is  all  gone  and  the  steel  has  become  soft  again.  In 
practice  the   temperature   is   determined   by  the   change   in 

X.  E. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOT^MULAEY  109 

color  of  a  polished  surface  of  the  steel ;  at  425*^  it  is  a  very 
pale  yellow,  and  as.  the  temperature  is  increased  it  becomes 
straw  color,  chocolate,  tinged  with  crimson,  light  purple, 
dark  purple,  and  finally  blue.  Dental  cavity-forming  tools 
should  be  quite  hard  at  the  cutting  surfaces  and  approach- 
ing a  spring  temper  just  beyond.  All  tools  used  in  the  root 
canals  should  be  very  little  harder  than  a  spring  temper — 
just  sufficiently  hard  to  cut  soft  bone,  yet  not  at  all  brittle. 

COLOR   REACTION   IN   TEMPERING    OF   STEEL. 

430° — 450°  F.  pale  straw  =  enamel  chisels. 

470°  F.  full  yellow  =  excavators. 

490°  F.  brown  =  pluggers ;  scissors. 

510"  F.  brown  with  purple  =  saws;  axes. 

530''  F.  purple  =  knives. 

550"  F.  light  blue  =  watch  springs. 

560°  F.  full  blue  =  augers. 

600°  F.  dark  blue  =  hand  saws. 

TO  TEMPER  BROACHES,  BURS,  ETC. 

Cover  the  bottom  of  a  box,  made  of  sheet  iron,  with 
powdered  animal  charcoal  to  the  thickness  of  about  one- 
sixteenth  of  an  inch.  Animal  charcoal  is  readily  prepared 
by  burning  pieces  of  leather  in  a  covered  iron  box.  Place 
on  the  charcoal  a  layer  of  instruments  covered  with  char- 
coal, and  repeat  this  process  until  the  box  is  filled.  Heat 
the  box  to  a  dark  cherry  red  and  keep  at  this  temperature 
for  an  hour ;  remove  from  the  fire  and  at  once  drop  the 
contents  of  the  box  into  cold  water.  Dry  the  instruments, 
immerse  in  coal  oil,  and  place  on  an  iron  plate.  Heat  the 
plate  until  the  oil  starts  tn  Inirn,   remove   from  tlic  flame, 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulanj  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


110  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

and  allow  to  cool.    The  instruments  will  be  found  to  be  of  a 
perfectly  even  temper. 

TEMPERING  FLUIDS  FOR  STEEL. 

I. 

Tartaric  acid i  part 

Cod-liver  oil 5  parts 

2. 

Tartaric  acid 47  parts 

Resin 41  parts 

Alutton  tallow 78  parts 

Charcoal 6^  parts 

Potassium  ferro-cyanide   39  parts 

Ammonium  carbonate 31  parts 

Cod-liver  oil   234  parts 

3- 

Sodium  chloride   25  parts 

Zinc  sulphate i  part 

Ammonium  chloride ^  part 

Borax   |  part 

Potassium  nitrate v  P^^^ 

Water  250  parts 

4- 

Hydrochloric  acid,  concentrated. 5  parts 

Ammonium  chloride   . 10  parts 

Sodium  chloride 50  parts 

Glycerin     800  parts 

Water    1,000  parts 

ISr.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOJiMULAJiY  111 


TEMPERING  OF  COPPER. 


Copper  may  be  rendered  hard  enough  to  take  a  cutlins^ 
edge  b}-  treatment  with  i)otassium  ferro-cyanide.  The  cop- 
])er  is  melted  in  a  graphite  crucible  and  about  2  percent  of 
the  potassium  salt  is  then  added.  After  standing  until  the 
moisture  has  been  driven  off,  the  powder  is  stirred  into  the 
melt,  which  is  allowed  to  stand  a  few  minutes  and  again 
stirred.  In  five  or  ten  minutes  it  is  ready  for  pouring.  The 
color  of  the  copper  is  not  aft'ected  by  the  flux.  The  reason 
for  the  change  is  supposed  to  be  the  introduction  of  iron 
and  possible  carbon. 


TO    APPROXIMATELY    DETERMINE    THE    CHARACTER    OF    A 
METAL  PLATE. 

If  a  drop  of  concentrated  nitric  acid  is  placed  upon  a 
metal  surface  which  has  been  freshl}-  scratched,  the  resulting 
color  helps  to  approximately  guess  the  nature  of  the  metal. 
Pure  silver  turns  gray ;  brass,  light  olive  green ;  German 
silver,  grayish  green;  nickel,  black.  Gold  above  18  carat 
will  not  show  any  discoloration ;  16  carat  gold  shows  a 
brownish  hue,  which  deepens  with  the  reduction  of  the  carat. 


UNITED   STATES   MINT   TESTS   FOR   GOLD   AND   SILVER. 

The  following  is  a  test  for  determining  whether  a  coin 
is  good  or  bad.  Use  the  liquids  as  near  to  the  edge  of  the 
suspected  coin  as  possible,  as  that  is  the  part  worn.  A  drop 
of  the  respective  liquid  will  have  no  eft'ect  on  a  genuine 
coin,  while  it  can  be  plainly  seen  on  the  counterfeit.  Coins 
should  be  scraped  slightly  before  using. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  qnantities 
by  weight. 


112  DENTAL  FOSMULABY 

Test   for   Gold. 

Strong  nitric   acid 39  parts 

Hydrochloric  acid i  part         s 

Water   20  parts 

Test   for   Silver. 

Nitrate  of  silver 24  parts 

Nitric  acid   30  parts 

Water   480  parts 

The  above  tests  should  be  taken  in  conjunction  with 
diameter,  thickness  and  weight. 

THE  TOUCHSTONE,  AND  ITS  USE. 
(By   Dr.  Henry  H.   Boom.) 

A  method  for  quickly  ascertaining  the  degree  of  purity 
of  both  silver  and  gold  was  so  necessary  to  artificers  that 
at  as  earl}'  a  date  as  450  b.  c.  we  find  the  people  of  Lydia, 
in  Asia  Minor,  employing  the  Lydian  stone,  or  touchstone, 
for  this  purpose. 

THE  STONE. 

The  stone  used  by  the  Lydian  goldsmiths  was,  probably, 
a  hard  bituminous  quartz,  although  in  more  recent  times 
black  basalt,  jasper,  slates,  and  even  black  marble  have 
been  used. 

At  the  present  time,  jewelers  and  metal  workers  use  a 
stone  of  black  basalt,  similar  in  composition  to  the  basaltic 
columns  forming  the  celebrated  Giant's  Causeway,  in 
County  Antrim,  Ireland.  The  modern  touchstone  must  be 
densely  black  in  color  and  of  a  quadrangular  prismatic 
shape,  measuring  one  inch  in  thickness  and  from  two  to 
three  inches  in  length. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod   in  tliis  Denial  Formnlari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  •     113 

It  should  show  an  entire  absence  of  color,  for  any 
lightening  of  its  dense-  black  surface  would  interfere  with  a 
correct  appreciation  of  the  color  left  by  metal  that  has  been 
rubbed  upon  it.  It  must  not  be  too  hard,  or  in  its  use  it 
will  acquire  too  high  a  luster.  It  must  not  be  so  soft  as 
to  be  grooved  or  furrowed  by  use ;  nor  should  it  be  of 
such  composition  as  to  be  affected  by  the  nitric  acid  with 
which  the  streak  of  metal  left  upon  its  surface  is  to  be 
treated. 

THE  TOUCH  NEEDLES. 

These  are  needles  like  masses  of  pure  and  of  alloyed 
silver  or  gold,  the  exact  composition  of  which  are  known. 

The  silver  needles  are  prepared  from  pure  silver,  alloyed 
with  pure  copper  in  varying  proportions.  The  first  mass 
of  silver  selected  is  that  which  we  would  now  call  chemic- 
ally pure.  Of  such  metal  the  manufacturer  weighs  out 
one  mark,  or  eight  ounces  (sixteen  half  ounces),  and,  fusing 
the  mass  under  borax,  flows  the  metal  into  molds  that  give 
to  the  finished  needle  a  size  of  one-twelfth  inch  in  breadth, 
one-forty-eighth  inch  in  thickness,  and  one  and  one-half 
inches  in  length.  These  needles  are  stamped  i,  to  indicate 
their  degree  of  absolute  purity. 

The  second  needle  of  the  series  is  then  made  by  weigh- 
ing exactly  fifteen  half  ounces  of  pure  silver  and  one-half 
ounce  of  pure  copper,  and  this  mixture,  wrapped  in  paper, 
is  introduced  into  a  clean  new  crucible  already  heated  and 
containing  melted  borax.  The  contents  of  this  crucible, 
maintained  at  a  temperature  sufficiently  high  to  melt  the 
metal,  are  stirred  vigorously  with  a  w'ooden  stick  that  has 
been  charred  at  the  end  ;  the  metal  alloying  is  then  poured 
into  a  mold,  and,  when  cold,  is  weighed  with  care:  when, 
should  it  be   found   to  be  less   in   weight  than   a   mark,   or 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornudary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


114  DENTAL  FOEMULAHY 

sixteen  half  ounces,  it  will  have  lost,  through  vaporization, 
so  much  of  its  silver  as  to  unfit  it  for  use  in  making  the 
touch  needles. 

When  a  perfect  alloy  is  obtained  it  is  remelted  under 
borax,  at  a  much  lower  temperature  than  was  required  in 
its  making,  and  is  molded  in  the  appropriate  needle  shapes. 
These  finished  needles  are  stamped  2.  The  needles — in 
increasing  proportions  of  copper — are  made  in  this  same 
careful  manner,  and  the  series,  when  perfect,  then  show  in 
composition : 

No.  I — Made  from  mass  of  pure  silver  weighing  16  half  oz. 

No.  2 — Pure  silver,  15  half   oz. ;   pure   copper,    i    half  oz. 

No.  3 — Pure  silver,  14  half  oz. : 

No.  4 — Pure  silver,  13  half   oz. : 

No.  5 — Pure  silver,  12  half  oz. 

No.  6 — Pure  silver,  11  half  oz. 

No.  7 — Pure  silver,  10  half  oz. 

No.  8 — Pure  silver,  9  half   oz. 

GOLD  TOUCH  NEEDLES. 

The  needles  are  made  of  the  same  breadth  and  thick- 
ness as  the  silver  needles,  but,  to  less  the  expense,  they 
generally  are  made  but  one-quarter  or  one-half  inch  in 
length,  and  these,  called  points,  are  soldered  to  copper  bars 
of  corresponding  sectional  area. 

A  i...mber  of  series  of  gold  touch  needles,  or  points,  are 
used ;  thus,  gold  alloyed  solely  with  silver  forms  a  series 
known  as  the  "white  alloy"  series ;  another  series  of  gold 
points,  called  "red  gold"  points,  are  composed  solely  of 
gold  and  copper.  The  most  careful  gold  touch  needles  for 
the  dentist's  employment  are  alloys  of  gold,  silver  and 
copper,   called  the   "mixed   alloy."     The   touch    needles  of 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


pure 

copper, 

2 

half 

oz. 

pure 

copper, 

3 

half 

oz. 

pure 

copper. 

4 

half 

oz. 

pure 

copper, 

5 

half 

oz. 

pure 

copper. 

6 

half 

oz. 

pure 

copper, 

7 

half 

oz. 

DENTAL  F0S2rrLAHY  115 

mixed    alloy    are    made    from    gold    debased    with    varving 
proportions  of  silver  and  half  as  much  copper. 

In  making  the  allo}'s  for  the  needles  the  manufacturers 
must  employ  the  greatest  of  care,  that  there  mav  be  no 
loss  of  metal  (gold  and  silver)  through  volatilization"  or 
oxidation  (copper).  When  the  alloy  is  obtained  it  must  not 
var}-  in  weight  from  the  sum  of  the  weights  of  its  con- 
stituent metals.  The  carat  weighs  12  grains;  the  composi- 
tion and  markings  of  the  touch  needles  are  shown  in  the 
following : 

No.  I — ^lade  from  a  mass  of  pure  gold,  weight  24  carats. 
Xo.  2 — Contains,  pure  gold,  27,  carats,  6  grains ;  pure  silver, 

4  grains ;  copper,  2  grains. 
No.  3 — Contains,  pure  gold,  23  carats  ;  pure  silver,  8  grains ; 

copper,  4  grains. 
No.  4 — Contains,  pure  gold,  22  carats,  6  grains ;  pure  silver, 

I  carat ;  copper,  6  grains. 
No.  5. — Contains,  pure  gold,  22  carats ;  pure  silver,  i  carat, 

4  grains  ;  copper,  8  grains. 
No.  6 — Contains,  pure  gold,  21  carats,  6  grains;  pure  silver, 

1  carat,  8  grains  ;  copper,  10  grains. 

No.  7 — Contains,  pure  gold,  21  carats;  pure  silver,  2  carats; 

copper,  I  carat. 
No.  8 — Contains,  pure  gold,  20  carats,  6  grains ;  pure  silver, 

2  carats,  4  grains  ;  copper,  i  carat,  2  grains  ;  etc. 

For   convenience    in    their   use    the   touch    needles    are 
usually  strung  upon  rings. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  TOUCHSTONE. 

Each  metal,  when  pure,  has  a  specific  color.     Alloving 
a  metal  changes  its  color.     Metals  are  so  opaque  that  their 

X.  E. — Parts  as  iisod   in  tliis  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


116  DENTAL  FOBMULAIiY 

colors  are  only  determined  with  accuracy  when  a  thin  film 
of  the  metal  is  spread  npon  a  densely  hlack  surface.  In 
using  the  touchstone  the  operator  first  cleans  a  portion  of 
its  surface,  using-  for  this  purpose  fine  coal  dust,  tripoli  or 
putty  powder. 

He  then  ruljs  the  gold  ( of  unknown  fineness  )  upon  the 
stone,  stroking  the  stone  several  times  with  ihe  gold.  The 
metal  streak  of  gold  left  upon  the  stone  should  be  one- 
tenth  inch  in  width  and  at  least  one-fourth  inch  in  length. 
Then,  selecting  a  touch  needle  that  appears  to  be  of  about 
the  same  fineness  ( color )  as  the  specimen  he  is  testing,  he 
makes  a  metal  streak  with  the  touch  needle  upon  the  stone, 
close  to  the  first  streak,  and  then  wets  each  streak  with 
water  and  compares  their  colors  when  moistened.  Should 
the  colors  of  the  two  metal  streaks  fail  to  correspond,  he 
tries  with  another  touch  needle,  of  lower  or  greater  fineness, 
to  match  the  color  given  to  the  surface  of  the  stone  by  the 
metal  of  unknown  composition. 

In  all  this  examining  of  color  he  must  not  forget  to 
moisten  the  metal  streaks.  When  the  operator,  employing 
a  needle,  secures  a  metal  streak  on  the  stone  that  corre- 
]5onds  to  the  streak  given  by  the  metal  tested,  he  then  wets 
each  streak  with  nitric  acid,  and  the  acid,  dissolving  from 
the  streaks  from  the  silver  and  copper  used  to  debase  the 
gold,  causes  the  latter  to  present  in  the  streak  a  broken  or 
interrupted  line,  indicating  by  the  loss  of  continuity  the 
relative  amount  of  debasing  metal  alloying  the  specimen  of 
gold.  By  this  method  of  testing  it  is  possible  for  the  dentist 
to  ascertain,  like  the  jeweler,  the  carat  or  fineness  of  gold, 
in  a  very  few  minutes,  and  so  be  able  to  select  the  solder  or 
]jlate  best  suited  for  each  piece  of  repair  work  he  may 
undertake. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  iii  this  Denial  Formulari)  mean  quantities 
by  weigtit. 


DENTAL  FOiniULAIiY  117 
ROUGH  METHOD  OF  ESTIMATING  HIGH  TEMPERATURES. 

Zinc  melts  at ' 800°  F. 

Slight  glow  in  dark  at 975°  F. 

Dark  red  heat  at : .  .  1,280°  F. 

Cherry-red  heat  at 1 ,650°  F. 

Bright  cherry-red  heat  at.  .  .  .- 1,800°  F. 

Silver  melts  at 1,900°  F. 

Gold  mehs  at 2,012°  F. 

Orange  heat  at 2.100°  F. 

Copper  melts  at • 2,190°  F. 

White  heat  at 2,350°  F. 

Steel  melts  at 2,465°  F. 

Dazzling  white  heat  at.  . 2,750°  F. 

Platinum  melts  at 3.240°  F. 

Wrought  iron  melts  at, 2,900°  F. 

TEMPERATURES  PRODUCED  BY   VARIOUS   FLAMES 

The    highest    temperatures    afforded    b\-    flames    are, 
according  to  Fery,  as  follows : 

Bunsen  burner,  with  sufficient  access  of  air 3.400°  F. 

Bunsen  burner,  with  insufficient  access  of  air.  .  .  .  3,105°  F. 

Acetylene  flame 4.645°  F. 

Denayrouz's  burner  (  alcohol  and  air) 3.383°  F. 

Denayrouz's  burner  (alcohol  and  petroleum  ether, 

equal   parts  ) .  3,700°  F. 

Alcohol  flame 3,100°  V. 

Hydrogen  flame  in  open  air 3.450°  F. 

Oxy-hydrogen  mixture 4.390°  F. 

Oxygen  and  illuminating  gas  lilasi  llanic 4.000°  F. 

Electric  arc  ( estimated  ) -.  .  6.800°  F. 

Temperature  of  the  sun  (  estimated  )    14.075"  F. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  DrnUiJ  Forihuhir^i  iiuMii   (|n;intities 
by  weight. 


118  DENTAL  FOEMVLAET 

THE  HEAT  CONDUCTING  POWER  OF  METALS. 

Silver    lOO          Tin    14 

Copper    74          Bismuth    12 

Gold    53         Iron 12 

Zinc 36         Lead    9 

Brass    24         Platinum 8 


CONTRACTION  OF  CASTINGS  IN  COOLING. 

Cast  iron 125  percent 

Copper     193  percent 

Brass    210  percent 

Lead 319  percent 

Tin 278  percent 

TO  TEST  NEW  CRUCIBLES. 

Heat  to  redness  and  put  a  cold  iron  rod  into  crucibles, 
touching  the  bottom.  Cracks  will  expand  and  may  easily 
be  seen. 

POLISHING  POWDERS. 
For   Brass. 

Chalk    10  parts 

White  bole 4  parts 

Magnesium  carbonate i   part 

Iron  oxide i  part 

For    Gold     or    Silver. 

Chalk    54  parts 

^lagnesium  carbonate , 5  parts 

Alumina   14  parts 

Silica 8  parts 

Iron  oxifle 5  parts 

X.  B. — Pai'ts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULARY  119 

TO  RESTORE  TARNISHED  GOLD  PLATES  TO  THEIR  ORIGINAL 

COLOR. 

Iron  oxide,  red  (Crocus  martis) 3  parts 

Calcined  borax 2  parts 

Ammonium  chloride i   part 

Powder  and  mix  slowly  with  water  to  form  a  paste. 

Paint  over  the  plate,  heat  on  a  copper  pan  until  no 
hissing  sound  is  heard,  place  aside  to  cool,  and  boil  in 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  dr}-  in  sawdust. 

GOLD  POLISHING  FLUID. 

Chlorinated   lime i   part 

Sodium  bicarbonate. 20  parts 

Sodium  chloride i  part 

Water,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

Appl\'  with  a  soft  brush,  and,  when  dry,  polish.. 

SILVER  POLISHING  FLUID. 

Sodium  hyposulphite 16  parts 

Ammonium  chloride 8  parts 

Water  of  ammonium 4  parts 

Potassium  cyanide 4  parts 

Water  120  parts 

CLEANING  OF  SILVER  BY  ELECTROLYSIS. 

A  few  strips  of  zinc  are  shaped  so  as  to  form  a  grid. 
The  ribs  of  the  grid  are  heavily  coated  with  tin  and  placed 
on  the  bottom  of  a  tin  pan  of  convenient  size.  The  pan  is 
filled  with  two  quarts  of  water,  in  which  one  ounce  of 
sodium  chloride  and  one  ounce  of  sodium  bicarbonate  are 
dissolved.  The  tarnished  silverware  is  placed  on  the  grid, 
and    immediately   the    evolution    of   hydrogen    takes    place, 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  FormKlar;/  moan  quantities 
liv  weiyht. 


120  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

which  will  remove  the  tarnish  in  a -few  minutes.  The  silver- 
ware must  be  completed  covered  by  the  solution.  The  silver 
itself  will  not  be  affected  by  this  process,  only  its  oxides  are 
removed. 

LIQUID  METAL  POLISHES. 

I. 

Kieselguhr  56  parts 

Kerosene    30  parts 

Alcohol 15  parts 

Oil  of  turpentine 5  part'^ 

Ammonia  water    5  parts 


Tripoli    10  parts 

Kieselguhr   10  parts 

Olein 15  parts 

Carbon   tetrachloride 90  parts 

3- 

Prepared  chalk 100  parts 

Olein 65  parts 

Ammonia  water 40  parts 

Alcohol 50  parts 

Carbon   tetrachloride 50  parts 

4- 

Olein 10  parts 

Stearin 5  parts 

Kieselguhr   20  parts 

Oil  of  turpentine 20  parts 

Kerosene    25  parts 

Alcohol   5  parts 

Ammonia  water 10  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Forinulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight, 


DEXrjL  FOEllULAET  121 

5- 

Oleic  acid lo  parts 

Stearic  acid ■ 5  parts 

Infusorial    earth 20  parts 

Oil  of  turpentine 20  parts 

Kerosene  oil 25  parts 

Wood  alcohol 5  parts 

Water  of  ammonia 6  parts 

Water 6  parts 

6. 

Putty   powder 6  parts 

Kieselguhr 20  parts 

Bath  hrick 2  parts 

Emery i   part 

Rottenstone    i^  parts 

?\Iix  well  together  and  gradually  add  the  following : 

Wood  alcohol 30  parts 

Oil  of  turpentine 15  parts 

Petrolatum 80  parts 

Ammonia   water 15  parts 

Oil  of  citronella -1  part 

A'otc. — The  difficulty  experienced  with  most  liquid 
metal  polishes  is  to  keep  the  polishing  ingredients  in  sus- 
pension. If  the  vehicle  is  made  too  heavy,  as  with  a  crude 
ammonium  oleatc  compound,  a  wide  mouth  bottle  is  neces- 
sary, while  the  problem  with  a  thinner  preparation  is  to 
prevent  the  kieselguhr  from  caking  at  the  bottom  of  the 
bottle.  A  mixture  of  ordinary  kerosene  oil  and  crude  oleic 
acid    makes    a    good    vehicle    for   a    lic|ui(l    metal    polish    or 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  Formtilari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


122  DENTAL  FOEMULAET 

"Putz."  One  part  of  kerosene  to  five  parts  of  crude  oleic 
acid  is  about  the  right  proportion  to  use,  and  to  a  pint  of 
such  a  mixture  there  may  be  added  two  ounces  of  kiesel- 
guhr  and  ten  or  twelve  drops  of  oil  of  myrbane. 

POLISHING  PASTES. 

I. 

Pumice  stone  ( in  fine  powder) 20  parts 

Oleic  acid 20  parts 

Tallow    2  parts 

Paraffin    .  .  .  .' 4  parts 

]\Ielt  the  oleic  acid,  tallow,  and  paraffin  together 
and  gradually  stir  in  the  pumice  stone,  stirring 
continuously  until  cold. 

2. 

Precipitated    chalk 2  parts 

Water  of  ammonia 2  parts 

Wood  alcohol 13  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

Shake  well  before  using. 

TO  CLEAN  NICKELED  INSTRUMENTS. 

I. 

Place  the  instruments  in  a  mixture  of 

.Sulphuric  acid i  part 

Alcohol 50  parts 

Let  remain  fr)r  ten  minutes,  remove,  wash  in 
hot  water,  and  dr\-  in  sawdust. 

X.  B. — Pfti'ts  as  used  in  this  DmUil  Farmularjj  mean  quantities 
by  \veit(lit. 


DENTAL  FOHMLLAUY  123 

2. 

Prepared  chalk 2  parts 

Water   of  ammonia 2  parts 

Alcohol 2  parts 

Water  4  parts 

Rub  the  instruments  with  a  cloth  saturated  with 
the  mixture,  then  wipe  them  with  a  dry  cloth. 

3 

Ammonium  carbonate ....    30  parts 

Water 120  parts 

Dissolve  and  add 
Precipitated    chalk 480  parts 

Spread  this  paste  over  the  surface  of  the  object  to  be 
polished  and  rub  with  a  soft  flannel  cloth  first,  then  with  a 
piece  of  chamois  skin.  If  the  metal  surface  has  any  pits  or 
fissures,  a  brush  may  be  employed. 


Cover  the  rust  spots  with  engine  oil  and  in  a  few  days 
rub  and  polish  with  a  paste  made  of  chalk  and  water  of 
ammonia.  If  the  spots  are  very  resistant  they  may  be 
treated  with  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  followed  immediately 
by  the  above  paste. 

5- 

One  of  the  best  methods  known  for  keeping-  bright  the 
nickel  work  about  the  office  is  to  wet  a  rag  with  a  solution 
of  hyposulphite  of  soda  and  wipe  the  article  with.  it.  drying" 
with  a  soft  towel  and  ihcn  rubbing  it  with  a  piece  of 
chamois. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  usml  in  this  Dinial  Formularii  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


124  DENTAL  FOliMVLABY 

TO  REMOVE  RUST  FROM  POLISHED  STEEL. 

I. 

To  remove  rust  from  polished  steel,  potassium  cyanide 
is  excellent.  Soak,  if  possible,  the  instrument  to  be  cleaned, 
in  a  solution  of  potassium  cyanide  in  the  proportion  of 
one  part  of  cyanide  to  four  parts  of  water.  Allow  this  to 
act  until  all  loose  rust  is  removed,  and  then  polish  with 
cyanide  soap.  The  latter  is  made  of  potassium  cyanide, 
precipitated  chalk,  and  white  castile  soap.  Make  a  satu- 
rated solution  of  the  cyanide  and  add  chalk  sufficient  to 
make  a  creamy  paste.  Add  the  soap,  cut  in  fine  shavings, 
and  thoroughly  incorporate  in  a  mortar.  When  the  mixture 
is  stiff,  cease  to  add  the  soap.  It  should  be  remembered 
that  potassium  cyanide  is  a  violent  poison ! 


2. 

Rusted  surgical  instruments,  etc.,  are  placed  over  night 
in  a  saturated  solution  of  stannous  chloride,  which  causes 
the  spots  to  disappear  by  reduction.  The  articles  are  then 
rinsed  in  water,  laid  in  a  hot  solution  of  soda  soap,  and 
dried.  It  is  well  to  rub  them  with  absolute  alcohol  and 
prepared  chalk.  Another  convenient  method  for  removing 
rust  is  to  lay  the  instruments  in  kerosene.  Paraffin  oil  is 
the  best  preservative  against  rust,  and  the  most  convenient 
way  of  applying  it  without  getting  an  unnecessarily  thick 
coating  is  as  follows:  One  part  of  oil  is  dissolved  in  two. 
hundred  parts  of  benzine,  and  the  objects,  after  being  thor- 
oughly dried  and  warmed,  are  plunged  into  the  solution. 
Instruments  with  joints,  as  scissors  or  needle  holders,  are 
waslifd  in  llie   llui<l,  in   order  to  cause  it  to  penetrate  into 

N.   1^.. —  I'ni-ts  as  used   in  this  Denial   Forni iihiri/  Tiienn  quantities 
liy  weight. 


DENTAL  FOJ^MVLAHY  125 

all  crevices,  and  the  benzine  is  then  allowed  to  evaporate 
in  a  dry-room. 

TO  CLEAN  ENGRAVED  COPPER. 

Wash  thoroughly  with  soap  and  water,  and  dry  thor- 
oughly. Then  rub  the  surface  with  a  fresh  lemon  cut  in 
half,  rinse  with  tepid  water,  (lr_\-,  and  polish  with  chamois 
leather.  Powders  and  polishing-  pastes  should  never  be 
used  on  worked  copper,  for  the  particles  get  lodged  in  the 
chasings  and  are  very  difficult  to  remove. 

LINING  OF  RUBBER  DENTURES  WITH  ALUMINUM;  LA  SALLE. 

For  the  solvent  use  chloroform  one  part,  carbon  disul- 
phide  one  part,  and  naphtha  one  part ;  for  powder,  the 
aluminum  used  by  plumbers  in  bronzing  metal  work.  Pack 
the  case  as  usual,  using  the  flask  press  and  the  wet  cloth  to 
test  the  pack.  An  excess  of  rubber  is  fatal  to  best  results. 
The  flask  should  be  made  to  come  together  under  gentle 
pressure.  The  palatal  surface  of  the  denture  should  be 
made  of  as  large  pieces  as  possible.  This  gives  a  smooth 
surface  and  prevents  penetration  of  the  mass  by  the  lining — 
an  event  certain  to  mar  the  appearance  of  the  palatal  sur- 
face of  the  denture.  After  packing,  a  swab  of  cotton 
wound  on  a  wood  toothpick  is  dipped  into  the  solvent  and 
applied  to  the  palatal  surface  of  the  pack,  and  a  small 
quantity  of  the  powder  dusted  on  to  this  moistened  surface 
and  rubbed  in  with  the  swab,  again  saturated  with  the 
solvent.  This  procedure  is  continued  _^until  the  surface 
refuses  to  hold  more.  A  new  swab  is  then  made  and  used 
dry,  and  with  it  dry  aluminum  is  applied  to  the  model. 
The  flask  is  then  closed  and  bolted,  and  the  case  vulcanized. 
With  the  vulcanization   completed,  the   flask   is  allowed   to 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Denial  Fonnidarii  moan  quantities 
by  Aveight. 


126  DENTAL  FOT.MVIA'RY 

become   "stone   cold"   before   opening.      Without   this   pre- 
caution the  lining-  would  adhere  in  part  to  the  model. 

TO  MAKE  GOLD  COHERE  UNDER  ALL  CONDITIONS;  DODEL. 

When  it  is  advisable  to  repair  an  old  gold  filling  with- 
out removing  the  gold  already  in  position,  it  may  be  accom- 
plished by  following  the  directions  here  outlined : 

(i)  Apply  the  rubber  dam.  (2)  Clean  the  tooth  care- 
fully with  lukewarm  water.  (3)  Wash  it  with  sulphuric 
ether,  to  dissolve  any  fatty  or  oily  substances.  (4)  Go  over 
the  filling  with. alcohol.  (5)  Dry  with  v/arm  air.  (6)  Take 
a  gold  cylinder  and  unroll  it,  until  you  have  but  one  thick- 
ness, or  take  gold  foil  No.  4;  carefully  anneal  this,  as  it 
readily  melts.  (7)  With  a  very  fine  pointed  plugger  go 
over  the  entire  surface  of  the  gold  put  on,  first  with  hand 
pressure,  then  mallet  it  well.  (8)  After  that,  go  over  it 
with  a  convex  plugger.  (9)  The  direction  of  the  force 
should  be  ^t  right  angles  to  the  surface  worked  upon. 
(  10)  If  you  have  followed  these  directions  in  applying  two 
layers,  you  can  go  ahead  in  the  usual  manner  and  use  either 
pellets  or  leaf  gold.  Having  tested  it  in  various  positions,  I 
find  it  entirely  satisfactory  except  where  the  filling  is  subject 
to  great  stress,  when  it  is  ill-advised. 

TO  IMITATE  GOLD  FILLING  IN  PORCELAIN  TEETH. 

Pure  powdered  gold 100  parts 

Mercury  oxide,  yellow 150  parts 

Bismuth   tri-nitrate 9^  parts 

Mix  with  thick  oil  of  turpentine,  paint  upon 
tooth,  and  carefully  heat  in  oven  or  flame.  Polish 
with  burnisher. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod  in  this  Drnlal  Fnrwulnri/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOT^MrLATlY  127 

TO  REPAIR  A  GOLD  PLATE  WITHOUT  REMOVING  THE 
RUBBER-MOUNTED  TEETH. 

Attach  to  the  plate  the  negative  wire  of  the  hghting 
circuit,  and  to  the  positive  wire  a  smaU  carbon,  cutting  in, 
in  series,  a  bowl  of  salt  water  as  a  rheostat.  The  hole  in 
the  plate  is  cleansed  and  prepared  in  the  usual  waw  then 
covered  with  a  piece  of  gold  foil  and  i8  carat  solder  upon 
it,  with  borax  as  a  flux.  The  carbon  point  is  brought  in 
contact  with  the  solder  and  then  gradually  removed,  forming 
the  arc,  which  is  held  su.fficiently  long  to  melt  the  solder. 
Immerse  the  plate  immediately  in  water. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
1)V  weight. 


CHAPTER  V. 

PLATING,     COLORING,     LACQUERING,     AND 
ETCHING    OF    METALS. 

ELECTROPLATING  OF  METALS. 

When  an  electrified  body  is  discharged  through  a  con- 
ductor, an  electric  current  is  produced,  known  as  the  cir- 
cuit. The  circuit  represents  the  entire  path  traveled  by 
the  current,  including  both  that  within  the  cell  and  that 
without.  The  current  passes  from  the  negative  pole,  i.  e,, 
the  positive  plate  of  the  cell,  to  the  positive  pole,  i.  e.,  the 
negative  plate  of  the  cell.  When  the  poles  of  a  cell  arc 
connected  by  wire  immersed  in  a  salt  solution  in  which  a 
piece  of  metal  of  the  same  nature  as  the  salt  present  in  the 
solution  and  a  piece  of  metal  of  a  dififerent  character  are 
suspended,  the  piece  of  metal  attached  to  the  negative  pole 
will  be  covered  with  a  coat  of  metal  as  presented  in  the 
solution.  The  process  is  referred  to  as  electroplating.  The 
negative  pole,  carrying  the  article  to  be  plated,  is  spoken  of 
as  the  cathode,  and  the  positive  pole,  carrying  the  plating 
metal,  is  spoken  of  as  the  anode. 

PRACTICAL  HINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED   IN  ELECTROPLATING. 

Ordinary  dry  cells  (Columbia  type),  or  wet  cells 
(Leclanche  type),  furnish  the  best  current  for  small  plating 
outfits.     A   Leclanche   cell   furnishes,   in   average,   one   and 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 
128 


DENTAL  FOEMULARY 


129 


one-half  volts ;  the  dry  cells,  from  one  and  three-tenths  to 
one  and  seven-tenths  volts.  Ordinarily,  two  cells  are  neces- 
sary for  dental  work.  The  current  must  never  be  so  strong' 
as  to  produce  small  bubbles  upon  the  cathode ;  too  weak 
a  current  produces  a  milk-colored  deposit. 

Use  the  purest  chemicals  obtainable. 

Heating  the  solution  to  about  ioo°  F.  facilitates  ready 
plating-. 

Metal  Ro<b 

supporting  the  Anode 

and  the  Cathode 


Fig.   1. 
Sohomo    for    arranging    a    simple    olootroplal  Ing    outfit. 


X.  B. — Parts  as  usod   in  this  Denial  Forinularii  iiioau  (|iiaiitities 
ly  weight. 


130  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

In  making  the  solution,  all  the  salts,  with  the  exception 
of  the  metal  salts  proper,  should  be  dissolved  first,  the 
metal  salts  are  added  last. 

Gold  or  platinum  wire  soldered  to  the  anode  and  at- 
tached to  the  article  to  be  plated,  the  cathode,  should  be 
used  only.     Base  metal  wire  produces  poorer  results. 

Between  the  anode  and  the  cathode,  as  suspended  in  the 
solution,  there  should  be  from  i  to  2  inches  of  space ;  the 
articles  must  never  touch  each  other  during  the  plating 
process. 

Articles  made  of  German  silver,  bronze,  or  other  metal 
alloys  must  be  copper-plated  before  the  final  gold,  silver 
or  nickle   plating  is  made. 

The  vessels  used  in  plating  should  be  of  glass,  stone- 
ware or  porcelain. 

Before  immersing  the  articles  into  the  plating  solution 
it  must  be  boiled  in  a  solution  of  caustic  potash  ( i  ounce  to 
a  pint  of  water)  to  remove  fat,  oil,  finger  greases,  etc. 
Remove  with  wire  hook  and  wash  in  water.  Do  not  again 
touch  with  fingers. 

If  articles  are  oxidized,  they  must  be  boiled  for  a  short 
time  only  in  a  weak  solution  (i  :io)  of  sulphuric  or  hydro- 
chloric acid. 

Places  which  should  not  be  covered  by  the  plating 
solution  must  be  carefully  varnished  with  asphalt  varnish. 
The  varnish  must  be  perfectly  dry  before  the  goods  are 
immersed  in  the  plating  solution. 

The  time  necessary  to  accomplish  a  good  plating  varies 
with  the  size  of  the  article,  from  ^A  to  5  hours  may  be 
required;  the  color  of  the  plated  article  is  usually  the  best 
indicator. 

After   the   plating   is   accomplished,    the   article   is   re- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABT  131 

moved  from  the  solution  and  boiled  in  water  for  a  few 
minutes  and  the  still  *hot  article  is  thrown  in  jeweler's  saw 
dust  and  dried.     Polish  in  the  usual  manner. 


AN  INEXPENSIVE  GOLD  PLATING  OUTFIT  FOR  SMALL  WORK. 

Dissolve  one-fourth  ounce  of  potassium  cyanide  in  two 
and  one-half  ounces  of  pure  water  in  a  warm  bath.  Also 
fifteen  grains  of  chloride  of  gold  in  two  and  one-half 
ounces  of  cold  water.  Mix  the  two  licjuids  and  pour  into 
a  glass  or  porcelain  dish.  Procure  three  pieces  of  insulated 
copper  ware,  each  sixteen  inches  in  length  and  about  22 
gauge.  Remove  two  inches  of  the  insulation  on  each  end 
of  the  wires.  Use  two  of  these  for  connections  with  a  dry 
battery,  such  as  are  used  for  hall  bells  or  alarms. 

To  the  anode  attach  a  piece  of  pure  gold,  and  to  the 
cathode  the  appliance  to  be  plated.  Immerse  in  the  plating 
solution  after  previously  cleansing  in  a  heated  solution  of 
caustic  potash,  followed  b}'  a  wash  of  clear  water.  For  this 
cleansing  use  the  third  wire  and  do  not  handle  the  appliance 
with  the  fingers.  Stir  the  plating  solution  occasionally. 
The  outfit  complete  can  be  procured  for  less  than  one 
dollar. 

PLATING  SOLUTIONS. 

Silver   Plating    Solution. 

I. 

Silver  cyanide 2  parts 

Potassium    cyanide 5  parts 

Distilled    water 35  parts 

Use  pure  silver  plate  as  the  anode. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formularij  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


132  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

2. 

Silver    chloride 3  parts 

Sodium   phosphate 40  parts 

Potassium    cyanide 25  parts 

Potassium  hydrate 15  parts 

Distilled  water 1000  parts 

3- 

Silver    nitrate 68  parts 

Distilled   water 1000  parts 

Dissolve,  and  mix  with 

Potassium  cyanide 104  parts 

Distilled   water 1000  parts 

This  solution  produces  a  heavy  deposit. 

GOLD  PLATINQ  SOLUTION. 

I. 

Sodium   phosphate 25  parts 

Sodium    sulphate 5  parts 

Gold    chloride 3  parts 

Potassium  cyanide 10  parts 

Distilled   water. 560  parts 

The  anode  must  be  attached  to  a  piece  of  pure  gold 
plate  of  nearly  the  same  size  as  the  article  to  be  plated. 

2. 

For    Plating    Iron    and    Steel    Goods. 

Sodium  phosphate,  crystals 50  parts 

Sodium  sulphate 12  parts 

Potassium  cyanide   ^   part 

Gold   chloride,  crystals i   part 

Distilled  water locx)  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formular;/  uw.m  ruiantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  .      133 

COPPER  PLATING  SOLUTIONS. 

I. 

Copper   acetate 5  parts 

Sodium  carbonate,  crystals 5  parts 

Sodium  sulphite 5  parts 

Potassium    cyanide 5  parts 

Distilled   water 280  parts 

Use  pure  copper  plate  as  the  anode. 


2. 

Copper  acetate ; 20  parts 

Sodium    carbonate 25  parts 

Acid  sodium  phosphate 20  parts 

Potassium  cyanide 23  parts 

Distilled    water 1000  parts 


NICKEL   PLATING    SOLUTION. 

I. 

Nickel    sulphate 10  parts 

Sodium    citrate 9  parts 

Distilled   water 280  parts 

Use  pure  nickel  in  sheet  form  as  the  anode. 


2. 

Nickel  and   Ammonium   sulphate 70  parts 

Boric   acid *. 25  parts 

Distilled    water 1000  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  usofl  in  this  Denial  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  \v  eight. 


134  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

PLATINUM  PLATING  SOLUTION. 
Solution    1. 

Platinum    chloride 4  parts 

Ammonium  phosphate 20  parts 

Sodium    phosphate 100  parts 

Distilled   water 1000  parts 

Solution    2. 

Platinum    chloride 4  parts 

Distilled   water 1000  parts 

Both  solutions  are  mixed  with  constant  stirring.  A 
yellow  precipitate  of  platinic  ammonium  chloride  is  formed. 
To  dissolve  this  precipitate  add  a  solution  of 

Sodium    phosphate 100  parts 

Distilled   water 700  parts 

and  boil  the  whole  mixture  until  the  precipitate  is  dis- 
solved. After  complete  solution,  the  solution  is  reduced 
by  evaporation  to  about  1500  parts. 

BRASS  PLATING  SOLUTION. 

Iron,  copper  or  zinc  articles  may  be  readily  brass 
plated  with  the  following  solution  : 

Copper  sul]jhate   i  "/lo  parts 

Zinc  sulphate .      to         parts 

Potassium  cyanide if)         parts 

Distilled  water    1000         parts 

N.  B. — T'ni'ls  lis  used  in  tliis  f)rnl(il  Funinihiri/  inc-iii  i|ii;nitities 
by  Aveight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  135 

GOLD    PLATINC,   WITH   ALUMINUM    CONTACT. 

I. 

Gold  chloride i  ^  parts 

Potassium  cyanide   i6  parts 

Distilled  water lOOO  parts 

Dissolve  the  gold  chloride  in  500  parts  of  warm  dis- 
tilled water  and  the  potassium  cyanide  is  500  parts  of  warm 
distilled  water.  Ivlix  the  two  solutions.  The  article  to  be 
plated  is  wound  with  an  aluminum  wire  and  placed  in 
a  hot  5  percent  solution  of  potassium  or  sodium  hydrate ; 
it  is  now  rinsed  in  water  and  placed  in  the  heated  gold  solu- 
tion. Depending  on  the  size  of  the  article,  it  may  remain  in 
the  gold  bath  from  15  seconds  to  2  minutes  or  until  a  suf- 
ficiently heavy  deposit  is  obtained.  It  is  then  removed, 
washed  in  water  and  polished  in  the  ordinary  way. 

2. 

Gold   chloride i  part 

(or   silver  chloride  for   silver  plating) 

Potassium    cyanide 25  parts 

Sodium   phosphate 16  parts 

Potassium    hydrate 10  parts 

Distilled   water 500  parts 

Boil  the  solution. 

The  perfectly  clean  and  highly  polished  article  is  held 
by  an  aluminum  wire  and  moved  about  in  the  boiling  liquid 
for  ^  to  2  minutes ;  it  is  then  removed,  washed  in  alcohol, 
and  dried  in  sawdust. 

GOLD  SOLUTION  FOR  PLATING  WITHOUT  A  BATTERY. 

Sodium  pyro-phosphate.  crystals 80  parts 

Hydrocyanic  acid.   12  percent 8  parts 

Gold  chloride,  crystals 2  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


136  DENTAL  FOEMULASY 

GOLD  PLATING  OF  ALUMINUM  BASE  PLATES. 

After  the  aluminum  base  plate  is  swaged,  it  is  placed  in 
a  lO  percent  potassium  hydrate  solution  for  a  few  minutes, 
removed,  washed  in  water  and  placed  in  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid  and  left  there  until  small  gas  bubbles  are  visible  upon 
its  surface.  It  is  now  immediately  transferred  to  a  25 
percent  solution  of  mercuric  chloride,  left  there  a  few 
moments  and  transferred  to  the  acid  bath  in  which  it  remains 
until  the  gas  bubbles  again  start  to  form.  It  is  now  placed 
in  a  10  percent  gold  chloric  solution.  Immediately  it  is 
covered  with  a  tense  film  of  gold,  which  may  be  readily 
polished. 

FIRE  GILDING. 

Gold-amalgam  for  fire  gilding  is  prepared  by  alloying 

Pure   gold i  part 

Mercury   8  parts 

A  Dixon  black  lead  or  English  clay  crucible  is  coated 
with  prepared  chalk,  the  gold  is  cut  into  small  pieces  and 
heated  in  the  crucible  to  a  dull  redness  and  the  mercury 
added  and  stirred.     Pour  in  water. 

"Quickening"  solution  is  prepared  by  dissolving  (in 
the  open  air)  : 

Mercury    10  parts 

in 

Nitric  acid 11  parts 

and  adding 

Distilled   water • 275  parts 

Clean  the  article  thoroughly  and  apply  the  "quickening" 
solution ;  with  a  copper  spatula  rub  the  gold  amalgam  over 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULAE Y  137 

the  "quickened"  surface  and  remove  the  surplus  of  the 
amalgam  with  a  soft  brush.  The  article  is  now  slightly 
heated  to  evaporate  the  mercury,  leaving  a  pure  layer  of 
gold.  With  prepared  chalk  and  borax  solution  the  article 
is  finally  polished. 

Caution:  JMercury  fumes  are  very  poisonous;  they 
must  not  be  inhaled. 

SILVER  PLATING  PASTE. 

I. 

Silver    nitrate • i  part 

Sodium  chloride i  part 

Potassium  cyanide. ■ 2  parts 

Chalk,  a  sufficient  quantity. 

Dissolve  the  silver  nitrate  in  16  parts  of  water  and 
add  the  sodium  chloride,  dissolved  in  an  equal  amount  of 
water.  Mix  thoroughly  and  collect  the  precipitate  on  a 
piece  of  damp  cotton  cloth.  Transfer  the  moist  precipitate 
to  a  mortar  containing  the  potassium  cyanide  in  powder  and 
dissolve  by  adding  more  water  if  necessary.  Now  add 
sufficient  chalk  to  make  a  spreadable  paste. 

To  resilver  the  tarnished  article  spread  the  paste  upon 
the  spot  which  must  be  free  from  grease,  dirt,  etc.  and  let 
remain  two  hours,  then  brush  off.     Repeat  if  necessary. 

2. 

Silver    nitrate t,6  parts 

Potassium  cyanide 60  parts 

Precipitated    chalk lOO  parts 

Potassium    bitartrate 5  parts 

Water    enough 

Dissolve  the  silver  nitrate  and  potassium  c\anide  sepa- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formuhtrij  moai.  quantities 
by  ^veight. 


138  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

rately  in  a  minimum  of  water ;  mix  them  and  add  the  chalk 
and  potassium  bitartrate  and  sufficient  water  to  make  a 
paste. 

SILVERING  SOLUTION. 

A  solution  that  is  considerably  used  for  covering  the 
worn  parts  of  plated  goods  has  the  following  composition  : 

Silver    nitrate 35  parts 

Sodium  chloride 60  parts 

Alum    30  parts 

Potassium    bitartrate 180  parts 

Water 1000  parts 

The  solution  is  applied  by  friction  with  a  sponge  or 
rag  to  the  previously  well  cleaned  article. 

SILVER  PLATING  OF  ORGANIC  SUBSTANCES. 

Ivory,  horns,  bone,  vulcanized  rubber,  leather  and  simi- 
lar materials  may  be  coated  with  a  layer  of  silver  as  follows  : 
The  material  is  heated  to  about  150°  F.  and  painted  over 
with  a  hot  solution  of  2  parts  of  g-allic  acid  in  100  parts  of 
water.  After  drying,  a  one  percent  solution  of  silver  nitrate 
in  distilled  water  is  painted  over  the  parts  and  this  process 
is  alternately  repeated  until  the  desired  silver  color  is 
obtained. 

NICKEL  PLATING  WITHOUT  A  BATTERY. 

It  is  not  so  easy  to  deposit  nickel  on  the  surface  of 
brass  as  silver,  but  the  following  processes  represent  per- 
haps, the  most  practicable  methods  in  use.  The  first  method 
is  known  as  the  Mitresscy  process,  by  which  any  desired 
thickness  of  plating  may  be  deposited,  yielding  a  surface 
which  is  said  to  be  more  solid  than  electroplated  nickel: 

N.  B. — Parts  as  usod   in  tliis  Dental  Formulari/  ino.-ni  f|n;n]tifios 
Ijy  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAB¥  139 


First  Bath. — Clean  the  objects  and  take  5  parts  by 
weight  of  potassium  carbonate  for  25  parts  by  weight  of 
water.  If  the  pieces  are  quite  rusted,  take  2  parts  by  weight 
of  hydrochloric  acid  for  i  part  by  weight  of  water.  The 
bath  is  employed  cold. 

Second  Bath. — Put  25  parts  by  weight  of  copper  sul- 
phate in  2500  parts  by  weight  of  water.  After  dissolution 
add  a  few  drops  of  sulphuric  acid,  drop  by  drop,  stirring  the 
liquid  with  a  wooden  stick  until  it  becomes  as  clear  as  spring 
water.  Take  the  cleaned  pieces  and  place  them  in  what 
is  called  the  copper  bath,  attaching  to  them  leaves  of  zinc : 
they  will  assume  a  red  tint.  Then  pass  them  into  the  nickel- 
ing bath,  which  is  composed  of: 

Potassium    bitartrate 20  parts 

Ammonium    chloride 10  parts 

Sodium  chloride 5  parts 

Stannic  chloride 20  parts 

Nickel  sulphate,  single 30  parts 

Nickel  sulphate,  double 50  parts 

Remove  the  pieces  from  the  bath  after  a  few  minutes 
exposure,  and  rub  with  fine  sand  on  a  moist  rag.  Bril- 
liancy will  thus  be  obtained.  To  improve  the  appearance 
apply  a  brass  wire  brush. 


Prepare  a  bath  of  neutral  zinc  chloride  and  a  neutral 
solution  of  a  nickel  salt.  The  objects  are  immersed  in  the 
bath  with   small   ]jicces   of   zinc  and  kept  boiling  for  sc^ne 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Dnilal  Foriniilari/  moan  quantifies 
by  weiglit. 


140  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

time.  This  process  has  given  satisfactory  results.  It  is 
easy  to  prepare  the  zinc  chloride  by  dissolving  zinc  in 
hydrochloric  acid,  as  well  as  a  saturated  solution  of  am- 
moniacal  nickel  sulphate,  in  the  proportion  of  two  parts  of 
the  latter  to  one  of  the  zinc  chloride.  The  objects  should 
be  boiled  for  fifteen  minutes  in  the  bath.  Nickel  chloride 
may  also  be  employed. 

PLATINUM-PLATING    OF    DENTAL   INSTRUMENTS. 

Platinum    chloride i  part 

Water   i  part 

Hydrochloric  acid 3^  -parts 

Alcohol    20  parts 

Dissolve  and  evaporate  to  15  parts 

And  add 

Ether    75  parts 

With   a   woolen   cloth   rub   this   liquid   upon  the   clean 

instrument,  heat  to  about  100°  F.  and  polish. 

COPPER  PLATING  ALUMINUM. 

Copper  sulphate 30  parts 

Potassium  and  sodium  tartrate 30  parts 

Sodium    carbonate 25  parts 

Water    1000  parts 

The  aluminum  article  is  thoroughly  cleansed  in  a  weak 
potassium  hydrate  solution  and  placed  in  the  heated  bath. 

COLORING  OF  METALS. 
Copper. 

Black. — To  cplor  copper  black  immerse  the  object, 
previously  well  cleansed,  in  the  following  solution,  let  remain 
for  from  30  to  45  minutes,  and  afterwards  wash  well : 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOFMULABY  141 

I. 

Antimony  chloride 15  parts 

Alcohol    125  parts 

Hydrochloric  acid,  sufficient  to  dissolve. 
The  less  of  the  acid  that  is  used,  the  better  the  result. 
This  process  deposits  a  coating  of  antimony. 

2. 

Plunge  the  well  cleansed  object  in  nitric  acid,  remove 
and  heat  to  a  dull  red.    It  deposits  a  coating  of  copper  oxide. 

3- 

Plunge  the  copper,  previously  well  cleansed,  into  the 
following : 

Arsenous   acid 2  parts 

Hydrochloric    acid 4  parts 

Sulphuric    acid 1   part 

Water 24  parts 

It  causes  a  deposit  of  arsenic. 

Bluish-Gray. — Suspend  the  object  in  the  following  at 

an  almost  boiling  heat : 

Sodium    sulphide i   part 

Antimony  sulphide i   part 

Water 12  parts 

Let  remain  until  the  desired  tint  is  obtained,  wash  rapidly 

with  water  and  dry. 

Brown. — Immerse  in  nitric  acid  sufficiently  long  to  give 
a  bright  surface,  rinse  in  clear  water  and  plunge  into  a 
solutioii  of  iron  chloride. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  FormuJdrii  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


142.  DENTAL  FORMULABY 

Olive-Green. — Cover  with  a  solution  of  iron  and  arsenic 
in  hydrochloric  acid.  Polish  with  lead-minimum,  warm, 
and  cover  with  the  following  varnish : 

Gamboge    i   part 

Yellow    ochre i   part 

Alcoholic    varnish i   part 

To  make  iridescent : 

Lead  acetate 2  parts 

Sodium    hypophosphite 6  parts 

Water    100  parts 

Mix,  and  heat  to  boiling.  When  in  active  ebulli- 
tion, plunge  the  object  in  it  and  keep  until  the  de- 
sired tints  are  obtained.  Dry  and  varnish.  The 
copper  takes  on,  successively,  gray,  violet,  chestnut, 
red,  and  finally  blue. 

Bronze. — First  tin  the  copper  by  boiling  in  a  weak 
solution  of  acid  potassium  tartrate,  in  which  granulated  tin 
has  been  placed. 

Wash,  dry,  and  warm  until  the  desired  tint,  is  obtained. 


Zinc. 

Black. — Clean  the  zinc  by   dipping  in  acid,  rinse  and 
plunge  into  the   following: 


I. 

Nickel    ammonium    sulphide 4  parts 

Sulphuric    acid i  part 

Water    40  parts 

Wash  the  article  and  dry  carefully. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEUULARI  143 

2. 

Treat  with  the  following-  solution : 

Hydrochloric  acid •. 6  parts 

Antimony  chloride lo  parts 

Alcohol lOO  parts 

When  the  desired  shade  is  attained,  dry  and  rub  with 
some  good  drying  oil.     Give  2  or  3  coats. 

Green-Patina. — Make  the  following  solution: 

Sodium  hyposulphite   2  parts 

Sulphuric    acid i  part 

Water    20  parts 

Filter  oft'  the  precipitated  sulphur  and  heat  the  filtrate. 
Plunge  the  object  into  the  hot  solution.  Watch  the  colora- 
tion as  it  progresses  and  when  the  desired  tint  is  secured, 
remove,  let  dry  and  varnish  with  copal  varnish. 

To  Bronze. — First  cover  with  copper  by  galvanism, 
then  wash  with  the  following  solution : 

Potassium   oxalate 8  parts 

Ammonium    chloride 30  parts 

Vinegar    1000  parts 

Rinse  and  let  dry. 

Silver. 

To  Blacken. — Plunge  into  a  solution  of  an  alkaline 
sulphite  (sulphurated  potassaj.  Remove  and  rub  with  a 
brush  dipped  in  powdered  cream  of  tartar. 

Baths   for  Oxidizing  Silver. 

The  peculiar  appearance  on  the  surface  of  silver  articles 
that  has  been  termed  "oxidized  silver"  can  be  produced  in 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Formulary  moan  quantities 
bv  weight. 


144  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

a  variety  of  ways,  the  particular  tone  depending  upon  the 
treatment  to  which  the  metal  is  submitted. 

A  mixture  of  6  parts  of  graphite  and  i  part  of  pow- 
dered hematite  (or  rouge)  is  prepared,  and  moistened  with 
oil  of  turpentine.  The  surface  of  the  object  to  be  oxidized 
is  covered  with  this  paste,  which  is  allowed  to  dry,  and 
then  dusted  off  with  a  soft  brush.  The  object  is  now  im- 
mersed in  a  solution,  heated  to  about  176°  F.,  consisting 
of  5  parts  potassium  sulphide,  10  parts  ammonium  carbonate, 
and  1000  parts  of  water.  If  the  following  solution  be  em- 
ployed a  rich  brown  tone  is  produced :  20  parts  copper 
sulphate,  10  parts  saltpetre,  and  20  parts  ammonium 
chloride. 

Bromine  vapor  blackens  silver  and  its  alloys,  and  by  its 
use  extraordinarily  artistic  effects  can  be  produced,  especially 
upon  engraved  surfaces. 

The  silver  objects  may  also  be  covered  with  ammonium 
sulphide  in  a  porcelain  vessel  and  gradually  warmed.  As 
soon  as  a  bluish-black  color  appears  they  are  taken  out  of 
the  bath,  placed  in  soap  water,  and  gently  rubbed  with  a 
soft  brush,  while  immersed. 

A  bath  which  produces  the  same  effect  as  potassium 
sulphide,  can  be  prepared  as  follows,  and  has  the  advantage 
of  being  very  cheap :  1000  parts  of  water  are  poured  over  a 
mixture  consisting  of  370  parts  of  quicklime,  and  640 
parts  flowers  of  sulphur.  Considerable  heat  is  evolved, 
and  a  pasty  mass  forms ;  the  latter  is  diluted  with  1000 
parts  of  hot  water,  and  boiled  for  an  hour.  The  resulting 
liquid  is  ready  for  use,  and  is  best  employed  after  slightly 
warming.  It  produces  a  bluish-gray  surface  on  silver, 
while,  if  50  parts  of  gray  antimony  sulphide  or  cinnabar  be 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMVLAF^Y  145 

added    during-   the    boilinor.    the    color    will   be    a    beautiful 
grayish  brown. 

Brown  Color. — To  give  silver  a  deep  brown,  treat  it 
with  a  solution  of  ammonium  chloride  and  copper  sulphate, 
equal  parts,  in  A-incgar. 

To  Oxidize  Silver. 
I. 
Light  Color. — 
Sulphuretted  potash  ( liver  of  sulphur)  .  .      5  parts 

Ammonia  water 10  parts 

Water  60  parts 

2. 

Dark  Color. — 

Chlorinated    lime 10  parts 

Sodium  chloride 8  parts 

Sodium  carbonate 20  parts 

Water    30  parts 

Boil  the  article  in  this  solution  under  a  good  ventilator 
as  intensely  ill-smelling  gases  are  produced. 

To  Oxidize  Silver  With  Platinum. 

Platinum  chloride 2.3  parts 

Water    looo.o  parts 

Dissolve  and  add 

Alcohol    500.0  parts 

The  silverware,  previously  cleaned  in  a  caustic  soda 
solution,  is  immersed  in  the  warmed  platinum  solution, 
removed  and  lightly  heated  over  a  Bunsen  flame.  Care 
should  be  taken  so  as  not  to  burn  the  alcohol.  If  the 
black  color  is  not  deep  enough,  the  process  is  to  be  repeated. 

Rose   Color.— Immerse    for   a   few   seconds    in   a   con- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formularji  mean  quantiHes 
bv  wpicrlit. 


146  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

centrated  hot  solution  of  copper  chloride,  rinse,  dry  and 
immerse  in  alcohol.  Finally,  dry  off  by  holding  near 
the  fire. 

IRON  AND  STEEL. 

Bronzing. — Lay  the  object  for  a  moment  in  a  solution 
of  iron  perchloride  and  copper  sulphate  with  a  little  added 
nitric  acid.  Remove  and  dry  at  a  temperature  of  about 
85°  F.  Finally  suspend  in  a  closed  box  containing  a  vessel 
of  boiling  alcohol,  and  leave  for  20  minutes,  keeping  the 
alcohol  boiling  all  the  time.  Scratch  off  with  a  scratch 
brush.  Repeat  operation  several  times  or  until  the  desired 
tint  is  obtained. 

Blue  Black. — Clean  the  object  thoroughly,  removing 
every  trace  of  grease,  then  cover  with  the  following: 

Copper  sulphate   8  parts 

Nitric  acid 15  parts 

Alcohol V  •  •  •   30  parts 

Water    125  parts 

Mix,  and  dissolve.  Let  dry  on,  and  when  quite 
dry  rub  with  a  woolen  cloth. 

Brilliant  Black. — Boil  the  following  together : 

Sulphur  I  part 

Oil  of  turpentine 10  parts 

While  boiling  spread  in  a  very  light  coating,  by 
means  of  a  pencil,  over  the  surface  and  heat  in  the 
flame  of  an  alcohol  lamp  until  black. 

Brown. — Make  the  following  solution : 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  147 

Iron    sulphate 20  parts 

Copper    sulphate 2  parts 

Sweet  spirit   of  nitre 4  parts 

Water  200  parts 

Place  the  iron  in  ihe  soluliun,  dr}-  and  [)olish  with 
boiled  linseed  oil. 

Bronzing  Gun  Barrels.^]Make,the  following-  solution: 

Solution  of  ferric  chloride 4  parts 

Alercuric    chloride 3  parts 

Fuming  nitric   acid 3  parts 

Copper  sulphate 3  parts 

Water 80  parts 

\\'ith  a  brush  or  pencil  go  over  the  barrels  with  this 
liquid.  Repeat  this  two  or  three  times.  Finally  plunge  the 
barrels  into  a  i  percent  solution  of  potassium  sulphide  and 
let  remain  for  ten  days.  At  the  end  of  the  time  wash  in 
hot  suds,  dry  ofif  and  cover  with  linseed  oil.  which  let  dry  on. 


BRASS. 

Silver  Color. — 

Cream  of  Tartar 46  parts 

Tartar  emetic 4  parts 

Dissolve  in  boiling  water 1000  parts 

and  add 

Hydrochloric    acid 50  parts 

Tin,    granulated 125  parts 

Antimony    30  parts 

Bring  the  solution  to  a  boil,  immerse  the  brass  article 
and  dry  in  sawdust. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Venial  Fnrmulani  iiu^iui  quantities 
by  weight. 


148  DENTAL  FOEMULAHY 

Platina. — The  green  coating — 'Tatina" — found  upon 
bronze  objects,  especially  such  as  have  laid  buried  for 
some  time,  is  not  only  pleasing  to  the  eye  but  also  serves  a 
practical  purpose,  in  that  the  metal  beneath  is  protected 
from  further  corrosion. 

Brass  objects  can  be  coated  as  well  as  bronzed,  by  the 
following:  solution : 


Copper    30  parts 

Nitric  acid,  concentrated 60  parts 

Acetic  acid,  6  percent 600  parts 

Ammonium   chloride 11  parts 

Ammonia    water 20  parts 

The  copper  is  dissolved  in  the  nitric  acid,  and,  as  soon 
as  solution  is  effected,  the  other  ingredients  are  added.  The 
solution  must  be  allowed  to  stand  several  days  before  using. 

The  objects  to  be  coated  are  either  dipped  into  the 
solution  for  a  moment,  or  the  solution  is  applied  to  the  sur- 
face by  means  of  a  brush.  They  are  then  allowed  to  dry, 
and  are  finally  covered  with  a  thin  coat  of  linseed  oil. 

Steel  Blue. — To  obtain  a  beautiful  steel  blue  color,  the 
cleaned  brass  is  dipped  in  a  heated  mixture  of  the  following 
solution  : 

I. 

Antimony    sulphate 12  parts 

Sodium  carbonate,  calcined. 120  parts 

Water    750  parts 

Dissolve  and  add 

Sulphuretterl   antimony 22  parts 

Filler. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAET  149 


Cream  of  tartar 22  parts 

Sodium    hyposulphite 45  parts 

\\'ater    750  parts 

Equal  parts  of  solutions  i  and  2  are  freshly  mixed  when 
needed. 

Black. — Mix  equal  parts  of  the  following  solutions 
when  needed. 

I. 

Silver    nitrate , 25  parts 

Water 100  parts 

2. 

Copper    nitrate 25  parts 

Water    : 100  parts 

The  cleansed  brass  is  plunged  into  this  freshly  mixed 
solution,  removed  and  heated  evealy  until  the  desired  degree 
of  dead  blackness  is  obtained. 

BLACKENING  OF  METALS. 

Solution    1. 

Silver    nitrate 192  parts 

Distilled   water 480  parts 

Solution   2. 

Copper   nitrate 192  parts 

Distilled   water " 480  parts 

Thoroughl}-  clean  the  article,  especially  from  grease,  and 
dip  into  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  above  solutions.  Allow 
it  to  remain   in  this  about  ten  minutes,  then   rcium-e,  and 

X.  E. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formtilar/i  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


150  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

dry  naturally.     When  dry,  heat  it  on  a  sand  bath  until  a 
good  deep  black  color  is  obtained. 

METAL  LACQUERS. 

I. 
For  Optical  Goods,  Microscopes,  Etc. 

Seed   lac 32  parts 

Dragon's  blood ^  part 

Extra  red  sanders -i   P^^^ 

Oriental  saffron ^  part 

Amber  16  parts 

Copal    16  parts 

Coarsely  powdered  glass 30  parts 

Absolute  alcohol 320  parts 

Mix.  Keep  in  a  warm  place,  shake  occasionally 
until  dissolved,  let  settle  and  pour  off  the  clear 
liquid. 

2. 

For  Ordinary  Brass  Goods. 

Shellac    50  parts 

Turpentine    varnish 100  parts 

Tumeric   ' 125  parts 

Gamboge    16  parts 

Sandarac    25  parts 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make   looo  parts 

-J 

Shellac 75  parts 

Sandarac    75  parts 

Venice  turpentine 10  parts 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make lOOO  parts 

N.  B. — Parl-s  as  used   in  this  Brnial  Formula?'!/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  151 

Alcoholic  lacquers  are  best  colored  with  "Aniline  dyes 
for  spirit  varnishes."'.  They  are  obtained  from  dealers  in 
dye  stuffs. 

4- 

Blue  Lacquer  for  Steel. 

White   shellac 5  parts 

Borax I  part 

Alcohol    5  parts 

Water  4  parts 

Methylene  blue,  enough  to  give  the  desired  shade. 
Dissolve   the   borax   in   the   water;   the   shellac   in  the 
alcohol.     Bring  the  borax  solution  nearly  to  a  boil,  add  the 
shellac     solution    under    constant    stirring-    and    add    the 
methylene  blue. 

Metal  goods  to  be  lacquered  must  be  perfectly  clean, 
especially  free  from  grease ;  they  must  be  warmed  and 
handled  with  a  cloth  to  avoid  finger  touches.  Apply  the 
lacquer  with  a  soft  camel's  hair  brush,  using  the  tip  only. 
Apply  2  to  3  coats,  letting  each  coat  dry  perfectly.  Warm 
the  articles  between  the  varnishing. 

Metal  Lacquer;  to  Be  Used  Without  Heat. 

Shellac    5  parts 

Gamboge    5  parts 

Acetone    30  parts 

Alcohol 50  parts 

The  lacquering  must  be  done  in  a  warm  room,  free 
from  moisture.  Two  or  more  days  should  be  allowed  for 
perfect  drying. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  DcnIaJ  Formularii  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


152  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

ETCHING. 

Steel.— 

Copper  sulphate 24  parts 

Alum    12  parts 

Sodium  chloride 3  parts 

Acetic   acid 12  parts 

Nitric  acid i  part 

Water,  enough  to  make 120  parts 

Mix  the  acids  and  the  water,  and  dissolve  the  solid 
ingredients  in  the  mixture.  Dip  the  article  in  boiling 
water,  wipe  dry,  and  either  dip  into  melted  beeswax  or  rub 
wax  on  the  article,  while  it  is  still  hot  enough  to  melt 
it.  The  design  is  produced  by  scratching  with  a  fine  pointed 
instrument  through  this  film  of  wax.  Apply  the  mixture 
with  a  piece  of  wood,  wash  off  in  a  few  minutes  and  repeat 
the  process  until  the  etching  is  of  sufficient  depth. 

The  same  procedure  holds  good  for  the  etching  of  the 
color  substances  given  below : 

Brass  and  Copper. — 

Mix  equal  parts  of  the  following  solutions  when 
needed : 

I. 

Nitric    acid 16  parts 

Water   100  parts 

2. 

Potassium   chlorate O  parts 

Water    ' 100  parts 

Zinc. — 

Mix  equal  parts  of  the  following  solutions  when 
needed : 

N.  B. — Parts  a«  nsod  in  this  Venial  Formnlurij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  .       153 

I. 

Gallic  acid   5  parts 

Gum  arabic 40  parts 

Water   500  parts 

Warm  the  mixture  until  solution  takes  place. 

2. 

Nitric  acid ^-  part 

Copper  sulphate 2  parts 

Water 500  parts 

Glass. — 

Hydrofluoric  acid,  a  sufficient  quantity. 

Apply  with  a  glass  rod. 

Diamond  Ink. 

Ammonium   fluoride i  part 

Barium    sulphate 3  parts 

Add  sufficient  sulphuric  acid  to  make  a  stiiT  paste. 

Wood.— 

First  cover  the  surface  to  be  etched  with  good  varnish, 
and  let  drw  \Mth  a  needle  point  or  any  similar  sharp 
instrument,  draw  the  lines  to  be  etched,  through  the  layer 
of  varnish,  and  apply  to  the  design  a  liquid  made  as 
follows : 

Potassium  bichromate i   part 

Distilled    water 6  parts 

Sulphuric  acid i   part 

Dissolve  the  bichromate  in  the  water,  and  add  the 
acid.  Let  remain  in  contact  until  the  etching  is  deep 
enough  to  suit,  then  wash  oft.  The  varnish  can  be  removed 
with   any   suitable   siilvent — benzol,  alcohol,  etc. 

X.  E. — Parts  ;is  used  in  tliis  Drntol  Fnnnulari/  moan  quantities 
by  weigiit. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  THE  MOUTH  AND  TEETH. 

The  remedies  intended  for  the  mouth  and  teeth  may  be 
conveniently  divided  into  those  prescribed  for  specific  dis- 
eased conditions  and  those  used  as  hygienic  cosmetics  for 
daily  use.  The  object  of  the  hygienic  care  of  the  oral 
cavity  is  to  keep  the  mouth  and  teeth  in  a  healthy  condition. 
This  object  may  be  attained  by  the  proper  employment  of 
mechanical  and  chemical  methods.  The  mechanical  cleans- 
ing of  the  mouth  and  teeth  by  means  of  the  brush,  toothpick, 
floss  silk,  powder,  paste,  etc.,  will  always  be  the  funda- 
mental principle  of  oral  hygiene.  Mechanical  cleansing 
alone  is  not,  how'ever,  sufficient,  and  the  additional  use  of 
antiseptic  solutions  is  essential  to  obtain  the  best  results. 
Food  remnants  and  slimy  adhesions  between  and  on  the 
teeth,  which  form  a  favorable  pabulum  for  the  micro-organ- 
isms, together  with  a  large  number  of  the  adherent  bacteria, 
are  removed  by  mechanical  cleansing.  Mouth  washes  are 
employed  for  the  sole  purpose  of  keeping  the  oral  tissues 
in  a  healthy  condition.  They  must  favor  the  recovery  of 
inflamed  mucous  membrane,  which  is  so  frequently  present 
in  a  mild  degree,  and  they  must  be  sufficiently  antiseptic 
to  inhibit  the  growth  of  fission  fungi  and  pathogenic 
bacteria. 

A  good  antiseptic  mouth  wash  should  possess  the  fol- 
lowing properties : 

1.  It  must  be  absolutely  indifi'crcnt  in  regard  to  (a) 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth,  i.  c.,  it  must  be  non- 

X.  V,. — Parts  HK  used  in  tliis  Denial  Forinular/j  mean  quantities 
liy  woi^lit. 
154 


DENTAL  FOE^IULAEY  155 

caustic;  (b)  the  teeth — it  must  be  non-decalcifying ;  (c)  the 
organism  as  a  whole,  i.e.,  it  must  be  non-poisonous. 

2.  It  must  have  sufficient  antiseptic  action. 

3.  It  must  have  a  pleasant  taste  and  odor. 

These  properties  are,  naturall}-,  rarel}'  found  in  com- 
bination, and  yet  each  one  is  of  importance.  A  mouth 
wash  which  has  a  disgusting  taste  is  as  ineffective  as  one 
which  has  no  germicidal  action.  The  great  mass  of  the 
public  will  never  be  induced  to  practice  oral  hygiene  that 
involves  the  use  of  an  ill-tasting  mouth  wash. 

In  constructing  a  formula  for  a  mouth  preparation  the 
following  drugs  must  be  avoided :  Alum,  charcoal,  for- 
maldehyde solution,  iron  salts,  mineral  acids  (with 'the 
exception  of  boric  acid),  mercury  salts,  potassium  salts, 
salicylic  acid  and  salol,  beet  and  cane  sugars,  and  easily 
fermentable  substances. 

Preparations  which  are  intended  to  exercise  a  definite 
function  on  the  teeth  and  gums,  the  oral  membrane,  the 
tongue,  the  salivary  glands,  the  tonsils,  and,  to  some  extent, 
on  the  breath  are  known  as  oralia.  This  term  has,  however, 
never  been  universall}-  recognized  ;  the  physical  nature  of  the 
preparation  has  created  specific  names  for  definite  classes — 
solid  or  semi-solid  tooth  preparations  are  known  as  denti- 
frices, liquid  tooth  preparations  are  spoken  of  as  collutoria, 
while  liquids  intended  for  the  p]iar_\-ngeal  regions  are  known 
as  gargles.  Oral  remedies  are  emplo\ed  for  the  ]:)urpose 
of  preserving  and  restoring"  the  normal  equilibrium  of  the 
oral  tissues,  and  consequentlw  no  specific  pliarmacological 
action  is  represented  by  each  class  of  these  ])reparations ; 
they  represent  merelv  a  combination  of  medicinal  agents 
indicated  for  a  clinical  entity.  According  to  their  thera- 
peutic indications,  tlie  drugs  used  in  the  mouth  are  grouped 

N.  B. — Parts  as  usi'd  in  this  Denial  Formiildri/  moan  qnantities 
by  weight. 


156  DENTAL  FOEMVLAEY 

under  abrasives,  antacides,  antiseptics,  astringents,   stimu- 
lants and  correctives. 

DRUGS  USED  IN  THE  MOUTH. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  drugs  which  are  employed 
in  mouth  and  tooth  preparations.  The  numbers  indicate 
the  percentage  in  which  these  substances  are  usually  present 
in  the  finished  preparation. 

ABRASIVES.  Percent 

Pumice  stone 3  to       5 

Cuttle  fish  bone 3  to       5 

Soap 3  to       5 

Cinchona   bark 5 

Orris  root ' 10 

Calamus   root 10 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 60  to  100 

ANTACIDS.  Percent 

Sodium    bicarbonate 5 

Magnesium  carbonate 10 

Magnesium    oxide 10 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 60  to   100 

ANTISEPTICS.  Percent 

Mercuric  chloride  0.05  to  o.i 

Formaldehyde    solution o.  1  to  0.3 

Sodium  fluoride i  to  3 

Benzoic  acid 0.5  to  i 

Hydronaphthol    i  to  5 

Resorcinol    '  to  5 

Salol    3  to  5 

I  hcnol     3  to  5 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  \u  lliis  Denial  Fonindari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMVLAjRY 


157 


Salicylic  acid   3  to  5 

]\Iagnesium  clioxi<le   5  to  10 

Sodium  perborate   5  to  10 

Strontium  dioxide 5  to  10 

Boric  acid ro  to  20 

Sodium  borate 10  lo  50 

Potassium  chlorate   10  to  50 

Hvdroeen  dioxide  solution 10  to  100 


ASTRINGENTS. 


Percent 


Zinc  chloride 0.05  to 

Tannic  acid   i        to 

Benzoin 

Catechu    . 

Kino 

Myrrh    

Rhatanv  root 2        to 


0.1 

2 

5 
5 
5 
5 
10 


STIMULANTS.  Percent 

Oil  of  rose o.  1  to 

Oil  of  ylang  }lang o.i  to 

.   Thymol 

Oil  of  geranium 0.5  to 

Oil  of  cinnamon 0.5  to 

Oil  of  peppermint 

Menthol   

Oil  of  cloves I  to 

Oil  of  eucalyptus i  to 

Oil  of  mountain  pine i  to 

Camphor     i  to 

Oil  of  wintergreen i  to 

Methyl  salicylate   i  to 

Alcohol   10  to  100 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formularif  mean  quantities 
))y  weight. 


0-5 

0.5 

0.5 

I 

I 

I 

I 


158 


DENTAL  FOEMULARY 


CORRECTIVES. 

Saccharin 

Ctimarin    0.5 

A'anillin     0.5 

Glycerin    5 

Sucar  of  milk 


Percent 


0.0003 

to 

1 

to 

I 

to 

10 

10 

ACTION  OF  ANTISEPTICS  IN  THE  MOUTH. 


(According  to  W.  D.  Miller.) 


DRUGS. 


Dilution  in  wliich 
they  can  be  em- 
ployed    in     mouth. 


Acid  benzoic i  :    100. 

Acid  boric . 1  :      50. 

Acid  salicylic i  :    300. 

Eugenol   1  :    750. 

Hydronaphthol    i  :  1,500. 

Iodine  trichloride i  :2,ooo. 

Lysol I  :    200. 

Mercuric  chloride 2  :2,500. 

Oil  of  cinnamon i  :    400. 

Oil  of  cloves I  :    550. 

Oil  of  eucalyptus i  :    625. 

Oil  of  mountain  pine i  :    360. 

Oil  of  peppermint  . i  :    600. 

Oil  of  wintergreen i  :    350. 

Phenol    I  :    100. 

Potassium  chlorate i  :      40. 

Potassium   permanganate i  :4,ooo. 

Saccharin i  :    400. 

Solution  aluminum  acetate.  .  .  .  i  :  20. 
Solution  hydrogen  dioxide.  .  .  .2:  100. 
Thymol     1  :2,ooo. 


Time  in  which 
the  mouth  be- 
comes sterilized. 

.^  minute 
.above  11  minutes 
.  _^f  to  I  minute 
.above  10  minutes 
.above  15  minutes 
.above  I5  minutes 
.above  5    minutes 
.^  to  f  minute 
.about     8  minutes 
.above  11  minutes 
.above    8  minutes 
.above  19  minutes 
,  above  1 1  minutes 
.above  12  minutes 
above     5  minutes 


.about  15  minutes 
.  J  minute 
.above  5    minutes 
.above  6    minutes 
.above  5^  minutes 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Dental  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMVLAHY  ■  159 

MOUTH  WASHES. 

A  mouth  wash  h  usually  prescrihecl  as  a  gargle,  to  be 
used  in  conjunction  with  the  toothbrush.  The  components 
i>f  the  \\ash  should  be  so  adjusted  that  one  teaspoonful, 
mixed  with  a  half  tumberful  of  warm  water  (approximately 
I  to  30),  furnishes  the  correct  proportions  of  its  active 
ingredients  intended  for  daily  use.  The  gargling  motion 
is  produced  by  forcing  air  from  the  lungs  through  the 
fluid  held  posteriorly  in  the  mouth.  Powerful  exercise  of 
the  muscles  of  the  pharynx,  the  cheeks,  and  the  lips  are 
material  adjuncts  in  forcing  the  fluid  back  and  forth 
through  the  teeth.  About  one-half  to  one  minute's  gargling 
is  the  average  time  required  for  each  mouthful,  corre- 
sponding approximately  to  half  to  one  fluidounce  (15  to 
30  c.c.)  of  liquid.  Correct  gargling  is  quite- a  difficult  pro- 
cedure ;  it  cannot  be  accomplished  by  children  and  those 
aftlicted  with  pharyngeal  disturbances.  Through  incorrect 
gargling  a  quantity  of  the  fluid  is  usually  swallowed,  or  it 
merely  turns  about  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  mouth.  If 
the  fluids  contain  alcoholic  or  volatile  liquids,  more  or  less 
of  it  is  always  absorbed. 

A  convenient  way  of  spraying  the  oral  cavity  with  a 
fluid  antiseptic  is  readily  accomplished  by  using  an  atomizer. 
This  method  of  applying  an  antiseptic  is  especially  of  service 
before  and  after  the  removal  of  tartar  and  other  operations 
about  the  mouth,  in  children  and  in  those  who  cannot  gargle. 
The  atomizer  bulb  may  be  worked  by  hand  or  foot  power,  or, 
still  better,  by  compressed  air. 

Tooth  and  mouth  washes  are  usually  dispensed  in  flint 
glass  bottles  stoppered  with  corks  or  metallic  sprinkler  tops. 
If  the  latter  are  used  the  contents  of  the  bottle  must  not 
corrode  the  metallic  top. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


160  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

COLORS  FOR  MOUTH  WASHES. 

Bright  red Tincture  of  cochineal 

Reddish  brown Tincture  of  cudbear 

Brown Caramel  solution 

Golden  yellow Tincture  of  saffron 

Green Chlorophyl  solution 

-ALKALINE  MOUTH  WASH. 

Sodium  bicarbonate 20  parts 

Sodium  benzoate    20  parts 

Sodium  borate    50  parts 

Menthol 6  parts 

Eucalyptol 3  parts 

Alcohol    100  parts 

Glycerin 200  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 1,000  parts 

General  Directions  for  Preparing  a  Mouth  Wash  : 
Dissolve  the  essential  oils,  eucalyptol,  thymol,  menthol,  or 
other  alcohol-soluble  substance  in  the  alcohol,  mix  the 
glycerin  and  the  water  and  add  the  water-soluble  substances ; 
mix  the  two  solutions,  and  if  turbid  add  20  parts  of  purified 
talc  for  each  1,000  parts  of  the  finished  product.  Shake 
occasionally,  and  let  stand  for  a  week.    Filter  through  paper. 

ANATHERIN  DENTIFRICE. 

Red  sandalwood 20  parts 

Guaiac  wood 10  parts 

Myrrh    25  parts 

Cloves    15  parts 

Cinnamon    5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves I    part 

N.  B. — Parts  as  \\hp(\  in  tliis  Denial  Formiihiri/  moan  quantities 
Ijy  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULARY  161 

Oil  of  cinnamon i  part 

Alcohol    1 .500  parts 

Water    ' 750  parts 

ANTISEPTIC   MOUTH  WASH. 

Boric  acid 25  parts 

Benzoic  acid i  part 

Thymol    3  parts 

Menthol 6  parts 

Eucalyptol 5  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen 5  parts 

Alcohol    250  parts 

Glycerin     100  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make.  , 1,000  parts 

CHINOSOL  MOUTH  WASH. 

Chinosol i  part 

Oil  of  peppermint i  part 

Water    40  parts 

Alcohol    60  parts 

£AU  DE  BOTOT. 

Star  anise  seed 25  parts 

Cinnamon,  Ce\lon   25  parts 

Cloves    25  parts 

Cochineal ' 10  parts 

Potassium  bitartrate   5  parts 

Tannic  acid 5  parts 

Balsam  of  Peru 5  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 10  parts 


X.  B. — Parts  as  usod   in  tliis  Dental  Fnrmulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


162  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

HYDROGEN  DIOXIDE  MOUTH  WASHES. 

I. 

Resorcinol   50  parts 

Zinc  chloride   J  part 

Menthol 5  parts 

Thymol 2  parts  . 

Alcohol,  diluted 1,000  parts 

Eucalyptol I  part 

Camphor .  |  part 

Oil  of  wintergreen ^  part 

Alcohol    250  parts 

Hydrogen   dioxide   solution 200  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 1,000  parts 

2. 

Thymol    0.5  part 

Menthol 0.5  part 

Saccharin .  0.5  part 

Alcohol    70  parts 

Hydrogen  dioxide  solution 120  parts 

MILLER'S  MOUTH  WASHES. 

I. 

Thymol    i   part 

Benzoic  acid   12  parts 

Tincture  of  eucalyptus 60  parts 

Alcohol    400  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 3  parts 

2. 

Benzoic  acid   60  parts 

Tincture  of  rhatany 260  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 15  parts 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make 2,000  parts 

N.  E. — Pads  as  wso'l  in  this  Denial  Formulary  inean  qiiantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOJiMrLATiY  163 

PRUYN'S   MOUTH  WASH. 

Phenol   ^ 2  parts 

Boric  acid   6  parts 

Oil  of  cassia 2  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint -J-  part 

Chloroform  2  parts 

Alcohol    50  parts 

Glycerin,  enough  to  make 120  parts 

RESORCINOL  MOUTH  WASH. 

Boric  acid   5  parts 

Sodium  horate   13  parts 

Resorcinol 18  parts 

Eau  de  cologne 100  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 500  parts 

SACCHARIN  MOUTH  WASH. 

Saccharin    0.5  part 

Sodium  borate   4  parts 

Alcohol    50  parts 

Water    50  parts 

Tincture  of  cochineal ^  part 

Oil  of  peppermint i   part 

SAPONACEOUS  MOUTH  WASH. 

White  casiilc  soap 25  part? 

Glycerin 100  parts 

Water    600  parts 

Alcohol    400  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 10  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 15  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen 25  parts 

Oil  of  cassia .  10  parts 

Color  with  tincture  of  cochineal. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  iisod  in  this  Drnfal  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


164  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

THYMOL  MOUTH  WASH. 

Thymol    15  parts 

Benzoic  acid 100  parts 

Eiicalyptol 30  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 5  parts 

•  Oil  of  cloves I  part 

Oil  of  sage i  part 

Cumarin    ^  part 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make 1,000  parts 

Color  with  tincture  of  saffron. 

TOOTH  POWDERS. 

Tooth  powders,  pastes  and  soaps  are  chiefly  employed 
for  the  purpose  of  mechanically  cleansing  the  accessible 
surfaces  of  the  teeth.  Their  antiseptic  effect  on  oral  bac- 
teria is  of  cjuestionable  value,  as  they  remain  hardly  long 
enough  in  the  mouth  to  enter  into  complete  solution.  Tooth 
powders  or  pastes  should  not  contain  gritty  or  fermentable 
substances  or  chemicals  which  act  deleteriously  on  tooth 
structure.  The  wasting  away  of  tooth  tissues,  usually 
referred  to  as  erosion  or  abrasion,  and  which  principally 
occurs  upon  the  labial  surfaces  of  the  teeth,  is  largely  the 
result  of  the  continuous  use  of  powders,  pastes,  etc.,  which 
contain  more  or  less  abrasive  substances. 

An  acquaintance  with  the  abrasive  qualities  of  the  in- 
gredients entering  into  the  make-up  of  tooth  preparations 
is  essential  for  the  compounder.  A  microscopic  examina- 
tion of  the  more  important  powdered  substances,  together 
with  a  comparative  knowledge  of  their  physical  and  chem- 
ical composition,  furnishes  excellent  information  regarding 
their  usefulness  as  components  of  dentifrices. 

■    N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod  in   tliis  Drvtol  Formiilarji  mean  quantities 
by  weight.     * 


DENTAL  FOEMULAIiY  165 

THE  ABRASIVES. 

Prepared  chalk  ( drop  chalk,  whiting,  creta  prseparata. 
U.S.P.),  a  white  amorphous  powder,  is  calcium  carbonate, 
purified  by  mechanical  means.  Prepared  chalk  is  not  pre- 
cipitated chalk.  Prepared  chalk  contains  small  quantities 
of  silica,  alumina  and  other  impurities,  and  consists  princi- 
pally of  the  microscopic  shells  of  many  form  of  infusoria. 
The  minute  particles  of  prepared  chalk  are  sufficiently  hard 
and  sharp  to  remove  tooth  substances  when  used  in  a  denti- 
frice, and  should  therefore  not  be  employed  for  such 
purposes. 

Precipitated  chalk  (precipitated  calcium  carbonate, 
calcii  carbonas  prsecipitatus,  U.  S.  P.)  is  a  fine  wdiite  amor- 
phous powder,  prepared  b\-  chemical  means.  Depending 
upon  the  process  of  manufacture,  various  grades  of  fineness, 
weight  and  color  are  obtained.  For  the  purpose  of  pre- 
paring tooth  powders,  pastes,  etc.,  only  the  very  finest 
bolted  precipitated  calcium  carbonate  is  permissible. 

Prepared  oyster  shells  (concha  praeparata,  testa  prae- 
parata)  are  prepared  from  the  boiled,  cleansed  and  pow- 
dered shells  of  the  oyster,  Ostrca  ediilis.  They  consist 
principally  of  an  impure  calcium  carbonate  with  variable 
quantities  of  calcium  phosphate  and  small  amounts  of  iodine, 
bromine,  organic  matter,  etc.  The  powder  usually  emits  a 
])eculiar  odor,  reminding  one  of  that  of  the  sea.  The  abra- 
sive power  of  powdered  0}-ster  shells  is  about  C(|ual  to  that 
of  prepared  chalk,  and  the  same  objection  obtains  as  to 
their  use  as  a  tooth  powder  l)ase  as  to  the  oilier. 

Pumice  stone  (lapis  pumici-^ )  is  a  light,  porous  stone 
of  volcanic  origin,  consisting  chietiy  of  silica,  with  potash 
and  soda.  As  may  be  expected  from  its  composition,  it  is  a 
])Owerful  abrasive,  and  it  should  never  enter   into  a  tooth 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weigli^. 


166  DENTAL  F0E2IULAEY 

preparation  intended  for  daily  use.  Even  its  temporary  use 
in  conjunction  with  precipitated  chalk  acts  deleteriously  on 
tooth  structure. 

Magnesium  carbonate  (magnesii  carbonas.  U.S.  P.). 
Two  forms  of  magnesium  carbonate  are  known — the  light 
and  the  heavy.  The  light  preparation  is  usually  employed 
for  tooth  powder.  It  has  no  abrasive  or  polishing  action 
on  tooth  structure.  As  it  is  a  voluminous  powder,  it  is 
principally  used  to  give  bulk  to  tooth  powders.  Burnt 
magnesia  (Magnesii  oxidum,  U.S. P.)  is  prepared  from 
magnesium  carbonate  by  calcination.  It  possesses  no  advan- 
tage over  magnesium  carbonate,  and  is  rarely  used  at 
present  as  a  component  of  dentifrice. 

Cuttlefish  bone  (os  sepise)  is  a  calcareous  substance 
found  under  the  skin  of  the  back  of  the  cuttlefish,  Sepia 
officinalis.  It  is  composed  of  calcium  carbonate,  calcium 
phosphate,  gluten  and  other  substances,  which  are  readily 
recognized  by  their  peculiar  putrid  odor.  The  external  hard 
skin  and  the  internal  soft  deposits  of  the  cuttlefish  bone  are 
ground  together,  forming  a  powder  which  is  used  as  an 
abrasive. 

Charcoal  (carbo  ligni,.  U.  S.  P.,  carbo  tiliae)  is  a  very 
fine  black  powder  prepared  from  soft  wood  (linden  wood). 
It  is  odorless  and  tasteless,  and,  when  freshly  prepared, 
readily  absorbs  offensive  odors.  Even  the  finest  charcoal 
powder  presents  under  the  microscope  a  mass  of  sharp, 
crystalline  cylinders  which  possess  marked  abrasive  power. 
When  used  as  a  component  in  a  tooth  powder,  the  sharp 
particles  imbed  themselves  in  due  time  in  the  gum  tissue, 
producing  a  distinct  blue  line  near  the  margin,  which  may 
simulate  the  typical  lead  line  found  in  le.ad  poisoning.  The 
gum  tissue  becomes  tattooed  by  the  charcoal,  and  nothing 

N.  B. — Pnrts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  moan  qnantitips 
liy  woiylit. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  167 

can  remove  this  pigmentation  but  a  surgical  operation. 
Charcoal  sliould  not  be  used  in  a  tooth  powder  preparation ; 
it  is  often  found  in  the  so-cahed  Chinese  and  Japanese 
tooth  powders. 

Powdered  vegetable  drugs — as  calamus,  rhatany,  lico- 
rice, orris  root,  cinchona  bark,  sandalwood,  myrrh,  benzoin, 
etc. — have  no  place  in  tooth  powtlers.  As  stated  above, 
they  are  added  to  give  flavor  to  the  powder  or  to  increase 
its  bulk.  The  odor  and  taste  of  these  substances  are  readily 
substituted  by  their  respective  essential  oils  or  alcoholic 
extracts.  The  time  a  tooth  powder  remains  in  the  mouth 
is  not  long  enough  to  allow  the  active  constituents  of  these 
substances  to  enter  into  solution.  Their  abrasive  action  is 
of  no  value,  and,  as  these  vegetable  powders  may  be  forced 
between  the  teeth  and  remain  there  for  some  time,  the 
starch.,  which  is  one  of  their  constituents,  may  give  rise  to 
acid  fermentation.  For  flavoring  tooth  powders  the  essen- 
tial oils  of  anise,  cassia,  cloves,  wintergreen,  ylang-ylang 
(cananga),  etc.,  either  alone  or  in  suitable  combinations, 
are  available.  If  the  delicate  flavor  of  the  violet  (orris 
root),  which  apparently  is  appealing  to  refined  taste,  is 
wanted,  the  orris  oil,  tenfold,  is  to  be  recommended.  This 
concentrated  oil  must  be  used  very  sparingly.  A  suitable 
flavoring  combination  of  oils  for  tooth  powder  purposes 
may  be  prepared  as  follows : 

Cumarin   \  '^o  part 

Oil  of  orris  (tenfold) i  part 

Oil  of  star  anise 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 15  parts 

0\\  of  wintergreen   (  artificial ) 80  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 150  parts 

One  part  of  this  oil  mi.xturc  added  to  from  50  to  75 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  l)i  nlal  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


168  DENTAL  FOEMULABT 

parts   of   tooth   powder  body   imparts   a   sufificiently   strong 
flavor. 

Tooth  powders  are  preferably  dispensed  in  glass  bottles 
or  tin  cans  with  suitable  sprinkler  tops. 

BODIES  FOR  TOOTH  POWDERS. 

Red. 

Carmine,  No.  40 20  parts 

Ammonia  water 50  parts 

Water    20  .parts 

Alcohol    30  parts 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 1,000  parts 

Dissolve  the  carmine  in  the  ammonia  water,  add 
the  water  and  alcohol  and  mix  thoroughly  with  the 
calcium  carbonate.  Spread  on  paper  and  dry  at 
room  temperature.  Rub  through  a  No.  50  brass 
wire  sieve. 

Pink. 

Prepare  same  as  red  body,  using  only  one-half  of 
the  carmine,  i.  e.,  10  parts. 

Violet. 

Alkanin   2^  parts 

Ether  100  parts 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 1,000  parts 

Prepare  same  as  red  bodw 

COMMON  SENSE  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 90  parts 

Magnesium  carbonate 5  parts 

Castile  soap 5  parts 

Oil"  of  orris   (tenfold) -i-  part 

N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
Ijy  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMVLAUY  169 

CAMPHOR  OR  ENGLISH  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 720  parts 

[Magnesium  carbonate 120  parts 

Sugar  of  milk 130  parts 

Camphor   20  parts 

Ether   30  parts 

Dissolve  the  camphor  in  the  ether,  mix  with  the 

calcium   carbonate,   dry  in  the  air,   and  mix   with 
the  other  ingredients. 

FITZGERALD'S  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 360  parts 

Magnesium  carbonate 300  parts 

Castile  soap 150  parts 

Salol 60  parts 

Boric  acid  30  parts 

Thymol    2  parts 

Saccharin    1  part 

Oil  of  peppermint 5  parts 

LASAR'S    TOOTH    POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate.  ])recipitated 100  parts 

Sodium  chloride 2^  parts 

Pumice  stone   2^,  parts 

Castile  soap 3  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 1   part 

MILLER'S   TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium   carbonate.    ])rccipitated 30  parts 

^lagnesium  carbonate 10  parts 

Orris  root   15  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint r   part 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in   this  Dental  FoDiuihiri/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


170  DENTAL  FOEMVLAEY 

OXYDIZING  TOOTH  POWDERS. 

I. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 75  parts 

Magnesium  carbonate 10  parts 

Sodium  perborate    10  parts 

Castile  soap 3  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint i  part 

2. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 90  parts 

Strontium  dioxide   5  parts 

Castile  soap 3  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen i   part 

Oil  of  peppermint -I  part 

3- 

Magnesium  oxide   50  parts 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 100  parts 

Magnesium  dioxide 20  parts 

Menthol 2  parts 

Saccharin    i   part 

Oil  of  peppermint 2  parts 

PEDLEY'S  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 1,000  parts 

Orris  root 250  parts 

Castile  soap 125  parts 

Ijoric  acid ; 125  parts 

Phenol  30  parts 

Oil  of  eucalyptus 25  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in   tliis  Dental  Fornnildri/  mean  (|iiaiitities 
liv  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  171 

POTASSIUM  CHLORATE  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 500  parts 

Potassium  chlorate   250  parts 

Sugar  of  milk 100  parts 

Orris  root 125  parts 

Menthol 10  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 5  parts 

RED  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Red  tooth  powder  body 1,000  parts 

Orris  root 300  parts 

Sugar  of  milk 200  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 50  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 50  parts 

FLETCHER'S  VEGETABLE  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Pulverized  cereal 75  parts 

Sodium  borate   18  parts 

Potassium  chlorate 7  parts 

Sweeten  with  saccharin  and  flavor  to  taste. 

VIOLET  TOOTH  POWDER. 

Violet  tooth  powder  body 650  parts 

Sugar  of  milk lOO  parts  - 

Orris  root 200  parts 

Licorice  root 25  parts 

Cumarin    • i  part 

Extract  of  jasmine to  parts 

Oil  of  rose 1  part 

TOOTH  PASTES. 

A  perfectly  satisfactory  paste  cannot  be  produced  with- 
out the  use  of  gelatin  or  mucilage  of  acacia.     Pastes  which 

X.  R. — Parts  as  iisod  in  this   Tirnial  Formulnrii  moan  qnantities 
by  weight. 


172  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

are  massed  with  pure  glycerin  are  disappointing ;  they  ooze 
from  the  tube,  discoloring  the  label,  forming  an  unsightly 
package.  Glycerin  is  necessary,  but  it  should  not  be  em- 
ployed alone.  Glucose  should  never  be  used  as  a  massing 
fluid,  as  it  will  easily  ferment.  The  consistency  of  the 
excipient  or  massing  fluid  determines  the  character  of  the 
paste.  If  formaldehyde  solution  is  added  to  a  gelatin  mass- 
ing fluid,  the  gelatin  is  changed  to  an  insoluble  compound, 
and  the  paste  in  due  time  becomes  hard  as  a  rock.  Small 
quantities  of  tooth  paste  may  be  made  in  a  large  wedge- 
wood  mortar ;  for  making  pastes  upon  a  commercial  scale 
an  ordinary  dough  mixer  (as  used  in  bakeries)  is  indis- 
pensable. The  so-called  "heavy"  precipitated  chalk  is  to  be 
preferred  as  a  base  for  the  tooth  paste  body. 

MASSING  FLUIDS. 

Gelatin i  part 

Glycerin 30  parts 

Water    35  parts 

Soak  the  gelatin  in  the  water,  apply  gentle  heat, 
and  add  the  glycerin. 

Another  massing  fluid  is  made  by  mixing- 
Glycerin 2  parts 

Mucilage  of  acacia 2  parts 

Mucilage  of  acacia  is  made  by  dissolving 

Gum  arable '. .  .         4  parts 

Water    .  6  parts 

Dissolve    the    gum    arable    in    the   water   and    strain 
through  fine  cotton  cloth. 

N.  B. — Parts  an  used   in,  tliis  Denial  Fornmlurij  ineau  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMULABY  173 

Tooth  pastes  may  be  prepared  according  to  the  fol- 
lowing general  formula : 

Tooth  paste  body i  part 

Massing  fluid 3  to  4  parts 

The  amount  of  massing  fluid  depends  upon  the  tooth 
paste  body  and  upon  the  season  of  the  year.  In  cold 
weather  a  larger  quantity  is  required  than  during  the  sum- 
mer months.  Tooth  paste  bodies  containing  large  quantities 
of  vegetable  drugs  also  require  large  amounts  of  massing 
fluid.  After  the  tooth  paste  body  is  thoroughly  mixed  with 
the  massing  fluid  into  a  rather  stifif  paste,  it  should  stand 
for  at  least  four  days.  It  should  be  beaten  up  every  day  in 
the  dough  mixer  for  about  fifteen  minutes,  and  each  time 
very  small  quantities  of  glycerin  are  added  to  it,  until  finally 
the  right  consistency  is  reached.  At  the  last  mixing  the 
paste  should  just  drop  from  a  spatula  when  held  in  a 
perpendicular  position. 

Tooth  pastes  are  to  be  dispensed  in  collapsible  tubes 
made  of  pure  tin.  Tin  boxes  or  porcelain  dishes  are  poor 
substitutes  for  the  tubes,  as  they  invite  contamination  of 
the  paste.  The  filling  of  the  tubes  is  best  accomplished  by 
using  a  special  filling  apparatus  worked  by  hand-power  or 
compressed  air.  The  ends  of  the  tubes  are  closed  by  a 
special  folding  punch. 


TOOTH  PASTE  BODIES. 

Any  tooth  powder,  unless  it  contains  substances  which 
are  decomposed  by  moisture  (i.  e..  certain  oxygen  tooth 
powders),  may  be  worked  into  a  paste.  A  suitable  tooth 
paste  body  may  be  made  according  to  the  following  formula  : 

]S\  B. — Parts  as  iisod   in  this  Poifal  Formiilari/  mean  quantities 
by  -ueight. 


174     .  VENIAL  FOUMULABY 

Heavy  precipitated  chalk 75  parts 

Powdered  castile  soap 10  parts 

Powdered  orris  root 5  parts 

Saccharin   3/100  parts 

Flavoring  oils i  part 

The  chalk  may  be  colored  pink,  according  to  instruc- 
tions as  given  under  tooth  powders. 

A    suitable    flavoring    oil    mixture    may    be    prepared 
according  to  the  following  formula : 

Oil  of  star  anise i  part 

Oil  of  cloves 3  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen 16  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 24  parts 

Cumarin 1/300  part 

HARLAN'S  TOOTH  PASTE. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 1,500  parts 

Sodium  fluo-silicate 250  parts 

Tannic  acid 30  parts 

Sugar 750  parts 

Cuttlefish  bone 250  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen 20  parts 

Massing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

ENGLISH  ODONTINE. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 500  parts 

Orris  root  100  parts 

Pumice  stone 50  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 10  parts 

Oil  of  sage 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 2  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used   in   this  Drntal  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAHY  175 

Carmine,  enough  to  color. 

Classing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

KALADONT. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 250  parts 

Magnesium  carbonate 80  parts 

Castile  soap '.....  100  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 10  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 2  parts 

Oil  of  cinnamon i  part 

Oil  of  wintergreen i  part 

Carmine,  enough  to  color. 

Massing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

MILLER'S  TOOTH  PASTE. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 100  parts 

IVIagnesium  carbonate 5  parts 

Cuttlefish  bone 4  parts 

Sugar 2  parts 

Myrrh    2  parts 

Classing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

TOOTH  PASTE    "KOLYNOS";  JENKINS. 

Soap 33  parts 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 25  parts 

Absolute  alcohol 20  parts 

Glycerin     15  parts 

Benzoic  acid 3  parts 

Oil  of  eucalyptus 2  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 2  parts 

Saccharin    1-  part 

Thymol ^-  part 

Make  into  a  paste. 

iV.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formnlan/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


176  DENTAL  FOEMVLAEY 

POTASSIUM  CHLORATE  TOOTH  PASTE. 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 350  parts 

Orris  root 100  parts 

Potassium  chlorate    250  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 2  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen i   part 

Massing-  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

TOOTH  PASTE  WITH  CARLSBAD  SALTS. 

Artificial  Carlsbad  salt i  part 

Powdered  castile  soap i  part 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 3  parts 

Massing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

TOOTH  PASTE  WITH  ORRIS  ROOT. 

Precipitated  calcium  carbonate,  "pink".  450  parts 

Powdered  orris  root 100  parts 

Powdered  castile  soap 50  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 10  parts 

Oil  of  sage 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 5  parts 

Massing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

SALOL  TOOTH  PASTE. 

Precipitated  calcium  carbonate,  heavy.  .  350  parts 

Powdered  orris  root •  150  parts 

Sugar  of  milk 100  parts 

Powdered  castile  soap 50  parts 

Salol    20  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 3  parts 

Massing  fluid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

N.  B. — Parts  a-s  iisod   in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  177 

TOOTH  PASTE  WITH  PUMICE  STONE. 

Precipitated  calcium  carbonate,  "pink".  400  parts 

Powdered  orris  root 100  parts 

Powdered  pumice  stone 50  parts 

Powdered  castile  soap 150  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 15  parts 

Oil  of  lemon 3  parts 

Oil  of  cassia 3  parts 

Oil  of  sage i  part 

HARD  TOOTH  PASTES  OR  TOOTH  SOAPS. 

Tooth  soaps  are  usually  prepared  by  incorporating  about 
20  percent  of  castile  soap  in  alcoholic  solution  into  the 
powder  base  and  pressing  the  mass  into  suitable  molds; 
their  hardness  increases  with  age.  Tooth  soaps  are  usually 
dispensed  in  flat  tin  boxes,  china  jars,  or  wrapped  in  tinfoil. 

AUSTRIAN  TOOTH  SOAP. 

Castile  soap 200  parts 

Calcium  carbonate,  precipitated 80  parts 

Carmine 2  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint -  5  parts 

Alcohol    30  parts 

BERGMANN'S  TOOTH  SOAP. 

Transparent  glycerin  soap 50  parts 

Sugar 25  parts 

Alcohol    20  parts 

Water    10  parts 

■  Oil  of  peppermint i   part 

Dissolve  the  soap  and  sugar  in  the  alcohol. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Deiifdl  Formularii  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


178  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

ROBERT'S  TOOTH  SOAP. 

Magnesium  carbonate 50  parts 

Orris  root 50  parts 

Talcum    50  parts 

Castile  soap    50  parts 

Oil  of  vvintergrecn 3  parts 

THYMOL  TOOTH  SOAP. 

Pink  tooth  powder  body 750  parts 

Castile  soap 200  parts 

Glycerin 50  parts 

Alcohol 100  parts 

Thymol    10  parts 

Cumarin    |  part 

Menthol 10  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 5  parts 

The  soaps,  glycerin  and  alcohol  are  mixed  to  a  paste 
and  the  other  ingredients  are  incorporated.  Press  in  suit- 
able molds,  expose  to  the  air  for  twenty-four  hours,  and 
paint  the  pieces  with  tincture  of  benzoin  to  give  gloss  to 
the  finished  product. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
PHARMACEUTICAL  COMPOUNDS. 

LOCAL  ANESTHETIC   SOLUTION;  FISCHER. 

Novocaine • .  . .      1.5     parts 

Sodium  chloride 0.92  part 

Thymol 0.06  part 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

To   each   20   minims    of   this   solution    add   one 
drop  of  adrenaline  solution  when  needed. 

NORMAL  ANESTHETIC  SOLUTION;  BUENTE  AND  MORAL. 

Novocaine 1.5     parts 

Sodium  chloride   0.92  part 

Th}'mol    0.02  part 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make ■      100  parts 

To   each    20   minims    of   this    solution    add   one 
drop  of  adrenaline  solution  when  needed. 

NOVOCAINE  SOLUTION. 

Novocaine 1.5     parts 

Sodium  bicarbonate,  C.  P 0.4     part 

Sodium  chloride,  C.  P 0.4     part 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

To   each   20   minims   of   this    solution    add   one 
drop  of  adrenaline  solution  when  needed. 

N.  B. — farts  as  used  in  this  Dental  FormuJarji  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 

179 


180  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

ANESTHETIC   SOLUTIONS;   SCHLEICH. 

I. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 0.2     part 

Sodium  chloride 0.2     part 

]\Iorphinc  hydrochloride 0.02  part 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

2. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride o.i     part 

Sodium  chloride 0.2     part 

Morphine  hydrochloride  ............      0.02  part 

Distilled  water 100        parts 

3- 
Cocaine  hydrochloride 0.0 1   part 

Sodium  chloride 0.2     part 

Morphine  h}drochloride 0.005  P^''^ 

Distilled  water 100  parts 

COCAINE  ANESTHETIC  SOLUTION. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 5  parts 

Sodium  chloride 4  parts 

Sterilized  water 480  parts 

To  each  syringe ful  (20  minims)  add  one  drop  of 
adrenaline  chloride  solution,  when  used. 

COCAINE  ANESTHETIC  SOLUTION;  WYCKOFF. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 4  parts 

Solution  trinitrin  Ct  percent) 10  parts 

Spirit  thymol  comp 120  parts 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 480  parts 

[The  spirit  thymol  comp.  is  composed  of  benzo- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOHMVLABY  ISl 

boric  acid,  thymol,  eucalyptol,  oil  of  wintergreen, 
oil  of  peppermjnt.  with  extract  of  witch-hazel, 
alcohol,  and  distilled  water.  | 

TROPACOCAINE  ANESTHETIC   SOLUTION. 

Tropacocaine  hydrochloride   20  parts 

Sodium  chloride 5  parts 

Distilled  water   480  parts 

Boil  and  filter. 

NOVOCAINE   COMPOUND   TABLETS. 

Novocaine    1/3  grain 

Suprarenine  hydrochloride 1/1200  grain 

Sodium  chloride  .  .  ; 1/8  grain 

One  tablet  dissolved  in  20  minims  of  sterile 
water  makes  a  2  percent  solution  of  novocaine 
ready  for  immediate  use. 

HEMOSTATIC  LOCAL  ANESTHETIC  SOLUTION;  LEGRAND. 

Gelatin 2      parts 

Sodium  chloride 0.7  part 

Phenol  crystals o.i  part 

Eucaine  B 0.7  part 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 0.3  part 

Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

TO  RELIEVE  PAIN  AFTER  EXTRACTION. 

I. 

Alenthol 2  parts 

Phenol  liquid 2  parts 

Tincture  of  iodine 2  parts 

Ether   30  parts 

Chloroform   30  parts 

Appl\'  on  cotton  tn  the  painful  alveolar  socket. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Drnfal  Fornutlari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


182  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

2. 

Orthoform  powder   i  part 

Roll  absorbent  cotton  to  a  cone,  dip  in  carbolated 
water,  and  cover  with  orthoform  powder ;  insert 
the  cone  into  the  painful  alveolar  socket. 

ANESTHETIC  AND  ANTISEPTIC  PASTE  FOR  SCALING  TEETH. 

Phenol  liquid lo  parts 

Cocaine  hydrochloride lo  parts 

Menthol .    .  25  parts 

White  vaseline   480  parts  . 

Before  scaling;  the  teeth,  rub  the  paste  into  the 
spaces  between  the  teeth  and  on  the  .a^um. 

EUROFORM  PASTE;  BUCKLEY. 

Orthoform    - 60  parts 

Europhen 90  parts 

Petronol 135  parts 

Petrolatum    125  parts 

LOCAL    ANESTHETIC    FOR    PYORRHEA    ALVEOLARIS;     PAT^ 

TERSON. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 20  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 8  parts 

Oil  of  cassia 8  parts 

Menthol 8  parts 

Chloroform   480  parts 

r)efore  removint^  (le])osits  from  roots,  saturate 
])ellct  of  cotton  with  solution,  crowd  gently  into 
pockets,  and  allow  to  remain  for  a  few  moments. 
Keep  well  sto]jpered. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisod  in  I  his  Dental  Formulary  mean  qnantities 
by  •weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  183 

LOCAL  ANESTHETIC  FOR  EXPOSED  PULPS. 
1 ;    Gertzen. 

Sodium  bicarbonate lo  parts 

Phenol  liquid,  enough  to  make  a  creamy  paste. 

2;   Pincemaille. 

Cocaine  hydrochloride i  part 

Chloroform 5  parts 

Phenosalyl 25  parts 

Oil  of  lavender 10  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 20  parts 

Oil  of  cinnamon 25  parts 

COMPOUNDS  FOR  DEVITALIZING  THE   PULP. 
Arsenical   Pastes. 

I. 

Arsenic  trioxide 20  parts 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 10  parts 

Glycerin,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

2, 

Arsenic  trioxide i  part 

Orthoform    i  part 

Lanolin,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

3- 

Arsenic  trioxide 20  parts 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 20  parts 

Menthol 5  parts 

Glycerin,  enough  to  make  a  j)aste. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dculol  Funnulory  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


184  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

4- 

Arsenic  trioxide 20  parts 

Thymol    20  parts 

Oil  of  cloves,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

5- 

Arsenic  trioxide 90  parts 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 40  parts 

Phenol  crystals 10  parts 

Lanolin,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

6. 

Arsenic  trioxide 5  parts 

Tannic  acid 2  parts 

Morphine  acetate 10  parts 

Oil  of  cloves,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

7- 

Crude  cobalt 80  parts 

Cocaine  hydrochloride 20  parts 

Phenol  liquid,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 


Arsenical   Fibre. 

Arsenic  trioxide 5  parts 

Tannic  acid 2  parts 

Morphine  acetate JO  parts 

Phenol  liquid,  enough  to  make  a  thin  paste. 

Mix  with  sufficient  fine  cross-cut  absorbent  cot- 
ton fibers  until  tlie  paste  is  fully  absorbed  ;  dry, 
and  keep  in  a  well-covered  glass  jar. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL   VOllMULARY  185 

9- 

Arsenical   Discs. 

Arsenic  trioxide, 

Cocaine  hydrochloride equal  parts 

Oil  of  cloves,  enough  to  make  a  soft  paste. 

Cut  small  squares  (one  to  one  and  one-half  millimeters) 
of  hard  white  blotting  paper,  saturate  with  the  paste,  let  dry 
for  a  few  hours,  and  then  put  into  a  glass  stoppered  bottle. 

PULP  DIGESTANT;  HARLAN. 

Papain i  part 

Glycerin    i  part 

Solution  hydrochloric  acid  (i:ioo)    ...  i  part 

Make  a  paste,  apply  to  the  dead  pulp,  and  seal  into  the 
cavity  for  two  weeks,  at  the  end  of  which  time  the  pulp  will 
be  digested.  First  destroy  the  pulp  with  arsenic  left  in  the 
tooth  for  two  or  three  days.  Remove  the  arsenic,  cut  away 
the  bulbous  portion  of  the  pulp,  and  introduce  the  paste  as 
above.  The  pulp  is  reduced  to  a  jelly-like  mass  resembling 
glue,  and  is  easily  removed. 

STYPTICS. 
Styptic   Cotton. 

I. 

Alum   12  parts 

Solution  of  iron  perchloride 12  parts 

Water    75  parts 

Absorbent  cotton   50  parts 

Dissolve  the  alum  in  the  water  and  add  the  solution  of 
iron  perchloride.  Pour  the  solution  over  the  cotton  in  such 
a  way  that  all   is   absorbed.     Afterwar<ls,   by  means   of  a 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  FormuJaru  meau  qiiautities 
by  weiglit. 


186  DENTAL  FOEMULABI 

press,  squeeze  the  damp  cotton  until  the  solution  is  evenly 
distributed,  and  then  dry. 

2. 

Solution  of  iron  chloride 60  parts 

Alcohol    60  parts 

Mix  and  saturate 

Absorbent  cotton   40  parts 

Dry  in  a  dark  closet  and  preserve  in  dark  colored 
glass  jars. 

Styptic    Mixture. 

Phenol-sulphonic  acid 12  parts" 

Alcohol    4  parts 

Benzoic  acid  . i   part 

Tannic  acid i   part 

Glycerin 12  parts 

Rose  water 56  parts 

For  external  use. 


BONE  CAVITY  PASTES. 
/  I. 

Bone   Plombe;    Mosetig-Mayrhofer. 

Iodoform 10  parts 

Oil  of  sesame 15  parts 

.Spermaceti    30  parts 

Melt  the  spermaceti  and  the  oil  of  sesame  in  a  porcelain 
capsule  over  a  low  flame,  and  wlien  the  mixture  starts  to 
cong-eal,  stir  in  the  iodoform. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in   tliis  Dnilal  Formvldri/  mean  quantities 
by  we i gilt. 


DENTAL  FOUMULAEY  187 

2. 

BECK'S  BISMUTH  PASTES. 
Soft   Paste. 

Bismuth  subnitrate  (  free  from  arsenic)       t^t,  parts 
Vaseline  (yellow  or  white ) 67  parts 

Hard   Paste. 

Bismuth  subnitrate   30  parts 

Vaseline    60  parts 

Paraffin  (melting  point  120°  F.) 5  parts     • 

White  wax   5  parts 

Place  the  vaseline,  paraffin  antl  white  wax  in  an 
enameled  vessel,  bring  to  a  boil,  and  add  the  bismuth  under 
constant  stirring  until  the  paste  becomes  solid. 

PLASTIC  INJECTION  FOR  PYORRHEA  POCKETS. 

Menthol 3  parts 

Hydronaphthol 15  parts 

White  wax   240  parts 

Vaseline 480  parts 

SEAL  FOR   PYORRHEA   POCKETS. 
1;    Rhein. 

Gum  lac.   purified 135  parts 

Gum  benzoin,  purified 5  parts 

Phenol  crystals 50  parts 

Oil  of  cinnamon 3  parts 

Saccharin     3  parts 

.Alcohol,  enough  to  make 500  jiarts 

After  the  removal  of  all  deposits  and  the  application  of 
a  stimulating  escharotic,  covering"  with  this  soothing  appli- 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis.  Dental  Fonnularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


188  DENTAL  FOEMULARY- 

cation  will  keep  the  pockets  sealed   for  many  hours,  and 
will  be  found  beneficial  from  its  therapeutic  properties. 


2;   Steresol. 

Shellac 270  parts 

Gum  benzoin 10  parts 

Balsam  of  Tolu 10  parts 

Phenol  crystals 100  parts 

Oil  of  cinnamon 6  parts 

Saccharin    6  parts 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make 1,000  parts 


COUNTER-IRRITANTS. 

lodo-Glycerol;   Talbot. 

Zinc  iodide  15  parts 

Distilled  water 10  parts 

Iodine    25  parts 

Glycerin     50  parts 

Dissolve  the  zinc  iodide  in  the  distilled  water,  add  the 
iodine,  stir  with  a  glass  rod  until  dissolved,  and,  lastly,  add 
the  glycerin. 

Compound    Iodine   Solution;    Harlan. 

Iodine   24  parts 

Potassium  iodide   24  parts 

Tincture  of  aconite  root,  Fleming's.  ...  12  parts 

Alcohol    48  parts 

Chloroform   48  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  nsofl   in   this  Dnita!  Fornuilari/  mean  quantities 
Ijy  woiglit. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  189 

Pyorrhea  Astringent;  Buckley. 

Potassium  iodide- 60  parts 

Iodine   80  parts 

Zinc  phciiolsulphonate    60  parts 

Water    192  parts 

Glycerin    100  parts 

Aromatic    Tincture    of   Iodine   and   Aconite;    Witzel. 

Eucaine 5  parts 

Tincture  of  iodine 65  parts 

Tincture  of  aconite 32  parts 

Eugenol    3  parts 

Stronger    Tincture    of   Aconite. 
(For  external  use  only.) 

Fluid  extract  aconite  root 2  parts 

Alcohol    2  parts 

Iodine    Paint;    Carson. 

Iodine    i  part 

Alcohol    8  parts 

This  solution  is  allowed  to  stand  in  a  glass-stoppered 
bottle  for  several  months  before  using. 

Iodine   Caustic;    Churchill. 

Iodine    35  parts 

Potassium  iodide  70  parts 

Water    1 50  parts 

Stable   Tincture   of   Iodine. 

Iodine    i  part 

Alcohol    12  parts 

Sodium  borate 2  parts 

N".  B. — Parts  as  nsod   in   tliis  Pf)ital  Foniuilnri/  mean  qnantities 
bv  weight. 


190  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

Decolorized  Tincture  of  Iodine. 

Iodine 20  parts 

Sodium  thiosulpbate   20  parts 

Distilled  water 20  parts 

Put  the  ingredients  in  a  bottle  and  place  the  bottle  in 
a  vessel  surrounded  by  cold  water.  Shake  occasionally  until 
solution  is  completed.     Add  in  small  portions : 

Water  of  ammonia  .  .  . 32  parts 

and 
Alcohol    1 50  parts 

Let  stand  for  eight  days  and  filter. 

Refrigerant    Counter-irritant;    Buckley. 

I. 

Menthol 10  parts 

Iodine 10  parts 

Chloroform 75  parts 

Tincture  of  aconite,  U.  S.  P 375  parts 

2. 

Chloroform 3  parts 

Tincture  of  aconite '. 5  parts 

Tincture  of  iodine 10  parts 

Chloroform    Liniment. 

Gum  camphor 6  parts 

Ether   12  parts 

Alcohol    48  parts 

Chloroform too  parts 

For  external  use  only. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in   this  Itciihil  Formnlar)!  ?iioan  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAUT  191 

Dental   Liniment;   Buckley. 

]\Ienthol ^ 20  parts 

Chloroform   /^  parts 

Tincture  of  aconite,  I'.  S.  P.,  enough  to 

make .  480  parts 

For  external  use  onlw 


Dental     Liniment;     Hoff. 

Chloroform 8  parts 

Ether   8  parts 

Menthol 4  parts 

Spirit  of  camphor 4  parts 

Spirit  of  rosemary . 8  parts 

Water  of  ammonia 20  parts 

Tincture  of  capsicum 20  parts 

For  external  use  only. 

Capsicum   Plaster. 

Caoutchouc 10  parts 

Paraffin    i   part 

Heat  carefully  until  just  liquefied,  and  add  under  con- 
stant stirring 

Rosin 10  parts 

Orris  root,  powdered 4  parts 

Capsicum,  powdered   4  parts 

Spread  thinly  on  linen  and  after  trying,   cut  in   small 
pieces.     Dry  the  gum  thoroughly  before  applying. 

Capsicum    Bags. 

Powdered  capsicum 2  parts        ^ 

Powdered  ginger 2  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


192  DENTAL  FOUMULABY 

Fill  small  muslin  bags  with  the  mixture  and  cover  one 
side  with  rubber  dam.  The  muslin  side  of  the  bag  is  placed 
against  the  gum. 

Balsam  Analgesique;   Bengue. 

IMenthol lo  parts 

]\Iethyl  salicylate lO  parts 

Lanolin    15  parts 

ANTISEPTIC  COMPOUNDS. 
Iodine    Caustic. 

Iodine   i   part 

Creosote  3  parts 

Phenol    Compound;   Buckley. 

Menthol i  part 

Thymol    2  parts 

Liquid  phenol 9  parts 

Camphorated   Phenol. 

Phenol  crystals 3  parts 

Camphor   6  parts 

Alcohol    I   part 

Iodized  Phenol. 

Iodine 2  parts 

Phenol 6  parts 

Glycerin    2  parts 

Phenosalyl. 

Phenol  crystals 90  parts 

Lactic  acid    20  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Drntnl  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOIiMVLATH'  193 

Salicylic   acid lo  parts 

Eucaiyptol 5  parts 

.Menthol ' i   part 


Phenol   Sodique. 

I'henol  crystals 30  parts 

Sodium  hydrate   2  parts 

^^'ater   28  parts 

Dissolve   the    sodium    hydrate   in    the    water,   add   the 
phenol  and  warm  gently. 

Compound  Solution   of  Cresol. 

Soft  soap  ( U.  S.  P.) 350  parts 

Distilled  water   150  parts 

Place  on  a  water  bath  and  stir  until  homogeneous. 

Add 

Cresol.  U.  S.  P 500  parts 

Stir  until  liquid. 

Saponated   Tincture    of   Cresol. 

Cresol   350  parts 

Soft  soap 450  parts 

Alcohol,  enough  to  make i  .000  parts 

Eucalpytol   Compound;   Buckley. 

I.  .,  •■  \ 

^Menthol 64  parts 

.    Thymol    96  parts 

Eucalyptol.  enough  to  make 2.000  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulart/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


194  DENTAL  FOBMULAFiY 

2. 

Camphor i  part 

Phenol I  part 

Oil  of  Eucalyptus,  enough  to  make.  ...  lo  parts 

Thymophene. 

Phenol   crystals 2  parts 

Thymol    2  parts 

Place  the  thymol  in  a  dry  bottle,  melt  the  phenol  and 
pour  it  over  the  thymol.  The  resultant  solution  will  remain 
liquid. 

Thymocamphene. 

Phenol  crystals 2  parts 

Thymol    2  parts 

Camphor  i  part 

Place  the  thymol  and  the  camphor  in  a  dry  bottle,  melt 

the  phenol  and  pour  it  over  the  mixture.  The  resultant 
solution  will  remain  liquid. 

Geranium — Formol. 

Formaldehyde  solution 40  parts 

Oil  of  geranium 20  parts 

Alcohol 40  parts 

Formocresol;  Buckley. 

Tricresol   2  parts 

Formaldehyde  solution 2  parts 

vr  1-2-3   Mixture;   Black. 

Oil  of  Cassia i  part 

Phenol  crystals 2  parts 

Oil  of  wintergreen 3  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  In  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOT^MULAFY  195 

Solution    of    Chlorinated   Soda    Compound;    Lepkowsky. 
(For    the    treatment    of   infected    root    canals.) 

Solution  of  chlorinated  soda 9  parts 

Solution  of  soditim  hydroxide i   part 

Compound  Chloral  Solution;  Baumgartner. 
(For   the   treatment   of   infected   root   canals.) 

Chloral  hydrate   50  parts 

Water 25  parts 

Diluted  hydrochloric  acid ., 25  parts 

Mono-Chlor-Phenol  Compound. 
(For   the    treatment   of  infected   root   canals.) 

Thymol i   part 

A'lono-chlor-phenol 3  parts 

Potassium  hydroxide   '.         i   part 

Melt  the  thymol  and  the  mono-chlor-phenol  in  a  test 
tube  and  add  to  it  the  potassium  hydroxide.  Carefully  heat 
over  a  low  Runsen  flame  until  a  perfect  solution  is  obtained. 
Immediately  transfer  to  small,  perfectly  dry  bottles  and  pro- 
tect with  a  paraffin  stopper. 

Phenol-Sulphonic   Acid. 

Phenol,  liquid 45  parts 

Sulphuric  acid,  strong 40  parts 

Heat  to  about  150°  F.  for  several  days  and  add 
Distilled  water,  enough  to  make 100  parts 

Mercuric  Bichloride  Antiseptic  Solution. 

Bernay's  antiseptic  tablet i  part 

Solution  of  hydrogen  dioxide t20  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FormuJarii  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


196  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Antiseptic   Solution;   Dobell. 

Sodium  borate 240  parts 

Sodium  bicarbonate 240  parts 

Pbenol.  liquid 48  parts 

Glycerin    480  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 15,000  parts 

Antiseptic   Solution;    Thiersch. 

Salicylic   acid 4  parts 

Boric   acid 12  parts 

Water  i  ,000  parts 

Extemporaneous    Solutions    of   Hydrogen   Peroxide. 

Extemporaneous  solutions  of  hydrogen  peroxide  may 
be  prepared  as  follows  : 

2  Percent   (by  volume)  Solution. 

Sodium  perborate    25  parts 

Boiling  distilled  water,  enough  to  make.  1,000  parts 
Filter,  if  necessary. 

5  Percent   (by  volume)  Solution. 

Sodium  perborate 65  part's 

Tartaric,  or  citric  acid,  powdered 21  parts 

Boiling  distilled  water,  enough  to  make.  1,000  parts 
Filter,  if  necessary. 

10-12  Percent   (by  volume)   Solution. 

_  Sodium  perborate 170  parts 

Tartaric,  or  citric  acid,  powdered 60  parts 

Boiling  distilled  water,  enough  to  make.  1,000  parts 
Filter,  if  necessary. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iisorl   in  this  Dental  Formulari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  197 

18-20  Percent   (by  volume)   Solution. 

Sodium  perborats 210  parts 

Tartaric,  or  citric  acid,  powdered 105  parts 

Boiling  distilled  water,  enough  to  make.  1,000  parts 

These  aqueous  solutions  of  sodium  perborate  produce 
a  hydrogen  peroxide  solution  which  always  reacts  alkaline. 

To  Preserve  Hydrogen  Peroxide  Solution. 

Solution  hydrogen  peroxide 1,000  parts 

Acetanilide    i  part 

Keep  in  well-stoppered  bottles. 

Black  Zinc  Chloride  Solution;  Witzel. 

Zinc  chloride 10  parts 

Phenol  liquid 5  parts 

Alcohol    5  parts 

Chloroform   i  part 

Oil  of  peppermint i  part 

Oil  of  cloves I  part 

Aromatized    Iodoform. 

Iodoform g6  parts 

Cumarin    4  parts 

Iodoform    Emulsion. 

Iodoform 5  parts 

Mucilage  of  gum  arabic 2^  parts 

Glycerin    15  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make '  60  parts 

Iodoform    Wax. 

Iodoform i   part 

Hard  paraffin   1   part 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used   in   this  Dental  Furniular/i  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


198  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

Liquid   Iodoform. 

Potassium   hydroxide 35  parts 

Water    25  parts 

Oleic  acid 50  parts 

Alcohol,  95  percent 30  parts 

Iodine   30  parts^ 

Dissolve  the  potassium  hydroxide  in  the  water,  then 
pour  the  oleic  acid  and  alcohol  into  this  solution  of  potassa. 
With  continued  stirring  add  the  iodine,  and,  finally,  a  few 
drops  of  potassium  hydroxide  solution  to  discharge  the 
reddish  color  of  the  liquid.  Let  the  mixture  stand  for  sev- 
eral days  in  a  dark  place,  when  it  will  separate  into  well- 
defined  layers.  The  upper  aqueous  layer  is  decanted.  The 
lower  layer  is  a  syrupy  liquid,  having  a  pronounced  yellow 
color  and  a  strong  odor  of  iodoform. 

Aristol  Oil  Solution. 

Aristol   I  part 

Oil  of  sesame 9  parts 

]\Iix  and  let  stand  undisturbed  for  one-half  hour.  Then 
repeatedly  shake  during  the  next  ten  hours,  set  aside  for 
three  or  four  days  and  pour  oft'  the  clear  solution. 

Soluble   Antiseptic   Powder. 

Salicylic  acid 75  parts 

Phenol  crystals 15  parts 

Eucalyptr)! 15  parts 

Menthol 15  parts 

Th>mol    15  parts 

Zinc  sulphate 2.000  parts 

P)Oric  acid,  in  impal]:)able  powder 18,000  parts 

"N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  Hiis  Denial  Formiihirij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  199 

ROOT  CANAL  FILLING  MATERIALS. 

1 :   Scheuer. 

Zinc  oxide 8  parts 

Zinc  sulphate 2  parts 

Cresol  3  parts 

Solution  of  formaldehyde i  part 

Eugenol i  part 

Glycerin,  enough  to  make  a  stifif  paste. 

2. 

Zinc  oxide 225  parts 

Zinc  sulphate 75  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint.  .  : i  part 

L3'Soform,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

3- 

Iodoform    90  parts 

Zinc  oxide 45  parts 

Charcoal,    powdered 45  parts 

Oil  of  cloves,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

4- 

Cresol    60  parts 

Formaldehyde  solution 15  parts 

Glycerin    10  parts 

Zinc  oxide 10  parts 

Boric  acid,  enough  to  make  a  stiff  paste. 

5- 

Gutta-percha  base  plate 60  parts 

Rosin   60  parts 

Chloroform 240  parts 

X.  B.— Parts  as  usfd  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  ^Yeight. 


200  DENTAL  FORMULARY    ' 

6;   Eucapercha   Compound;   Buckley. 

Dental  base  plate  gutta  percha 5  parts 

Eucalyptol  compound  (see  page  xx) .  . .  5  parts 

Make    solution   by   aid   of   heat,   avoiding  the   loss   of 
eucalyptol. 

7;  Eucalyptol  Gutta  Percha. 

Thymol    i  part 

Gutta  percha  base  plate 99  parts 

Eucalyptol    100  parts 

Melt  together  in  a  porcelain  capsule  by  carefully  heating 
on  a  water  bath. 


Powder. 

Thymol    5  parts 

Dried  alum 10  parts 

Kaolin   25  parts 


Liquid. 

Formaldehyde  solution i  part 

Cresol  2  parts 

Alcohol    .' 3  parts 

Mix  to  a  stiff  paste  before  using. 


9- 

Powder. 

Thymol    5  parts 

Dried  alum to  parts 

Kaolin 25  parts 

X.  15. — Parts  hh  used   in   tliis  Denial  Forniuliirij  uwdu  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAET  201 

Liquid. 

Formaldehyde   solution i   part 

Cresol   2  parts 

Alcohol    3  parts 

lO. 
Powder. 

Paraform    4  parts 

Iodoform    i  part 

Thymol    i  part 

Zinc  oxide 14  parts 

Tannic    acid 20  parts 

Liquid. 

Phenol 5  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 5  parts 

Oil  of  cinnamon 5  parts 

Glycerin    5  parts 

II. 

Powder. 

Zinc   oxide .'        8  parts 

Zinc  sulphate,  exsiccated 2  parts 

Liquid. 

Cresol   3  parts 

Formaldehyde  solution i   part 

Euo:enol i   part 

12. 
Powder. 

Hydronaphthol i  part 

Zinc  oxide 2  parts 

X-  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denfal  Fornudari/  moan  quantities 
•V  ^A■ei£rht. 


202  DENTAL  FOEilULABY 

Liquid. 

Hydronaphtliol 2  parts 

Alcohol    36  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 12  parts 


13- 

Powder. 

Zinc  oxide 20  parts 

Paraform 5  parts 

Liquid. 

Zinc  sulphate 6  parts 

VVater 20  parts 

Cresol   ; I  part 

14;    Wakefield. 

Powder. 

Alum    2  parts 

Thymol    4  parts 

Zinc  oxide 240  parts 

Liquid. 

Formaldehyde  solution  2  parts 

Alcohol    4  parts 

Creosote  90  parts 


15- 

Powder. 

Xeroform    5  parts 

Thymol    i  part 

Dried  alum   3  parts 

Zinc  oxide 5  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Venial  Formiilari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  203 

Liquid. 

Eugenol 5  parts 

Cresol  5  parts 

16;    Formagen;   Abraham. 
Powder. 

Fresh  slaked  lime 10  parts 

Zinc  oxide 20  parts 

Quartz 20  parts 

Kaolin   50  parts 

Liquid. 

Formaldehyde  solution i  part 

Oil  of  cloves 2  parts 

Creosote   3  parts 

Alcohol    4  parts 

Mix  to  a  stiff  paste  before  using. 

17;   Eucaine-Formol-Phenol   Paste;   WitzeL 

Powder. 

Eucaine   3  parts 

Phenol  liquid    5  parts 

Paraform    10  parts 

Zinc  oxide   10  parts 

Liquid. 

Eugenol to  parts 

Formaldehyde  solution 40  parts 

Glycerin    50  parts 

Mix  to  a  stiff  paste  before  using. 

N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Drninl  Formularii  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


204  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

18;  Oxpara;   Jones. 

Powder. 

Thymol    i   part 

Zinc  oxide 2  parts 

Liquid. 

Glycerin  i  part 

Formaldehyde  solution i  part 

Tricresol    3  parts 

19;  Dodel. 

Paraffin   48  parts 

Salol   12  parts 

Melt  the  paraffin  on  a  water-bath,  remove  from  the  fire 
and  add  the  salol  with  constant  stirring. 

20. 

Hard  paraffin 48  parts 

Aristol   6  parts 

Prepare  as  above. 

21. 

Thymol    i  part 

Crocus  martis 15  parts 

Hard  paraffin  84  parts 

Prepare  as  above. 

22;    Dunning. 

Paraform 2  parts 

Bismuth  subnitrate   8  parts 

Paraffin   8  parts 

Prepare  as  above. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


DENTAL  FOJiMULJTiY  '  205 

23.     Disappearing  Root  Filling;  Ferris. 

Isinglass    , 60  parts 

Tannic  acid   i-J  parts 

Tricresol    4  parts 

Distilled  water 90  parts 

When  heated  to  a  temperature  of  100°  F.  in  an  ordinary 
gluepot  or  water  bath,  it  becomes  syrupy  and  can  be  readily 
introduced  into  the  root  canals  with  a  piece  of  sterile  catgut. 
If  the  canal  be  large  the  catgut  may  be  left  in  the  canal.  A 
ball  of  stifif  phosphate  of  zinc  is  then  pressed  into  the  pulp 
chamber,  forcing  the  mixture  through  the  canal  and  fistula. 

PULP  MUMMIFYING  PASTES. 

1 ;   Soederberg. 

Alum    I  part 

Thymol    , i  part 

Glycerin  i  part 

Zinc  oxide,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

2. 

Paraform i  part 

Thymol    i  part 

Zinc  oxide 2  parts 

Glycerin,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

3- 

Cocain  hydrochloride i  part 

Thymol    i  part 

Formaldehyde  solution   i  part 

White  vaselin   3  parts 

Zinc  oxide 7  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  ForwuJari/  mean  quantises 
by  weight. 


20<3  DENTAL  FOmWLAT^Y 

PULP  CAPPING  MATERIALS. 

I. 

Aristol,  or  euro])heii i  part 

Calcium  phosphate   lo  parts 

Eugenol,  enough  to  make  a  creamy  paste. 

2. 
Thymolized   Calcium  Phosphate;   Buckley. 

Thymol    lo  parts 

Calcium  phosphate,  precipitated 438  parts 

3- 

Gum.  benzoin   3  parts 

Balsam  of  tolu 2  parts 

Eugenol 2  parts 

Thymol    I  part 

Chloroform 8  parts 

AGENTS  FOR  REDUCING  HYPERSENSITIVE  DENTINE. 
1 ;    Robinson's   Remedy. 

Phenol  crystals 2  parts 

Potassium  hydrate 2  parts 

Mix  by  trituration  in  a  heated  wedgwood  mortar  until 
a  crystalline  mass  is  obtained. 

2. 

Paraform  5  parts 

Zinc  sulphate,  exsiccated too  parts 

Mix  with   a  thin   solution  of  gum  arabic  into  a  thick 
paste  and  put  into  the  cavity. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Brnfal  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  F0E21ULARY  '■  207 

3- 

Solution  of  formaldehyde 2  parts 

Thymol    2  parts 

Eugenol    2  parts 

Zinc  oxide,  enough  to  make  a  stiff  paste. 

4- 

Paraform i  part 

Gutta-percha  base  plate. 5  parts 

Work  into  a  mass  by  the  aid  of  heat. 

5- 

Silver  nitrate i  part 

Gutta-percha  base  plated 2  parts 

Zinc  oxide lo  parts 

6. 

Zinc  chloride    2  parts 

Absolute  alcohol,  enough  to  make  a  solution. 

7- 
Orthoform  2  parts 

Eugenol,  enough  to  make  a  paste. 

8;   Silver  Nitrate   Reducing  Solution;   Shanasy. 

I. 

Saturated  solution  of  silver  nitrate.  ...        i  part 
Asbestos  felt,  a  convenient  quantity. 
Saturate  the  asbestos  felt  with  the  silver  nitrate  solu- 
tion, dry,  and  keep  in  a  dark  bottle. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


208  DENTAL  FOIIMULAEY 

2. 

Saturated  solution  of  sodium  hydroxide  50  parts 

Phenol  liquid   50  parts 

Formaldehyde  solution 25  parts 

Keep  in  a  well-stoppered  bottle. 

Dip  the  prepared  silver  nitrate  asbestos  into  the  solution 
and  apply  to  the  tooth. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


# 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

AN  INDEX  TO  ORAL  DISEASES— THEIR  ETIOL- 
OGY, DIAGNOSIS  AND  TREATMENT;  INCLUD- 
ING ACCIDEXTS  OF  GENERAL  AND  LOCAL 
ANESTHESIA  AND  ACUTE  POISONING. 
SALIVA— AND  URINE  ANALYSIS. 


Abrasion  :  The  mechanical  wearing  away  of  tooth 
substance,  resulting  from  occlusal  attrition  or  other  me- 
chanical causes  (clay  pipe  stem)  ;  usually  not  painful,  un- 
less the  pulp  is  irritated.  Therapeutical  applications  are  of 
no  avail.  Filling  or  capping  of  the  teeth  give  best  results. 
As  a  prophylactic  measure,  the  clay  pipe  smoker  should 
cover  the  pipe  stem  with  rubber  tubing. 


Abscess,  Acute  Alveolar. 

Causes:  Gangrene  of  the  tooth  pulp  and  infection  of 
the  pericementum. 

Symptoms  :  Swelling,  severe  pain,  fever.  The  pus  bur- 
rows along  the  line  of  least  resistance  and  after  the  bone 
and  gum  tissues  are  penetrated,  a  fistula  results.  In  the 
lower  jaw,  the  pus  may  sink  into  deeper  structures  and 
perforation  of  the  cheek,  along  the  lower  border  of  the  jaw. 
or  about  the  neck  may  result.  Abscesses  about  the  third 
lower  molars  are  prone  to  produce  severe  complications. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 

209 


210  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

Treatment :  In  the  early  stages,  drainage  through 
the  pulp  canal  may  be  possible.  If  fluctuation  is  present,  a 
deep  incision  is  essential  or  the  abscess  may  be  opened  with 
a  tubular  knife.  If  the.  tooth  has  to  be  removed,  it  should 
be  done  at  once,  although,  in  protracted  cases,  swelling 
may  increase  even  after  the  tooth  has  been  removed.  Hot 
poultices  in  the  form  of  cut  figs,  steeped  in  hot  boric  acid 
solutions,  helps  to  bring  the  abscess  to  a  focus.  To  estab- 
lish free  drainage  is  important.  The  fever  is  reduced  with 
antipyretics  and  the  engorgement  of  the  system  is  relieved 
by  saline  laxatives.  Severe  pain  is  best  combated  with  mor- 
phine. The  septic  root  canals  require  proper  treatment 
as  outlined  under:     Pulpitis  (Gangrene). 

Magnesii  sulphatis §j 

Acid,  sulphur,  dil gtt.  xx 

Syr.  limonis fl  §j 

.   Aquae q.  s.  ad  fl.  5  iv. 

M. 

Sig:  A  tablespoonful  in  a  glassful  of  water  every 
3  hours. 

Morph.  sulphatis  gr.  j 

M.  f.  pil.  No.  iv. 

Sig:     One  pill  every  2  hours  until  pain  is  relieved. 

Phenacetini   3  ss. 

M.  f.  plv.  No.  vi. 

Sig :     One  powder  every  three  hours. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  211 

Actixo:mycosis  :  Known  in  cattle  as  "wooden  tongue" 
or  "lumpy  jaw."  A. chronic,  infectious  disease  of  cattle, 
sometimes  transmitted  to  men,  caused  by  actinomyces  bovis, 
the  ray  fungus,  a  parasitic  bacterium.  It  may  involve  the 
jaws  (especiall\-  the  lower),  the  tongue,  the  neck,  etc.  The 
fungus  usuall}  enters  through  objects  which  have  come  in 
contact  with  diseased  cattle  or  directly  with  vegetable  part- 
icles upon  which  it  grows.  Carious  teeth  or  wounds  about 
the  mouth  are  favorable  ports  of  entry. 

S\mptoms :  Board-like,  slow  swelling  of  the  aft'ected 
parts,  occasionally  accompanied  by  severe  pain  in  the  affect- 
ed region,  periosteal  inflammation  and  formation  of  ab- 
scesses. 

Diagonosis :  Only  positive  by  means  of  the  micro- 
scope. 

Treatment:  Surgical;  free  excision  of  foci.  The  in- 
ternal administration  of  potassium  iodide  in  large  quanti- 
ties (lo  to  15  grains  in  milk,  three  times  daily)  is  recom- 
mended. Dr.  Bevan,  of  Chicago,  reports  excellent  results 
in  six  cases  from  the  internal  administration  of  copper  sul- 
phate, ^-3/2grain,  three  times  daily. 


Apxea  :     Transient    cessation  of  breathing. 

(See  treatment  of  accidents  of  general  anesthesia.) 


Arsenic.\l  Necrosis  :  Results  from  faulty  application 
of  the  chemical  or  other  accidents. 

Symptoms :  The  gum  tissues  become  highly  inflamed 
and  assume  a  raw  ham  color ;  the  hard  and  soft  tissues  are 
destroyed  with  almost  ecjual  rapidity.     It  is  not  painful  in 

X.  B. — Parts  as  nsod  in  this  Denial  FormuJari/  mean  quantities 
by  \vei,2;lit. 


212  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

the  early  stages ;  as  soon  as  the  deeper  structures  (perios- 
teum) are  reached  severe  pain  follows.  The  border  of  the 
bone  feels  rough  to  the  touch,  the  teeth  become  loose,  and 
if  the  necrosis  spreads,  sequestration  takes  place. 

Orthoform   3j 

Lanolin §  ss 

M.  f.  un^t. 


cloth. 


Sig :     Spread  on  painful  area  and  cover  with  cotton 

Orthoform   3  j 

Amyli 3  ss 

M.  f.  pulv. 

Sig:     Dusting  powder. 

Sol.  hydrogen,  peroxid. 

Aquae  menth.  pip aa  fl  §  ij 

M. 

Sig:     Tablespoonful  in  a  tumblerful  of  warm  water 
as  a  mouth  wash. 


Burns  are  caused  by  the  action  of  intense  heat  upon 
the  tissue ;  in  the  mouth  they  are  rarely  worse  than  the 
first  degree.  They  require  little  more  than  palliative  treat- 
ment; i.e.,  ice  and  saturated  solution  of  sodium  bicarbon- 
ate. Quite  frequently,  however,  cauterization  of  the  oral 
tissues  with  strong  acids  or  alkalis  occurs ;  the  treatment 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  moan  quantities 
1)V  \veiffht. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 


213 


corresponds  to  the  nature  of  the  cauterant.  Severe  pain 
is  reheved  by  dusting-  the  corroded  surfaces  with  mixtures 
of  orthoform  and  starch,  equal  parts. 


Cauterants. 
Silver  nitrate 

Ammonia 

Claustic  potash   (lye) 
iMineral  acids 

Phenol  and 

Trichloracetic  acid 


Tincture  of  iodine 
Formaldehyde  solution 
Pyrozone* 


Require: 

Concentrated  solution  of  sodium 
chloride. 

Lemon  juice  or  diluted  vinegar,  white 
of  eggs,  demulcent  drinks. 

Same  treatment  as  for  ammonia. 

Gargle  with  soapsuds,  give  chalk,  raw 
egg,  and  lime  water. 

Fifty  percent  alcohol  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible, followed  by  rinsing  the  mouth 
with  cold  Avater  and  the  application 
of  a  mild  salve. 

SAveetened  water. 

Ammonia  water. 

Alcohol,  followed  by  water. 


Cyanosis  :  Bhae  discoloration  of  the  skin  resulting 
from  insufficient  oxygenation  of  the  blood. 

Treatment :  Remove  the  cause ;  fresh  air  and  horizon- 
tal position  of  patient  and  rest. 


Cysts:  Slowly  growing  benign  tumors  containing 
serous,  mucous,  hemorrhagic  or  other  fluids.  They  may  be 
divided  into  follicular  cysts,  dermoid  cysts  and  retention 
cysts.  Follicular  c\sts.  resulting  from  abnormal  enlarge- 
ment of  pre-existing  cavities,   frequent!}-  contain   remnants 


*Caution:    If  pyrozone   is  si)illi'd    upon   woolen    fabrics,    i.    e.,   the 
dress  of  the  patient,  its  rapid  oxidation   may  set   fire  to  the  cloth. 


IST.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Venial  Fnnniihirj/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


214  DENTAL  FOFMVLABY 

of  the  enamel  organ  in  the  form  of  imperfectly  developed 
teeth  (odontomes)  and  are  spoken  of  as  dentigerous  cysts. 
Dermoid  cysts  are  formed  from  remnants  of  epithelial  cells ; 
they  are  rarely  found  in  the  oral  cavity.  About  the  roots 
of  teeth  frequently  fungous  growths  are  formed  which  are 
referred  to  as  dental  cysts ;  they  may  result  from  disturb- 
ances during  detention  or  from  other  causes.  Retention 
cysts  are  formed  through  the  enclosure  of  a  gland  duct, 
either  by  some  remaining  epithelial  cells  or  through  an  ob- 
struction of  the  duct  from  other  sources.  An  important  cyst 
of  the  mouth  is  ranula,  a  retention  cyst  of  the  sublingual 
glands. 

Treatment :  Dentigerous  cysts  are  referred  to  the 
surgeon,  ranula  may  be  destroyed  by  cauterants  or  it  is 
surgically  removed.  A  stout  silk  thread  is  drawn  through 
the  cyst  and  tied  over  the  outer  wall  (seton).  In  from 
lo  to  15  days  the  inner  cyst  walls  may  unite.  Extirpation 
of  a  part  of  the  cyst  wall  or  of  the  entire  gland  may  be 
necessary.  Truman  W.  Broph)'  employs  a  metal  seton 
made  of  a  "small  silver  tube  and  perforating  it  with  holes ; 
then,  bending  it  so  as  to  form  a  ring  about  one-half  inch 
in  diameter.  This  is  an  open  ring,  one  end  of  which  is 
carried  into  the  cyst  and  out  through  the  mucous  membrane 
and  telescoped  into  the  other  end,  thus  uniting  the  ends 
of  the  two  and  completing  the  ring.  The  perforated  ring 
thus  introduced  will  admit  the  saliva  within  the  cyst  and 
allow  it  to  escape  through  the  tube  into  the  mouth.  The 
ring  must  l)c  rotated  dailx',  else  the  tissues  may  fill  the 
oDenings  in  it,  thus  defeating  the  object  of  this  insertion. 
The  tissues  around  the  ring  will  become  smooth  and  a 
few  weeks  only  will  suffice  to  establish  permanent  open- 
ings, after  which  the  ring  mav  be  removed  and  the  saliva 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Forirnihirij  inran  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULJEY  215 

will  escape  through  the  openings  so  perfectly  formed  around 
the  silver  tube."' 


Dental  Caries  :  It  is  a  chemico-parasitic  process, 
consisting  of  two  definite  stages — decalcification  of  the  tooth 
substances  and  the  destruction  of  the  remaining  organic 
matrix.  The  second  stage  is  not  to  be  clearly  observed  in 
the  decalcification  of  the  enamel  (^Miller).  As  predispos- 
ing factors  are  to  be  mentioned :  purely  calcified  teeth,  ir- 
regularities of  form  and  position,  unhygienic  surroundings, 
constitutional  disturbances,  the  condition  of  food  stufifs,  etc. 

Treatment:  As  prophylactic  measures,  suitable  food 
materials  rich  in  lime  and  phosphorus,  proper  exercise  of 
the  jaws,  and  proper  hygiene  of  the  mouth,  are  indicated. 
In  the  early  stages  of  caries,  the  application  of  silver  nitrate 
under  suitable  conditions  will  inhibit  the  progress  of  the 
disease.  The  proper  treatment  of  the  carious  defects  con- 
sists in  the  thorough  removal  of  all  carious  material,  and 
in  filling  and  restoring  the  normal  outline  of  the  tooth.  (For 
mouth  and  tooth  preparations  see  Chapter  Vl.) 


Dextal  Hemorrhage  :  Results  from  tearing  the  blood 
vessels  of  the  periosteum  during  the  extraction  of  teeth.  Oc- 
casionally profuse  hemorrhage  occurs  from  tearing  large 
arteries  in  extracting  lower  molars  (inferior  dental  artery"). 
Four  cases  are  on  record  where  the  artery  bodily  passed 
through  the  roots  of  these  molars.  Organic  disturbances, 
i.  e.,  hemophilia,  chlorosis,  enemia.  leukemia,  etc..  are  often 
responsible  for  persistent  dental  hemorrhage.  \"icarious 
hemorrhage  of  the  gum  tissue  may  occur  during  menstrua- 
tion. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FormuJani  moan  quantities 
liv  weight . 


216  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

Treatment :  Normal  dental  hemorrhage  resulting  from 
the  extraction  of  teeth,  etc.,  requires  little  attention ;  in  se- 
vere cases  plugging  and  splinting  of  the  sockets  is  always 
successful.  Introduce  softened  modeling  compound  into 
the  mouth,  let  the  patient  close  the  jaws,  press  about  the 
teeth,  remove,  chill  and  trim.  Wash  away  the  blood  clot, 
and  tightly  pack  into  each  single  alveolus  a  narrow  strip 
of  iodoform  gauze,  having  the  tip  of  the  gauze  moistened 
with  a  paste  made  of  powdered  stypticin  or  styptol  and 
water.  Have  the  plug  slightly  extending  above  the  bortler 
of  the  alveolus.  Replace  the  prepared  splint  and  apply  a 
Bardon  bandage  (figure  of  8.)  The  plug  and  the  splint 
may  remain  several  days.  Internally  administer  stypticin 
or  styptol  tablets  ;  to  reduce  blood  pressure  give  five  grains 
of  phenacetin.  Let  patient  assume  a  sitting  posture ;  keep 
him  from  all  excitement  and  order  liquid  diet.  No  alcoholics 
should  be  allowed.  If  hemorrhage  occurs  from  torn  gum 
tissues  apply  gauze  strips  dipped  in  a  warmed  solution  of 
stypol  (20%).  Severe  interpapillary  hemorrhage  is  checked 
by  applying  a  25%  solution  of  chromic  acid.  Occasionally 
parenchymatous  hemorrhage  occurs  in  patients  wearing  full 
dentures.  It  is  usually  due  to  ill-fitting  plates,  uncleanli- 
ness,  etc.  Cleanse  the  plate  thoroughly,  cover  with  thin 
gauze  strips  dipped  in  20%  styptol  solution  and  reinsert  the 
plate.      Remedy   the   defects   of   the   denture. 

R. 

Styptol  tablets  (sugar  coated) .  .  .  .gr.   ^' 
No.  XV. 

Sig. :     Two  tablets,  three  to  four  times  daily. 


De.\"ial  PH.\m\(;n  is  :     l^ental  angina.     Catarrhal  in- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMVLARY  217 

flammation  of  the  upper  pharynx  from  dental  causes ;  usu- 
ally resulting  from  jdifficult  eruption  of  a  third  lower  molar 
or  as  a  sequence  of  stomatitis  and  other  mouth  infections. 

Symptoms :  Difficult  and  painful  deglutition,  a  typical 
red  ring  about  the  pillars  of  the  fauces  and  infection  of  the 
tonsils. 

Treatment :  Saline  aperients,  prohibition  of  tobacco, 
alcohol  and  highly  spiced  food.  Gargling  with  antiseptic 
and  astringent  solutions,  and,  in  severe  cases,  silver  nitrate 
or  iodine   application. 

Tinct.  ferri.  chloridi  fl.  5  iij 

Glycerin fl.  5  j 

Aquae q.  s.  ad.  fl.  .5  ij 

M. 

Sig. :     A  tablespoonful  in  half  a  glass  of  warm  water 
as  a  gargle. 

lodini gr.  v 

Pot.  iodini  5  ss 

Glvcerini    fl.  5  ss 

m" 

Sig:     Apply  on  a  swab. 


Dextition  :  It  is  a  physiological  process  which,  nor- 
mally, is  not  accompanied  by  any  disturbances.  The  S(_)- 
called  diseases  of  dentition,  i  .e.,  diarrhoea,  dysentery, 
fevers,  etc.,  result,  in  the  majority  of  instances,  from  im- 
proper feeding  during  the  period  of  most  active  development 

N.  B. — Part?  a?  used  in  this  Dental  Formulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


218  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

of  the  child.  If  the  teeth  erupt  too  early,  extraction  is  not 
indicated  unless  some  faults  in  their  development  make  it 
necessary.  The  removal  of  such  teeth  is  usually  accom- 
panied by  severe  hemorrhage.  The  eruption  of  the  teeth 
may,  by  reflex  irritation  from  pressure  upon  the  overlying 
gum  tissue,  cause  discomfort  to  the  child.  It  is  readily 
relieved  by  proper  scarification.  A  deep  cut  is  made  over 
the  advancing  tooth,  i.  c,  crucial  incisions  over  the  molars, 
and  singly  over  the  cutting  edges  of  the  anterior  teeth. 
General  disturbances  are  to  be  treated  according  to 
symptoms. 

The  eruption  of  the  third  molars  frequently  causes  severe 
disturbances  on  account  of  lack  of  space  and  malposition. 
These  disturbances  are  traumatic  in  their  nature,  and  should 
be  treated  accordingly.  If  the  tooth  is  to  be  removed,  gen- 
eral anesthesia  is  usually  indicated  ;  the  accompanying  trismus 
and  infiltration  of 'the  tissues  prevent  the  successful  injec- 
tion of  a  local  anesthetic.  Lecluse's  elevator  is  of  excellent 
service  if  the  tooth  cannot  be  reached  with  the  ordinary 
or  a  Physick's  forceps.  The  gum  tissue  overlying  the  tooth 
is  to  be  divided  before  the  extraction  is  made.  If  the  socket 
is  infected  and  painful,  packing  with  iodoform  gauze  dipped 
in  orthoform  and  strict  antisepsis  are  important.  Dry,  hot 
applications  applied  externally  are  of  service.  The  swelling 
about  the  angle  of  the  jaw  and  the  lymph  glands  is  benefited 
l)y  iodine  (colorless)  ap]Dlication,  and  by  passive  massage. 
Sore  throat  (see:  Dental  Angina)  very  frequently  accom- 
panies the  eruption  of  this  tooth.  In  the  earl}-  stages,  small 
chips  of  ice  held  in  the  mouth,  together  with  the  removal 
of  the  overlying  gum  tissue,  and  antiseptic  washes  will  often 
result   in   a  speedy   recovery. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formularij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DFNIAL  FOUMILMIY  219 

^         .    .    . 

lodipini,  io%. 

Sig. :    Paint  upon  the  inflamed  surface  and  cover  with 


a 


cloth. 


Dislocation  of  the  ^Iandible  :  It  may  be  unilateral  or 
bilateral ;  more  prone  in  women  than  in  men.  One  or  both 
condyles  have  slipped  out  of  the  glenoid  cavity  and  rest 
upon  the  inter-articular  fibrocartilage  directly  over  the  artic- 
ular eminences.  The  jaw  is  usually  rigid,  the  mouth  wide 
open ;  chewing  and  speaking  is  much  impaired. 

Treatment :  Place  patient  in  a  low  chair,  the  operator 
wraps  his  thumbs  with  cotton  or  with  napkins  to  protect 
them  against  injury.  He  stands  in  front  of  the  patient, 
having  the  head  fixed  by  an  assistant  or  on  the  head  rest 
of  the  chair  and  then  places  the  thumbs  firmly  upon  the 
jaw  in  the  region  of  the  lower  molars  while  the  other  fingers 
rest  on  the  body  of  the  jaw  near  the  symphisis.  Pressure 
is  now  made  downward  with  the  thumbs  and  forward  and 
upward  with  the  fingers,  and  when  the  condyles  have  passed 
the  articulating  eminence  they  will  snap  back  into  the  glenoid 
foss?e.  A  metal  rod  (excavator)  covered  with  cotton  and 
placed  crosswise  over  the  teeth  in  the  bicuspid  region  acts 
as  a  fulcrum  when  backward  and  upward  pressure  is 
brought  upon  the  symphisis  and  it  may  be  used  for  this 
purpose.  The  patient  should  be  instructed  to  be  careful  in 
not  opening  the  mouth  too  far.  A  chin  bandage  may  be 
worn  for  a  few  days. 


Dry  Mouth  (Xerostomia):  Pathological  dryness  of 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth  resulting  from  impaired 
secretions  of  saliva. 


N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Di  ntiil  Fdrmnhir!/  me-.m  quantities 
by  weight. 


220  DENTAL  FOBMVLABT 

Causes :  Severe  psychical  and  physical  disturbances^ 
nervous  diseases,  diseases  of  the  digestive  tract  and  other 
unknown  factors.  The  diseased  salivary  glands  (mumps) 
may  secrete  a  much  lessened  amount  of  saliva  at  times. 

Symptoms:  Painful  deglutition  and  speech.  The  mu- 
cosa is  dry,  shiny,  and  stretched  ;  the  tongue  is  bright  red, 
cracked  and  dry.  No  inflammation.  The  disease  may  last 
for  years. 

Treatment :  Pilocarpine  hydrochloride  internally ;  if  re- 
sulant  from  nervous  diseases,  electricity  is  indicated.  While 
recovery  is  very  problematical,  the  patient  may  be  made 
comfortable  by  continuous  use  of  the  above  drug. 

Pilocarpin.  hydrochlorid .  .  .gr.  v 

Aquae  distillatse fl.  o  ss 

M. 
Sig. :     Five  drops  three  times  daily. 
Slowly  increase  the  dose  by  one  drop  until  from  8  to 
lo  drops  per  dose  are  taken. 


Dyspnea  :  Labored  breathing ;  suspended  animation 
from  a  deficiency  of  oxygen  in  the  blood.  May  also  result 
from  inhaling  an  anesthetic  or  poisonous  gases ;  i.  e.,  coal 
gas,  water  gas,  etc. 

Treatment:  Fresh  air,  horizontal  position  of  patient, 
dashing  of  cold  water  in  the  face  and  artificial  respiration. 
(.See:    Treatment  of  accidents  of  general  anesthesia.) 


Empiivsema  01'  THE  Cheek:     The  inflation    of  the  in- 
terstices of  the  connective  tissues  with  air.   It  may  result  from 

N.  B. —  Pai'ts  as  used   in  tliis  Denial  Formiilarij  mean  qnantiMes 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAHY  221 

air  penetrating  into  the  tissues  after  tooth  extraction  or  from 
careless  injection  of  solution  of  hydrogen  peroxide  into  a 
closed  cavity,  setting  free  nascent  oxygen. 

No  treatment  necessary,  as  swelling  will  subside  spon- 
taneously.    A  tight  bandaging  is  often  of  some  benefit. 


Empyema  of  the  Maxillary  Sinus  (antrum  of  High- 
more) :  An  accumulation  of  fluid  in  the  maxillary  sinus; 
either  acute  or  chronic.  It  may  be  caused  by  infectious  dis- 
eases (influenza),  diseases  of  the  teeth,  traumatism,  etc. 
Tumors,  polypi  and  other  foreign  bodies  are  often  respon- 
sible. 

Symptoms :  More  or  less  dull  pain  in  the  affected  side 
of  the  face ;  foul  smelling  discharge  from  the  nostril,  espe- 
ciall}-  when  the  head  is  bent  forward  and  turned  to  the  sound 
side  and  in  blowing  the  nose.  The  disease  may  be  unilateral 
or  bilateral. 

Diagnosis :  Discharge  from  the  nose  and  the  general 
symptoms  are  helpful  in  making  a  diagnosis.  The  dull 
shadow  picture  of  the  diseased  sinus  as  revealed  by  the 
rays  of  the  electric  mouth  lamp  is  helpful  but  not  relia- 
ble. A  trial  puncture  and  washing  of  the  sinus  with  a 
saline  solution  is  the  only  positive  means  of  diagnosis. 

Treatment:  If  a  diseased  tooth  is  the  causative  fac- 
tor, the  tooth  is  to  be  removed  and  the  sinus  opened  through 
its  socket,  according  to  Cowper.  provided  the  opening  affords 
ready  access  to  the  sinus ;  or  an  opening  is  made  between 
the  apices  of  the  roots  of  the  first  molar  and  the  second  pre- 
molar, according  to  Drake.  The  opening  of  the  sinus 
through  the  canine  fossa,  according  to  Desault,  offers' the 
best  results,   as   it  allows  a   clear  inspection  of  the  entire 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulari/  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


222  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

cavity.  The  gum  tissue  between  the  canine  and  the  first 
molar  is  locally  anesthetized,  a  semi-circular  cut  is  made 
reaching'  from  the  canine  eminence  to  the  second  bicuspid, 
and  the  tissues,  including  the  periosteum,  are  lifted  up.  With 
a  fine  spear  drill  the  facial  wall  is  perforated  and  with  suit- 
able fissure  burs  sufficiently  enlarged  to  allow  the  little  finger 
to  enter.  Foreign  bodies  or  granulations  are  removed  with 
the  curette.  The  sinus  is  washed  with  at  least  a  quart  of 
warm  saline  or  Thiersch's  solution  and  tightly  packed  for 
twenty-four  hours  with  iodoform  gauze.  The  further  treat- 
ment consists  in  irrigating  the  sinus  with  mild  antiseptic 
solutions.  Solid  plugs  made  of  gutta  percha,  vulcanized 
rubber,  or  metal  should  now  be  used  to  keep  the  sinus  open. 
They  are  reduced  in  size  with  the  progress  of  recovery.  In 
extreme  persistent  cases,  a  large  part  of  the  facial  wall  is 
removed,  and  a  "window"  is  made  leading  into  the  middle 
meadus  of  the  nose ;  the  wdiole  sinus  is  thoroughly  curetted 
and  cauterized.  Chronic  cases  may  require  treatment  for  a 
year  or  two. 

Sodii  chloridi    %  ss. 

Aquje fl.  oL 

M. 
Sig. :     Use  as  a  douche. 

^      .  . 

Acidi  salicylic    .• 5  j 

Acidi  borici    3   iv 

Aquae fl.   5   xxxij 

M. 

Sig. :     Thiersch's  solution. 


Exostosis:     See  Hypercementosis 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  223 

Fracture  of  the  Alveolus:  Resulting  from  difficult 
or  clumsy  extraction  or  other  traumatic  causes. 

Treatment :  Remove  loose  pieces  and  smoothen  sharp 
edges  of  the  bone  with  a  fissure  bur  or  carborundum  stone. 
If  the  teeth  are  loose,  they  are  tied  with  silk  ligatures.  If 
the  alveolar  process  is  broken,  replace  it,  if  possible,  and 
if  the  teeth  are  present,  ligate  them  to  sound  neighbors. 
Paint  with  tincture  of  iodine  and  advise  ice  to  be  held  in 
the  moutli  to  reduce  inflammation.  Astringent  mouth 
washes  are  indicated.    ■ 

R. 

Acid,  benzoic 3  j 

Tinct.  kramerise   fl.  q  ss 

Aqu?e  hamamelidis q.  s.  ad.  fl.  5  iv 

M. 
Sig. :     Tablespoonf ul  m  a  glassful  of  warm  water  as 
a  gargle. 


Fractures  of  the  Jaws  :  Upper  Jaw. — It  is  com- 
paratively rare ;  it  is  frequently  accompanied  by  crushing 
of  the  maxillary  sinus  (antrum  of  Highmore)  and  fracture 
of  the  other  bones  of  the  face  and  skull. 

Treatment :  Replace  fragments  by  manipulating 
through  the  mouth  and  nose.  In  vertical  fractures,  an  in- 
terdental splint  is  indicated.  (Gunning's  or  Kingley's  splint 
with  the  necessary  modification.)  Feed  the  patient  on 
li^iuid  diet.     Union  takes  place  in  from  three  to  five  weeks. 

Lower  Jaw. — The  fractures  are  recognized  by  mobil- 
ity, crepitus,  and  dropping  of  the  mouth  on  the  side  of 
the  face. 

Treatment:     If  teeth  are  present  simply  lash  the  lower 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FormuJaru  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


224  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

jaw  firmly  to  the  upper  by  Gilmer's  wire  ligatures  (No.  28 
German  silver  or  brass  wire)  or  by  means  of  Angle's  or 
Lukens  fracture  bands  applied  on  both  sides  of  the  frac- 
ture. Look  after  correct  articulation.  In  complicated  cases, 
an  interdental  splint  with  or  without  external  steel  hooks 
or  a  Gunning  splint  is  indicated  ;  wiring  of  the  fragment;? 
is  sometimes  necessary.  A  suitable  splint  may  be  quickly 
constructed  over  the  articulated  models  from  a  good,  hard 
modeling  compound ;  it  can  be  kept  in  the  mouth  for  a 
month  without  deterioration.  A  chin  boot  made  of  metal, 
vulcanite  or  gutta  percha  is  occasionally  helpful.  In  edent- 
ulous jaws  an  interdental  splint  is  essential.  A  Barton  or 
Black  bandage  is  of  advantage.  Union  will  take  place  in 
from  three  to  five  weeks.  Antiseptic  mouth  washes  are 
indicated.  Feed  the  patient  on  liquid  diet  with  a  hooked 
glass  tube  (short  bent  saliva  ejector)  around  the  molars. 

Resorcinol 3  j 

Zinc,  chlorid gr.  x 

Menthol gr.  xx 

Thymol gr.  xv 

Glycerin A-  o  J 

Alcohol fl-  -^  ij 

Aquse  hvdrogenii  dioxidi  q.  s.  ad.  fl.  fy  viij 
M. 
Sig. :     Teaspoonful    in    half    a    tumblerful    of   warm 
water  as  a  mouth  wash. 


Fracture  of  tiik  Tretii:     If  the  crown  is  fractured, 
replace  it  by  an  artificial  substitute;  if  the  root  is  fractured, 

N".  B. — Parts  as  visod  in  this  Dental  Formvlary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOFMULASY  225 

an  attempt  may  be  made,  in  favorable  cases,  to  save  it  by 
banding.     Callous  union  may  occur  if  the  pulp  recovers. 


Gingivitis,  acute  or  chronic:  An  inflammation  of  the 
gum  tissue. 

Symptoms :  More  or  less  severe  inflammation  of  the 
gums  brought  about  by  local  irritation ;  ill-fitting  dentures 
are  frequently  the  cause.  The  gums  are  turgid,  loosened 
from  the  teeth,  and  upon  slight  irritation  they  bleed  pro- 
fusely. 

Treatment :  Thorough  removal  of  all  deposits  from 
the  teeth  and  especially  from  beneath  the  free  edge  of 
the  gum  margin ;  and  thorough  polishing  of  the  tooth  sur- 
faces. The  inflamed  edge  of  the  gum  is  touched  with  a 
lo  per  cent  solution  of  trichloracetic  acid  or  with  powdered 
copper  sulphate  made  into  a  paste  with  water. 

Cupri  sulphatis 3  j 

Acidi  lactici fl.  5  ss 

M. 
Sig. :     Apply  with   a  platinum   loop   about  the   free 
edge  of  the  gums. 

^      .   .         .  . 

Acidi  borici 3  iij 

Zinci  chloridi gr,  x 

Aquge  hydrogenii  dioxidi fl.  §  ij 

Aquas  menth.  piper q.  s.  ad.  fl.  §  viij 

M. 
Sig.:     A  teaspoonful  in  half  a  glassful  of  hot  water 
as  a  mouth  wash. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Furmulanj  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


226  DENTAL  FOBMULAHY 

Gingivitis  Nudata  (Arkoevy )  :  Acute  ulcerous  gin- 
givitis (Gilmer).  A  comparatively  rare  disease ;  its  onset 
is  sudden.  It  is  confined  to  localized  areas,  seldom  involv- 
ing the  entire  gum  tissue.  "The  lingual  margins  and  fes- 
toons of  the  gums  do  not  participate  at  first  in  the  inflam- 
matory process,  iDUt  later  the  festoons  are  destroyed  and 
deep  pockets  are  formed  in  the  interproximal  spaces.  The 
parts  attacked  present  the  appearance  of  having  been  gnawed 
away  until  most  of  the  gum  tissue  overlying  the  alveolar 
process  immediately  adjoining  the  teeth  has  been  destroyed. 
The  breath  of  the  patient  is  fetid,  the  saliva  ropy,  and  in 
excess  of  the  normal"  (Gilmer).  The  disease  may  last  for 
weeks  and  months. 

Treatment :  Irritating  food  stufifs  are  to  be  avoided. 
Bland  and  slimy  drinks,  such  as  rice  water,  oatmeal  in- 
fusion, etc.,  are  advised,  and  mild  antiseptic  mouth  washes, 
but  no  astringents,  are  indicated. 


Hypertrophy  of  the  Gingivae:  A  pathological 
growth  of  gum  tissue  resulting  from  chronic  irritation 
brought  about  by  ill-fitting  crowns,  calcareous  deposits,  and 
neglected  mouth  hygiene.  The  hypertrophic  growth  may  be 
of  a  fibromatous  nature. 

Treatment :  Simpler  cases  yield  readily  to  local  treat- 
ment ;  remove  the  cause  and  thoroughly  clean  the  mouth 
and  the  teeth  and  apply  cauterants,  i.  e.,  properly  diluted 
solutions  of  chromic  or  trichloracetic  acids.  Larger  areas 
of  hypertrophied  tissues  are  removed  with  the  knife.  In 
severe  cases,  major  surgical  interference  is  necessary. 


Hypercementosis  :     A  circumscribed  increase  of  the 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULARY.  227 

volume  of  the  cementum  of  a  tooth ;  diffuse  growth  is  some- 
times referred  to  as  hypertrophy  of  the  cementum. 

Causes:  Irritation  from  projecting"  root  filHngs,  crown 
finings,  ill-fiitting  bands,  or  other  chronic  irritation  of  the 
pericementum.  Pyorrhoea  alveolaris,  syphiHs.  metal  poison- 
ing (mercury ),  or  the  loss  of  the  opposing  tooth  are  claimed 
to  be  causative  factors. 

Symptoms  :  Usually  not  present.  Gnawing  and  neu- 
ralgic pain  are  met  with. 

Diagnosis :  Difficult.  The  skiagraphic  picture  of  the 
suspected  tooth  may  be  of  value. 

Treatment :  In  suitable  cases  amputation  of  the  root 
is  advisable,  otherwise  extraction,  which,  however,  is  often 
very  difficult  and  usually  accompanied  with  considerable 
bruising  and  damaging  of  the  alveolar  bone. 


Lock-Jaw^  :  Trismus,  either  tonic  or  clonic  spasms  of 
the  muscles  of  mastication.  Tonic  spasms  may  result  from 
difficult  eruption  of  the  lower  third  molars,  faulty  extrac- 
tion, abscesses,  or  periosteal  inflammations  and  severe  in- 
fections  ( actinomycosis ) . 

Treatment :  According  to  the  causes.  Inflammatory 
processes  in  the  early  stages  may  be  abated  by  ice,  or  some- 
times by  dry  heat  applied  externally  (hot  water  bag).  Ab- 
scesses should  be  at  once  opened  and  hot,  wet  fomentations 
applied  externally.  Clonic  spasms  do  not  require  treat- 
ment. In  true  ankylosis,  separation  of  the  ankylosed  joint 
by  an  operation  is  the  only  relief. 


Lux.\Tiox     OF     Tef.th  :     Resulting     from     traumatic 
causes. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  usoil  in  this  Denial  Fonnulary  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


228  DENTAL  FOUMULAEY 

Treatment :  In  complete  luxation  replace  the  teeth  and 
tie  with  silk  ligature  to  the  neighbors.  Apply  Talbot's  glyc- 
erol of  iodine  to  allay  periosteal  disturbances.  Test  for 
pulp  reaction  with  heat,  the  mouth  lamp,  and  a  weak  elec- 
tric current.  If  the  tooth  is  completely  detached  from  its 
socket,  replantation  is  advisable.  Pack  the  cleansed  alveolus 
tightly  with  iodoform  gauze.  Remove  the  pulp,  fill  the 
canal  aseptically,  cut  ofif  about  ^  inch  of  the  apex  and 
sterilize  the  tooth  in  mercuric  chloride  solution  i  :iooo.  If 
the  peridental  membrane  of  the  tooth  is  intact,  keep  the  tooth 
in  physiological  salt  solution,  warmed  to  body  temperature, 
until  ready  for  replantation.  Replace  and  tie  with  silk  liga- 
ture or  hold  the  tooth  in  position  with  a  metal  splint.  Anti- 
sepsis of  the  mouth  is  essential. 


Leucoplakia  (Leucoplakia  oris,  psoriasis  linguae,  ich- 
thyosis buccalis,  smoker's  patch)  : 

Etiology  :  Not  settled ;  constant  chewing,  or  smoking, 
highly  seasoned  food,  rough  edges  of  teeth,  predisposition 
of  the  tongue  and  the  mucous  lining  of  the  mouth,  or  as  a 
result  of  a  former  attack  of  syphilis.  Rarely  seen  below 
thirty  years  of  age;  scarce  in  women. 

Symptoms :  Circumscribed  or  diffused  white  or  blue- 
white  patches ;  smooth,  cornified  or  roughened.  The  epi- 
•thelium  is  much  thickened.  It  is  usually  not  painful ;  in 
some  cases  increased  flow  of  saliva,  in  others  dry  mouth. 

Diagnosis :  Differentiation  from  syphilitic  plaques : 
Its  bluish  white  color,  no  ulcerations  and  its  history.  If 
as  a  result  of  syphilis,  the  latter  is  to  be  regarded  as  the 
primary  disease. 

Treatment:     In  general,  leucoplakia  may  be  harmless; 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOmWLATxY  229 

however,  it  is  occasionally  the  starting  point  of  cancer. 
Bring  the  mouth  in  a,  hygienic  condition ;  alkaline  mouth 
washes  with  a  decoction  of  huckleberries  are  indicated. 
Paint  the  affected  parts  with  balsam  of  Peru  and  cauterize, 
in  the  early  stages  only,  with  chromic  acid  or  lactic  acid. 
Hydrogen  peroxide  solution  (io%)  for  cleansing  the 
plaques  is  useful.  Papain  solution  for  the  digestion  of  the 
plaques  is  recommended.  Prolonged  cauterizing  is  harm- 
ful. In  general,  medicinal  treatment  is  of  little  benefit. 
Surgical  removal  of  the  plaques  by  means  of  the  curette  or 
the  Paquelin  cautery  is  indicated,  if  the  plaques  spread. 

Acid,  chromic 3  ij 

Aquse  destillatje   q.  s.  ad.  fl.  5  iv 

M. 
Sig. :     Paint  with  a  cotton-wrapped  tootpick  on  the 
afifected  surface. 

Fruct.  myrtil %  \] 

Sod.  bicarbonat 5  ij 

Aquge  fervit^   q.  s.  ad.  fl.  3  xvj 

F.  Decoct. 
Sig. :     Undiluted  to  be  used  as  a  mouth  wash. 

Papaini gr.  v 

Glycerini fl.  o  j 

Aquae q.  s.  ad.  fl.  o  ij 

M. 
Sig. :     Paint  upon  the  afifected  surface. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


230  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

Mouth  Wash  Eczema  :  A  peculiar  eczematous  erup- 
tion about  the  external  mouth  caused  by  the  constant  irri- 
tation from  the  use  of  mouth  washes  containing  large  cjuan- 
tities  of  essential  oils,  menthol,  salol.  etc. 

Symptoms :  Scaly  eruptions  about  the  lips  and  chin 
but  more  especially  at  the  corners  of  the  mouth.  Those 
suffering  from  seborrhoea  and  eczema  show  predisposition. 

Treatment :  Prohibition  of  the  mouth  wash,  substitut- 
ing warm  salt  water  as  a  test  solution.  Externally  apply 
zinc  ointment  or  cold  cream. 


Necrosis  of  the  Alveolar  Process:  It  may  result 
from  faulty  arsenic  application  (which  see),  phosphorous 
poisoning   (which  see),  pulp  gangrene,  abscesses,  etc. 

Symptoms :  It  usually  starts  with  a  simple  periositis ; 
later  the  formation  of  abscesses  and  fistulas  occurs.  The 
periosteum  is  destroyed  and  the  bone  feels  rough  to  the 
touch.  Sequestration  of  the  dead  bone  takes  place  in  due 
time. 

Treatment :  If  the  necrosis  is  the  result  of  traumatism, 
the  removal  of  the  loose  bone  spicula  and  antiseptic  treat- 
ment of  the  wound  will  usually  bring  about  a  speedy  re- 
covery. If  a  large  part  of  the  bone  is  involved,  no  inter- 
ference should  be  made  until  sequestration  takes  place.  Free 
evacuation  of  pus  is  essential.  If  a  part  of  the  jaw  is  re- 
moved prosthetic  appliances  are  usually  necessar\'  to  pre- 
serve the  contcjur  of  the  face.  Strong  deodorizing  and  anti- 
septic scjlutions  are  essential. 

Pot.  permanganat 5  ij 

Sig. :     A   few  crystals  in  a  glassful  of  warm  water 
as  a  mouth  wash. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornnilury  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  231 

Zinc  chlorid. gr.  v 

Aquae  hydrogen,  dioxid. 
Aquae  menth.  pip.    .  .aa  q.  s.  ad.  fl.  5  iv 
M. 
Sig. :     A  teaspoonful  in   half    a    glassful   of  warm 
water  as  a  mouth  wash. 


Neuralgia,  tri-facial :  Tic  douloureux ;  Fothergill's 
disease ;  prosopalgia. 

A  disturbance  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves,  manifesting 
itself  in  a  sharp  and  darting  pain,  usually  unilateral. 

Symptoms :  The  pain  is  paroxysmal,  mostly  along  the 
points  of  the  nerve  branches.  It  may  be  located  in  the 
upper  or  lower  jaw,  especially  near  the  supra-  and  the  infra- 
orbital foramen  and  near  the  mental  foramen  Convulsive 
twitching  of  the  muscles  along  the  course  of  the  nerve  is 
observed.  Disturbances  of  nutrition,  anemia,  chlorosis,  an- 
omalies of  menstruation  are  often  responsible.  Neuralgia 
of  the  teeth  proper  is  comparatively  rare.  It  may  be  caused 
by  hypercementosis,  impacted  teeth,  tumors,  empyema  of 
the  maxillary  sinus,  reflex  disturbances,  chronic  constipation, 
etc. 

Treatment :  If  possible,  remove  the  cause.  Careful  ex- 
amination of  the  teeth  for  hidden  cavities  should  be  made. 
In  obscure  cases,  the  X-ray  may  be  of  service.  If  not  of 
dental  origin,  it  should  be  referred  to  the  physician. 

Ungt.  veratrinae o  ss 

Sig. :     Rub  a  small  quantity  over  the  painful  surface 
and  cover  with   cotton   cloth. 

N".  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FoDniilaij/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


232  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 

Chloroformi. 

Alcoholis aa  fl.  5  j 

Tinct.  aconiti fl.  5  ij 

Olei  menth.  pip fl.  5  iij 

M. 
Sig. :     Externally.     Apply  on  cotton  upon  the  pain- 
ful surface. 

•  Aspirini .3  i 

F.  plv.  No.  vi. 
Sig. :     One  powder  every  three  hours. 

.     ^ 

Tinct.  gelsemii    fl.  §  ss 

Sig. :     Eight  drops  three  times  a  day. 


Ostitis  and  Osteomyelitis  :  Inflammation  of  the  jaw 
bone.  It  may  be  idiopathic;  resultant  from  traumatism;  a 
concomitant  expression  of  a  general  disease,  or  an  intoxi- 
cation. Diseased  teeth,  fracture  of  the  jaw,  syphilis,  scurvy, 
mercury  and  phosphorus  poisoning,  and  a  peculiar  infection 
of  the  periosteum  of  the  jaw  bones  in  workers  of  mother- 
of-pearl  are  causative  factors. 

Symptoms  :  Very  painful  swelling  of  the  periosteum ; 
the  lymph  glands  are  afifected  and  the  teeth  are  loosened. 

Treatment :  Poultices  are  frequently  necessary  to 
soften  the  swelling;  if  pus  is  present,  an  incision  is  made 
and  the  periosteal  s'urfaces  are  curetted.  The  wound  is 
washed  with   antiseptics  and  cauterized  with  8%   solution 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  DmUil  Formuhiry  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


VEXTAL  FOBMULAEY  233 

of  zinc  chloride  and  packed  with  gauze.     Antiseptic  mouth 
washes  are  important. 

Zinc.  Chlorid •  •  -gr.  xl 

Aquc-e fl.  5J 

M. 

Sig. :    To  be  used  as  a  swab. 


Pericementitis  :  Inflammation  of  the  pericementum. 
CHnically,  three  stages  may  be  obser\-ed :  Acute,  purulent, 
and  chronic  pericementitis.  Causative  factors  are :  Trauma, 
too  high  fillings,  rapid  separation,  faulty  root  canal  fillings, 
foreign  bodies  between  the  teeth,  calcareous  deposits,  metal 
poisoning  (arsenic,  phosphorous,  mercury),  bacterial  infec- 
tion starting  from  the  apex  or  the  gingival  border,  etc.  As 
secondary  factors  may  be  counted :  Sequences  of  general 
disturbances   (gout,  rheumatism,  syphilis). 

Symptoms :  The  tooth  feels  elongated  on  account  of 
the  swelling  of  the  pericementum.  The  gum  tissue  is  in- 
flamed and  the  swelling  may  become  edematous,  involving 
the  whole  side  of  the  face.  The  pain  is  very  severe ;  it 
•slightly  subsides  with  the  formation  of  the  edema. 

'"Alany  practitioners  have  no  clear  conception  of  the 
diflference  between  pericementitis  and  pulpitis,  inasmuch  as 
each  produces  a  distinct  odontalgia  or  toothache  which  only 
close  observation  will  distinguish  from  the  other.  And 
yet  the  two  conditions  have  little  in  common  except  the 
pain,  and  that  is  not  of  the  same  character.  It  may  be  well 
to  compare  their  pronounced  symptoms  as  an  aid  in 
diagnosis. 

^'.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tbis  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


234 


DENTAL  FOBMULARY 


Pulpitis. 

The  pain  is  of  a  sharp, 
lancinating  character,  and  in 
its  earHer  stages  it  is  dis- 
tinctly paroxysmal. 

The  tooth  is  exquisitely 
sensitive  to  thermal  changes  ; 
in  its  inceptive  state  cold,  and 
in  its  later  condition  heat,  ex- 
acerbating the  pain. 

There  is  no  swelling  of  the 
tissue  about  the  tooth,  and 
no  tenderness  to  pressure  in 
ordinary  cases,  unless  the 
pulp  shall  in  some  way  be 
exposed. 

At  times  it  is  quite  difficult 
to  determine  exactly  which 
tooth  is  affected,  the  pain  be- 
ing fleeting  in  its  nature, 
and  inducing  reflex  symp- 
toms in  other  teeth  and 
tissues. 

The  pain  is  apt  to  be 
worse  upon  going  to  bed, 
and  excitement  and  fatigue 
increase  it. 

It  is  possible  to  bite  upon 
the  tooth  without  any  spe- 
cial sensation,  and  to  use  it 
in  mastication,  if  thermal  ex- 
tremes be  avoided. 


Pericementitis., 
The   pain   is   dull,   steady, 
boring,  throbbing  in  its  char- 
acter, and  is  not  at  all  par- 
oxysmal. 

There  is  no  sensation  to 
changes  of  temperature,  and 
neither  cold  nor  hot  appli- 
cations materially  affect  it. 

The  tooth  becomes  ex- 
ceedingly sore,  and  the  least 
pressure  upon  it  causes  pain. 
In  the  latter  stage  swelling 
is  common. 

There  is  no  trouble  in  de- 
ciding which  tooth  is  the  dis- 
eased one,  the  pain  being 
steady  in  degree  and  in  posi- 
tion, and  the  soreness  readily 
locating  it. 

The  pain  remains  nearly 
constant  without  much  refer- 
ence to  external  conditions 
or  circumstances. 

The  tooth  is  very  sore  to 
the  touch,  and  occlusion  in 
mastication  or  ordinary  shut- 
ting of  the  mouth  giving 
pain,  irrespective  of  thermal 
changes. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Dental  Foriiiulary  mean  quantities 


by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  235 

Tlie  tooth  is  not  elongated,  The  tooth  is  raised  in  its 

nor  does  it  strike  first  in  oc-      socket,    and    strikes    before 
elusion.  -  any  of  the  others  occlude. 

(Barrett.) 

Treatment:  Removal  of  the  cause  is  of  prime  impor- 
tance. If  the  disturbances  result  from  mechanical  causes 
they  usually  yield  readily  to  treatment  after  the  causative 
factors  have  been  eliminated.  Painting  of  the  affected  sur- 
faces with  an  iodine  solution  (Talbot's  iodo-glycerol)  as  a 
palliative  measure  is  of  some  service.  If  the  disturbances 
are  of  chemical  origin,  i.  e. :  arsenic,  pho.sphorous,  etc.;  they 
are  treated  as  outlined  under  their  respective  headings. 

The  disturbances  about  the  apex  of  a  tooth  require 
prompt  removal  of  the  accumulated  putrid  masses  from  the 
root  canals.  The  latter  are  to  be  opened  to  allow  free  drain- 
age. The  avoid  unnecessary  severe  pain,  stability  of  the  tooth 
is  essential  (traction  is  made  with  a  string;  plaster  of  Paris 
or. modeling  compound  splints)  ;  scarification  of  the  highly 
inflamed  gum  tissues  is  of  benefit,  while  in  the  early  stages 
ice  chips  held  between  the  gum  and  the  cheek  are  helpful 
in  reducing  inflammation. 

If  pus  collects  about  the  apex  and  no  read}-  drainage 
is  obtained,  very  intense  pain  is  the  direct  sequence.  An 
endeavor  should  be  made  to  drain  the  pus  through  the  root 
canal  (blind  abscess).  If  this  is  not  possible,  an  opening  is 
made  through  the  gum  tissue  and  the  bone  with  a  fissure 
bur  or  a  small  tubular  knife,  and  an  artificial  fistula  estab- 
lished. If  the  disturbance  is  left  alone,  nature  helps  herself; 
the  pus  may  burrow  through  the  bone  and  gum  tissue  along 
the  line  of  least  resistance,  or  along  the  pericementum  toward 
the  gingival  line.     As  soon  as  free  drainage  is  obtained  the 

X.  "R. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fonnulaii/  mean  quantities 
by  Avciglit. 


236  DENTAL  FOEMULAET 

pain  is  much  mitigated ;  it  may  often  stop  completely.  (See : 
Acute  Alceolar  Abscess.)  With  the  successful  treatment 
of  the  infected  root  canals  and  proper  filling,  the  fistula  will 
close  in  due  time  and  the  pericemental  disturbances  disap- 
pear. If,  on  the  other  hand,  a  dififuse  pus  infiltration  of  the 
entire  pericementum  results,  recovery  is  not  to  be  expected ; 
the  tooth  has  to  be  removed.  Occasionally  we  find  teeth, 
usually  multi-rooted  teeth,  where  the  root  fillings  have  not 
been  successfully  placed,  remnants  of  putrid  matter  are  left 
about  the  apices  and,  as  a  sequence,  the  pericementum  is 
kept  in  a  chronic  state  of  inflammation.  Such  teeth  are  a 
continuous  source  of  trouble.  The  slightest  disturbance 
(cold,  influenza,  menal  or  physical  strain)  may  set  up  a 
renewed  severe  acute  inflammation  with  all  its  sequences 
It  is  then  best  to  remove  the  root  filling,  treat  the  canals 
antiseptically  and  again  restore  the  filling.  Resection  (am- 
putation) of  the  root  is  the  most  promising  procedure. 

Tricresol fl.  o  ij 

Formalini  .  .  .  ; fl.  3  j 

M. 
Sig. :    Mechanically  evacuate  the  pus  and.  on  cotton, 
hermetically  seal  in  the  canals   from  24  to  48  Iiours,  two 
or  three  times — oftentimes  one  treatment  is  sufficient.    (J.  P. 
Buckley.) 

Phenol,  cryst. 

Thymolis aa  o  ij 

Camphorge 5  j 

M. 
Sig. :    Seal  into  root  canal. 

X.   ]',. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Fonnulury  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


DENTAL  FOEilULAET  237 

Zinci  iodidi   ,3  J 

lodi o  V 

Glycerini fl-  5  i 

Aqiise q.  s.  ad.  fl.  5  iv 

M. 
Sig. :    Paint  upon  the  gum  surfaces  of  the  affected 
tooth. 

Tiiict.  aconiti. 

Tinct.  iodi aa  fl.  oij 

Chloroformi fl.  5  j 

M. 

Sig. :    Paint  upon  the  gum  surfaces  of  the  aft'ected 
tooth. 

Morphinae  sulphatis gr.  j 

M.  f.  piL  No.  iv. 
Sig. :   One  pill  every  two  hours  until  relieved. 

Tablet  aspirini gr.  v 

No.  vi. 
Sig. :    One  tablet  every  two  hours  with  a  tumblerful 
of  water. 

Magnes.  sulph.atis ,j  j 

Acid,  sulphur,  dil fl.  5  ss 

Syr.  limonis rt-  o  J 

Aquee q  s.  ad.  fl.  5  iv 

M. 
Sig.:    A  tablespoonful   in   half  a  glassful  of  water 

every  three   hours   until   free   movement   of  the   bowels   is 

established. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  FoiDUilary  meau  quantities 
by  weight. 


238  "  DENTAL  FOIRMULAEY 

Phosphorus  Necrosis  :  This  disease  is  rare  at  present 
on  account  of  improved  hygienic  conditions  in  match  and 
chemical  factories.  Rigid  prophylaxis  is  the  best  prevent- 
ative. 

Symptoms :  Intoxication  is  very  slow,  extending  over 
months.  Carious  teeth  are  the  main  gates  of  entry  of  the 
phosphorus  gases;  it  is  primarily  located  in  the  lower  jaw. 
Severe  pain,  periostitis,  loosening  of  teeth,  osteomyelitis  and 
finally  necrosis,  which  often  involves  the  entire  mandible, 
are  the  results. 

Treatment :  Resection  of  the  involved  bone  along  the 
line  of  demarcation ;  packing  with  iodoform  gauze  and  rigid 
antiseptic.  Patient  must  keep  away  from  factory ;  nutritious 
food  and  tonics  are  recommended  (milk,  cod  liver  oil,  beef, 
wine  and  iron). 

Fl.  extr.  cascara  sagrada f\.  §  j 

Licjuor  ferri  pepto-mangan.,  cj.s.ad.fl.  §  xij 
M. 
Sig. :   Tablespoonful  three  times  daily,  an  hour  after 
meals. 


Pulpitis  :  Inflammation  of  the  pulp. 

I.  Hyperemia.  The  pulp  is  hypersensitive;  heat  and 
cold  produces  short  acute,  but  very  pronounced  expression 
of  pain. 

Causes:  Irritation  brought  about  by  chemical,  physical 
or  mechanical  agencies,  i.  e. :  through  a  carious  defect  or 
til  rough  the  exposure  of  a  tooth  root.     Heat,  resulting  from 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iiscci   in   tliis  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  239 

the  too  rapid  rotating  of  a  disc  in  finishing  a  fiUing  fre- 
quently produces  a  prolonged  h3peremia. 

Treatment :  If  the  insults  result  from  the  sequences  of 
a  carious  defect,  the  cavity  should  be  excavated ;  present 
acids  of  fermentation  are  neutralized  by  washing  with  warm 
alkaline  solutions;  antiseptics,  i.  e. :  phenol  thymol,  eugenol, 
with  astringents  in  the  form  of  tannic  acid  are  applied  and 
a  temporary  filling  is  inserted.  If  hyperemia  results  from 
an  exposed  root,  the  application  of  silver  nitrate  in  the  form 
of  a  concentrated  solution  or  in  substance  upon  the  surface 
of  the  root  gives  temporary  relief. 

Orthoformi .gr.  v  - 

Glycerit.  acidi  tannic  q.  s.  to  make  a  paste. 
M. 
Sig. :    Seal  into  the  cavity  for  48  hours. 

2.  Acute  pulpitis,  partial  and  total.  If  the  pain  of  the 
pulp  is  persistent,  i.  e. :  from  several  hours  to  several  days, 
a  more  or  less  severe  inflammation  of  the  pulp  is  present ;  a 
minute  exposure  may  frequently  be  located  upon  close 
examination. 

Treatment :  In  the  teeth  of  the  young  an  efifort  should 
be  made  in  the  early  stages  of  the  inflammation  to  preserve 
the  pulp  by  palliative  treatment.  Astringents  and  antiseptics 
are  applied  and  the  bottom  of  the  cavity  is  lined  with  a  non- 
conductive  material,  i.  e. :  asbestos  felt.  The  temporary  fill- 
ing must  remain  from  one  to  six  months.  In  the  adult  it  is 
usually  better  practice  to  destroy  the  pulp  at  once  and  replace 
it  by  an  aseptic  root  filling. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


240  DENTAL  F0BMULAE7 

(For  root  filling  materials  and  arsenical  compounds  for 
devitalizing  purposes  see :  Pharmaceutical  Compounds, 
Chapter  7.) 

3.  Purulent  pulpitis,  partial  and  total. 

Diagnosis :  Diffuse  continued  more  or  less  severe  pain 
upon  the  side  of  the  face  where  the  tooth  is  situated.  Pain 
usually  increases  upon  assuming  a  recumbent  position.  This 
form  of  pulpitis  frequently  results  from  cement  and  other 
fillings  placed  into  too  close  proximity  to  the  pulp. 

Treatment :  Palliative  treatment  for  48  hours  before 
the  arsenical  compound  is  applied  to  prevent  violent  pain, 
which  will  always  result  when  arsenic  is  applied  to  an  in- 
flamed pulp.  Mixtures  of  cocain,  eugenol,  thymol,  phenol, 
etc.,  are  sealed  into  the  tooth  as  indicated.  If  possible  the 
pulp  is  relieved  of  blood  and  pus  by  pricking  it  with  a 
sterile  smooth  broach.  After  it  is  divitalized  it  is  removed 
and  an  aseptic  root  filling  substituted.  It  is  often  a  physical 
impossibility  to  remove  all  of  the  pulp  tissue  from  certain 
root  canals ;  the  mummifying  principle  applied  in  such  cases 
is  then  indicated. 

4.  Necrosis  and  Gangrene  of  the  Pulp.  If  the  canals 
are  still  closed  the  preliminary  treatment  consists  in 
opening  the  pulp  chamber  sufficiently  to  allow  the  free 
escape  of  gases;  no  attempt  is  made  at  this  time  to  enter 
the  root  canals.  Small,  loosely  rolled  pledgets  of  cotton 
saturated  with  a  bland  antiseptic  are  placed  in  the  tooth 
and  the  patient  dismissed  for  twenty-four  hours.  On  the 
return  of  the  patient  the  canals  are  opened  and  as  much  as 
possible  of  their  contents  removed.  Strong  antiseptics, 
i.  e. :  a  mixture  of  formaldehyde  solution  and  cresol,  mono- 
chlorphenol, etc.,  may  now  be  sealed  into  the  canal.  If  the 
canals  are  obstructed,  sulphuric  acid    (50%)    followed  by 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAHY  241 

sodium  dioxide  is  pumped  into  the  canals  to  gain  entrance 
by  dissolving  the  calcarious  deposits.  After  thorough  dis- 
infection the  canals  are  aseptically  filled.  (For  antiseptic 
compounds  and  root  filling  materials  used  in  this  connection 
see:    Pharmaceutical  Compounds,  Chapter  7.) 


Pyorrhoea  Alveolaris  :  A  chronic  destruction  inflam- 
mation of  the  pericementum  with  a  more  or  less  severe  in- 
flammation of  the  gingivae  and  necrosis  of  the  alveolar  bone 
m  the  region  of  the  afifected  tooth.    (Miller.) 

Causes  :  Local:  Salivary  and  serumnal  calculus,  chronic 
irritation  from  ill-fitting  dentures,  distorted  articulation, 
orthodontia  aippliances  and  other  sources.  General:  Gout, 
rheumatisnij  diabetes  mellitus,  locomotor  ataxia,  and  other 
constitutional  diseases.  Metal  poisoning  and  probably  pre- 
disposition. 

Symptoms :  The  disease  begins  with  a  slight  loosening 
of  the  affected  tooth,  gingivitis  and  subsequent  formation  of 
a  pocket.  Pus  is  not  always  present  in  the  early  stages ; 
later  it  ma}-  be  dislodged  by  pressure  upon  the  pocket.  The 
gingivae  become  detached  from  the  tooth  and  necrosis  of  the 
alveolus  follows  :  There  is  little  fetor  from  the  mouth ;  the 
disease  usually  produces  little  inconvenience  to  the  patient  in 
the  earlier  stages. 

Treatment :  The  removal  of  all  deposits  from  the  roots 
with  suitable  instruments  is  of  prime  importance.  The 
pockets  are  washed  out  with  hot  antiseptic  solutions  and 
cauterized.  Trichloracetic  acid,  10 — 25*/^,  aromatic  sul- 
phuric acid,  a  saturated  solution  of  copper  sulphate  in  hot 
lactic  acid,  etc.,  are  to  be  recommended.     Loose  teeth  are 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fornndary  mean  quantities 
by  -n-eisrlit. 


242 


DENTAL  FOBMULABT 


ligated  to  their  sound  neighbors  or  held  in  permanent  posi- 
tion by  fixed  metal  splints.  Articulation  is  restored  and  the 
mouth  is  brought  in  a  hygienic  condition.  The  gums  are 
saturated  with  a  concentrated  zinc  iodide  solution  and  fre- 
quently massaged.  The  continuous  use  of  astringent  and 
antiseptic  mouth  washes  are  highly  indicated. 

Uric  acid  diathesis  is  held  to  be  the  sole  cause  of 
pyorrhoea  alveolaris  by  some  writers.  The  copious  drinking 
of  water,  especially  weak  alkaline  water  (lithia)  together 
with  a  w'ell-regulated  diet  and  proper  hygienic  measures  will 
be  of  marked  benefit.  A  suitable  uric  acid  free  diet  may 
be  easily  selected  from  the  following  dietary : 


Allowed  : 
Water,  especially  weak  al- 
kaline mineral  water. 
Very  weak  tea. 


White  meat  of  chicken, 
turkey,  quail. 

Meat  soups  in  small  quan- 
tities only. 

All  cereals,  rice  and  break- 
fast foods. 

All  green  vegetables. 

Cabbage  in  moderation. 
Dried  fruits  and  nuts. 
All  breads. 


Dietary. 

Prohibited  : 

All  raw  meats  (beef,  mut- 
ton and  pork). 

All  glandular  tissues  (kid- 
ney, liver  and  sweetbreads). 

Asparagus,  celery,  rad- 
ishes. 

Beans  and  peas. 


Cofifee. 


and 


All     liquors,     wines 
spirits. 

Pastry  and  confections. 

Sharp  sauces  and  mayon- 
naise. 


Eggs  in  moderation. 
Milk. 


Mushrooms. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Denial  Foninildii/  laoan  (jiiaiititics 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  F0E2IULAIiY  243 

As  a  solvent  of  the  iiratic  tophi  hexamethylene.  also 
known  as  urotropine,  formine,  saliformine  and  cystogen,  is 
recommended.  If  the  underlying  cause  is  a  general  disease, 
the  co-operation  of  the  family  physician  should  be  secured. 

Lithii  citratis gr.  v 

Tablet,  No.  L. 

Sig. :    One  tablet  dissolved  in  a  tumblerful  of  water 
five  times  a  day. 

Hexamethylenamin?e %  ss 

Colchicinje    gr.   ss 

M.  f.  tablet  Xo.  LX. 
Sig. :    One  tablet  dissolved  in  a  tumblerful  of  water 
five  times  a  day. 


Stomatitis,  /Aphthous  :  Primarily  a  disease  of  child- 
hood. Small,  round  ulcers  of  a  grayish  color  surrounded 
by  a  red,  narrow  border ;  occasionally  three  or  four  ulcers 
will  coalesce  to  a  larger  one.  It  is  found  principally  upon  the 
surfaces  of  the  tongue  and  upon  the  buccal  mucosa.  Espe- 
cially prone  to  be  present  at  the  time  of  the  first  dentition ; 
rarely  in  the  adult. 

Symptoms:  Painful  and  burning  mouth;  slight  fever. 
The  salivary  secretions  are  increased.  Usually,  in  ten  to 
fifteen  days  the  ulcers  disappear  without  leaving  a  scar. 

Treatment :  Perfect  cleansing  of  the  child's  mouth  and 
the  utensils  employed  in  nursing,  ^^'ashing  of  the  child's 
mouth  with  a  two  percent  boric  acid  solution  or  with  slight 
astringent  mixtiu-es.     Use  the  finger,  wrapped  with  cotton 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formidarj/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


244  DENTAL  FOEMULARY 

cloth  and  dipped  into  the  warmed  sokition.  An  eight  per- 
cent sohition  of  zinc  chloride  used  as  a  caustic  upon  the 
ulcers  acts  most  favorably.  If  the  mouth  is  very  painful  a 
one  percent  cocaine  solution  may  be  carefully  painted  over 
the  afifected  surfaces.  Silver  nitrate  is  contra  indicated. 
Keep  the  bowels  open. 

Zinci  chloridi gr.  xl 

Aquse   q.  s.  ad.  fl.  §  j 

M. 
Sig. :    Apply  upon  the  ulcers  with  a  small  pledget  of 
cotton  wrapped  about  the  point  of  a  toothpick. 

Glycerol,  acidi  tannici fl.  5  ij 

Aquse   q.   s.  ad.  fl.  §  J 

M. 
Sig. :   To  be  painted  upon  the  inflamed  spots. 

Acidi  borici o  ij 

Glycerini  A-  o  J 

Aquas q.   s.   ad.  fl.  5  iv 

M. 
Sig. :   Use  as  a  mouth  wash. 


Stomatitis,  Catarrhal:  Acute  or  chronic.  Follicular 
stomatitis.  Inflammation  of  the  mucous  linings  of  the  mouth. 

Causes :  Neglected  mouth  hygiene ;  ragged  edges  of 
teeth ;  calcareous  deposits  or  secondary  expressions  of  gen- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  245 

eral  diseases,  i.  e. :  influenza,  or  other  infectious  diseases, 
anemia,  and  during  pregnancy. 

Symptoms  :  Red  and  swollen  mucous  linings,  increased 
salivation,  thickened  papillae  and  turgid  gums.  The  tongue 
is  usually  swollen  and  coated  and  shows  the  imprints  of  the 
teeth.  A  pronounced  fetor  from  the  mouth  exists  with 
painful  deglutition  and  speech ;  fever  is  more  or  less  present. 

Treatment :  Clean  up  the  mouth ;  smooth  all  ragged 
edges  about  the  teeth ;  loose  roots  must  be  removed.  Smok- 
ing is  to  be  prohibited.  If  artificial  dentures  are  worn  they 
should  be  temporarily  removed.  The  bowels  should  be  kept 
open  by  a  saline  aperient :  the  gum  edges  are  cauterized  with 
aromatic  sulphuric  acid  or  copper  sulphate  in  substances  and 
rigid  mouth  hygiene  is  enforced. 

Alagnesii  sulphatis 5  j 

Acid,  sulphur,  dilut fl.  5  ss 

Syrup,  limonis fl.  .^  j 

Aquje q.   s.    ad.   fl.   .5  iv 

M. 
Sig. :    A  tablespoonful  in  half  a  glass  of  water  every 
four  hours. 

^      .  .  . 

Acid,  benzoici . o  j 

Tinct.  krameriae .  .fl.  5  ss 

01.  menth.  pip gtt.  xv 

Alcohol q.  s.  ad.  fl.  f,  iv 

M. 
Sig. :    Half  a  teaspoonful  in  half  a  glassful  of  warm 
water  as  a  mouth  wash. 

X.  B.— Parts  as  nseil  in  this  Dental  ForniuUinj  mean  quantities 
bv  weieht. 


246  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Stomatitis,  Gangrenous  :  Noma ;  cancrum  oris ; 
water-cancer. 

An  acute,  rapidly  progressive  gangrenous  ulceration  of 
the  mouth,  leading  to  extensive  sloughing  and  destruction 
of  the  affected  parts.  It  is  brought  about  by  an  infection 
which  is  probably  specific  in  its  nature.  The  disease  pro- 
gresses very  rapidly;  it  is  accompanied  by  an  intense  gan- 
grenous odor  and  nearly  always  ends  fatally.  Its  treatment 
belongs  to  the  domain  of  the  general  surgeon. 


Stomatitis,  Ulcerative  :  Various  forms  of  severe  dis- 
turbances of  the  soft  tissues. 

I.  Mercurial  stomatitis:  It  results  from  the  internal 
administration  of  mercury  or  from  inhalation  of  mercury 
vapors.  Usually  starting  about  the  posterior  teeth,  more  so 
if  ragged  tooth  structure  is  a  source  of  irritation.  The  gums 
are  much  swollen  and  loosened  from  the  teeth ;  the  teeth 
are  loose  and  covered  with  a  thick,  slimy  sordes  of  intense 
foul  odor;  salivation  is  much  increased.  Ulcerous  destruc- 
tion of  the  gum  tissue  terminates  in  gangrene.  Caries  and 
necrosis  of  the  alveolar  process  and  jaw  bones  may  be  the 
result. 

Treatment :  All  mechanical  disturbances  have  to  be  re- 
moved from  the  mouth ;  loose  teeth  and  useless  roots  are 
extracted  and  the  mercury  treatment  has  to  be  stopped  tem- 
porarily. Smoking  and  spiced  or  acid  foods  are  prohibited. 
Thorough  hygiene  of  the  mouth  is  of  prime  importance. 
Hydrogen  peroxide  in  combination  with  a  metal  astringent 
is  the  sovereign  remedy  for  this  affection.  The  much  lauded 
potassium  chlorate  administration  is  of  doubtful  value.  In 
severe  cases  of  ulceration,  iodoform  or  its  odorless  substi- 
tutes applied  upon  the  corroded  surfaces  are  of  much  benefit. 

N.  B, — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  24Y 

Zinci  chloridi gr.  x 

Resorcinoli? 5  j 

Thymolis gr.  xx 

Alcoholis -. fl-  o  ij 

Glycerini fl.  5  J 

Aquas  hyclrog.  clioxidi.  .  .q.  s.  ad.  fl.  5  viii 
M. 
Sig. :  A  teaspoonful  in  half  a  glassful  of  warm  water 
every  hour  as  a  mouth  wash. 

Iodoform! 3  j 

Glycerini fl.  3  ij 

m' 

Sig. :   To  be  painted  upon  the  ulcerated  surfaces. 

2.  Scorbutic  stomatitis :  Scurvy,  scorbutis  purpurea. 
General  malnutrition  or  anemia  brought  about  by  an  infec- 
tion resultant  from  dietary  insufficiency  of  fresh  vegetables. 
The  gums  are  much  swollen,  spongy  and  ready  to  bleed  upon 
the  slightest  irritation.  Malaise,  debility  and  mental  lethargy 
are  pronounced.  Refer  to  the  physician  for  the  treatment 
of  the  general  condition. 


Shock  :  Sudden  vital  depression  due  to  injury  or  emo- 
tion making  an  untoward  impression  upon  the  nervous  sys- 
tem. Its  severity  depends  upon  the  cause,  i.  e. :  it  may  be 
slight,  transient,  profound  or  even  fatal.  Recovery  is  fol- 
lowed by  more  or  less  quickening  of  the  pulse  and  the  res- 
piration and  an  abnormally  high  temperature. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fonuulary  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


248  DENTAL  FOEMVLABY 

Treatment :  It  requires  prompt  attention.  The  body 
is  placed  in  a  recumbent  position  with  the  head  lowered  and 
the  patient  is  wrapped  in  warm  blankets  and  hot  water  bot- 
tles are  placed  about  the  extremities.  Quickly  acting  stim- 
ulants, viz.,  whiskey  or  brandy  by  the  mouth  or  hypoder- 
mically  in  one-half  to  one  drachm  doses,  should  be  given 
very  freely  assisted  by  strong,  hot  coffee.  The  heart  is  sup- 
ported with  digitalis  and  atropine.  When  there  has  been 
much  hemorrhage,  copious  draughts  of  hot  liquids  are  in- 
dicated. Recovery  from  shock,  if  it  occurs  at  all,  is  usually 
quite  speedy. 


Swallowing  Artificl\l  Dentures:  Artificial  den- 
tures, like  other  foreign  bodies,  may  accidentally  be  swal- 
lowed. According  to  Kleinmann  the  following  points  should 
be  carefully  observed  in  the  construction  of  dentures : 

(l)  Great  care  should  be  exercised  in  regard  to  fasten- 
ing dentures  in  the  mouth.  (2)  It  is  best  to  advise  the 
patient  to  remove  such  substitutes  during  sleeping  hours. 
(3)  Epileptics  should  quickly  remove  the  artificial  teeth  in 
the  beginning  of  an  attack  (aurea  epileptica).  (4)  Before 
administering  a  general  anesthetic,  artificial  substitutes  must 
be  removed  from  the  mouth.  (5)  Dentures  should  not  be 
made  too  small  and  too  many  clasps  and  sharp  corners 
should  be  avoided. 

Diagnosis :  The  oesophageal  probe  and  the  Roentgen 
ray  are  sure  mean^. 

Treatment:  If  the  denture  is  caught  in  the  pharynx, 
the  coin  catcher  or  other  suitable  instrument  may  help  to 
extract  it.  If  lodged  in  the  oesophagus,  it  may  be  possible 
to  gently  force  it  into  the  stomach  by  means  of  a  sound. 
If  lodged  in  the  stomach  or  the  intestines  an  attempt  should 


N.  B. — Parts  os  uso<l  in  this  Dental  Fonmilary  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


DEXTAL  FOEMULAEY  249 

be  made  to  facilitate  the  removal  of  the  denture  through 
the  natural  way,  viz. :  the  intestines.  The  patient  should  eat 
large  quantities  of  asparagus,  oatmeal  porridge,  boiled  rice, 
or  mashed  potatoes,  mixed  to  a  thick  mush  with  milk  and 
white  crochet  cotton  cut  in  pieces  two  inches  long.  The 
meal  should  be  repeated  every  three  hours.  After  the  third 
portion  is  taken,  half  an  ounce  of  castor  oil  is  administered. 
Avoid  purgatives  in  the  beginning.  The  object  is  to  distend 
the  intestines  and  to  entangle  the  dentur^  in  the  cotton 
threads.  This  diet  may  be  continued  for  several  days.  If 
the  stomach  or  the  bowels  persist  in  retaining  the  denture, 
an  operation,  should  be  resorted  to. 


Syncope:  A  more  or  less  sudden  failure  of  the  heart; 
extreme  state  of  prostration. 

Treatment:  Fresh  air,  horizontal  position  of  the  patient, 
opening  of  obstructing  garments  and  massage  of  the  heart ; 
dashing  of  cold  water  in  the  face  and  irritating  substances, 
like  ammonia  and  amyl  nitrite,  for  inhalation.  (For  de- 
tailed description  see  the  treatment  of  accidents  of  general 
anethesia.) 


Syphilis  of  the  ]\Iouth  :  The  hard  chancre  (Hun- 
tarian)  is  the  typical  initial  lesion  of  syphilis  which  usually 
appears  about  three  weeks  after  infection  at  the  point  of 
inoculation.  It  is  more  typical  in  men  than  in  women.  It 
is  a  definite  round  or  oval  ulcer,  having  a  sharplv  defined 
border  and  presenting  a  corroded  surface  which  is  covered 
with  a  whitish  lard-like  detritus  and  which  secretes  a  thin 
serous  fluid.    The  edges  are  often  ragged  and  undermined. 

X.  B. — Paits  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quautitics 
bv  M-cight. 


250  DENTAL  FORMULAB¥ 

Swelling  of  the  neighboring  lymph  glands  occurs  in  the  early 
stages  of  the  disease.  Of  all  extra-genital  chancres  65% 
are  located  about  the  mouth  (lips,  throat,  tongue  and  buccal 
cavity).  The  secondary  manifestations  appear  from  four 
to  eight  weeks  after  the  initial  lesion  and  are  ushered  in 
with  fever,  malaise,  and  headache.  A  typical  sore  throat 
makes  its  appearance  early.  The  diagnosis  is  often  dififiicult 
in  the  early  stages ;  the  presence  of  certain  skin  eruptions 
(roseola)  and  the  mucous  patches  make  the  diagnosis 
certain. 

"There  are  several  points  which  all  syphilides  have  in 
common,  and  which,  taken  together,  may  be  considered  as 
pathognomonic  of  syphilis. 

1.  Syphilitic  rashes  or  syphilides,  are  superficial.  They 
are  situated  in  the  capillary  layer  or  the  corium  of  the  skin 
and  extend  only  superficially.  .  There  is  no  tendency,  as  in 
tertiary  lesions,  to  extend  into  the  deep  tissue,  and  very 
little  tendency  to  increase  peripherally,  though  two  or  more 
closely  situated  lesions  may  coalesce. 

2.  It  is  only  the  epidermis  overlying  the  syphilides 
that  is  destroyed  and  it  is  replaced  by  new  epithelium. 

3.  If  the  lesion  is  not  contaminated  by  pus  cocci,  there 
is  no  tendency  to  ulcerate. 

The  epidermis  is  replaced  and  does  not  leave  a  scar. 

4.  There  is,  however,  a  deposit  of  pigment  where  the 
syphilide  occurred,  which  is  of  a  characteristic  ham  or  cop- 
per color.  This  spot  may  disappear  very  shortly,  leaving  no 
trace.  It  may  appear  immediately  or  its  appearance  may  be 
delayed  a  few  days. 

6.  Syphilitic  rashes  may  or  may  not  itch. 

7.  They  are  symmetrical  on  both  sides  of  the  body. 

8.  The  roseola  disappears  on  pressure. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  DciiUil  Fonmilary  mean  quantities 
by  we i gilt. 


DENTAL  FOKMULARl  251 

The  mucous  patch  develops  upon  mucous  surfaces  of 
the  skin  and  it  is  similar  in  structure  to  a  papule,  but  it 
secretes  a  glairy  fluid  which  is  highly  infected.  If  inocu- 
lated into  a  healthy  person,  a  chancre  will  always  result  at 
the  point  of  infection.  Mucous  patches  are  not  painful  and 
seldom  give  rise  to  inconvenience.  In  the  mouth,  the  first 
manifestation  of  the  secondary  stage  of  syphilitic  infection 
is  the  appearance  of  a  general  dull  red  erythema  involving 
the  entire  fauces.  The  erythema  soon  fades,  leaving  sym- 
metrically disposed  erythematous  spots  on  both  sides  of  the 
palate,  the  walls  of  the  pharynx,  the  pillars  of  the  fauces, 
and  sides  of  the  tongue." 

Tertiary  manifestations  may  occur  from  two  to  three 
vears  or  even  fifteen  years  after  the  primary  infection.  Gum- 
mata,  viz,,  small  defined  accumulations  of  cells,  which  show 
a  tendency  to  break  down  into  ulcers  and  destroy  surround- 
ing tissues.  The  gummata  of  the  palates  destroy  the  soft 
and  hard  portions  equally  rapid ;  necrosis  of  the  bone  results. 
The  ulcer  finally  heals  but  leaves  a  round  perforation  which 
communicates  with  the  nasal  cavity.  Hereditary  syphilis  is 
characterized  by  typical  imperfections  of  the  permanent 
teeth  usually  confined  to  the  upper  incisors ;  they  present 
crescent-like  peculiar  excavations  at  their  incisive  edges  and 
they,  with  the  other  teeth,  may  show  pitted  surfaces,  irregu- 
larity of  position  and,  in  general,  weak  structure.  Patho- 
gnomonic signs  of  inherited  syphilis  are :  the  presence  of 
malformed  teeth,  interstitial  keratitis  and  otitis  media 
(Hutchinson's  trias). 

Treatment :  It  is  to  be  left  to  the  physician.  The  oral 
cavity  of  the  syphilitic  should  be  brought  in  perfect  order 
before  medicinal  treatment  is  inaugurated.  This  factor  will, 
to  a  very  large  extent,  prevent  the  possible  occurrence  of 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  iu  this  Denial  Fonindari/  iiieau  quantitios 
by  weight. 


252 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY 


mercurial  stomatitis.  The  teeth  should  be  scrupulously 
cleaned  and  kept  in  that  condition  during  the  treatment ;  all 
useless  roots  are  removed  and  present  cavities  filled.  The 
frequent  use  of  astringent  and  antiseptic  mouth  washes  are 
essential.  The  greatest  care  is  to  be  exercised  by  the  ope- 
rator to  work  with  sterilized  instruments  only  to  prevent  a 
possible  infection  of  himself  or  of  his  patients.  All  instru- 
ments used  during  treatment  must  be  sterilized  by  boiling. 


Differential   Diagnosis. 


Syphilitic  Sore  Throat. 

History  of  infection. 

Inflammation  slight. 

Little  swelling. 

Slight  rise  in  temperature. 

Little  pain. 

No  difficulty   in   swallowing 

and  opening  mouth. 
Symmetrically  disposed. 

Syphilitic  Sore  Throat. 
Syphilitic  history. 

May   be   in   children,   if    so 

hereditary. 
No  emaciation. 
Little  fever  and  pain. 
Hoarseness,  no  dysphagia  or 

aphonia. 
Ulcer   sharply    defined    with 

edges. 


Acute  Tonsilitis. 

No  specific  history. 
Liflammation  much  greater. 
Much  swelling. 
Temperature  high. 
Pain  very  severe. 
Difficulty  in  opening  mouth 

and  swallowing. 
Unusual  unilateral. 

Tubercular  Sore  Throat. 

Tubercular       history.       N  o 

syphilitic  history. 
LTsually  adults. 

Rapid  emaciation. 

High  fever,  much  pain. 

Aphonia,  dysphagia,  dysp- 
nea. 

Ulcer  superficial,  indefinite 
edges,  not  undermined. 


N.  11 — PartK  as  nsod   in  tliis 
by  we i gilt. 


Dental  ForDnilari/  mean  ((uantities 


Undermined. 

Situated  on  a  thickened  base 


with  surrounding  area  of 
redness. 
Duration  brief. 

Syphilitic  Ulcer  of 
Tonsil. 

SwelHng      and      induration 

slight. 
Usually  bilateral. 
Syphilitic  history. 
Ulcer  has  indurated  base. 
Edges  sharply  defined. 

Undermined. 
May  be  superficial  or  deep. 
Little  or  no  pain. 

No  cachexia. 

Discharge  not  so  ofl^ensive. 

Mucous  Patches. 

Duration  short. 
Round  or  oval,  smaller. 

Seldom  on  cheek. 

Pain  very  severe  before  and 
under  surface  of  tongue. 

Patches  thinner. 

Glands  involved. 

Grayish  perforated  appear- 
ance. 

Progresses  rapidly. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  253 

Anemic  mucous  membrane. 
Cancer  of  Tonsil. 


Much  swelling  and  indura- 
tion. 

Usually  unilateral. 

No  history  of  s\philis. 

No  indurated  base. 

Edges  not  undermined,  gray- 
ish. 

Profuse  granulations. 

Pain  very  severe  before  and 
after  ulceration. 

Cachexia  marked. 

Fetid  discharge. 

Leucoplakia  Buccalis. 

May  last  for  years. 

Form  irregular,  may  grow 
quite  large. 

Frequently  on  cheek. 

Never  found  in  these  loca- 
tions. 

Patches  thickened. 

If  involved,  only  later. 

No  carcinomatous  tendency. 

Patches  grayish  or  red. 

Tendency    to    develop    into 

carcinoma. 
Patches  verv  white. 

(L.  Lake  Baldwin.) 


N.  B. — Parts  ns  used  in  tliis  Denial  FonnuJani  mean  qiiautities 
bv  weifflit. 


254  DENTAL  F0BMULAE7 

Thrush  :  White  mouth ;  soor  muguet ;  parasitic  sto- 
matitis. 

An  inflammation  of  the  mucous  hning  of  the  mouth 
from  a  parasitic  fungus,  oidiiiin  albicans,  manifesting  itself 
in  pain,  disturbed  degkitition,  disorders  of  digestion  and  of 
the  bowels. 

Symptoms:  The  mucous  lining  of  the  oral  cavity  is 
covered  with  a  whitish  thick  deposit  which  may  be  lifted  up 
by  an  instrument.  Thrush  fungi  are  seen  on  microscopical 
examination.  The  pain  varies  with  the  severity  of  the 
disease. 

Diagnosis :    Presence  of  thrush  fungi. 

Treatment:  Absolute  cleanliness  of  the  mouth,  alkaline 
mouth  washes  and  painting  of  the  affected  surfaces  with 
borax  or  salicylic  acid  solutions. 

Sodii  boratis 3  ij 

Glycerini    fjss 

Aquae q.  s.  ad  f^ij 

M. 
Sig. :   Apply  3  or  4  times  daily. 

Acidi  salicylici 3"j 

Alcoholis    foij 

Glycerini q.  s.  ad  f^j 

M. 
Sig. :   Paint  upon  afifected  surfaces  3  times  daily. 
TuMOR.s   OF   THE    MouTH :     All    forms    of    tumorous 
sarcomatous  growths,  known  as  epulis,  are  specially  prone 
growths  are  found  in  the  mouth.    Upon  the  gums,  giant-cell 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOTiMULAT^Y  255 

to  occur.  They  have  their  origin  in  the  periosteum  of  the 
tooth  and  they  are  benign  in  their  nature.  Sarcoma  and 
carcinoma  are  rarely  found  upon  the  gums.  From  the 
periosteum  may  develop  fibroma,  myxoma,  sarcoma,  carci- 
noma, c}sts,  etc.  In  the  floor  of  the  mouth,  retention  cysts 
are  frequent.     (See  Ranula.) 

Treatment :  Epulis  is  usually  pedunculated ;  it  is  re- 
moved with  the  knife  or  by  the  galvanic  cautery ;  care  being 
taken  to  destroy  the  peduncle  at  its  starting  point,  other- 
wise it  will  recur  in  a  short  time.  (For  the  treatment  of 
the  retention  cysts,  see  Ranula.) 

Diagnosis  and  treatment  of  all  larger  tumors  are  to  be 
referred  to  the  surgeon. 


Wounds  are  breaks  in  the  continuity  of  the  tissues. 
They  may  be  incised,  made  by  a  cutting  instrument ;  lacer- 
ated, resulting  from  crushing  or  tearing;  or  penetrating, 
made  by  a  pointed  instrument.  Wounds  frequently  become 
infected. 

Treatment — General ;  to  stop  the  hemorrhage,  tie  the 
vessels  or  pack  the  wounds ;  remove  crushed  or  lacerated 
tissues  and  close  the  wound  by  a  suture  or  by  a  protective 
(collodion,  adhesive  plaster).  Infected  wounds  with  pus 
formation  require  prompt  incision  and  pus  evacuation.  Re- 
move detritus  by  syringing  and,  if  necessary,  with  a  curette. 
Dress  with  wet  hot  gauze  soaked  in  solution  of  phenol,  2%, 
or  mercuric  bichloride,  i  in  5000.  Wounds  in  the  mouth 
heal  comparatively  readily ;  antisepsis  should  be  rigidly 
enforced. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornuilari/  mean  quaiititips 
by  weifflit. 


256  DENTAL  FOSMULABY 

TREATMENT  OF  ACCIDENTS  OF  GENERAL  AND  LOCAL 

ANESTHESIA. 

The  disturbances  resulting  from  the  administration  of 
anesthetics,  which  to  a  more  or  less  degree  involve  the 
various  functions  and  tissues  of  the  body,  may  conveniently 
be  classified  as  those  affecting,  first,  the  digestive  apparatus ; 
second,  the  circulation ;  third,  the  respiration,  and  fourth,  the 
nervous  system.  Disturbances  in  the  digestive  apparatus 
usually  manifest  themselves  in  two  distinct  varieties — in 
nausea  and  in  vomiting.  By  nausea  we  understand  that 
well-known  sickening  feeling,  accompanied  by  retching  and 
a  desire  to  vomit.  It  is  the  direct  result  of  reflex  move- 
ments of  the  pharynx,  esophagus  and  stomach,  and  is  most 
likely  caused  by  the  irritating  vapor  of  the  anesthetic.  It  is 
primarily  noticed  in  connection  with  the  administration  of 
chloroform,  ether,  and  ethyl  bromide,  and  rarely  with  ethyl 
chloride  or  nitrous  oxide  gas.  Treatment  is  seldom  called 
for,  as  nature  usually  helps  herself.  If  we  wish  to  overcome 
nausea  by  drug  administration,  small  doses  of  spirit  of  pep- 
permint or  of  a  valerian  preparation  are  recommended  ;  espe- 
cially validol,  a  compound  of  menthol  and  valerianic  acid, 
deserves  to  be  mentioned.  Vomiting  results  from  compli- 
cated conjoint  movements  of  the  diaphragm,  the  stomach 
walls  and  the  glottis.  It  is  naturally  oftener  noticed  in  cases 
where  a  full  meal  is  taken  shortly  before  the  anesthetic  is 
administered ;  it  rarely  occurs  in  laughing  gas  narcosis.  By 
vomiting  the  stomach  empties  itself,  and,  except  dieting  for 
a  short  time,  no  further  treatment  is  required.  It  is  essential 
to  clear  the  mouth  and  throat  from  all  vomited  matter  as 
soon  as  possible  to  avoid  obstruction' of  the  air  passages. 

Disturbances    of   the    circulation    are    very    dangerous. 
While  they  can  not  be  directly  observed  upon  the  organs 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOT^MrLAT^T  257 

of  circulation  or  the  blood,  fortunately  they  manifest  them- 
selves externally  to  the  trained  eye  by  various  color  mani- 
festations— cyanosis  or  extreme  pallor.  Cyanosis  is  the  ex- 
pression of  severe  congestive  hyperemia,  resulting  from  ac- 
cumulation of  venous  blood — a  subcharge  of  carbonic  acid. 
The  blue  color  appears  primarily  on  the  end  organs  of  the 
body — the  lips,  cheeks,  fingers,  nose,  etc.  Cyanosis  is  al- 
ways present  in  dyspnea  and  asphyxia.  Lipothymia,  or 
fainting,  is  a  temporary  inhibition  of  the  functions  of  the 
brain,  resulting  from  cerebral  anemia,  usually  accompanied 
by  more  or  less  complete  inhibition  of  all  senses.  If  the  heart 
should  stop  completely,  general  collapse  may  result.  A  spe- 
cific variety  of  collapse  which  is  marked  by  the  suddenness 
of  complete  heart  failure  is  referred  to  as  syncope.  This 
syncope,  when  occurring  in  the  early  stages  of  administering 
a  narcotic,  and  when  accompanied  by  a  typical  staring  or 
enlarged  or  reduced  pupils,  indicates  idiosyncrasy  to  the 
narcotic  used.  The  treatment  of  the  disturbances  of  circu- 
lation consists  in  applying  mechanical  and  chemical  means 
to  bring  about  increased  or  renewed  heart  action.  Artificial 
respiration  and  powerful  rhythmic  compression  of  the  heart's 
region  are  essential.  The  compression  of  the  heart  is  best 
accomplished  by  standing  on  the  left  side  of  the  patient  and 
forcefully  pressing  with  the  right  thumb  into  the  region 
between  the  apex  of  the  heart  and  the  left  wall  of  the 
sternum ;  the  left  hand  should  be  placed  over  the  right 
thoracic  region  of  the  patient  to  steady  the  body,  and  com- 
pression should  be  applied  about  a  hundred  times  a  minute.- 
Slapping  the  face  and  chest  of  the  patient  with  towels  wrung 
out  in  cold  water  acts  as  an  active  reflex  stimulant.  Xelaton 
suggests  lowering  the  head,  or  complete  inversion  of  the 
body,  to  promote  rapid  flow  of  blood  to  the  anemic  brain. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


258  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Both  means  produce  excellent  results.  Stimulation  by  chem- 
ical agents  consists  of  applying  strong  irritating  substances 
to  the  nostrils.  In  the  early  stages  of  collapse,  ammonia, 
in  the  form  of  smelling  salts  or  in  its  various  solutions,  acetic 
ether,  eau  de  Cologne,  etc.,  are  indicated.  As  a.  powerful 
dilator  of  the  peripheral  vessels  the  vapors  of  amyl  nitrite 
are  exceedingly  useful  by  placing  three  to  five  drops  of  this 
fluid  on  a  napkin  and  holding  it  before  the  nostrils  for  in- 
halation ;  flushing  of  the  face  and  an  increase  of  the  fre- 
quency of  the  pulse  follow  almost  instantly.  Nitroglycerin 
solution  manifests  a  similar  typical  nitrite  action.  Aromatic 
spirit  of  ammonia,  in  half-teaspoonful  doses,  well  diluted, 
is  much  lauded  for  such  purposes.  Perfect  respiration  is 
absolutely  essential  to  aerate  the  blood  in  circular  dis- 
turbances. 

Disturbances  of  respiration  are  either  mechanical  or 
functional  in  their  nature.  To  avoid  possible  mechanical 
obstruction  during  narcosis,  which  may  occlude  the  trachea, 
careful  inspection  of  the  oral  cavity  should  always  be  re- 
sorted to  before  beginning  to  anesthetize.  Artificial  teeth, 
removable  bridges,  chewing  gum,  tobacco  and  many  other 
things  may  be  looked  for  in  the  mouth.  In  extracting  teeth 
extreme  care  should  be  exercised  to  actually  deposit  the 
tooth  outside  of  the  mouth.  A  tooth  is  liable  to  spring  from 
the  forceps,  or,  when  forced  from  an  alveolus  by  an  elevator, 
may  fall  backward  and  enter  the  trachea.  To  avoid  such 
an  occurrence.  Carter's  oral  net  spoon  has  been  devised. 
If  the  slipped  tooth  can  not  be  caught  with  the  finger  or  an 
instrument,  an  efl^ort  should  be  made,  in  extreme  cases  only, 
to  force  the  tooth  into  the  gullet  by  pushing  it  backward 
and  a  little  to  the  left,  thus  gaining  entrance  into  the 
esophagus. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  we i gilt. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  259 

In  the  early  stages  of  anesthesia,  occasionally  inhibition 
of  respiration  is  produced  by  tonic  spasms  of  the  muscles 
of  the  tongue,  thus  forcing  this  organ  against  the  soft  palate 
and  the  posterior  wall  of  the  pharynx.  This  same  phenome- 
non may  occur  during  profound  anesthesia  in  a  patient  as- 
suming a  recumbent  position.  To  overcome  stenosis  of  the 
larynx  the  lower  jaw  should  be  throwai  forward  by  pressing 
against  the  two  rami  posteriorly.  This  movement  is  known 
as  Esmarch  (English)  or  Howard  grip.  A  tongue  forceps 
may  be  inserted  and  the  tongue  pulled  forward,  or  piercing 
the  tongue  with  a  needle  threaded  with  stout  silk  and  apply- 
ing rhythmic  traction  has  been  resorted  to. 

The  typical  organic,  impairments  of  respiration  are 
known  as  apnea,  dyspnea  and  asphyxia.  The  differentiation 
between  these  three  forms  of  suffocation  rests  probably  more 
with  the  severity  of  the  disturbances  than  with  the  kind ; 
they  are  primarily  the  result  of  a  lesser  or  greater  paresis 
of  the  respiratory  centers.  The  supreme  remedy  is  artificial 
respiration — an  artificial  means  for  the  thorough  ventilation 
of  the  blood  and  lungs,  replacing  the  narcotic  with  air  until 
normal  functions  of  the  organ  are  established.  One  of  the 
older  methods  of  forcing  air  into  the  system  is  the  mouth-to- 
mouth  insufflation,  a  method  which  today  is  abandoned;  the 
same  is  true  of  the  bellows  method.  Artificial  respiration 
may  be  applied  by  any  of  the  known  methods  that  serve  its 
purpose,  provided  the  employed  method  is  thoroughly  under- 
stood. 

Sylvester's  method  of  resuscitation  is  probably  most  uni- 
versally employed.  It  is  carried  out  as  follows :  Place  the 
patient  on  the  back,  with  a  roll  of  clothing  under  the  shoul- 
ders. Pull  the  tongue  forward  and  retain  it  in  that  position 
to  allow  the  free  entrance  of  air  into  the  wind]')ipe.     The 


N.   B. — Parts  as  iisod    in   tliis   Denial   Fnrnndnri/  mpaii   qnant  iti's 
by  weight.  . 


260  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

operator  stands  at  the  head  of  the  patient  and  grasps  both 
arms  midway  between  the  elbows  and  wrist  joints ;  the  arms 
are  drawn  upward  until  the  hands  are  carried  high  above 
the  head,  and  kept  in  this  position  until  i,  2,  3  can  be  counted 
slowly.  The  elbows  are  now  slowly  carried  downward, 
placed  by  the  side  of  the  trunk  and  inward  against  the  chest. 
This  movement  should  be  continued  at  the  rate  of.  fifteen 
to  sixteen  times  a  minute,  and  may  be  continued  for  an  hour 
or  more  if  needed. 

Howard's  method  of  resuscitation  has  recently  been  ad- 
vocated. It  is  carried  out  as  follows :  Place  the  patient  on 
the  back  with  a  roll  of  clothing  under  the  thorax.  All  cloth- 
ing obstructing  the  neck,  chest  and  abdomen  must  be  loos- 
ened. The  tongue  is  pulled  forward  and  held  in  that  position 
to  allow  the  free  entrance  of  air.  Kneel  astride  the  patient's 
hips  and  place  your  hands  on  his  chest ;  the  ball  of  each 
thumb  rests  on  the  inner  margin  of  the  free  border  of  the 
costal  cartilages,  the  tip  of  each  thumb  is  near  or  on  the  ensi- 
form  cartilage,  and  the  finger  tips  are  placed  into  the  corre- 
sponding intercostal  spaces.  The  elbows  of  the  operator  are 
firmly  pressed  against  the  patient's  sides  and  the  upper  por- 
tion of  his  hips.  Press  upward  and  inward  toward  the 
diaphragm,  and  throw  the  weight  slowly  forward  two  or 
three  seconds  until  the  face  almost  touches  that  of  the 
patient,' ending  with  a  sharp  push,  which  helps  to  jerk  the 
operator  back  to  the  erect  kneeling  position.  Now  rest  three 
to  five  seconds,  and  repeat  the  same  movement  at  the  rate 
of  seven  to  ten  times  a  minute  until  natural  respiration  is 
established. 

Faradization  of  the  diaphragm  is  sometimes  useful ;  too 
much  shoulfl  not,  however,  be  expected  from  the  electric 
current  in  this  connection.    Dilating  tlie  anus  with  a  suitable 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAKY  261 

speculum  is  also  recommended.  A  careful  and  quickly  insti- 
tuted artificial  respiration  is  the  alpha  and  omega  of  all 
methods  of  resuscitation.  The  proper  use  of  the  first  minute 
is  of  more  real  value  in  the  preservation  of  the  extinguishing 
life  than  all  the  hours  thereafter.  No  precious  moments 
should  be  lost  by  rubbing  the  patient,  applying  smelling 
salts,  or  other  secondary  means.  Artificial  respiration  may 
often  be  profitably  continued  for  an  hour  or  longer  until 
fairly  normal  lung  activity  is  established. 

As  far  as  medication  is  concerned,  the  only  drug  that 
has  proved  to  be  of  value  in  this  connection  is  strychnine  in 
full  doses  by  means  of  hypodermic  injections. 

Nervous  disturbances  during  or  following  anesthesia 
usually  manifest  themselves  in  two  definite  forms — in  those 
aft'ecting  the  psyche  and  those  unbalancing  the  motor  cen- 
ters. Psychic  excitement  is  a  common  occurrence  in  the 
preliminary  stages  of  narcosis ;  hysterics  and  alcoholics  fur- 
nish by  far  the  largest  contingent.  Intense  muscular  exer- 
tion, combined  with  clonic  or  tonic  spasms,  frequently  result 
in  an  increased  pulse  rate,  with  more  or  less  cyanosis  and 
stertorous  respiration.  If  we  possess  an  anamnetic  clue  in 
regard  to  existing  hysteria  or  alcoholism,  a  hypodermic  in- 
jection of  morphine  half  an  hour  before  beginning  of  the 
narcosis  will  materially  lessen  this  preliminary  excitement. 
Occasionally  we  meet  a  patient  who  will  awake  from  the 
anesthetic  with  apparent  normal  ph}-sical  condition,  but  with- 
out perfect  control  of  the  scnsorium.  The  patient  remains 
for  some  minutes  in  a  sort  of  lethargic  sleej).  which  may 
at  tinies  reach  a  deep  comatose  state.  Swelling  salts  held 
to  the  nostrils,  cold  water  dashed  in  the  face,  and  loud  talk- 
ing or  shaking  will  arouse  the  patient.  Disturbances  of  the 
motor  centers  result  in  more  or  less  severe  spasms.     Singul- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fonuuhirij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


262  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

tus,  the  ordinary  hiccough,  is  often  seen  in  the  early  stages 
of  inhalation.  Tremor  of  a  single  group  of  muscles  or  of 
the  entire  body  is  noticed  more  or  less  frequently  after  the 
taking  of  smaller  quantities  of  the  narcotic ;  similar  tremors 
as  a  result  of  indulging  in  other  narcotics — as  tea,  coffee, 
or  tobacco — are  noticed  in  those  who  are  not  habitues  of 
these  drugs.  These  muscle  tremors  are  usually  confined  to 
the  early  stages  of  inhalation,  and  are  not  dangerous.  If 
they  should  cccur  after  the  anesthetic  passes  off,  the  strong 
will  power  of  the  patient  materially  assists  in  readily  over- 
coming these  tremors.  Convulsions,  combined  with  clonic 
or  tonic  spasms,  occur  frequently  under  nitrous  oxid  anes- 
thesia, but  much  less  under  the  other  narcotics.  Care  should 
be  exercised  to  prevent  the  patient  from  hurting  himself. 
The  removal  of  the  anesthetic  quickly  relieves  the  condition. 
Tetanus — the  persistent  contraction  of  voluntary  muscles — 
is  frequently  seen  in  the  early  stages  of  anesthesia ;  loss, 
however,  when  chloroform  is  used.  Typical  trismus — tonic 
spasms  of  the  muscles  which  are  supplied  by  the  fifth  pair 
of  nerves,  especially  those  of  mastication — is  often  very 
troublesome  in  dental  anesthesia.  As  a  precaution,  a  suitable 
mouth  prop  should  always  be  put  in  place.  Severe  forms  of 
tetanic  convulsions,  bending  the  head  and  feet  backward, 
known  as  opisthotonus,  are  also  seen  under  anesthesia  in 
the  early  stages.  All  these  muscle  disturljances  rarely  call 
for  treatment,  but  carefully  watching  the  ])atient  to  prevent 
hurting  himself  is,  however,  indicated. 

The  typical  ])icture  of  cocaine  poisoning  is  produced 
when  the  blood  flowing  through  the  central  nervous  system 
contains  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  drug,  even  for  the 
moment  only,  which  is  dangerous  to  this  organ.  No  maxi- 
mum dose  of  cocaine  can  be  positively  established  ;  this  is 

N".  B.- — Parts  as  iisod   in  this  T)cnial  Formvlnry  mean  quantities 
\>y  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  263 

equally  true  of  chloroform  and  ether  when  used  for  general 
anesthetic  purposes.  'The  man}-  cases  of  so-called  idiosyn- 
crasy probably  find  an  explanation  in  the  too  large  doses 
which  formerly  were  so  frequently  administered. 

The  danger  of  poisoning  with  cocaine  preparations  has 
been  practically  eliminated  with  our  increased  knowledge  of 
its  action  on  the  tissues.  At  present  solutions  containing  a 
relativeh'  small  percentage  combined  with  adrenaline  are 
usually  employed,  and,  when  injected  with  the  proper  tech- 
nique, dangerous  results  are  comparatively  rare.  No  direct 
antidotes  of  cocaine  are  known. 

The  treatment  of  general  intoxication  is  purely  sympto- 
matic. Anemia  of  the  brain,  which  is  of  little  consequence, 
may  be  readily  overcome  by  placing  the  patient  in  a  recum- 
bent position,  or  by  complete  inversion  if  necessary.  As  a 
powerful  dilator  of  the  peripheral  vessels,  the  vapors  of 
amy]  nitrite  are  exceedingly  useful ;  it  is  best  administered 
by  placing  3  to  5  drops  of  the  fluid  on  a  napkin  held  before 
the  nostrils  for  inhalation.  Flushing  of  the  face  and  an  in- 
crease in  the  frequency  of  the  pulse  follows  almost  instantly. 
Nausea  may  be  remedied  by  administering  small  doses  of 
spirit  of  peppermint,  aromatic  spirit  of  ammonia,  orvalidol. 
The  latter  deserves  special  recommendation.  To  overcome 
the  disturbances  of  respiration,  quickly  instituted  artificial 
respiration  is  the  very  best  procedure  in  all  methods  of  re- 
suscitation :  the  only  drug  that  has  proved  to  be  of  value  in 
this  connection  is  strychnine  in  the  form  of  the  sulphate  or 
the  nitrate  in  full  doses  by  means  of  hypodermic  injections. 
In  dental  literature  reference  is  frequently  made  to 
"shock  from  the  anesthetic."  By  shock  is  meant  the  depres- 
sion resulting  from  an  injury  or  an  operation,  and  we  are 
inclined  to  believe  that  these  '"shock  stories"  of  anesthesia 

N".  B. — Parts  as  tised  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


264  DENTAL  FOSMULABY 

can  be  properly  placed  under  the  various  disturbances  within 
the  four  divisions  of  anesthesia  sequences  if  a  correct  diag- 
nosis is  made. 

For  the  purpose  of  readily  meeting  unexpected  side 
effects  of  anesthetics,  every  practitioner  should  provide  him- 
self with  a  stock  of  emergency  drugs,  placed  in  an  easily 
accessible  compartment  of  his  medicine  chest,  consisting  of : 

Hypodermic  tablets  of  strychnine  sulphate,  1-30  grain. 

Hypodermic  tablets  of  nitroglycerine,  i-ioo  grain. 

Amyl  nitrite,  in  5-drop  glass  capsules. 

Validol. 

Aromatic  spirit  of  ammonia. 

Smelling  salts. 

Whiskey. 

Hypodermic  syringe  in  good  working  order. 

IMMEDIATE    TREATMENT    OF    ACUTE    POISONING. 
General    Directions. 

When  a  poison  has  been  swallowed,  the  stomach  should 
at  once  be  evacuated  with  the  stomach  tube,  or,  in  its  ab- 
sence, with  a  fountain  syringe.  If  corrosives  have  been  swal- 
lowed and  the  mucous  membranes  are  greatly  swollen,  the 
stomach  tube  is  not  indicated,  as  laceration  of  the  soft  tissues 
may  follow.  Emetics  are  of  prime  importance.  Certain 
metallic  salts,  especially  copper  sulphate  in  3-grain  (0.2  Gm.) 
doses,  and  zinc  sulphate  in  lo-grain  (0.65  Gm.)  doses,  dis- 
solved in  a  glassful  of  water,  act  very  promptly.  If  the 
patient  is  unable  to  swallow,  apomorphine  hydrochloride, 
i-io  grain  (0.006  Gm.),  hypodermically,  acts  promptly  and 
vigorously.  As  an  emergency  remedy  a  tablespoonful  of 
ground  mustard  stirred  in  a  cupful  of  tepid  water  usually 
produces  quick  vomiting.    If  the  poison  is  of  an  unknown 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  265 

origin,  emetics,  bland  liquids  and  stimulants,  together  with 
suitable  systematic  treatment,  is  indicated. 

Acetic,    Hydrochloric,    Nitric,     Nitro-Hydrochloric    and    Sulphuric 

Acids. 

No  emetic  should  be  given.  To  dilute  and  neutralize  the 
acid,  milk  mixed  with  chalk,  whiting,  magnesia,  or  baking 
soda,  strong  soap  suds,  or  white  of  Qgg  beaten  up  with  water, 
is  given ;  later  oil  and  mucilaginous  drinks  of  flaxseed  or 
slippery  elm  are  indicated.  Usually  intense  ulceration  fol- 
lows the  acid  burns.  To  relieve  pain,  morphine  sulphate. 
y^  grain  (0.015  Gm.),  or  tincture  of  opium,  15  drops  (i 
Cc),  is  administered. 

Hydrocyanic  Acid  and  All   Cyanides,   Alcohol,    Chloroform,  Ether, 

Chloral  Hydrate,  Gasoline,  Carhon  Bisulphide  and 

Sulphurets    of    the    Alkalies. 

Hydrocyanic  acid  and  cyanides  require  very  prompt 
measures;  they  are  quick  and  powerful  poisons.  Emetics 
ma\-  be  given  if  necessary.  The  patient  is  put  in  a  recum- 
bent position,  the  head  lowered  and  plenty  of  fresh  air 
for  free  respiration.  Persistent  artificial  respiration  should 
be  instituted  if  needed.  Keep  the  body  warm  and  try  to 
arouse  '.ne  patient  with  ammonia  vapors ;  put  cold  douches 
to  hi:'  head  and  apply  friction  to  the  extremities.  Strong 
stimulants — wliisky,  nitroglycerine  solution  in  ^/^  drop  doses, 
etc. — are  indicated. 

Oxalic    Acid  and  Its   Salts. 

Give  chalk  or  whiting  mixed  with  two  tablespoonfuls 
of  vinegar  and  an  equal  quantity  of  water ;  do  not  give 
soda   or  potash   with   the  object   of  neutralizing   the   acid. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


266  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Vomiting  should  be  induced  at  once  and  followed  by  olive 
oil  or  mucilaginous  drinks.  General  stimulants — whisky, 
etc. — and  warmth  applied  to  the  extremities  are  essential. 

Phenol    (Carbolic    Acid)    and    Its    Compounds,    Cresol,    Creosote, 
Lysol    and    Resorcinol. 

Induce  vomiting  and  give  large  quantities  of  diluted 
whisky  or  magnesium  sulphate  solution  in  the  early  stages. 
Remember  that  alcohol  is  not  a  chemic  antidote  for  phenol 
or  its  compounds.  Later  give  bland  liquids,  olive  oil  and 
general  stimulants  as  required. 

Caustic   Alkalies   and  Ammonia. 

Promote  vomiting  by  large  draughts  of  warm  water. 
Alild  acids  in  the  form  of  diluted  vinegar  or  lemon  juice 
are  indicated,  which  should  be  followed  by  olive  oil,  white 
of  egg  beaten  up  with  water  and  mucilaginous  drinks. 
Severe  pain  calls  for  morphine  sulphate,  ^  grain  (0.015 
•Gm.)  or  tincture  of  opium,  15  drops  (i  Cc). 

Arsenic   and   Its    Compounds. 

Promote  vomiting  with  large  draughts  of  warm  wa- 
ter and  administer  at  once  hydrated  oxide  of  iron  (the  offi- 
cial antidote  for  arsenic )  or  dial\'zed  iron.  The  official 
antidote  may  Ijc  ])re]jared  extemporaneous!}-  Ijy  mixing  a 
tcasp(jonful  of  calcined  magnesia  with  a  cupful  of  water, 
add  three  teaspoon fuls  of  tincture  of  iron  chlorid,  mix 
well  and  give  the  whole  of  it  at  once.  This  is  to  be  fol- 
lowed witli  olive  oil,  white  of  egg  beaten  up  with  water 
and  mucilaginous  drinks. 

N.  B.— Parts  as  iiseil    in   lliis   PciiUii  For  111 11  la rtj  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMULAEY  267 

Antimony    Salts,     Copper,    Iodine    and    Its    Preparations,    Mercury 

Salts,     Potassium    Bichromate,     Tartar    Emetic,     Tin    and    Its 

Salts,  Colchicum,  Cantharides  and  the  Oils  of  Croton, 

Savin    and    Pansy. 

Induce  vomiting  and  is  usually  produced  by  the  metal- 
lic salts  themselves.  Give  large  draughts  of  raw  white 
egg  (about  half  dozen  or  more)  beaten  up  with  water,  or 
tiour  stirred  in  water,  strong  tea  or  coffee  and  general  stim- 
ulants. To  relieve  pain  and.  tenesmus,  morphine  sulphate, 
j^i  grain  (0.015  Gm.)  is  indicated. 

Barium    and   Lead    Salts. 

Give  magnesium  sulphate,  4  drams  (15  Gm.)  or  so- 
dium sulphate,  1  ounce  (30  Gm.j,  dissolved  in  a  large  tum- 
blerful of  water.  Promote  vomiting  by  warm  water  or 
with  mustard  and  follow  with  milk  and  demulcent  drinks. 
Pain  is  relieved  by  morphine  sulphate,  ^  grain  (0.015  Gm.) 
or  tincture  of  opium.  15  drops  (i  Cc). 

Silver    Nitrate. 

Give  common  salt,  t)ne-half  tablespoonful  dissolved  in 
a  tumblerful  of  warm  water  and  induce  vomiting ;  later, 
large  draughts  of  demulcent  drinks — starch,  flaxseed  or 
slippery  elm  stirred  in  water — are  indicated. 

Phorphorus    (Rat  Paste,  Etc.). 

Give  a  prompt  emetic — C(^])pcr  sulphalc,  3  grains  (0.03 
Gm.),  dissolved  in  a  tumblerful  of  water — every  five  min- 
utes. Old,  thick  oil  of  turpentine  in  i-dram  (4  Cc.)  doses, 
suspended  in  flour  water  and  repeated  every  hour,  is  much 
lauded.  Do  not  give  oils  or  fats.  Milk  of  magnesia  is 
often  beneficial.     W'licn  indicated  oive  Q-eneral  stimulants. 


X.  B.- — Pnrts  ;is  iisoil   in  tliis  Drnfal  Fnrntularj/  inenn  qnnntitios 
I IV  we i "lit. 


268  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

Atropine,    Cocaine,    Gelsemine,    Pilocarpine    and    All    Preparations 
Containing    These   Alkaloids. 

Induce  vomiting,  give  large  draughts  of  warm  water, 
strong  coffee  and  tea  and  general  stimulants.  If  the  pa- 
tient is  drowsy,  rouse  him  with  ammonia  vapors ;  apply 
heat  to  the  extremities  and  institute  artificial  respiration  if 
necessary. 

Aconite,    Cotton    Root,    Digitalis,    Ergot,    Lobelia,    Tobacco,    Vera- 
trum    and    Preparations    Containing    These    Substances. 

Give  an  emetic,  which  should  be  followed  by  large 
draughts  of  warm  water,  strong  tea  or  coffee.  Keep  the 
patient  in  a  horizontal  position,  apply  warmth  and  friction 
to  the  extremities  and  use  artificial  respiration  if  needed. 

Opium   and   Its    Preparations,    Morphine   and   Its   Salts   and   Indian 

Hemp. 

If  necessary,  vomiting  should  be  induced.  Give  strong 
tea  or  coffee  and  large  draughts  of  warm  water.  Keep 
the  patient  awake  and,  if  possible,  in  motion.  A  cold 
douche  is  beneficial.  Strychnine  sulphate,  1-30  grain  (0.002 
Gm.)  and  atropine  sulphate,  i-ioo  grain  (0.0006  Gm.), 
administered  hypodermically,  are  often  of  benefit.  Per- 
sistent artificial  respiration  should  be  kept  up,  even  after 
life  seems  to  be  extinct. 

Nux    Vomica   and    Its    Preparations,    Strychnine   and    Its   Salts   and 
Fishberries    (Cocculus    Indicus). 

Induce  vomiting,  followed  by  large  draughts  of  warm 
water,  and  give  tannic  acid  in  i  percent  solution  or  iodide 
of  starch.  Spasms  are  relieved  by  inhalation  of  chloroform 
or  by  chloral  hydrate,   15  grains    (i   Gm.),  dissolved  in  a 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  2m 

tumblerful  of  water.     Evacuate  the  bowels  and  give  the 
patient  absolute  rest. 

Formaldehyde    and    Its    Solutions. 

Give  ammonia  in  very  diluted  solutions  and  demulcent 
drinks.    General  stimulants  should  be  given  when  indicated. 

Wood    Alcohol. 

Give  immediately  a  tablespoonful  of  common  salt,  dis- 
solved in  a  large  tumblerful  of  warm  water,  and  repeat 
with  strychnine  sulphate,  1-30  grain  (0.002  Gm.),  hypo- 
dermically  and  give  strong  coffee  or  tea. 

Decayed  Meat   or  Vegetables. 

These  materials  are  often  productive  of  ptomaine  poi- 
soning. Induce  vomiting  and  cleanse  the  bowels  with  full 
doses  of  castor  oil.  Strong  stimulants  and  heat  and  fric- 
tion applied  to  the  extremities  are  beneficial. 

Poisonous  Fungi. 

Evacuate  the  stomach  as  quickly  as  possible  by  prompt- 
ly acting  emetics.  Give  atropine  sulphate,  i-ioo  grain 
(0.0006  Gm.),  hypodermically  and  tannic  acid  in  the  form 
of  strong  tea  or  coffee. 


URINE  ANALYSIS. 

Urine  analysis  as  an  aid  in  diagnosticating  certain  den- 
tal diseases  is  an  essential  adjunct  to  the  clinical  examina- 
tion of  the  patient.  Oral  manifestation  of  typical  general 
diseases — as  diabetes,  gout,  autointoxication,  etc. — are  often 
the  first  pathognomonic  signs  of  these  diseases.     The  cor- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Formiilarij  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


270  DENTAL  FOFMULABY 

rect  diagnosis  of  the  latter  is  verified  by  a  urine  analysis 
and  the  patient  may  be  surprised  to  learn  that  the  presence 
of  an  odor  of  acetone  from  the  oral  cavity,  together  w^ith 
the  formation  of  pericemental  abscesses  and  the  rapid  ac- 
cumulation of  soft  white  calcareous  deposits  about  the  teeth 
should  be  indicative  of  diabetes,  of  which  he  has  no  knowl- 
edge at  the  time.  The  presence  of  sugar  in  the  urine  will 
verify  the  diagnosis.  A  urine  analysis  is  also  of  important 
value  to  the  dental  practitioner  if  he  intends  to  administer 
a  general  anesthetic— chloroform  or  ether — to  a  patient. 
For  the  foregoing  purposes  an  exhaustive  examination  of 
the  urine  is  not  necessar}" ;  it  is  merely  intended  to  ascer- 
tain by  a  few  simple  tests  the  presence  or  absence  of  al- 
bumin, of  sugar,  of  the  approximate  amount  of  uric  acid, 
etc.  The  determination  of  these  substances  may  also  in- 
dicate if  the  assistance  of  the  family  physician  is  desired 
in  the  treatment  of  the  case  under  observation.  An  intelli- 
gent report  made  to  the  physician  will  not  merely  insure 
the  co-operation  of  the  latter,  but  may  also  assist  in  bring- 
ing about  a  better  understanding  and  a  much  desired  closer 
relationship  of  the  two  professions. 

The  normal  quantity  of  urine  voided  in  twenty- four 
hours  varies  from  40  to  50  ounces  (1,200  to  1.500  Cc). 
Free  perspiration  decreases  the  quantity,  while  chilling  of 
the  skin  increases  it.  The  greatest  portion  of  urine  is 
passed  during  the  day ;  during  the  night  and  the  early 
morning  hours  the  least  portion  is  passed.  Usually  the 
urine  has  a  light,  amber  color,  due  to  urobilin ;  the  color 
depends,  however,  largely  on  the  quantity  voided.  On 
standing,  nearly  all  normal  urine  assumes  a  cloudy  ap- 
pearance, which  is  due  to  the  presence  of  mucus.  The  nor- 
mal reaction  of  urine  is  slightly  acid,  due  to  uric  acid,  hip- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  usod  in  this  Dental  Formuhni/  menn  qnnntitifs 
1)V   woitrlil. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAI^Y  271 

puric  acid,  or  acid  sodium  phosphate.  After  meals  the  re- 
action may  be  neutral  or  even  alkaline  for  a  short  time. 
The  normal  specific  gravit}-  varies  from  1.015  to  1.025;  it 
is  low  when  an  increased  amount  is  passed  and  high  when 
the  quantit}-  is  diminished.  Normal  urine  has  a  peculiar, 
aromatic  odor ;  it  is  altered  by  certain  food  or  drugs — as- 
paragus and  oil  of  turpentine  produce  a  violet-like  odor, 
garlic  gives  a  garlic-like  odor,  etc. 

The  solid  constituents  of  urine  consist  of  organic  and 
inorganic  compounds  and  they  vary  very  markedly.  The 
solids  held  in  solution  by  and  excreted  with  the  urine  within 
twenty-four  hours  amount  to  approximately : 

308  to  617  grains  (20  to  40  Gm.)  urea. 

6  to    12  grains  (0.36  to  0.78  Gm.)  uric  acid. 
9  to    14  grains  (0.54  to  0.90   Gm.)    ammonium,   calcium, 
magnesium,  potassium  and  sodium  urate. 
12  to    45  grains  (0.72  to  2.9  Gm. )  sodium  phosphate. 
154  to  237  grains  ( 10  to  25  Gm.)  sodium  chloride. 

General   Examination. 

For  the  examination  of  the  urine  the  mixed  total  quan- 
tity voided  during  the  twenty-four  hours  or  a  part  thereof 
should  be  submitted.  The  preliminary  inspection  begins 
with  the  color  of  the  sample  ;  the  latter  may  be  expressed 
as  pale  straw,  straw,  pale  amber,  amber,  dark  amber,  red- 
dish amber,  etc.,  or  after  X'ogel's  scale  of  colors.  It  should 
not  be  forgotten  that  certain  drugs  which  are  taken  inter- 
nally may  impart  a  distinctive  color  to  the  urine — santonin 
produces  an  intense  yellow  color,  which  changes  to  red  or 
purple  when  alkalies  are  added ;  methylen  blue  produces  a 
blue  color,  etc.     The  odor  is  recognized  as  normal  aromatic. 

N.  B. — Pai'ts  as  useil  in  this  DcaUil  Foniiuhiri/  mean  quantitios 
bv  weight. 


272  DENTAL  FOBMVLABY 

as  ammonical  or  as  putrid ;  the  reaction  is  obtained  with 
sensitive  Htmus  paper.  The  specific  gravity  is  readily  de- 
termined by  the  urinometer,  the  specific  gravity  bottle,  or 
by  the  specific  gravity  beads.  If  it  is  above  1.025,  sugar 
in  appreciable  quantities  may  be  expected.  The  instru- 
ments used  for  this  work  are  usually  corrected  to  conform 
to  a  temperature  of  60  degrees  F.  (15  degress  C).  If 
the  temperature  is  above  or  below  this  standard  one  degree 
of  the  urinometer  has  to  be  respectively  added  or  sub- 
tracted for  every  5  degrees  F.  (2.8  degrees  C). 

Tests  for  Albumin. 

Serum  albumin  is  the  most  often  tested  for  of  any 
constituent  of  the  urine,  and  of  the  many  tests  which  have 
been  proposed  the  following  are  to  be  preferred.  No  single 
test  is  sufficient. 

1.  Heat  Test. — Boil  the  urine  in  a  test  tube;  when 
an  opalescence  appears  it  indicates  the  presence  of  albumin 
or  an  excess  of  phosphate.  If  a  few  drops  of  nitric  acid 
are  now  added  the  cloudiness  will  disappear  if  due  to  phos- 
phate, but  will  remain  permanently  if  du€  to  albumin. 

2.  Purdy's  Modified  Heat  Test. — Fill  the  test  tube 
three-quarters  full  with  urine  and  add  saturated  sodium 
chloride  solution  to  fill  the  tube ;  now  add  two  or  three 
drops  of  strong  acetic  acid  and,  holding  the  tube  in  the 
fingers  by  its  bottom,  heat  the  upper  layer  of  the  fluid  un- 
til the  mixture  boils ;  then,  without  shaking  the  tube  or  its 
contents,  examine  the  layer  of  fluid  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  tube,  comparing  its  degree  of  transparency  with  that  of 
the  fluid  that  was  not  heated  in  the  lower  part  of  the  tube. 
If  the  heated  portion  of  the  fluid  is  in  the  slightest  degree 
hazy  or  less  transparent,  albumin  is  present. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMULABY  273 

3.  Heller's  Nitric  Acid  Test. — A  test  tube  is  filled 
to  the  depth  of  one-half  inch  with  nitric  acid,  and  while 
being  held  in  an  inclined  position,  the  clear  (filtered,  if 
necessary)  urine  is  allowed  to  trickle  slowly  down  the  in- 
side surface  from  a  medicine  dropper,  so  as  to  form  a 
superimposed  layer  on  the  urine.  An  opalescent  ring  at 
the  junction  of  the  two  liquids  indicates  albumin.  Excess 
of  urates,  mucus,  etc.,  sometimes  gives  rings  resembling 
those  of  albumin,  but  on  close  observation  these  rings  will 
be  seen  to  be  slightly  above  in  the  column  of  urine  instead  of 
at  the  bottom  of  contact. 

Tests  for  Sugar. 

Sugar  occurs  less  frequently  in  the  urine  than  albumin, 
and  is  usually  present  in  urine  having  a  very  high  specific 
gravity — above  1.025.  If  a  sample  of  the  urine  contains 
albumin,  it  should  always  be  removed  by  boiling  and  filter- 
ing before  any  of  the  tests  for  sugar  are  applied. 

1.  Fehling's  Copper  Test. — Equal  volumes  of  the  or- 
dinary Fehling's  solutions  are  mixed  in  a  test  tube  and 
heated  to  the  boiling  point ;  if  no  reduction  occurs,  the 
solution  may  be  considered  safe,  and  the  urine  is  now 
added  drop  by  drop  to  the  boiling  Fehling's  solution  until 
an  orange  color  or  reddish  precipitate  forms,  or  until  a 
volume  of  urine  equal  to  that  of  the  copper  solution  has 
been  added.  If  there  is  no  precipitate  of  orange  or  red- 
dish cuprous  oxide,  sugar  may  be  considered  absent.  Sim- 
ple discharging  of  the  color  of  the  formation  of  various 
bluish-gray  precipitates  must  not  be  mistaken  for  a  true 
reduction. 

2.  Trommer's  Modified  Copper  Test. — Place  one  inch 
of  urine  in  a  test  tube  and  add  one-half  inch  of  potassium 

K  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fnrmularj/  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


274  DENTAL  FOUMULAEY 

hydroxide  solution,  U.  S.  P.,  to  the  urine.  Mix  the  two 
fluids  by  shaking  the  tube  and  add  two  or  three  drops  of  a 
5  percent  solution  of  copper  sulphate  in  distilled  water. 
Do  not  heat  the  mixture,  but  allow  the  tube  to  stand  un- 
disturbed for  twelve  to  twenty-four  hours  in  the  cold.  At 
the  expiration  of  that  time,  if  sugar  be  present,  there  will 
be  collected  in  the  tube  an  ochre-yellow  to  brick-red  precipi- 
tate of  fine  sand-like  character  of  suboxide  of  copper. 

Quantitative  Estimation  of  Sugar 

The  quantity  of  sugar  in  urine  is  very  conveniently 
and  quickly  estimated  by  using  "soloid"  tablets  of  copper 
sulphate  and  alkaline  tartrate  (i).  It  is  based  on  Fehling's 
reduction  test  as  follows  : 

Prepare  a  standard  test  solution  of  dissolving  four 
"soloids"  copper  sulphate  in  about  2  cubic  centimeters  of 
distilled  water  and  in  this  solution  also  dissolve  4  "soloids" 
alkaline  tartrate,  then  adjust  to  4  cubic  centimeters  at  15 
degrees  C.  Each  cubic  centimeter  corresponds  to  0.005 
gram  of  anhydrous  glucose.  It  may  be  found  more  con- 
venient to  dilute  the  above  measure  of  4  cubic  centimeters 
with  an  equal  volume  of  water,  when  each  cubic  centimeter 
of  diluted  test  solution  will  correspond  to  0.0025  gram  of 
anhydrous  glucose.  Make  a  rough  estimation  by  adding 
the  urine  to  a  definite  volume  of  the  boiling  test  solution 
in  such  quantity  that,  after  boiling  and  allowing  the  pre- 
cipitate to  subside,  the  blue  color  of  the  reagent  is  just 
discharged.  Now  dilute  the  urine  (if  necessary)  until  it 
contains  0.5  to  i  percent  of  sugar  and  make  an  accurate 
estimation  with  the  diluted  urine. 


'''Soloid"  tablota  aro  made  by  Burroughs  Wellcome  &  Co.,  of 
London  and  New  York. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  DmUil  Formidnry  mean  quantities 
by  we  iff  lit. 


DENTAL  FOFMULAHY  275 

Tests    for   Uric    Acid. 

The  presence  of  an  excess  of  uric  acid  or  of  urates 
is  usually  readily  detected  by  the  physical  appearance  of  the 
urine  itself.  If  the  urine  has  stood  in  a  vessel  from  three 
to  four  hours  and  a  sediment  of  red  sand  ("brick  dust  de- 
posit") is  seen  in  the  bottom  of  the  vessel,  it  usually  points 
to  an  excessive  excretion  of  urates.  The  urates  are  more 
soluble  in  hot  water  than  in  cold  water  and  consecjuently 
the  urine  may  be  clear  on  voiding',  but  after  becoming  cold 
may  deposit  quite  a  sediment.  The  amorphous  urates  read- 
ily dissolve  on  warming.  Under  the  microscope  uric  acid 
appears  as  whetstone-shaped  crystals,  which  are  sometimes 
arranged  in  rosettes.  These  crystals  are  usually  of  a  yellow- 
ish-red color. 

I.  Hopkin's  Test. — To  lOO  cubic  centimeters  of  urine 
add  33  grams  of  ammonium  chloride.  Shake  or  stir  until 
it  dissolves  and  then  allow  to  stand  in  a  cool  place  for  three 
or  four  hours.  Collect  the  precipitated  ammonium  urate 
on  a  filter  and  wash  with  saturated  ammonium  chloride 
solution  until  the  filtrate  is  clean.  Spread  out  the  filter 
on  a  square  glass  plate  and  wash  the  precipitate  down 
over  one  corner  of  the  plate  and  into  a  beaker  or  flask  with 
hot  water.  The  contents  of  the  beaker  are  now  heated 
to  boiling  with  an  excess  (lo  cubic  centimeters)  of  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  allowed  to  stand  in  a  cool  place  for  sev- 
eral hours  (not  less  than  three),  when  the  uric  acid  will 
crystallize  out.  This  is  collected  on  a  small  filter  (the  vol- 
ume of  the  filtrate  being  noted)  and  washed  slightly  with 
cold  water.  Wash  ofif  the  filter  into  a  flask  with  hot  water, 
enough  sodium  carbonate  solution  being  added  to  dis.solve 
the  uric  acid,  the  volume  is  made  up  to  too  cubic  centi- 
meters with  water,  20  cubic  centimeters  of  sulphuric  acid 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used    in  tliis   Denial  Formtdori/  mean  rjiiaiititios 
by  wpisrlit. 


276  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

are  added  and  a  decinormal  potassium  permanganate  solu- 
tion run  in  from  a  burette  until  a  faint  pink  coloration  re- 
mains one  minute  after  shaking.  Each  cubic  centimeter 
of  decinormal  permanganate  equals  0.007  grams  of  uric 
acid,  to  which  must  be  added  o.ooi  gram  for  each  15  cubic 
centimeters  of  the  filtrate  before  noted. 

2.  Murexid  Test. — Evaporate  to  dryness  at  a  low  heat 
over  an  alcohol  lamp  a  few  drops  of  urine  in  a  watch  crys- 
tal, add  a  drop  or  two  of  nitric  acid  and  again  cautiously 
evaporate  to  dryness.  A  red  residue  will  remain.  Now 
add  a  drop  or  two  of  ammonia  solution  without  at  first 
letting  it  come  directly  in  contact  with  the  residue.  The 
formation  of  murexid,  which  is  shown  by  a  beautiful  purple 
color  (purpurate  of  ammonia),  indicates  uric  acid  or  urates. 

Test  for  Indican. 

Salkowski's  Test. — Eight  cubic  centimeters  of  urine 
with  I  cubic  centimeter  of  a  10  percent  copper  sulphate 
solution  are  mixed  with  an  equal  volume  of  hydrochloric 
acid  of  a  specific  gravity  of  1.19.  A  few  cubic  centimeters 
of  chloroform  are  added  and  the  mixture  inverted  a  num- 
ber of  times.  The  indican  (indol-potassium  sulphate)  hav- 
ing been  split  up,  the  chloroform  extracts  the  resulting  in- 
digo and  takes  on  the  characteristic  blue  color.  The  quan- 
tity is  estimated  by  the  depth  of  the  blue  color. 

If  the  urine  contains  albumin,  it  must  be  removed  be- 
fore applying  this  test ;  otherwise  the  blue  color  often  aris- 
ing from  the  admixture  of  hydrochloride  acid  after  stand- 
ing may  prove  misleading.     (Purdy.) 

Test  for  Urobilin. 

Strauss'  Test. — -The  urine  is  acidulated  with  acetic 
acid  and  cleared  by  the  addition  of  one-fourth  of  its  volume 

X.  B. — Parts  ns  used  in  this  Denial  Fonniilary  mean  quantities 
Vjy   weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  277 

of  lo  percent  lead  acetate  solution  and  filtration.  The  fil- 
trate is  then  shaken  with  amyl  alcohol,  the  urobilin  being 
thus  extracted,  as  is  shown  by  the  yellow  to  deep  orange 
color.  The  addition  of  ammonious  zinc  chloride  causes  a 
fluorescence.  Urobilin  in  very  small  quantities  is  present  in 
the  healthy  urine. 


SALIVA  ANALYSIS. 

(After  Dr.  Henry  C.  Ferris.) 

History  of  chronic  diseases. 

Description  of  teeth  and  character  of  caries. 

Amount  of  saliva.  Normal  average,  60  Cc.  per  hour ; 
20  Cc.  required  for  examination. 

Consistence  :    Report  sticky,  thick  or  thin. 

Odor :    Ammoniacal,  sweet,  sour,  etc. 

Specific  gravity :     Normal  1.002. 

Precipitate :  Centrifuge  entire  amount  and  record  in 
terms  of  centrifuge  scale.  Then  take  5  Cc.  of  this  and  di- 
lute with  an  equal  quantity  of  distilled  water,  which  will 
become  cloudy  if  globulin  is  present.  Centrifuge  again  and 
record  amount  of  globulin.  Pour  off  supernatant  fluid  again 
in  the  centrifuge  tube;  add  four  drops  of  glacial  acetic  acid, 
which  precipitates  the  mucin.  Pour  oft*  supernatant  fluid 
and  add  i  Cc.  of  10  percent,  solution  potassium  ferro- 
cyanide  ;  if  albumin  be  present  specimen  will  become  cloudy. 
Centrifuge  as  before  and  record  quantity  of  albumin. 

Enzymic  action :  Take  immediately  upon  delivery. 
Make  2  percent  solution  of  starch  paste,  according  to  the 
following  directions  : 

Mix  starch  with  half  the  quantity  of  cold  water  and 
let  stand  for  five  minutes  ;  then  add  the  rest  of  the  water 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fontiulari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


278  DENTAL  FOEMULARY 

and  boil  for  ten  minutes.  Take  5  Cc.  of  this  solution  in 
test  tube  and  place  in  incubator  at  temperature  of  55  degrees 
C,  to  which  add  J/2  Cc.  saliva,  let  stand  for  one  minute  and 
boil  to  kill  action  of  enzyme.  Centrifuge  and  read  scale, 
which  will  give  percentage  of  reduction  of  starch  to  dextrin. 
To  determine  further  the  product  of  the  reaction,  take  2 
Cc.  of  the  clear  solution  and  add  i  Cc.  of  iodine  solution 
N/250.  If  starch  is  present  the  reaction  will  be  deep  vio- 
let (iodide  of  starch)  ;  if  a  light  violet,  it  indicates  a  par- 
tial reduction  of  starch,  or  erythrodextrin ;  a  colorless  re- 
sult indicates  complete  reduction  of  starch  to  dextrin. 

Proteolytic  test : 

I  Cc.  Fehling  copper  solution. 

5  Cc.  Fehling  alkaline. 
94  Cc.  I  0/00  sodium  carbonate  solution. 
Dissolve  in  the  solution  i  decigramm  casein  C.  P. 

Take  5  Cc.  of  the  above  and  place  in  the  incubator  at 
temperature  of  50°  to  55°  C. ;  then  add  jA  Cc.  saliva,  if 
there  is  a  string  proteolytic  action  in  a  few  seconds,  the  color 
turns  to  pink;  if  it  is  of  medium  action  to  violet;  if  no  ac- 
tion, to  a  dirty  blue  color.  The  first  represents  peptones ; 
second,  albuminose ;  third,  unsplit  caseine. 

Oxydase    Test. 

Take  i  Cc.  saliva,  4  Cc.  distilled  water,  12  drops  of  a 
10  percent  solution  of  sulphuric  acid,  then  mix  and  add  drop 
by  drop  0.5  percent  aqueous  solution  of  metaphenylene- 
(liamin.  If  there  is  no  oxidase,  it  stays  without  color.  If 
there  is  an  oxydcuse,  there  is  formed  triaminplu'nylin,  whicli 
makes  the  solution  strongly  }ello\v. 

N.  B. — Pnrts  ns  used  in  tliis  Dnilnl  ForDiuJcirij  nionn  ({iiantitics 
)jy  weight. 


DENTAL  F0E2irLAEY  279 

Test   for   Acid    Index. 

Should  be  ascertained  as  soon  as  specimen  is  delivered. 
Use  1/40  normal  sodium  hydrate  solution  in  5  Cc.  buret. 
The  degree  of  acidity  is  obtained  by  taking  5  Cc.  of  saliva 
and  adding  2  drops  of  phenolphthalein  solution,  neutral, 
then  drop  by  drop  1/40  normal  solution  sodium  hydrate 
until  a  rose  color  is  produced.  Having  noted  on  paper  the 
number  of  Cc.  of  the  sodium  hydrate  solution  in  the  buret 
before  and  after  the  rose  color  is  obtained,  the  number  of 
Cc.  displaced  multiplied  by  20  and  divided  by  4  (in  order 
to  find  the  number  of  Cc.  sodium  hydrate  solution  neces- 
sary to  reduce  100  Cc.  saliva)  equal  the  degree  of  acidity. 
Normal  being  alkaline. 

To  attain  a  more  accurate  result  add  i  Cc.  of  i/io 
normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution  and  boil  to  drive  off  the 
carbonic  acid ;  titrate  as  before  and  subtract  the  acid  index 
of  the  hydrochloric  acid  from  result. 

Test  for  Alkalinity, 

Proceed  as  above,  substituting  i,'40  normal  hydro- 
chloric acid  for  sodium  hydrate  and  methyl  orange  for  phen- 
olphthalein and  titrate. 

Ammonia   or  Organic   Matter. 

Take  2^  Cc.  saliva  and  i  drop  phenolphthalein  solu- 
tion and  titrate  it  with  X/40  sodium  hydrate  solution  to 
a  feeble  pink  color.  The  used  Cc.  of  the  sodium  hydrate 
solution  gives  the  acidity  in  relation  to  phenolphthalein. 
Take  formalin  and  put  in  i  drop  phenolphthalein  solu- 
tion and  titrate  it  with  NaOIi  solution  to  a  feeble  pink 
color. 

Xow  both  solutions  arc  neutral   or   feeblv  alkaline   to 


N.  B. — Pnrts  fis  useil   in  this  Pnital  ForDitdari/  menu  qua;ititii.'& 
l)v  weiolit. 


280  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

phenolphthalein  ;  but  if  you  put  i  Cc.  of  this  neutralized 
formalin  to  the  neutralized  saliva  the  pink  color  disappears, 
because  the  ammonia  is  used  up  by  the  formalin.  Now 
titrate  a  second  time  with  N/40  sodium  hydrate  until  the 
reappearance  of  the  pink  color.  This  amount  corresponds 
to  the  amount  of  ammonia.  Multiply  the  Cc.  by  0.017  and 
you  have  the  percentage  of  ammonia  in  the  saliva.  Proof : 
23/2  Cc.  and  N/40  has  the  same  relation  as  100:  N/i  ; 
therefore,  the  amount  of  grams  in  the  amount  of  Cc.  nor- 
mal solution  (instead  of  used  N/40  sodium  hydrate  solu- 
tion) gives  the  percentage.  Ammonia  has  the  atomic 
weight  of  17,  therefore  i  Cc.  normal  solution  corresponds 
to  0.017  percent  and  any  amount  of  Cc.  used  must  be  mul- 
tiplied by  0.017  percent. 

Sulfocyanate  Test. 

Use  colorimetric  scale  (Eimer  &  Amend),  i  Cc.  of 
specimen  in  tube  A,  i  Cc.  of  i :  2,000  ammonia  sulfocyanate 
in  tube  B ;  add  2  drops  of  5  percent  ferric  chloride  to  each 
tube,  add  distilled  water  until  color  in  B  matches  that  of 
specimen.  Read  scale  .in  thousands- and  ten  thousands.  Care 
must  be  taken  to  have  the  bottom  of  the  meniscus  on  the 
line. 

Chlorine. 

To  I  Cc.  of  specimen  add  2  or  3  drops  of  potassium 
bicromate  i  percent  solution;  then  titrate  with  N/io  silver 
nitrate  solution  until  a  light  brick-red  color  is  attained. 
Multiply  the  buret  Cc.  used  by  0.3545.  The  result  will 
show  the  amount  of  chlorine. 

Urea. 

To  attain  the  amount  of  urea,  use  a  Ferris'  modified 
Doremus   ureometer,   supplied  by  Eimer  &  Amend,   New 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAR¥  281 

York.  Tube  A  is  washed  with  water  and  filled  with  hypo- 
bromite  solution  ;  close  the  stopper  and  fill  tube  B  with  i 
Co.  of  specimen ;  open  the  stopper,  allow  specimen  to  enter 
tube  A  and  close  stopper.  After  all  bubbles  of  gas  have 
disappeared,  the  reading  is  taken.  The  degrees  marked 
upon  the  tube  are  divided  into  0.025  and  represent  the  num- 
ber of  grams  or  grains  of  urea  contained  in  the  amount 
of  saliva  employed.  (The  normal  relation  between  the 
chlorine  and  the  urea  in  the  urin  is  i  :2.) 

Acetone. 

In  4  drops  of  specimen  dissolve  a  crystal  of  potassium 
carbonate,  then  add  a  drop  of  Gram's  reagent.  An  odor 
of  iodoform  indicates  acetone.  ( Care  must  be  taken  not  to 
confound  the  odor  of  iodine  in  Gram's  reagent  with  that 
of  iodoform.)  To  mount  slide  and  examine  with  micro- 
scope for  crystals  of  iodoform  is  best  test. 

Total    Solids    and    Ash. 

To  obtain  total  solids  cleanse  and  weight  a  platinum 
dish,  into  which  place  2  Cc.  of  specimen.  Dry  in  the  in- 
cubator at  100°  C.  from  two  to  three  hours.  Care  should 
be  taken  that  it  does  not  turn  too  black.  Weight  again 
and  add  to  this  2  or  3  drops  of  fuming  nitric  acid.  Evapo- 
rate the  acid  and  burn  it  white.  Weigh  again.  The  first 
gives  the  total  of  solids  and  the  second  the  amount  of  ash. 

Xote  A :  To  determine  the  percentage  of  chlorine 
in  total  solids,  you  multiply  the  chlorine  by  no  and  divide 
by  total  solids. 

Xote  B :  In  urine  the  normal  amount  of  chlorine  is 
15-  percent  of  total  solids  and  it  is  reduced  in  pathological 
states. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


282 


DENTAL  FOhMULARY 


DIAGNOSTIC    HINTS. 
Frequency   of  Pulse. 

At  birth    130-150  times  a  minute 

At  the  first  year 100-130 

At  the  seventh  year 72-  90 

At  the  time  of  puberty 80-  85 

At  middle  Hfe 69-  75 

At  old  age 50-  60 

Frequency    of    Respiration. 

At  the  first  year •  •  •  -35  times  a  minute 

x^t  the  second  year. 25      "  " 

During  time  of  puberty 20      "  " 

Above  twenty  years  of  age 18      "  " 

Temperature  of  the  Body. 

Normal    temperature 97/^-  98^°  F. 

Feverishness 99 

Slight  fever 100 

Aloderate    fever 102 

High   fever 104 

Intense  fever 105 

Comparison  Between   Temperature  and  Pulse. 


-100 

°  F. 

-lOI 

°F. 

-103 

°  F. 

-105 

°  F. 

- 

°F. 

A   temperature 

of 

98° 

F. 

cor res 

Donds 

to  a  pulse 

of 

60 

"             ' 

99° 

F. 

70 

100° 

F. 

80 

101° 

F. 

90 

102° 
103° 
104° 

F. 
F. 
F. 

100 
IIO 
120 

105° 

F. 

a             (< 

130 

106° 

I'. 

4  1 

140 

N.  H.- 

-Parts 

as 

used   in  11 

is   Dcnh 

tl  Form 

i(l<tri/  iiK 

■an  ( 

luan 

iti(s 

by  weigiit. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

MISCELLAXEOUS.* 

FORMULAS  FOR  MAKING  NEGATIVES,  LANTERN  SLIDES  AND 
X-RAY  WORK. 

Developer    for    Contrast    Work,    Lantern    Slides,    Etc. 

I. 

Hot  water,  pure i8  parts, 

Metol   . I   part 

Hydrochinone  ■ ^  part 

Sodium  sulphide,  cryst 6  parts 


2. 

Water,  pure 80  parts 

Sodium  carbonate,  cryst . .-.  5  parts 

To  develop  take : 

Water,    pure 2  parts 

Solution   Xo.    I . '.  .  .  I  part 

Solution    X^o.    2 2  parts 

"Uniler  tliis  licMdiiiy  techiucal  foviinilas  anil  pveparalions  are 
oniiiiieratod.  which  may  ho  mare  or  loss  useful.  They  aetnally  rep- 
resent a  part  of  many  inqniiies  which  were  rer-eiveil  by  the  author 
from   dental   practitioners   during-   the  last    few  years. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Denial  FnrnniJnr)/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 

^  283 


284  DENTAL  FOKMULAEF 

Developer   for    View    Work. 

No.  I. 

Water,  pure 64  parts 

Eikonogen i   part 

Hydrochinone %  pai't 

Sodium  sulphide,  cryst 2^  parts 

No.  2. 

Water,   pure .' 64  parts 

Potassium  carbonate  (dry) 2%  parts 

To  develop  take : 

Solution  No.  i 2  parts 

Solution  No.  2 i  part 

and  add  developer   (solution  previously  used)    a  sufficient 
quantity  to  produce  best  results. 

Quickly   Acting    Photographic   Developer. 

A  soft  effect  is  obtained  in  negatives  of  portraits  by 
using  iron  oxalate  developer  containing  a  small  quantity  of 
sodium  thiosulphate.  The  following  is  said  to  give  a  good 
developer : 

Solution  of  ferrous  sulphate  (i  13) 25  Cc. 

Solution  of  potassium  oxalate  ( i  :3  and 
containing  5  drops  of  chemically  pure 
sulphuric  acid ) .  . 75  Cc. 

Solution  of  potassium  bromide  ( i  :io) ...    4  drops 

Solution    of    sodium    thiosulphate     (not 

more  concentrated  than   i  :20o) 12  drops 

This  solution  develops  the  plate  two  or  three  times 
more    rapidl\-    than   those   ordinarily   used   and   gives   finer 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY  285 

gradations  in  the  tones.  Contrasts  can  be  heightened  by 
increasing  the  quantity  of  potassium  bromide,  i.  e. :  12 
drops  of  potassium  bromide  sohition  and  12  drops  of  so- 
dium thiosulphate  to  100  C.  C.  of  the  developer. 

Methods    for    Quick    Developing    of    Films,    Plates,    Etc. 

For  lihns  one  ma}-  use  the  widely  advertised  developing 
machine,  or,  better  still,  the  new  system  of  tank  develop- 
ment recently  introduced.  By  this  method  the  film  is  wound 
up  in  broad  daylight,  by  means  of  a  transfer  box.  in  a  light 
tight  apron,  and  immersed  in  a  cup  containing  the  develop- 
ing solution  and  allowed  to  develop,  the  period  depending 
upon  the  formula  used  and  its  temperature.  When  devel- 
opment is  completed  the  developer  is  poured  oflf  and  the 
cup  filled  with  water  two  or  three  times  to  rinse  ofif  the 
film,  which  is  then  transferred  to  the  fixing  solution,  all 
being  done  in  daylight. 

\\'ith  plates,  practically  the  same  method  of  procedure 
is  followed  except  that  a  dark  closet  is  required,  so  that 
the  plates  may  be  safely  transferred  from  the  holders  to 
the  developing  tank.  This  having  been  done,  the  tank  may 
be  covered  and  the  room  made  light  and  the  plates  left 
until  development  is  completed,  and  the  time  required  for 
this  having  been  determined  beforehand  by  regulating  the 
strength  and  temperature  of  the  developing  solution. 

In  selecting  a  developer  for  this  kind  of  work  it  is  of 
the  utmost  importance  to  have  one  which  has  absolutely 
no  tendency  to  fog  and  which  is  not  seriously  afTected  by 
changes  in  temperature.  Given  a  developing  agent  w'ith 
these  characteristics,  a  formula  should  be  used  which  is 
susceptible  to  many  modifications. 

No  developing  agent  fills  the  first  mentioned  specifica- 

^"-  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Denial  Fnrmulan/  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


286  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

tion  as  well  as   Edinol  and   the   following   formula  cannot 
be  equaled  for  versatility  : 

Water    2,500  parts 

Acetone  sulphite 75  parts 

Sodium  sulphite  (  des. ) 225  parts 

Edinol    30  parts 

Hydroquinone    15  parts 

Potassium  bromide 7  parts 

Potassium    carbonate 480  parts 

For  regular  tray  development,  dilute  this  stock  solution 
with  five  parts  of  water. 

For  machine  development,  dilute  with  6  parts  of  wa- 
ter and  develop  for  6  minutes  at  a  temperature  of  65°  F. 

For  tank  development  (either  plates  or  film)  to  take 
ten  minutes,  dilute  with  ten  parts  of  water  and  have  tem- 
perature at  65°  F. 

For  the  tank  development  (plates  or  film)  to  take  30 
minutes,  dilute  with  25  parts  of  water  and  have  tempera- 
ture at  65°  F. 

Any  other  state  of  dilution  may  be  used  and  develop- 
ment may  be  prolonged  for  several  hours  if  desired.  In 
using  extreme  dilutions,  however,  it  is  advisable  to  wet 
the  plate  thoroughly  before  immersing  it  in  the  developer. 
This  will" prevent  "freaks,"  which  are  irregular  streaks  and 
which  sometimes  occur  with  certain  makes  of  plates. 

In  addition  to  the  above  directions  it  may  be  well  to 
mention,  especially  for  the  benefit  of  X-ray  workers,  the 
following  modifications :  To  increase  contrast  omit  .the 
acetone  sulphite.  To  increase  softness  omit  the  hydro- 
quinone and  add  an  equivalent  quantity  of  edinol. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Forwulary  mfan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY 


!'»/ 


Another  method  of  time  development  is  the  factorial 
system.  The  factor  being  a  certain  number,  which  when 
multiplied  by  the  number  of  seconds  elapsed  ])el\\cen  the 
immersion  of  the  plate  in  the  developer  and  the  first  ap- 
pearance of  the  image,  gives  the  time  in  which  the  develop- 
ment shoulil  Ijc  completed.  The  factor  of  the  above  formula 
is  15. 

Besides  the  simpli^cd  methods  of  development,  photo- 
graphic printing  has  also  been  made  much  easier  since  the 
introduction  of  the  various  so-called  gaslight  papers. 

With  these  papers  any  negative  may  be  printed  by 
any  kind  of  artificial  light  in  a  few  seconds  and  the  devel- 
oping and  printing  done  in  a  few  minutes  longer.  The 
directions  for  using  papers  of  this  kind  are  so  complete 
and  so  simple  that  it  is  unnecessary  to  go  into  the  matter 
here,  except  to  give  a  formula  with  which  superb  results 
can  be  obtained  and  which  keeps  indefinitely  e^-en  in  open 
bottles.     It  is  as  follows : 

\\'ater    4,000  parts 

Edinol   30  parts 

Acetone  sulphite 150  parts 

Sodium  carbonate    (des.) 225  parts 

Bromide,  i  percent ;  solution.  5  drops  to  the  ounce. 

After  adopting  the  above  simple  method  of  working 
it  is  unnecessary  to  sit  up  all  night  washing  negatives  and 
prints.  The  new  hypo-destroyer  "Bayer"  will  be  found  to 
reduce  the  time  of  washing  to  8  minutes. 

Plain    Fixing    Bath. 

The  plain  fixing  liath  is  a  solution  of  sodium  hypo- 
sulphate  of  a  strength  of  about  five  or  six  parts  to  sixteen 

N.  B. — Parts  ns  used  in  this  PenlaJ  Fnnnularif  menu  quantities 
by  weight. 


288  DENTAL  FOUMULABY 

parts  of  water.  A  fully  saturated  solution  diluted  with  an 
equal  quantity  of  water  is  about  this  strength.  The  plate 
should  be  left  in  the  fixing  bath  for  several  minutes  after 
it  appears  to  be  cleared ;  as  long  as  it  *took  to  fix  would 
not  be  too  much.  Neglect  of  this  precaution  may  lead  to 
the  formation  of  insoluble  compounds  "in  the  film,  which, 
although  not  visible  at  first,  may  in  time  result  in  stains 
or  even  total  decay  of  the  negative.  Commercial  hypo- 
sulphite of  soda  usually  contains  foreign  matter,  which,  if 
allowed  to  remain  in  the  solution,  will  cause  spots  on  the 
negative.  Filter  before  use.  If  the  regular  fixing  bath  is 
too  strong  and  not  stirred  before  use,  it  will  at  times  cause 
parallel  lines  on  the  negatives  that  were  fixed  in  grooved 
fixing  boxes. 

A  cool  fixing  bath  can  be  prepared  by  dissolving  a 
fresh  lot  of  "hypo"  for  each  batch  of  plates.  This  is  of 
benefit  during  the  hot  weather. 


Add    Fixing    Bath. 

Owing  to  the  quality  of  the  water  in  some  localities, 
some  workmen  prefer  an  acid  fixing  bath.  The  following 
is  good  and  remains  clear  (mix  in  order  given)  : 

Water    (about ) 960  parts 

Sulphuric  acid 3  parts 

Sodium  sulphite 32  parts 

When  dissolved,  add: 

Sodium  hyposulphite 32  parts 

Water,  to  make 160  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  sis  nsod  in  this  Driital  Fnniivlari/  inf.'in  qunntitici 
\>y   weig'ht. 


DENTAL  FOlRMrLA'RY  289 

Acid  Chrome-Alum  Fixing  Bath. 

(For  hot  weather  use.) 

Water  (about) 800  parts 

Sulphuric  acid .      3  parts 

Sodium  sulphite 32  parts 

When  dissolved,  add  : 
Sodium  hyposulphite 256  parts 

Dissolve  and  then  add : 
Chrome-alum,  from 8  to  15  parts 

previously  dissolved  in  120  parts  of  water.     Then  add  wa- 
ter to  make  1,280  parts. 

Dry  Plates. 

For  snapshots,  landscapes  and  general  outdoor  work: 
Cramer's  Crown  plates.  Hammer's  fast  plates  or  Seed's  No.- 
2y  plates. 

For  copying  drawings,  interior  views  and  all  time  ex- 
posures :  Cramer's  Banner,  Hammer's  slow  plates  and 
Seed's  No.  23  plates. 

Lantern    Slide    Plates. 

These  special  plates  are  made  by  Cramer,  Hammer 
or  Seed  and  are  suitable  for  making  slides  either  by  contact 
or  reduction. 

For  all  view  and  landscape  work  the  average  kodak 
with  film  attachment  gives  perhaps  the  most  universal  sat- 
isfaction. For  interior  work,  such  as  copying  and  scientific 
work,  an  ordinary  camera,  strongly  constructed  and  pro- 
vided with  a  good  lens   (Goerz.  Zeis,  Cooke,  etc.)   is  indi- 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Pcnial  Fornudari/  mean  quantitie,-; 
by  weight. 


290  DENTAL  FOFiMULAEY 

cated.    For  daylight  work,  solar  paper  is  best  adapted,  while 
for  night  work,  velox  paper  is  to  be  used. 

Photographic  Blue  Print  Paper. 

The  ordinary  photographic  blueprint  paper  is  made  as 
follows.     Two  solutions  are  prepared : 

Solution  i. 

Potassium    ferricyanide .  .  .  lo  parts 

Distilled  water 32  parts 

Solution  2. 

Iron  ammonium  citrate 15  parts 

Distilled  water 32  parts 

Mix  when  wanted  for  use.  Filter  and  apply  to  the 
surface  of  the  paper  by  means  of  a  brush  or  a  piece  of 
cotton  wool.  Let  the  paper  dry  in  a  dark  place  and  store 
away  from  the  light.  No  developer  is  required  for  this 
paper.  After  exposure  it  is  placed  in  water  to  wash  out 
the  undecomposed  iron  salts.  It  may  be  improved  by  im- 
mersion in  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  after  which  it  must 
be  again  thoroughly  washed  in  water. 

Varnish  for  Celluloid  Negatives. 

Shellac,  pale  orange 4  parts 

Methyl  alcohol 6  parts 

Dissolve  and  add : 

Water  of  ammonia 6  parts 

Boiling  water'. 8  parts 

Glycerine j4   P^^ 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  Aveight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULAFY  291 

Allow  to  Stand  for  a  week  and  filter.  After  the  nega- 
tive is  fixed  and  was'hed  it  is  thoroughl}-  drained.  The 
varnish  is  then  poured  into  a  dish  and  the  negative  im- 
mersed and  allowed  to  soak  for  a  few  minutes.  It  is  then 
taken  out  and  pinned  by  one  corner  to  the  edge  of  a  shelf 
or  another  convenient  article  to  dry. 

Transparent  Cement  for  Photographs. 

Tragacanth,   powdered i  part 

Gum  arable,  best  selected 4  parts 

Glycerin    4  parts 

Water,  distilled 32  parts 

Dissolve  the  tragacanth  in  one-half  of  the  water,  the 
gum  arabic  in  the  remainder  and  mix  the  solutions,  com- 
pleting by  adding  the  glycerine.  If  the  gum  arabic  is  not 
first  class  you  may  have  to  filter  the  solution  through  ab- 
sorbant  cotton.  The  white  of  a  fresh  egg  dissolved  in  a 
little  distilled  water  is  also  an  excellent  medium  for  at- 
taching photographic  prints  to  glass,  face  foremost. 

Photographing    Burnt    Manuscripts. 

The  writing  on  a  burnt  manuscript  can  be  rendered 
legible  by  photography,  provided,  of  course,  that  the  paper 
has  not  completely  fallen  to  pieces.  The  method  of  pro- 
cedure is  as  follows :  The  fragments  are  carefully  ar- 
ranged on  a  plate  of  glass,  then  coated  with  a  drying  var- 
nish and  covered  with  another  sheet,  the  whole  arrange- 
ment being  then  placed  in  a  printing  frame.  If  vegetable 
inks  have  been  used,  clear  and  legible  photographs  are  ob- 
tained by  the  use  of  orthochromatic  plates  and  the  proper 
color  screens.     \\'riting  done  in   aniline  or  iron   is  photo- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formvlary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


292  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

graphed  in  the  usual  way.  If  the  writing  is  in  pencil,  the 
camera  and  the  object  must  be  so  arranged  that  the  light 
reflected  from  the  graphite  may  enter  the  lens. 

To   Transfer  Photographs,   Engravings,   Etc.,   from  Paper  to   Glass 
in  Lines   of  Silver. 

Lightly  silver  a  sheet  of  glass  by  any  of  the  numerous 
processes  in  use  (see  page  XX).  Then  float  on  the  sil- 
vered surface  a  very  thin  coating  of  Syrian  asphaltum  (ob- 
tainable from  any  dealer  in  photographic  supplies)  dissolved 
in  benzol.  This  should  be  done  in  very  subdued  light,  best 
of  all  in  the  dark.  When  the  asphaltum  is  dry,  lay  on  it 
the  picture  to  be  transferred  and  expose  the  whole  to  the 
sunlight  for  several  hours.  The  .asphalt,  by  its  peculiar 
property,  is  thus  rendered  insoluble  in  direct  proportion 
to  the  quantity  of  light  received  and,  as  a  consequence,  the 
parts  protected  by  the  lines  of  the  picture  are  left  soluble, 
while  the  other  parts  become  insoluble.  After  exposure, 
the  plate  is  placed  in  benzol  and  the  soluble  parts  of  as- 
phaltum dissolved  away.  It  is  then  rinsed  and  put  in  nitric 
acid  for  a  moment,  which  dissolves  the  silver  thus  exposed. 
Rinsing  in  water  completes  the  operation. 

Paste   for   Mounting   Photographic   Prints. 
I. 

Nelson's  photographic  gelatin 4  parts 

Glycerin   i  part 

Alcohol 5  parts 

Water 16  parts 

Dissolve  the  gelatin  in  water,  add  the  glycerine  and 
finally  the  alcohol. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
bj  weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  293 

2. 

Arrowroot '. lo  parts 

Gelatin   i  part 

Alcohol lo  parts 

Water lOO  parts 

Make  the  arrowroot  into  a  paste  with  a  portion  of  the 
water  and  soak  the  gelatin  in  the  balance  until  soft.  Mix 
the  two  and  bring  to  a  boil  and  boil  for  five  minutes.  On 
cooling,  add  the  alcohol  and  sufficient  liquid  phenol  (about 
I  percent)  to  prevent  decomposition. 

3 

White  dextrin 2  parts 

Alcohol .  I  part 

Boiling  water 6  parts 

Dissolve  the  dextrin  in  the  water  and  when  nearly  cold 
add  the  alcohol. 

4 

In  mounting  b>-  the  "dry  method"  the  paper  or  a  part 
of  it  is  previously  varnished  and  the  print  having  been  put 
in  place,  is  subjected  to  heat  in  a  press.  This  softens  the 
resins  in  the  varnish  and  makes  perfect  contract  between 
the  print  and  the  mount.  The  resinified  paper  is  made  by 
brushing  fine  tissue  paper  with  the  following  solution : 

White    shellac 30  parts 

Gum  clemi 3  parts 

Canada    balsam 5  parts 

Alci  ih(  )1 1 ,000  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fonnuhiri/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


294  DENTAL  FOEMULATiY 

Making  of  Hand  Lantern  Slides   for  Immediate  Use. 

(After  Dr.  G.  V.  Black.) 

The  materials  necessary  for  this  work  are :  Hard 
rolled,  fine,  tissue  tracing  paper. 

Ordinary  cover  glasses  for  lantern  slides  (thin,  white 
glass  is  preferable). 

Hard  pencils  No.  H.  B.  and  H.  BBB.,  clmrcoal  and 
paper  points. 

India  ink  and  "crowquill"  pens. 

Water  colors  and.  fine  hair  pencils. 

Xylol  and  Canada  balsam. 

The  India  ink  should  be  diluted  with  water  propor- 
tionately so  as  to  make  five  different  grades.  The  weak 
solution  is  used  for  making  a  very  light  shade,  the  others 
grading  blacker.  All  water  colors  can  be  used  freely  with 
the  exception  of  yellow.  The  latter  must  be  used  very 
carefully,  as  it  will  kill  light  badly. 

The  picture  is  made  by  copying  or  tracing  on  the  trac- 
ing paper  with  pencils,  ink  or  water  colors.  Dr.  Black 
described  in  the  following  the  details  of  making  colored 
slides :  This  drawing  is  of  a  lower  bicuspid  tooth  in  which 
I  noticed  a  very  peculiar  pulp  chamber.  In  order  to  bring 
this  out  a  little  plainer  I  will  use  a  lead  pencil  with  which 
to  outline  the  pulp  chamber,  doing  this  very  lightly,  and  then 
I  will  color  it  lightly  with  red.  I  will  outline  the  enamel 
also  with  a  lead  pencil,  rather  lightly,  and  go  over  it 
lightly  with  a  pencil  so  as  to  make  the  enamel  stand  out  a 
little  from  the  dentine,  showing  it  to  be  different ;  then 
I  will  take  the  red  ink  and  my  brush,  making  sure  that 
the  latter  is  not  very  wet,  and  lightly  color  the  pulp  cham- 
ber. It  is  best  to  do  any  such  coloring  last.  It  is  not  nec- 
essary to  the  drawing  particularly  that  we  color  the  pulp 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  tins  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  295 

chamber,  but  a  fresh  tint  catches  the  eye.  We  must  not 
make  this  paper  too -wet,  for  if  we  do  it  wih  all  crinkle 
up  in  drying.  When  we  use  a  brush  with  India  ink  the 
paper  will  be  all  crumpled  up  and  not  fit  for  use.  How 
will  we  straighten  it  out?  Let  it  dry  to  fix  the  ink,  then 
lay  it  on  water  and  saturate  the  entire  paper  and  it  will 
straighten  out.  It  may  then  be  dried  beween  pieces  of  blot- 
ting paper  under  a  light  compress,  after  which  we  can  add 
anything  further  we  wish.  Xow  my  picture  is  completed. 
I  will  make  a  second  one  of  different  design,  a  large  pulp 
chamber  in  a  second  bicuspid,  a  very  dift'erent  form  of  tooth 
in  which  I  will  make  the  enamel  a  little  bit  stronger  in 
its  demarcation  from  the  dentine  by  just  a  little  shading 
with  a  pencil.  This  pulp  chamber  I  will  not  color.  I  will 
put  this  on  a  cover  glass,  place  on  it  a  mat  and  over  this 
with  another  cover  glass,  having  the  picture  and  the  mat 
between  two  cover  glasses.  Around  the  whole  I  will  place 
a  couple  of  rubber  bands.  This  is  now  ready  for  the 
screen." 

To  make  a  picture  as  transparent  as  possible,  it  is  now 
dropped  into  xylol  and  left  there  for  about  five  minutes. 
Two  cover  glasses  are  laid  on  blotting  paper  and  on  each 
is  placed  a  small  quantity  of  Canada  balsam,  the  same  as  is 
used  in  mounting  microscopic  specimens,  care  being  taken 
not  to  include  any  air  bubbles.  Remove  the  picture  from 
the  xylol  and  place  it  on  the  balsam  cover  as  nearly  to 
the  center  as  possible  and  place  a  second  balsam  cover 
slide,  face  downward,  over  the  picture.  Press  the  two 
together  lightly  and  carefully  put  a  rubber  band  on  each 
end  so  as  to  hold  the  slides  firmly  together.  Place  the 
slides  on  their  edge  for  drying.     After  a   few   days'  dry- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  ^veigbt. 


296  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

ing,  the  edges  may  now  be  enclosed  in  the  usual  binding. 
All  pressed  out  balsam  must  be  carefully  removed. 

Sizing  Preparation  for  Lantern  Screens. 

White  glue i  part 

Zinc    oxide. 2  parts 

Glycerin i  part 

Water S  parts 

Macerate  the  glue  in  the  water,  boil  until  dissolved 
and  add  the  glycerine.  Mix  the  zinc  oxide  with  a  small 
quantity  of  the  solution  until  a  smooth  paste  is  obtained 
and  add  the  remainder  of  the  solution  under  constant  stir- 
ring. Have  the  fabric  stretched  on  a  smooth  surface  and 
apply  while  hot.  Leave  on  the  stretcher  until  perfectly 
dry.  One  gallon  of  this  sizing  will  cover  a  screen  10  feet 
square. 

TO  MAKE  A  PLASTER  CAST  FROM  LIFE. 

The  face  is  well  covered  with  vaseline,  the  eyelashes 
and  eyebrows  are  well  buried  in  wet  clay  (antiphlogistine 
is  serviceable)  and  well  covered  with  wet  tissue  paper  and 
smaller  hairs  smoothened  down.  Mustache,  whiskers,  etc., 
are  coated  with  clay  and  oiled.  Rubber  tubing  or  quills 
are  inserted  into  the  nostrils  for  respiration.  If  the  ear 
is  embedded,  stop  it  up  with  cotton  and  wax.  Have  the. 
patient  in  a  recumbent  position  and  apply  the  well-mixed 
plaster  with  a  spatula.  Just  before  setting  bury  a  stout 
string  into  the  plaster  corresponding  to  the  long  axis  of 
the  face.  When  hardened,  cut  the  plaster  by  pulling  the 
string,  which  facilitates  the  ready  removal  of  the  impres- 
sion. The  impression  must  be  thoroughly  set  before  the 
cast  is  made.     Soak  the  impression  in  water  and  paint  it 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAFY  297 

with  a  separating  medium.     The  caste  has  to   set   for   at 
least  two  hours  before  separation  is  undertaken. 

HARD  RUBBER   CORROSIONS  OF  THE  PULP  CANALS  OF 
TEETH. 

(After  Dr.  J.  A.  Brown.) 

The  preparation  of  vulcanite  corrosions  of  the  pulp 
canals  of  teeth  consists  of  five  distinct  steps : 

1.  Remove  the  contents  of  the  canals. 

2.  Wash  out  and  dry  the  canals. 

3.  Pack  the  canals  with  vulcanizable  rubber. 

4.  Invest  the  tooth  in  plaster  of  Paris  and  vulcanize. 

5.  Remove  from  the  investment  and  corrode  the  tooth 
in  an  acid. 

The  process  in  detail  is  as  follows :  Make  an  opening 
into  the  pulp  chamber  of  the  tooth  and  with  suitable  broaches 
remove  the  contents  of  the  canals.  Wash  and  dry  the  tooth. 
Fill  the  canals  with  a  solution  of  vulcanizable  rubber  in 
chloroform  and  keep  in  a  warm  place  until  the  chloroform, 
has  entirely  evaporated.  Now  pack  some  more  rubber  into 
the  pulp  chamber,  force  it  in  the  canals  as  far  as  possible 
with  warm  instruments.  Before  investing  the  teeth  press  a 
small  roll  of  rubber  into  the  pulp  chamber  by  means  of  a 
hot  spatula.  The  purpose  of  the  extra  roll  of  rubber  is  to 
force  more  material  in  the  canals  by  the  expansion  of  the 
rubber  during  the  process  of  vulcanization.  The 
flask  should  be  vulcanized  for  an  hour  and  thirty 
minutes  at  a  temperature  of  320"'  F.  When  cold 
remove  the  tooth  from  the  investment,  wash  in  water  and 
jilace  in  50%  hydrochloric  acid,  which  corrodes  the  tooth 

N.  B. — Parts  as  viseu  in  this  Denial  Fornnilari/  mean  quantities 
by  weiglit. 


298  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

substances,  leaving  a  hard  rubber  cast  of  the  canals  and 
pulp  chamber  complete. 

CELLULOID  CORROSIONS  OF  THE  PULP  CANALS  OF  TEETH. 

(After  Dr.  G.  Fischer.) 

Celluloid  corrosions  may  be  made  by  first  dehydrating 
the  tooth,  from  which  the  pulp  has  been  removed,  in  acetone. 
A  solution  of  one  part  celluloid  in  eight  parts  of  acetone 
is  made.  The  tooth  is  placed  in  a  perfectly  dry  test  tube, 
covered  with  the  celluloid  solution  and  tightly  corked.  After 
the  three  days  the  cork  is  removed  and  the  acetone  is  al- 
lowed to  evaporate.  The  tube  is  again  filled  with  celluloid 
solution  and  the  acetone  allowed  to  evaporate  (without 
corking).  This  process  is  repeated  until  in  about  two  or 
three  weeks  the  tooth  is  completely  covered  with  a  solid 
mass  of  celluloid.  The  tube  is  broken  and  the  tooth  is 
cut  from  the  celluloid  with  a  sharp  knife  and  placed  in  a 
50%  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid,  C.  P.,  and  kept  in  a 
warm  room.  In  about  two  weeks  decalcification  will  be 
completed.  The  celluloid  corrosion  is  now  carefully  washed, 
dried  and  mounted  and  kept  in  a  dry  place  protected  from 
dust. 

CLEANING  AND  BLEACHING  OF  BONES. 

(After  Dr.  H.  H.  Lauderdale.) 

A  skull  in  the  flesh  or  one  which,  though  dry,  has  been 
pro]jerly  roughed  out  and  dried  will  always  make  the  best 
specimen.  Roughing  out,  as  the  natural  science  collector 
would  term  it,  is  removing  the  skin  and  the  major  portion 
of  the  flesh  from  the  skull.  Care  should  be  taken  when 
working  on  the  underside  of  the  skull  not  to  injure  the 
often   long  and  delicate   styloid,   hamular  and  other  proc- 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBilULABY  299 

esses.  With  a  flattened  instrument,  slightly  bent  at  one  end, 
remove  all  the  brain  substance  possible.  Place  the  roughed- 
out  skull  in  a  bucket  .of  cold  water,  changing  the  water 
daily  until  it  is  no  longer  bloody.  If  it  is  not  convenient 
to  mascerate  the  skull  at  this  time  take  it  from  the  water 
and  place  it  in  a  shady  place  to  dry.  It  can  then  be  kept 
as  long  as  desired  and  will  have  .little  or  no  odor.  On  the 
collecting  grounds  the  skulls  are  treated  in  this  way  and 
can  then  be  shipped  to  any  point  in  safety. 

Roughed-out  ligamentary  skeletons — the  skeletons  of 
all  smaller  animals,  reptiles  and  birds  are  of  this  kind — 
are  soaked  in  an  aqueous  solution  of  arsenic  for  fifteen 
minutes  to  protect  them  from  the  ravages  of  insects  which 
would  otherwise. destroy  the  ligaments  by  which  the  bones 
are  held  together  when  mounted.  Skulls,  of  course,  do  not 
need  this  treatment.  Skulls  should  never  be  buried  in  the 
soil  or  boiled  in  water  to  remove  the  flesh,  as  either  method 
tends"  to  set  the  blood  in  the  bones  and  leave  them  dark 
and  discolored.  Placing  them  in  an  anthill  and  allowing 
the  ants  to  remove  the  flesh  will  produce  the  same  effect. 
Skulls  exposed  for  a  long  time  to  the  weather  become 
dark  and  can  rarely  be  whitened. 

Place  the  bucket  containing  the  roughed-out  specimens 
in  a  warm  place  and  in  summer,  which  is  the  best  time  to 
macerate,  place  in  a  sunny  location,  filling  the  bucket  as 
the  water  evaporates.  In  winter  a  covered  crock  in  a  warm, 
sheltered  nook  will  do.  though  the  maceration  process  will 
be  much  slower.  In  ]\lilan,  Italy,  where  large  numbers 
of  skeletons  are  macerated  yearly,  pieces  of  horseflesh  are 
thrown  in  the  maceration  tubs  to  hasten  the  decomposition. 
The  time  of  maceration  varies,  being  best  in  summer,  slower 
in  winter  ;  fresh  skulls  in  this  climate  in  the  summer  re- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


300  DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 

quiring  from  six  to  eight  weeks.  When  the  skull  has 
macerated  sufficiently,  remove  it  from  the  bucket  and  scrub 
it  in  clean  water  with  a  stiff  brush  until  thoroughly  cleansed. 
A  scraper  is  often  of  great  service  in  cleaning  the  skull 
cavity. 

Now  take  two  gallons  of  water,  bring  it  to  the  boiling 
point  and  add  first  two  pounds  of  washing  soda  and  then 
one  pound  of  chloride  of  lime.  Then,  with  a  brush,  wash 
the  skull  in  this  solution,  commonly  called  Javelle  water. 
The  washing  soda  assists  in  removing  the  grease  from  the 
skull,  while  the  chloride  of  lime  bleaches  the  bones  by 
means  of  the  chlorine  liberated.  The  length  of  time  the 
skull  is  washed  in  this  solution  will  depend  on  the  strength 
of  the  solution  and  quality  of  the  bone ;  strong,  hard  bones 
are  not  easily  affected,  while  a  delicate  bone,  left  long  in 
the  solution,  ceases  to  exist  in  its  original  form. 

After  washing  the  skull  in  Javelle  water  the  proper 
length  of  time,  rinse  thoroughly  in  clean  water  to  remove 
any  of  the  lime  which  may  have  been  deposited  and  which, 
on  drying,  fills  the  small  pits  of  the  bone,  giving  it  an  un- 
natural, chalky  appearance.  Place  the  skull  in  the  sun- 
shine, when  it  soon  becomes  white.  If,  after  two  or  three 
days,  it  is  not  as  white  as  desired,  again  wash  in  Javelle 
water.  If  the  skull  shows  signs  of  grease  place  it  in  a  glass 
jar  containing  naphtha  and  allow  it  to  remain  in  the  sun- 
shine, the  jar  to  be  covered  with  a  glass  plate  to  prevent 
the  readily  volatilized  liquid  from  vaporizing.  The  skulls 
are  placed  in  the  sunshine  as  the  warmth  assists  the  action 
of  the. naphtha.  The  time  needed  to  properly  degrease 
skulls  depends  considerably  on  their  size,  the  smaller  ones 
being  degreased  more  ra])i(lly  than  a  relatively  larger  skull. 

N.  B. — Pints  ;is  nscil   in  Jliis   Denial  Formulary  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY  SOI 

For  small  skeletons  and  skulls  about  two  months  would  be 
the  average  length  pf  time  required. 

After  removing  from  the  naphtha  again  wash  the  bones 
in  the  Javelle  solution,  rinse  in  water  and  again  place  in 
the  sun  to  bleach.  In  many  fresh  skulls  the  bones  show 
little  or  no  signs  of  grease  and  do  not  need  this  treatment, 
and  in  large  skulls  and  skeletons  a  special  machine  is 
needed,  which,  though  doing  the  work  quicker  and  using  a 
much  smaller  amount  of  naphtha,  is  much  more  likely  to 
injure  the  bones. 

The  bones  from  the  dissecting  room,  if  strongly  in- 
jected, seldom  bleach  perfectly,  just  why  I  cannot  tell,  the 
arsenic  with  which  the  subjects  are  injected  being,  no  doubt, 
the  cause.  Bones  of  this  sort  often  remain  in  maceration 
for  a  year  and  a  half  and  then  are  very  hard  to  clean,  while 
fresh  specimens  would  be  fully  cleaned  in  one-fourth  of 
that  time. 

In  macerating  skulls  great  care  should  be  taken  to  pre- 
vent any  brass  or  iron  getting  into  the  water,  as  the  brass 
renders  the  bones  of  a  greenish  hue,  which,  as  yet,  nothing 
has  been  found  that  will  remove.  The  iron  rusts  the  bones 
and  then  they  must  be  scrubbed  in  hot  hydrochloric  acid, 
washed  in  Javelle  fluid,  rinsed  in  clean  water  and  bleached. 

PRESERVING  FLUID  FOR  ANATOMICAL  SPECIMENS. 

(  W'ickersheimer's.  ) 

Alum   loo  parts 

Sodium   chloride 25  parts 

Potassium  nitrate 12  parts 

Potassium  carbonate 60  parts 

Arsenous  acid 10  parts 

\\'ater,    boiling. 1,000  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  nscil  in  this  Denial  Formularii  mean  quantities 
bv  weight 


302  DENTAL  FOEMULAHY 

Filter  the  solution  and  add : 

Glycerin 400  parts 

Wood    alcohol 100  parts 

EMBALMING  FLUID. 

I. 

Mercuric    bichloride i  part 

Glycerin 16  parts 

Wood  alcohol 120  parts 

2, 

Solution  of   formaldehyde 16  parts 

Phenol   liquid 4  parts 

Water 60  parts 

DISINFECTANT  SOLUTIONS:   "FOUR  CHLORIDES." 

Alum 10  parts 

Sodium    carbonate 10  parts 

Ammonium  chloride 2  parts 

Sodium    chloride 2  parts 

Zinc   chloride i  part 

Hydrochloric  acid,  crude,  a  sufficient  quantity. 
Water,  enough  to  make 125  parts 

Dissolve  the  alum  in  50  parts  of  hot  water,  add  the 
sodium  carbonate  which  gives  a  precipitate  of  ammonium 
hydrate.  Hydrochloric  acid  is  now  added  in  sufficient  quan- 
tity under  constant  stirring  until  the  precipitate  is  dis- 
solved and  converted  into  aluminum  chloride.  The  other 
salts  are  dissolved  in  the  remainder  of  the  water  and  added 
to  the  first  solution. 

A  suitable  strength  of  the  solution  for  ordinary  disin- 

N.  B. — Parts  as  u.sed  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOE  MU  LA  BY  303 

fectant  purposes  (rooms,  clothing,  etc.)  is  made  by  mixing 
one  pint  of  the  concentrated  solution  with  one  gallon  of 
water. 

DISINFECTING  POWDER  FOR  STABLES,  LATRINES,  ETC. 

Fresh  slaked  lime . 75  parts 

Plaster  of  Paris 30  parts 

Sulphate  of  iron,  powder 20  parts 

Carbolic  acid,  crude 10  parls 

Mix  thoroughly. 
To  be  used  dry. 

Disinfection    of   Rooms. 

The  room  to  be  disinfected  should  have  a  temperature 
of  65°  F.  (18°  C.)  or  more,  and  the  air  present  must  con- 
tain at  least  75  percent  of  moisture.  This  humidity  can  be 
produced  by  placing  pans  of  steaming  hot  water  about  the 
room.  Drawers,  closet  doors,  etc.,  should  be  opened  and 
the  furniture  moved  from  the  walls.  Set  on  the  floor  in 
the  middle  of  the  room  a  large  tin  bucket,  in  which  place 
a  tin  can  of  suitable  capacity.  Put  into  the  can  six  ounces 
of  potassium  permanganate  crystals  and  pour  over  them  one 
pint  of  commercial  formaldehyde  solution.  This  quantity 
is  sufficient  for  every  thousand  cubic  feet  of  air  space.  The 
operator  should  leave  the  room  at  once,  as  large  quantities 
of  formaldehyde  gas  are  immediately  evolved.  The  room 
must  be  closed  air  tight  and  not  opened  for  at  least  six 
hours.  Furniture,  draperies,  carpets,  pictures,  etc..  are  not 
damaged  by  this  method  of  disinfection.  After  the  disin- 
fection is  completed  the  formaldehyde  gas  can  be  neutral- 
ized by  ammonia,  so  as  to  render  the  room  fit  for  occupa- 
tion.    This   may  be   readily  accomplished  by  placing  in  a 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formularj/  mean  quantities 
bv  weielit. 


304  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

suitable  vessel  two  pounds  of  freshly  burnt  lime,  seven 
pints  of  boiling  water  and  three  pints  of  strong  ammonia 
water.  After  one  hour's  exposure  to  the  ammonia  vapors 
the  room  should  be  well  aired. 


STERILIZING  FLUID  FOR  INSTRUMENTS. 

■    Solution  of  formaldehyde 50  parts 

Sodium  borate 20  parts 

Water,  enough  to  make 100  parts ' 

A  SIMPLE  STERILIZER. 

A  large  wide-mouth  office  preparation  bottle,  such  as 
is  used  for  dental  varnish,  is  filled  to  the  depth  of  about 
one  and  one-half  inches  with  a  clean  powdered  pumice  stone. 
Saturate  the  powder  with  lysol,  cresol  or  a  similar  strong 
antiseptic  liquid,  leaving  a  layer  of  the  liquid  covering  the 
mixture.  Push  the  instrument  back  and  forth  in  the  pumice, 
wash  in  hot  water  and  dry. 

REMEDIES  FOR  THE  TEETH. 
Tooth   Ache    Gum. 

Beeswax 16  parts 

Lard  4  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 8  parts 

Creosote 8  parts 

Melt  the  wax  and  lard,  when  cool  add  the  oil  of  cloves 
and  the  creosote  and  sufficient  crosscut  cotton  to  saturate 
it  thoroughly  with  the  mixture.  Roll  into  small  sticks,  wrap 
in  paraffin  paper  and  place  in  vials. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOSMULAIiY  305 

Tooth    Ache    Drops. 

Chloral  hydrate I  part 

Alenthol    i  part 

Gum    camphor 2  parts 

Eugenol   2  parts 

Rub  together  until  a  syrupy  liquid  is  obtained. 


Tooth    Ach<e    Sticks. 

Beeswax    8  parts 

Phenol   6  parts 

Eugenol i  part 

Melt  the  wax  and  add  'the  phenol  and  the  eugenol. 
While  still  liquid  immerse  thin  layers  of  absorbent  cotton 
in  the  fluid  and  when  sufificiently  cool  roll  them  into  the 
shape  of  rods.  For  use  snip  off  a  little  piece,  warm  it  gently 
and  introduce  into  the  hollow  tooth. 


Tooth    Ache    Cement. 

Gum    mastic 20  parts 

Oil  of  cloves 5  parts 

Chloroform    50  parts 

Gum  copal,  hard 10  parts 

Opium  powder 10  parts 

Tannic  acid 5  parts 

Dissolve  the  gum  mastic  and  copal  in  the  chloroform 
and  add  the  other  ingredients.    Apply  on  a  ball  of  cotton. 

Tooth  Polish   to   Remove  Stains. 

Acid  potassium  tartrate i   part 

Pumice   ^tone 1   part 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Drnlal  Foniiuhui/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


306  DENTAL  FOJiMULABY 

Mouth    Cachou. 

Orris  root 250  parts 

Muse    }i  part 

Cumarin i  part 

V^anillin    5  parts 

Oil  of  rose 5  parts 

Oil  of  orange,   sweet 5  parts 

Oil  of  peppermint 5  parts 

Oil  of  spearmint 5  parts 

Oil  of  ylang-ylang 2  parts 

Extract  of  licorice,  enough  to  make  a  solid  mass. 


REMEDIES  FOR  THE  HAIR  AND  SCALP. 

Hair  Tonic  for  Oily  Hair. 

Resorcinol i  part 

Betanaphthol    1/2  part 

Compound  tincture  of  cinchona 3  parts 

Bay  rum,  enough  to  make. 120  parts 

Hair  Tonic  for  Dry  Hair. 

Balsam  of  Peru 5  partis 

Castor   oil 20  parts 

Alcohol 100  parts 

Oil  of  bergamot 2  parts 

Alopecia  Ointment. 

Pilocarpine    hydrochloride 3  parts 

Lanolin    350  parts 

Cold  cream,  enough  to  make i  ,000  parts 

Apply  to  the  scalp  daily. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  moan  quantilios 
by  weigiit. 


DENTAL  FOlRMrLAFY  307 

Eau    de    Quinine. 

Quinine    hydrochloride 4  parts 

Tannic    acid 10  parts 

Alcohol ■ 850  parts 

Tincture  of  cantharides 10  parts 

Glycerine    60  parts 

Eau    de    Cologne 40  parts 

Vanillin   i/io  part 

Red   saunders   wood 3^  part 

Filter  after  a  week's  standing. 

Depilatory    Compound. 

Barium    sulphide 2  parts 

Zinc    oxide .      3  parts 

Corn    starch 3  parts 

Mix  with  water  into  a  paste,  spread  on  the  hairy  parts 
and  when  dry,  wash  off  with  warm  water. 

HAIR  DYES. 

I. 
Solution   1. 

Silver    nitrate 2  parts 

Distilled  water 15  parts 

Keep  in  amber-colored  bottle. 

Solution  2. 

Copper  sulphate,  C.  P 0.6  parts 

Distilled  water 10  parts 

Water  of  ammonium.  . 6  parts 

Add  equal  parts  of  solution  i  to  2  when  needed.  Ap- 
ply with  a  soft  toothbrush,  comb  the  hair  thoroughly  and 
expose  to  sunlight  for  ten  minutes. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  FonnuJari/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


308  DENTAL  FOEMULABY 


Solution   1. 

Silver    nitrate lo  parts 

Distilled   water 240  parts 

Water  of  ammonium 5  parts 

Solution  2. 

Pyrogallic  acid 4  parts 

Tannic    acid .      2  parts 

Acetic  acid,  diluted 8  parts 

Distilled  water .  240  parts 

Mix  equal  parts  of  solutions  i  and  2  when  needed  and 
apply  as  above.  If  black  stains  about  the  skin  should  re- 
sult from  accidental  contact  with  the  dye,  they  may  be  re- 
moved with  the  following  solution  : 

Potassium  iodide 2  parts 

Distilled  water 16  parts 

REMEDIES  FOR  THE  SKIN. 
Hand  Cream. 

Lanolin 25  parts 

Glycerin 35  parts 

Borax  5  parts 

Oil  of  geranium i  part 

Greaseless  Toilet  Cream, 

Tragacanth    2  parts 

Water    125  parts 

Glycerin 8  parts 

Tincture  of  benzoin .      2  parts 

Borax  2  parts 

White  rose  extract,  enough  to  ])erfume. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  iiscil  in  tliis  Dental  Fnrmvlary  moan  quantities 
by  weigbl. 


DENTAL  FOllMULAUY  309 

Mascerate  the  tragacanth  in  the  water  until  it  is  per- 
fectly soft.  Dissolve  the  horax  in  the  glycerine.  Mix  the 
two  solutions,  add  the  tincture  and  the  perfume  and  press 
through  muslin. 

REMEDIES  FOR  THE  SKIN  AND  THE  HANDS. 
Skin   Food. 

White   wax 4  parts 

Spermaceti 4  parts 

Cocoanut  oil 8  parts 

Lanolin 8  parts 

Oil  of  sweet  almonds 16  parts 

Melt  together  in  a  porcelain  capsule,  remove  from  fire 
and  add : 

Orange   flower  water 8  parts 

Tincture  of  benzoin I4   part 

Briskly  beat  until  a  perfect  cream  is  obtained. 


Skin   Lotion. 

Borax 16  parts 

Potassium  carbonate 2  parts 

Dissolve  in 
Hot  water 80  parts 

and  add 

Glycerin    16  parts 

Eau  de  Cologne 16  parts 

Tincture  of  benzoin 4  parts 

Essence   of    violet . 4  parts 

Rose  water,  enough  to  make  125  parts. 

A  teaspoonful  to  be  added  to  a  basin  of  warm  water. 

X.  B. — Pai'ts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Fornnihn /i  moan  quantities 
by  weight. 


310  DENTAL  FOE^IULARY 

Almond    Meal     Compound. 

Almond  meal 25  parts 

Orris  root,  powdered 5  parts 

Borax 3  parts 

Castile  soap  powder 2  parts 

Eau   de   Cologne. 

Oil  of  bergamot 26  parts 

Oil  of  lemon 28  parts 

Oil  of  orange,  sweet 22  parts 

Oil  of  lavender 15  parts 

Oil  of  petis  grain 3  parts 

Oil  of  orange  flowers 2  parts 

Alcohol   4-500  parts 

Rose  water* 500  parts 

Bay  Rum. 

Oil  of  cloves '.      I  part 

Oil  of  bay 16  parts 

Alcohol    1,000  parts 

Water 750  parts 

Dusting   Powder. 

I. 

Salicyclic    acid 10  parts 

Corn  starch 30  parts 

Talc    • .  . . 300  parts 

2. 

Sodium    perborate 3  parts 

Boric  acid 5  parts 

Talc 90  parts 

Essence  of  violet 2  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Fornndary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOFMULARY  311 

Fingernail  Bleach. 

Sodium   perborate . 2  parts 

Corn  starch 2  parts 

Make  into  a  paste  with  water  and  apply  to  the  nails. 

After  drying  wash  off  with  warm  water  and  polish  with 

putty  powder. 

Hand-Cleansing    Pastes. 

I. 

Extract  of  quillaya 2  parts 

Borax i  part 

Fuller's  earth i  part 

Soft   soap I  part 

Perfume .  .  q.  s. 

Triturate  the  borax  with  the  extract  of  quillaya  and 
afterward  with  F'uller's  earth ;  then  incorporate  with  the 
soft  soap  and  sufficient  water  to  form  a  paste.  Lastly  per- 
fume as  desired. 


2. 

Domestic  soap,  dried  and  rasped 750  parts 

Sodium  carbonate,  crystallized 20  parts 

Hot    water 120  parts 

Heat  upon  the  water-bath  until  soft ;  thoroughly  mix. 

Then  add 

Pulverized   pumice   stone 200  parts 

Pulverized    talc 50  parts 

Perfume  q.  s. 

X.  R. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight 


312  DENTAL  FOEMULARY 

Shaving    Cream    for    Collapsible    Tubes. 

Curd    soap 8  parts 

Spermaceti    ^2  part 

Oil  of  Almonds 2  parts 

Glycerin    i   part 

Potassium  carbonate ^4   part 

Water i6  parts 

Cut  the  soap  into  shreds  and  dissolve  on  a  water  bath 
in  14  parts  of  water.  Dissolve  the  spermaceti  in  the  al- 
moid  oil  and  while  warm  mix  it  with  the  glycerin,  potas- 
sium carbonate  and  remainder  of  the  water.  Transfer  to 
a  warm  mortar,  gradually  incorporate  the  warm  soap  solu- 
tion and  continue  to  stir  until  a  smooth  paste  is  obtained. 
With  this  incorporate  any  suitable  perfume. 


SOAP  POWDER  CLEANSERS. 

I. 

Borax    Soap    Powder. 

Soap  5  parts 

Sodium    hydroxide 3  parts 

Sodium  silicate 2  parts 

Sodium  borate i  part 


2. 

Soap 6  parts 

Sodium  hydroxide •.  .  .  .  2  parts 

Pearlash    i  part 

Sodium    sulphate i  part 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FORiilLARY  313 

3- 
Dry  Soap  Powder. 

Desiccated  hard  soap. 28  parts 

Sodium  carbonate  (crystals) 68  parts 

x\nhydrous  boric  acid i  part 

Boron  nitride i  part 

Ammonium  chloride i   part 

TO   BLEACH   LEATHER,    IVORY,   BONE   AND   HORN. 

Digest  the  material  with  benzine  at  100^  F.  for  one 
hour.  Pour  off  the  liquid  and  drive  off  the  residual  ben- 
zine by  warming  the  leather,  etc..  in  a  water  bath  and  treat 
afterwards  with  liquid  sulphurous  acid,  Javelle's  water  or 
hydrogen  peroxide  with  ammonia  water.  This  process  pro- 
duces excellent  results,  leaving  the  leather,  etc.,  a  pinkish 
white,  suitable  for  the  finest  hand  ornamentation,  book- 
covers,  etc.  Whatever  iron  is  present  is  in  the  shape  of 
an  oleate  or  tannate,  both  of  which  are  soluble  in  benzine. 
In  ivory,  horn  and  bone  bleaching  two  birds  may  be  killed 
with  one  stone  by  shaking  up  the  benzine  with  hydrogen 
peroxide,  whereby  the  peroxide  goes  over  into  the  benzine. 
A  separation  funnel  separates  the  benzine  from  the  water 
in  which  the  hydrogen  peroxide  was  at  first  dissolved  and 
leaves  the  oxygenated  benzine  for  the  treatment  of  the  ob- 
ject to  be  bleached,  which  is  simply  immersed  in  it. 

SILVERING   OF   MIRRORS. 
Solution    1. 

Silver   nitrate 15  parts 

Rochelle  salt 15  parts 

Distilled    water ' 4,000  parts 

Boil  for  six  to  eight  minutes 4.000  parts 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Forniulaiii  mean  quantities 
by  weiglu. 


314  DENTAL  FORMULARY 

Solution  2. 

Silver  nitrate 20  parts 

Distilled   water 1,000  parts 

Stir  with  a  glass  rod  until  dissolved  and  add 

Water  of  ammonia,  a  sufficient  quantity  (usually  a  few 
drops  only)  until  solution  becomes  perfectly  clear.  Now 
add 

Silver  nitrate 15  parts 

Stir  until  dissolved  and  add 

Distilled  water 3.000  parts 

Filter  the  solution  through  paper  (glass  funnel).  Keep 
the  solution  in  amber-colored,  glass-stoppered  bottles. 

Directions  for  silvering :  Clean  the  glass  with  water 
of  ammonia  and  running  water.  Place  equal  parts  of 
solution  I  and  2  into  a  graduate,  stir  well  and  quickly  pour 
on  the  middle  of  the  glass  to  be  silvered.  The  solution 
will  spread  over  the  flat  surface  of  the  glass.  Leave  it  un- 
til the  solution  has  precipitated,  remove,  place  on  edge  for 
drying  and  when  perfectly  dry,  coat  with  a  thin  layer  of 
asphalt  varnish. 

PREVENTING    CONDENSATION    ON    MIRRORS,    EYE-GLASSES, 

ETC. 

I. 

Beeswax 6  parts 

Japan  wax 3  parts 

Paraffin    i   part 

Glycerin   5  parts 

The  waxes  and  the  paraffin  are  melted  together  and 
poured  upon  a  heated  plate  or  saucer  containing  the  glycer- 
in.  It  is  immediatel)-  thoroughly  spatulated  together  and  put 

iST.  B. —  Parts  as  nsoc]  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by   weight. 


DENTAL  FORMULARY  315 

in  a  tin  box.  The  wax  combination  may  be  replaced  by 
common  candle  wax.  The  mixture  is  rubbed  over  the  glass 
and  polished  with  a' soft  cloth. 

2. 

Potassium  oleate i6  parts 

Glycerin   8  parts 

Oil  of  turpentine I   part 

German  green  soap  may  be  used  instead  of  potassium 
oleate.  ]\Ielt  the  oleate  and  glycerin  together  on  a  water 
bath,  then  add  the  turpentine.  Should  the  paste  be  too 
thick,  it  may  be  thinned  by  the  addition  of  more  glycerin. 

To   Prevent  a  Mouth-Mirror  from   being  Scratched  by   a  Stone   in 
Preparing  Teeth  for  Crown-Work. 

Place  a  moistened  microscope  cover  glass  upon  the 
mouth  mirror.  If  the  stone  should  mar  it,  it  can  easily 
be  replaced,  thus  saving  your  mouth  mirror  many  a  scratch. 

FROSTING  FOR  WINDOW  GLASS. 

Zinc   sulphate 3  parts 

Magnesium  sulphate 5  parts 

Dextrine 2  parts 

Water 202  parts 

Dissolve  and  apply  with  a  soft  brush. 


INKS. 

Hectograph  Compound. 

Gelatin 22^  parts 

Water  40  parts 

Mix  and  set  aside  for  ^  j  liour.  add 

Glycerin    70  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


316  DENTAL  FOBMVLAEY 

Place  on  a  steam  bath,  heat  until  dis- 
solved and  evaporate  until  the  whole 
mass  weighs lOO  parts 

Ink   for   Hectograph. 

Resorcin  blue lo  parts 

Distilled  water 85  parts 

Acetic  acid .-. i  part 

Indelible    Ink. 

Extract  of   logwood 20  parts 

Boiling  water 280  parts 

After  solution  has  been  effected  mix  with    - 
a  liquid  composed  of  a  solution  of 

Potassium  bichromate. 3.5  parts 

Hot  water 20  parts 

Hydrochloric   acid 8  parts 

Ink   for   Marking   Linen. 

I. 

Silver  nitrate 5  parts 

Ammonia  water 10  parts 

2. 

Sodium   carbonate 7  parts 

Gum    arable 5  parts 

Distilled   water 12  parts 

Add  solution  i  to  2  and  keep  in  well-corked  bottles, 
protected  from  liglit.  Mark  linen  with  a  new  steel  or  quill 
pen. 

X.  B. — Piirts  as  used   in   tliis  Venial  Foriindury  mean  quantities 
by   weight. 


DENTAL  FOBMVLAHY  317 

Glass    Lettering    Ink. 

Zinc  oxide i   part 

Liquid    silex.  .  .' lo  parts 

Mix  and  appl_\-  with  a  Inrush. 

Pencils   for  Writing   on  Glass. 

Black — Lampblack,  i  ;  yellow  wax,  4:  tallow,  i.  White 
— White  lead,  4;  yellow  wax,  2;  tallow,  i.  Light  Blue — 
TurnbuU's  blue,  3;  yellow  wax,  4;  tallow,  2.  Dark  Blue — 
Prussian  blue.  3  ;  mucilage,  i  ;  tallow,  2.  Red — A'ermillion. 
I ;  yellow  wax,  2;  tallo\\%  i.  Yellow— Chrome  yellow,  i; 
yellow  wax.  2;  tallow,  2.  Melt  the  wax  and  tallow  and 
rub  in  the  colors.  On  the  large  scale  the  pencils  are  molded 
by  hydraulic  pressure,  then  dried  to  the  desired  consistency 
and  put  in  wooden  carriers. 

DURABLE  BLACK  STAIN  FOR  LABORATORY  TABLES. 
Solution   1. 

Copper    sulphate 125  parts 

Potassium    chlorate 125  parts 

Water 1000  parts 

Solution  2. 

Aniline    hydrochloride 75  parts 

Water    500  parts 

Aniline    Hydrochloride. 

Aniline   oil 60  parts 

Hydrochloric    acid 60  parts 

Water    500  parts 

The  table  must  be  in  natural  wood  without  paint  or 
varnish.     Two  coats   of  the   first    solution   arc   ajijilied   hot 

N.  B. — Parts  as  nspil  in  tliis  Denial  ForDiidarj/  moan  ruiaiitities 
by   wpiijlil. 


318  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

and  allowed  to  dry.  Two  coats  of  the  second  solution  are 
applied  at  an  interval  of  one  day.  A  coat  of  raw  linseed 
oil  is  then  applied  on  the  dry  surface  and  thoroughly  rubbed 
in.     Finally,  the  table  is  washed  with  hot  soap  suds. 

BATTERY  FLUIDS. 
A.       For    the    Carbon    and    Zinc    Battery. 

I.     For  OrdixNary  Use. 

Sodium  bichromate 4  troy  ounces 

Sulphuric  acid,  com'l .4  troy  ounces 

Water,    cold 32  fl.  ounces 

2.     For  Use  With  the  Galvano-Cautery. 

Sodium  bichromate ,  .4%  troy  ounces 

Sulphuric  acid,  com'l 9^  fi.  ounces 

Water,    cold 32  fl.  ounces 

3.     For  Medical  Batteries. 

Potassium  bichromate,  powdered. .7^  troy  ounces 

Sulphuric  acid,   com'l 8  fl.  ounces 

Water    5  pints 

Add  the  acid  in  a  thin  stream,  under  constant  stirring, 
to  the  water  and  dissolve  the  powdered  potassium  bichro- 
mate in  the  mixture. 

B.       For    the    Leclanche    Battery. 

Ammonium   chloride loj/   troy  ounces 

Water,  enough  to  make 32  fl.  ounces 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tliis  Dental  Foiiindary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAHY  819 

OIL    STONE    LUBRICANT. 

I. 

Glycerin    i   part 

Alcohol    2  parts 

2. 

Neatsfoot  oil i  part 

Fresh  lead  shavings,  a  sufficient  quantity. 

Place  in  bottle  and  expose  to  sunlight  for  some  weeks. 

To   Clean  Oil  Stoves. 

Wash  the  surface  with  alcohol  and  even  the  surface 
with  the  finest  sand  paper. 

Paste   for   Razor  Strops. 

Pumice  stone,  very  fine  powder 30  parts 

Emery  flour 30  parts 

Paris    red 15  parts 

Lard 30  parts 

Curd  soap 30  parts 

Lubricant  for  Syringe   Pistons,   Sounds,   Etc. 

Gum    tragacanth 25  parts 

Glycerin    10  parts 

Phenol  solution.  2% 90  parts 

Lubricant   for   Surgeon's    Rubber   Gloves. 

Gum    tragacanth 8  parts 

Boric  acid 4  parts 

Solution  of  formaldehyde i  part 

Alcohol    ; .    2>~  parts 

Water    200  parts 

Oil  of  rose  geranium,  a  -sufficient  quantity  to  scent. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fonmthiri/  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


320  DENTAL  FOUMULARY 

Dissolve  the  gum  tragacanth  in  the  water,  in  which  the 
"boric  acid  has  previously  been  dissolved.  Dissolve  the  oil 
in  the  alcohol,  add  the  solution  of  formaldehyde  and  mix 
with  the  gum  solution.  Keep  in  well  stoppered  wide-mouth 
bottles. 

A  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  RUBBER  GLOVES. 

Celloidin,    Schering i  part 

Alcohol,  96% 5  parts 

Castor  oil ^  part 

The  hands  are  thoroughly  cleansed  with  soap  and  hot 
water,  dried,  washed  in  alcohol  and  again  dried.  The  above 
solution  is  now  painted  on  the  hands.  It  leaves  an  elastic 
coat.     Washing  in  alcohol  will  remove  it. 

LIQUID  SPLINT  FOR  THE  FIXATION  OF  FRACTURES. 

Powdered    starch 2  parts 

Gelatin 2  parts 

Solution  of  potassium  silicate 60  parts 

'  Boric    acid ; i  part 

Alix  the  starch  with  the  solution  of  silicate  of  potash 

by  shaking  from  a  pepper-box  and  stirring  constantly  until 
mixed.  Dissolve  the  gelatin  in-  10  parts  of  warm  water  and 
add  the  solution  to  the  mixture.  Put  into  a  jug  of  double 
the  capacity  and  ferment  at  room  or  sun  temperature  for 
three  or  four  days.  Then  add  the  boric  acid,  mix  well,  and 
it  is  ready  for  use. 

If  too  thick  after  standing,  thin  it  with  boiling  water. 
Keep  corked.  Apply  a  silk  stocking  or  roller  bandage ;  then 
a  coat  of  the  preparation  with  a  brush,  and  repeat  until  three 
or  four  layers  are  applied  or  until  the  splint  is  thick  enough. 
It  may  be  cut  after  hardening  and  eyelets  and  laces  put  in. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOUMULAHY  321 

TO  CLEAN  MARBLE  SLABS. 

Grease  spots  are  removed  by  a  thick  mixture  of  mag- 
nesia and  gasoline  spread  over  the  surface,  say  three-eighths 
of  an  inch  thick.  Let  it  remain  on  the  stone  an  hour  or 
two,  then  remove  the  dried  crust  of  magnesia.  Stains  from 
extracts  may  be  removed  by  a  thick  paste  of  talcum,  white 
lead,  lemon  juice  and  either  citric,  tartaric  or  oxalic  acid, 
thinned  wnth  alcohol.  If  this  fails,  try  a  mixture  of  barium 
hyperoxide  and  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  mixed  at  the  lowest 
available  temperature  and  avoiding  any  excess  of  acid. 
Use  as  in  the  case  of  the  magnesia  mixture  above  spoken 
of.  The  stone  v/ill  have  to  be  repolished,  using  a  mixture 
of  "putty"  and  paraffin  oil. 

Kid   Gloves    Cleanser. 

Stearic    acid 5  parts 

Carbon  tetrachloride 75  parts 

Water  of  ammonia ■ ....  20  parts 

Shake  before  using. 

Straw    Hat    Cleanser. 

Sodium    bisulphate 10  parts 

Tartaric    acid 2  parts 

Borax    10  parts 

Moisten  a  small  quantity  of  the  powder  with  water  and 
apply  this  mixture  with  a  wet  brush. 

To  Clean  Saliva  Ejector  Tubes. 

Place  in  10%  hydrochloric  acid  for  a  few  hours  and 
wash  in  running  water. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  FoDiiulary  ineau  quautities 
by  weight. 


322  DENTAL  FOSMULAEY 

To   Remove   Glaze  from   Carborundum  Stones. 

To  renew  carborundum  stones  that  have  become  glazed 
from  grinding  down  teeth  containing  amalgam  fillings, 
place  them  in  a  beaker  and  cover  with  a  50%  solution  of 
nitric  acid,  allowing  them  to  remain  for  two  or  three  hours. 
Remove  and  place  in  a  strong  solution  of  sodium  bicarbon- 
ate for  several  hours,  that  the  acid  which  has  been  absorbed 
by  the  stones  may  be  neutralized. 

To    Clean    Vulcanite    Files. 

When  a  vulcanite  file  becomes  clogged  with  rubber  and 
plaster,  it  may  easily  be  cleansed  by  wrapping  absorbent 
cotton  around  it  and  saturating  the  cotton  with  chloroform. 
In  about  ten  minutes  it  can  be  cleaned  perfectly  by  the  use 
of  a  stiff  brush  wheel  on  the  lathe. 

FREEZING  PREVENTIVES  FOR  AUTOMOBILES. 

I. 

Potassium  carbonate 75  parts 

Glycerin 50  parts 

Water    100  parts 

2. 

Calcium  chloride 4^  parts 

Water,    hot 8     parts 

3- 

Wood    alcohol ; 2  parts 

Glycerin   4  parts 

Water  6  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  323 

4- 

(For  acetylene  generators.) 

Calcium   chloride 2  parts 

W' ater 8  parts 

Freezing  Mixtures. 

I. 

Potassium    nitrate lO  parts 

Ammonium  chloride 30  parts 

Potassium    chloride 60  parts 

Water    100  parts 

2. 

Ammonium    chloride 10  parts 

Potassium    nitrate 3  parts 

Potassium   chlorate . 20  parts 

Cold   water 32  parts 

j\Iix  the  salt  and  add  to  the  water.     \\'ill  reduce  the 
temperature  of  the  water  about  50°  F. 

FIRE  EXTINGUISHERS. 
Powders. 

I. 

Sodium    chloride 43  parts 

Alum    20.  parts 

Sodium    phosphate 5  parts 

Sodium    carbonate y/y  parts 

Sodium   silicate 20  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  useil   in  this  Denial  FonnHhiry  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


324  DENTAL  FOJRMULABY 

2. 

Sodium    bicarbonate 40  parts 

Sodium    sulphate 60  parts 

Ammonium   cliloride 100  parts 

3- 

Potassium    nitrate 59  parts 

Sublimated  sulphur 36  parts 

Charcoal   powder 4  parts 

English    red i   part 

Place  in  a  round  paper  carton,  holding  about  five 
pounds.  Punch  a  hole  in  the  center  and  push  one  end  of 
a  fuse  cord  (about  four  inches)  into  the  mixture,  leaving 
the  other  end  (about  six  inches)  extend  on  the  outside.  In 
case  of  fire,  the  mixture  is  set  on  fire  by  the  fuse  cord.  The 
burning  of  the  mixture  uses  up  the  oxygen  in  the  air  and 
thus  extinguishes  the  flames.  To  be  used  in  closed  rooms 
only. 

Liquid. 

Calcium  chloride,  crude 20  parts 

Sodium   chloride,   crude 5  parts 

Water 75  parts 

To  be  used  with  a  hand  spray  in  case  of  fire. 

Fire-proofing    of   Paper. 

Ammonium  sulphate 4  parts 

Sodium   borate i  part 

Boric    acid i^  parts 

Water   4  parts 

The  paper  is  immersed  in  the  hot  solution  until  com- 
pletely saturated  and  dried. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY  325 

Fire-proofing   of    Wood. 

Lime,    fresh   slaked 40  parts 

Sodium    chloride 10  parts 

Alum    10  parts 

Solution  of  sodium  silicate 10  parts 

Sodium    wolframate 10  parts 

Mix. 

Fire-proofing    of    Textile    Materials. 

Ammonium    sulphate 8  parts 

Ammonium   carbonate 2.5  parts 

Boric   acid 3  parts 

Borax    2  parts 

Starch 2  parts 

Water 100  parts 

Water-proofing    of    Paper. 

Gelatin   i  part 

Water    4  parts 

Glycerin .  i  part 

Cover  the  paper  on  both  sides  with  the  warmed  solu- 
tion ;  after  a  few  minutes,  before  it  is  fully  dry,  drop  into  the 
following-  solution : 

Formaldehyde  solution 75  parts 

Water    500  parts 

Water-proofing    of   Wrapping   Paper. 

Alum    24  parts 

Hard    soap 4  parts 

White   wax 15  parts 

Water    120  parts 

Boil  together.  Saturate  the  paper  with  the  hot  mixture 
and  hang  up  to  dry. 

X.  B. — Parts  as  r.scil  in  this  Dental  Formuhinj  moan  quantities 
l)y  weight. 


326  DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 

Water-proofing  of  Boots. 

Heat  fish  oil,  castor  oil  or  tallow  to  about  250°  F,  over 
a  naked  fire,  and  then  add  about  one-fifth  of  the  weight  of 
the  oil  taken  of  either  vulcanized  or  raw  India  rubber,  stir- 
ring well  until  the  latter  is  dissolved.  To  color,  a  little 
printer's  ink  may  be  used.  One  or  two  applications  of  this 
are  sufficient  to  thoroughly  waterproof  a  pair  of  boots  for 
a  season.  Boots  thus  treated  will  take  a  common  shoe 
blacking  afterwards  with  ease. 


Impervious  Corks. 

The  usual  procedure  for  treatment  with  paraffin  is  to 
immerse  the  dry  corks  in  the  melted  substance ;  they  should 
be  kept  in  the  bath  for  some  time  and  sunk  by  a  porous  disc 
of  some  kind.  Corks  treated  in  this  way  should  be  quite 
impervious  to  glycerin. 


Stoppers   for   Chemicals. 

Suitable  corks   are   saturated   in   a   solution   heated   to 
100°  F.  composed  of 

Gelatin   15  parts 

Glycerin   25  parts 

Water    500  parts 

If  corks  are  used  for  acids,  they  should  be  additionally 
treated  with 

Parafifin    10  parts 

Petrolatum 2  parts 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY  327 

Sealing   Wax  for  Bottles. 

Rosin    : 480  parts 

Japan  wax 60  parts 

Turpentine    30  parts 

Melt  together  in  a  water-bath. 
To  color  above  quantity,  ^dd 

For  green  color :  verdigris 45  parts 

For  red  color :  cinnabar 45  parts 

For  blue  color :     Prussian  blue 100  parts 

For  yellow  color:  chrome  yellow 40  parts 

To  remove  a  tightly  wedged  glass  stopper  from  the 
neck  of  a  bottle : 

Gently  heat  the  neck  of  the  bottle  and  remove  the  stop- 
per while  the  neck  is  still  warm  and  before  the  stopper  be- 
comes affected  by  the  heat. 

Engine  Burs — How  to  Sharpen. 

According  to  Dr.  Elliott,  a  suitable  disc  mounted  in  the 
engine,  preferably  an  electric  engine,  and  a  watchmaker's 
eye  gl?ss  form  all  the  equipment  necessary.  After  an  ex- 
perience of  some  years  using  vulcanite  and  corundum,  shel- 
lac and  corundum,  Arkansas  stone,  copper  disks  fed  with 
carborundum  and  vaseline,  none  compare  with  what  is 
called  the  ruby  gem  disk,  made  in  Worcester,  Mass.  The 
time  actually  taken  to  sharpen  a  bur  is  less  than  half  a 
minute,  and  you  can  sharpen  all  the  burs  you  have  used  in  a 
day  and  make  them  al)solntely  sharp  in  five  or  ten  minutes. 
The  disk  is  about  one  inch  in  diameter,  thin  and  cone- 
shaped,  the  base  of  the  cone  toward  the  hand  piece.  These 
disks  can  be  readily  turned  and  given  the  proper  angle  at 
the  edge,  by  holding  against  the  rapidly  revolving  disk  a 
coarse  carborundun,  wliecl  or  broken  bit.     .-Vnother  excellent 

N.  R. — Parts  as  used  in  tliis  Denial  Forwulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


328  DENTAL  FOBMULABY 

plan  is  to  use  a  steel  disk,  the  teeth  formed  by  rubbing  on 
a  very  fine  file  and  then  hardening.  This  gives  a  sharper, 
cleaner  blade  to  the  bur  than  the  ruby  gem,  but  has  the  dis- 
advantage that  the  bur  to  be  sharpened  must  be  soft,  have 
the  temper  drawn,  while  this  is  not  necessary  with  the  stone 
disk.  The  bur  is  held  between  the  thumb  and  index  finger 
of  the  left  hand  and  slowly  rotated  as  each  blade  is  gone 
over  by  the  rotating  disk  held  in  the  right  hand.  Make  it 
a  rule  to  never  use  a  bur  the  second  time  wthout  sharpening. 

N.  B.-T-Parts  as  used  iu  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


CHAPTER  X. 
TABLES. 

WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES. 

The  system  of  weights  and  measures  as  used  in  the 
United  States  was  standardized  in  1836,  when  the  then 
Secretary  of  the  Treasury  was  authorized  by  Congress  to 
furnish  each  state  of  the  Union  with  a  complete  set  of 
revised  standards  for  weights,  hquid  measures,  and  meas- 
ures of  length.  These  various  methods  of  weights  and  meas- 
ures are  quite  confusing  when  an  examination  of  their 
comparative  units  is  made — that  is,  it  is  perplexing  to  find 
that  a  pound  is  not  a  pint,  an  ounce  does  not  equal  a  fluid- 
ounce,  and  a  drop  is  neither  a  grain  nor  a  minim. 

The  United  States  National  Prototype  Standards,  from 
which  all  weights  and  measures  now  used  in  this  country 
are  derived,  are  the  meter  and  the  kilogram,  and  they  are 
preserved  in  the  custody  of  the  National  Bureau  of  Stand- 
ards at  Washington.  The  United  States  meter  and  kilo- 
gram are  identical  with  the  international  Standards  of  the 
same  capacity. 

The  United  States  standards  of  weights  and  measures 
are : 

The  apothecaries'  or  troy  ounce  =  480      grains. 

The  eommereial  or  avoirdupois  ounce  ==  437.5  grains. 
The  apothecaries'  fluiilounce   (identical 

with  the  fluidounce  of  tlie  liquid  gallon)  =  480     minims. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 

329 


330  DENTAL  FORMULABY 

The  weights  and  measures  used  in  the  British  Pharma- 
copeia are  the  Imperial  weights  and  measures,  legal  for 
commercial  purposes  in  the  British  Empire.  The  English 
apothecaries'  weights  are  the  same  as  those  used  in  the 
United  States. 

Apothecaries'   Weight. 

Pound.  Troy  ounces.  Drams.  Scruples.  Troy  grains. 

lb  1  =  12  =  96  =  288  =  5760 

g  1  =:  8  =  24  =  480 

3  1=  3  =  60 

©    1  =       gr.  20 

Troy  Weight. 

Pound                         Troy  ounces.               Pennyweights.  Troy  grains. 

mi                 =                  12  =               240  =        -        5760 

B  1  =                 20  =                 480 

4  troy  grains  =  7  carat.                               dwt.  1  =  gr.  24 

Avoirdupois   Weight. 


Pound. 

Ounces. 

Drams. 

Troy  grains. 

It)  1 

=             16 

= 

256 

= 

7000. 

oz.  1 

= 

16    ■ 

= 

437.5 

dr.  1 

= 

gr.  27.34375 

Relative    Value    of    Troy    and    Avoirdupois    Pounds. 

1  troy  pound  =         0.822857  avoirdupois  pound. 

1  avoirdupois  pound  =         1.215277  troy  pounds. 


Apothecaries'    or    Wine    Measure     (United    States). 

Gallon.  Pints.  Fluidounces.  Fluidrams.         Minims.  Cubic  inches. 

Cong.  1       =  8     =        128     =        1024     =       61440     =     231 

O  1 


16 

= 

128     = 

7680 

= 

28.875 

fig  1 

= 

S     = 

480 

= 

1.8047 

fi3   1     = 

Til  60 

= 

.22.56 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Doiliil  Foniiulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULAET  331 

Liquid   Measure. 

1  pint  =  4  gills.  1  gallon  =  4  quarts. 

1  gill  =  4  fiuiJounces.    1  quart  =  2  pints. 

Imperial    Measure    (British    Pharmacopeia). 

Gallon.                   Piuts.            Fluidouuces.          Fluidrams.  Minims. 

1             =             S           =           160           =           1280  =  76SU0 

1           =             20           =             160  =  9600 

1          =                8  =  480 

1  =  60 

The  Metric  System. 

The  metric  or  decimal  system  of  weights  and  meas- 
ures originated  with  Prince  de  Talleyrand,  bishop  of  Autun, 
in  1790.  Its  almost  universal  adoption  by  civilized  nations, 
its  legality  (though  not  compulsion)  in  England  and  the 
United  States,*  and  its  adoption  by  the  United  States 
Pharmacopeia  of  1890  demand  that  it  should  be  under- 
stood by  the  progressive  practicing  physician.  Except  in 
the  English-speaking  world,  it  is  the  only  system  of  weights 
and  measures  used  for  governmental,  statistical,  and  scien- 
tific purposes.  It  is  based  upon  the  decimal  system — that 
is,  the  denominations  increase  by  tens  and  decrease  by 
tenths.  The  starting  point  is  the  unit  of  linear  measures, 
the  meter,  which  represents  one-ten-millionth  of  the  polar 
quadrant  of  the  earth — that  is,  the  distance  from  the  equa- 
tor to  the  poles- — and  is  equivalent  to  39.37  English  inches. 
The  gram  (Gm.)  is  the  unit  of  weight;  the  lifer,  or  capac- 
ity (although  the  cubic  centimeter  is  oftener  jn-eferably 
used)  :  the   are,   of   surface  measure.      The   denominations 


*The  metric  system  was  legalized   in   Great  Britain   iu   1S64, 
and  in  the  United  States  by  act  of  Congress  in   1866. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Denial  Forniulari/  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


332  DENTAL  FORMULAEY 

representing  the  subdivisions  of  any  unit  are  expressed  by 
prefixing  the  Latin  numerals,  dcci,  centi,  and  inilli  to  the 
unit — meaning  respectively  one-tenth,  one-hundredth,  and 
one-thousandth ;  the  multiples  are  expressed  by  prefixing 
the  Greek  numerals  deka,  hecto,  kilo  and  myria — meaning 
ten,  hundred,  thousand,  and  ten  thousand. 

The  gram  is  derived  as  follows:  The  meter  is  divided 
into  one  hundred  equal  parts,  called  centimeters.  On  one 
centimeter  as  a  base  a  cube  is  erected,  having  for  its  three 
dimensions  one  centimeter  (Cm.)  each.  The  contents  of 
this  cube  will  be  one  cubic  centimeter  (Cc),  measuring  one 
milliliter.  This  quantity  of  distilled  water  at  its  maximum 
density  (39.2°  F.,  4°  C. )  and  30  inches  barometric  pressure 
weighs  one  gram,  or  15,432  grains. 

The  liter  is  derived  as  follows :  The  meter  is  divided 
into  ten  equal  parts,  called  decimeters.  On  one  decimeter 
as  a  base  a  cube  is  erected,  having  for  its  three  dimensions 
one  decimeter  (dm.)  each.  The  contents  of  this  cube  will 
be  one  cubic  decimeter  (dm.^),  the  capacity  of  which  is 
one  liter,  equivalent  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters,  or  33.81 
fluidounces,  or  2.1 13  pints.  One  liter  of  distilled  water  at 
4°  C.  and  30  inches  barometric  pressure  weighs  1,000  grams, 
or  I  kilogram,  or  2.2  pounds  avoirdupois,  or  15,432  grains. 

Metric   Weights    and  Measures. 

The  meter,  or  unit  of  length,  =  .39.37043  inches. 

The  liter,  or  unit  of  capacity,         =  33.814  fluidounces    (U.  S.). 

The  gram,  or  unit  of  weight,  =  15.432348  troy  grains. 

Measures  of  Length. 

English  inches.  English  inches. 

Millimeter   (mm.)      =       .03937  Decimeter  (dm.)        =     3.93704 

Centimeter  (cm.)       =       .39370  Meter  (m.)  =  39.37043 

Kilometer  =  39.370.43    English  inches. 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOT^MVLABY 


33S 


Measures    of   Capacity. 

English  cubic  inches. 
Milliliter    (Cc.)  ^  '    .06102 

Centiliter  (el.)  =         .(il028 

Hectoliter  =  6102.8  English  cubic  inches 

Measures    of   Weight. 

Troy  grains.       I 
.Milligram   (mg.)         =        .0154  Decigram  (dg.) 

Centigram  (eg.)  =         .154.'?  Gram  (Gm.) 

Kilogram   =   15432.34  troy  grains. 


English  cubic  inches. 
Deciliter  (dl.)  =       6.10280 

Liter  (L.)  =     61.02800 


Troy  grains. 
=  1..5432 
=    15.4324 


Apothecaries'   Weight  and  Metric  Equivalents. 


Moo 

grain 

= 

n.0006  grams. 

15 

grains 

= 

0.97  grams. 

Vu 

= 

0.001       " 

15. 

1    " 

= 

1. 

VoO 

= 

0.0013     " 

20 

( I 

= 

1.3 

1/40 

= 

0.0016     " 

24 

1 1 

= 

1.55         " 

'i2 

= 

0.002       " 

30 

i  I 

= 

1.94 

\^0 

= 

0.003       " 

40 

c  t 

= 

2.6 

Me 

= 

0.004       " 

45 

•  1 

= 

2.92 

M2 

= 

0.005       ' ' 

50 

" 

= 

3.23 

Mo 

= 

0.006       " 

60 

"  (1 

dram) 

\^ 

= 

0.008       " 

= 

3.89 

V^ 

= 

0.011       " 

li/L' 

drams 

= 

5.58 

Ms 

= 

0.012       " 

1% 

i  i 

= 

6.81         " 

M 

= 

0.015       " 

•) 

<  I 

= 

7.78 

^i 

= 

0.022       " 

2V- 

= 

9.72 

Vs 

= 

0.032       " 

3 

' 

= 

11.65 

% 

= 

0.048       " 

4 

( 1 

= 

15.55 

1 

= 

0.065       ' ' 

5 

" 

=:: 

19.43         " 

o 

grains 

= 

0.13 

6 

" 

= 

23.3           " 

3 

= 

0.2 

1 

ounce   (480 

grains) 

4 

= 

0.26 

= 

31.1           " 

5 

= 

0.32 

2 

ounces 

= 

62.2 

6 

= 

0.39 

3 

" 

= 

93.3 

8 

= 

0.52 

4 

" 

= 

124.4           " 

10 

= 

0.65 

6 

i  1 

= 

186.6           " 

12 

0.78 

8 
10 
12 

" 

= 

248.8 

311. 

373.2 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  tiiis  Dental  Fon))ulari/  mean  quantities 
bv  weight. 


334 


DENTAL  F0EMULAB7 


Apothecaries'   Measure  and  Metric  Equivalents. 


1 

minim 

= 

0.06  Cc. 

11/4 

fluidranis 

=: 

4.65 

Cc 

o 

minims 

= 

0.12    " 

11/2 

= 

5.60 

3 

( i 

^= 

0.18    " 

1% 

= 

6.50 

4 

i  i 

= 

0.24    " 

2 

= 

7.50 

5 

i  ( 

= 

0.30    " 

3 

= 

11.25 

6 

1 1 

= 

0.36    " 

4 

= 

15.00 

7 

iC 

= 

0.42    " 

8 

8 

t  i 

= 

0.50    " 

(1  fluidoz.) 

= 

30.00 

9 

I  i 

= 

0..55    " 

(more 

exactly) 

= 

29.57 

10 

1 1 

= 

0.60    " 

2  fluidounces 

= 

59.15 

15 

i  i 

= 

0.92    " 

3 

c  t 

= 

88.72 

20 

( t 

= 

1.25    " 

4 

i  i 

= 

118.29 

25 

1 1 

= 

1.54    " 

8 

I  i 

= 

236.59 

30 

1 1 

= 

1.90    " 

16 

i  I 

40 

1 1 

= 

.2.50    " 

(Ipint) 

= 

473.18 

45 

C  I 

= 

2.80    " 

32 

i  i 

= 

946.36 

50 

c  t 

=^ 

3.10    " 

128 

i  i 

60 

minims 

(1  fluidram) 

— 

3.70    '•' 

(1  gallon) 

= 

3785.43 

( I 

Weight   Equivalents. 

To  convert  grains  into  grams  multiply  by 0.065 

To  convert  grams  into  grains  multiply  by 15.5 

To  convert  drams  into  grains  multiply  by 3.9 

.To  convert  ounces   (avoirdupois)   into  grams  multiply  by....      28.4 

To  convert  pounds   (avoirdupois)-  into  grams  multiply  by.  . .  .  543.6 


Measure   Equivalents. 

To  convert  cubic  centimeters  into  drams  multiply  by 15.5 

To  convert  cubic  centimeters  into  drams  multiply  by 0.20 

To  convert   cubic  centimeters  into   ounces    (avoirdupois)   mul- 
tiply by  9.03 

To  convert  pints  into  cubic  centimeters  multiply  by 473. 

To  convert  liters  into  ounces   (avoirdupois)  multiply  by 35.3 

To  convert  gallons  into  liters  multiply  by 3.8 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOIillULAPiY 


335 


Approximate    Measures 

A  drop   equals  ronglily    1  minim 

A  teaspo(Jnl'ul 

A  dessertspoouftil 

A  tablespoonful 


A  wineglassful 
A  teacupfnl 
A  tumble?' ful 
A  handful 


=  1  fluidram. 

=  2  fiuidrams. 

=  1/4  fluidounce. 

=  2  fluidounces. 

=  4  fluidounces. 

=  8  fluidounces. 

=  4  ounces. 


Percentage   Solution   Table. 

Showing  the  quantity  of  drug  and  water  to  use  for 
preparing  aqueous  sokitions  of  different  strengths.  In  these 
calculations  456  grains  have  been  taken  as  the  weight  of 
one  fluidounce  of  distilled  water  at  ordinary-  temperature. 


C 

e 

c 

c 

e 

c 

c 

c 

c 

c  • 

c 

c 

>^n 

0  0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

□ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

c 

0  " 

§m 

m 

m 

tn 

m 

in 

m 

0  ^ 

Hi 

0  ^ 

1^" 

-a 

^  c 

c 

'-'" 

^'^ 

"c 

^C 

■^'c 

^C 

^'c 

^C 

""  c 

•   0 

t.  <u 

u  a> 

i.  a 

t.  0) 

0  0 

0  " 

c  u 

0  p 

0  a 

0  u 

0  p 

0  9 

E> 

(*-f  « 

^  a 

.•  a 

.■  ft 

C  P- 

.•  a 

!-•» 

C  ^ 

•  •  a 

C^ 

c^ 

tz  "• 

0 

5 

5 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

lA 

0.2281   0.457 

1.14 

•'>  3 

4.0 

7.    1      9.5 

121   2.5.3 

571      761   228 

1 



0.4561   0.'.)13 

2.29 

4.6 

9.3 

14.11   19. 

24]   50.6 

1141    1521    456 

0 

0.U12 
1.37 
1.82 
2.74 

1.83 
2.74 
3.05 
5.48 

4. 58 

0.87 

9.16 

13.75 

9.2 
13.8 
18.4 
27.0 

18.0 
27.9 
37.2 
.55.8 

28.21  38. 

42.3  57. 

50.4  76. 
84.fi  114. 

481101.31   22S|   3041   912 

^ 

72  151.9 

96  202.6 

144  303.9 

3421    450,1368 

4 

456     tUl.S,ls24 

C. 

6.S4:    '.112  27:!i; 

8 

3.65   1   7.31    118.32 

36.8 

74.4 

112.8  152. 

192  405.2 

912  I21li  .•;ii4s 

r> 



5.47   110.96   127.5 

55.2 

111.0 

169.2  228. 

288  607.911368, 1.S24|.5472 

10 

7.3      114.6      [36.64 

73.0 

148.S 

225.0  304. 

384  810.4I1824I2430I729U 

Short   Rules    for    Determining    Percentages    in    Mixtures. 

Multiply  480  b}-  the  percentage  desired  and  point  off 
two  right-hand  figures.  The  figures  at  the  left  of  separa- 
trix  will  give  the  number  of  grains  or  drops,  480  being  the 
numljer  of  grains  to  the  ounce.  Examples:  480X4^1920; 
ic). 20^191 ;  iQi  grains  to  an  ounce  of  liquid,  a  4  per  cent 
solution. 


N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Formtilori/  moan  quantities 
1)V   weight. 


336 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY 


Cabalistic    Signs    Used    in    Prescription    Writing. 

tb 

libra 

a  pound 

§ 

uncia 

'    an  ounce 

o 

drachma 

a  drachm 

9 

scrupulus. 

a  scruple 

gr. 

granum 

a  grain 

C 

congius 

a  gallon 

O 

octarius 

a  pint 

fS 

fluid  uncia 

a  fluid  ounce 

f3 

fluid  drachma 

a  fluid  drachm 

m 

minim 

a  drop 

gtt 

gutta 

a  drop 

ss 

semis 

half 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


CENTAL  FOUMFLAJiY 


337 


Table   of  Solubility. 


Name 

Water 

Alcohol 

Ether      j 

Glycerin 

Acetanilid   

23(1 

80 

400 

25 

15 

1 

500 

1 

1 

readily 

12 

1.3 

4 

3 

1 

35 

1 

17 

3.5 

3 

15 
readily 

1 
readily 

2 

2.5 
readily 

1 
35 
10 

Teadily 
50 ' 
readily 

4 
difficult 

10 

50 

3 

readily 
3 
50 

16 

readily 

3.5 

readily 

50 
readily 

readily 

50 

readily 

300 
readily 

3 

6 
15 

reafiily 
4 

Acid  arsenic   

5 

10 

Acid  boric   

10 

Acid  carbolic    

readily 
readily 

Acid  citric    

Acid  salicylic       

Acid  tannic 

2 

Acid  tartaric    

readily 
3 

■.:.■..•.:: 

Acid  trichloracetic    

Alum 

Ammonium  bromid    

Ammonium  carbonate    .  . 

Ammonium  chlorid    

Antipyrin    

Apomorphin  hydrochlorid 
Atropin  sulphate 

readily 

Camphor    

Caffein 

80 

readily 
0.5 
4 
4 

5000 

Chloral  hydrate   

Coeain  hydrochlorid    .... 

Codein  phosphate   

Copper  sulphate  

lodin    

readily 

4 

Iodoform   

lodol    

5000 
2 

SO 

1 

difficult 

1(3 

25 

20 

1400 

Iron  sulphate   

4 

Lithium  carbonate 

Magnesium   sulphate    .  .  . 
^lenthol  

Mercuric  chlorid    

Morphin  hydrochlorid   .  .  . 
Morphin  sulphate    ...... 

Phenacetin    

15 
5 
5 

N.  B. —  Parts  as  used    in   this  T>ental  Fonnulari/  mean   quantities 
bv  weishl. 


33S 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 


Name 

Water 

Alcohol 

Ether 

Glycerin 

Pilocarpin  hydrochlorid    . 

10 

readiiy 

Potassium  acetate 

0.5 

o 

Potassium  bicarbonate   .  . 

4 

readily 

Potassium  bromid 

2 

200 

1 

4 

Potassium  carbonate     .  .  . 

1 

15 

Potassium  chlorate   

16 

130 

32 

Potassium  iodid     

1 

12 

2.5 

Potassium  permanganate 

21 

explosive 

Potassium  sulphate 

10 

Potassium  tartrate    

1 

Quinin  hydrochlorid    .... 

34 

3 

Quinin  sulphate 

800 

90 

Eesorcinol   

1 
250 

0.5 
"5 

0.5 

5 

Saccharin    

Salol 

10         1             0.3 
10                 

Silver  nitrate 

0  6 

readily 
15 

Sodium  acetate    

3 

30             

Sodium  benzoate   

2 

13 

Sodium   bicarbonate 

12 

4 

Sodium  bromid    

1.2 

5 

1 

Sodium  carbonate   

2 





5 

Sodium  ehlorid 

3 
6 

diflSeult 

Sodium  phosphate 

difficult 

Sodium  salicylate    

1 

6 



readily 

Sodium  sulphate    

3 

1 

Strychnin  nitrate    

90 

70 

25 

Strychnin  sulphate    .... 

31 

65 

Suear  

0  5 

Sugar,  milk 

6 

Sulphonal    

500 

65 

135 

Tartar  emetic  

17 

1    readily 

Thymol    

1100 

1 

1 

Veratrin    

4 

7 

100 

Zinc  sulphate 

0.6 

3 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used 
by  weight. 


in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 


DENTAL  FOEMULABT  339 


Number    of    Drops  in   a   Fluidram. 

Table  showing-  number  of  drops  in  a  fluidram  of  dif- 
ferent liquids,  with  weight  in  grains  and  in  grams : 

Drops  in  Weight  of  1  fluidram 

Name                          1  fluidram  (60m)  In  grains  In  grama 

Acia.^aoeticum   108  58  3.75 

Aei'l.  aceticum  dilut   G8  55  3.56 

Acid,  hydrochlor    70  65  3.62 

Acid,  hydrochlor.  dilut  60  56  3.49 

Acid,  laetieum    Ill  66  4.27 

Acid,  nitricum   102  77  4.98 

Acid,  nitricum  dilut   60  58  3.62 

Acid,  sulphur 128  101  6.54 

Acid,  sulphur,  aromat 146  53  3.43 

Acid,  sulphur,  dilut 60  58y2  3.79 

iEtber  fortior 176  39  2:52 

Alcohol    146  44  2.85 

Aqua    60  55  3.56 

Aqua  amnion,  fortior   66  50  3.24 

Chloroform,  purificat 250  80  5.18 

Creosotum    122  56yo  3.66 

Glycerinum    67  68  4.40 

Hydrargyrum    ;  .  150  760  49.24 

Liq.  potassi  arsenitis   57  55  3.56 

Oleum  caryophylli   130  57  3.69 

Oleum  cinnamonic    126  53^/4  3.46 

Oleum  gaultheria?   125  62  4.01 

Phenol  liquid   Ill  59  3.82 

Spiritus  amnion,  aromat 142  48  3.11 

Syrupus    65  72  4.66 

Tinctura  aconiti    146  46  2.98 

Tinctura  digitalis    128  53  3.43 

Tinctura  ferri  chloridi    150  53  3.43 

Tinctura  iodi    148  47  3.04 

Tinctura  opii   130  53  3.43 

Tinctura  Zingiberis     :  .  144  46  ^.H'^ 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Peiilol  Fonnidary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


340 


DENTAL  FOBMULABY 


Thermometric  Equivalents. 

To  reduce  Centigrade  degrees  to  those  of  Fahrenheit, 
multiply  by  9,  divide  by  5  and  add  32 ;  or,  degrees  Centi- 
grade  Xi-8H-32=degrees  Fahrenheit. 

To  reduce  Fahrenheit  degrees  to  those  of  Centigrade, 
subtract  2,2,  multiply  by  5.  and  divide  by  9;  or,  degrees 
— 32-f-i.8^degrees  Centigrade. 


Fahrenheit    and    Centigrade    Scales. 


°c 

°F 

°C 

°F 

°C 

°F 

°C 

°F 

— 20 

—4- 

I 

33-8 

22 

71.6 

43 

[09.4 

—19 

— 2.2 

2 

35-6 

23 

73-4 

44 

[II. 2 

—18 

—0.4 

3 

37-4 

24 

75-2 

45 

[13- 

—17 

1.4 

4 

39-2 

25 

77- 

46 

[14.8 

—16 

3-2 

5 

41. 

26 

78.8 

47 

[16.6 

—15 

5- 

6 

42.8 

27 

80.6 

48 

[18.4 

—14 

6.8 

7 

44.6 

28 

82.4 

49 

[20.2 

—13 

8.6 

8 

46.4 

29 

84.2 

50 

[22. 

— 12 

10.4 

9 

48.2 

30 

86. 

51 

[23.8 

— II 

12.2 

10 

50. 

31 

87.8 

52 

[25.6 

— 10 

14. 

II 

51-8 

32 

89.6 

53 

[27.4 

—  9 

15.8 

12 

53-6 

33 

91.4 

54 

[29.2 

—  8 

17.6 

13 

55-4 

34 

93-2 

55 

f3i- 

-  7 

19.4 

14 

57-2 

35 

95- 

56     1 

[32.8 

-  6 

21.2 

15 

59- 

36 

96.S 

57     1 

34-6 

—  5 

23- 

16 

60.8 

37 

98.6 

58     ] 

.364 

—  4 

24.8 

17 

62.6 

38 

100.4 

59     ] 

38.2 

—  3 

26.6 

18 

64.4 

39 

102.2 

60     ] 

40. 

—  2 

28.4 

19 

66.2 

40 

104. 

61      ] 

41.8 

—  I 

30.2 

20 

68. 

41 

105.8 

62      ] 

43-6 

0 

32. 

21 

69.8 

42 

107.6 

63      1 

45-4 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used   in  this  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


DENTAL  FOEMULARY 


341 


°c 

op 

°C 

op 

°C 

op 

°C 

op 

64 

147.2. 

78 

172.4 

92 

197.6 

106 

222.8 

65 

149. 

79 

174.2 

93 

199.4 

107 

224.6 

66 

150.8 

80 

176. 

94 

201.2 

108 

226.4 

67 

152.6 

81 

177.8 

95 

203. 

109 

228.2 

68 

1544 

82 

179.6 

96 

204.8 

1 10 

230. 

69 

156.2 

83 

I8I.4 

97 

206.6 

III 

231.8 

70 

158. 

84 

183-2 

98 

208.4 

112 

233-6 

71 

159.8 

85 

185. 

99 

210.2 

113 

2354 

72 

I6I.6 

86 

186.8 

100 

212. 

114 

237.2 

73 

1634 

87 

188.6 

lOI 

213.8 

115 

239- 

74 

165.2 

88 

190.4 

102 

215.6 

116 

240.8 

75 

167. 

89 

192.2 

103 

217.4 

117 

242.6 

76 

168.8 

90 

194. 

104 

219.2 

118 

244.4 

77 

170.6 

91 

195.8 

105 

221. 

119 

246.2 

N.  B. — Parts  as  used  in  Ibis  Dental  Formulary  mean  quantities 
by  weight. 


342 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 


Comparison  of  Wire  Gauges. 

Number  of  Wire  Gauges  Expressed  in  Decimal  Parts  of  an  Inch. 


[0 

o 

Iz; 

01 

an 
C3 

xrx  3 
«3o 

C  3 

Q 
to 

'% 

o 

3 

m 

O 

< 

.  M 

M  3 

^d 

OS 

03  ea 
*  03 

Twist  Drill 

4.0 

.460 

.454 

19 

.03589 

.042 

.166 

3.0 

.40964 

.425 

£0 

.03196 

.035 

.161 

2.0 

.3648 

.380 

21 

.02846 

.032 

.159 

1.0 

.32486 

.340 

22 

.02535 

.028 

.157 

'l 

.2893 

.300 

.228 

23 

.02257 

.025 

.154 

2 

.25763 

.284 

.221 

24 

.0201 

.022 

.152 

3 

.22942 

.259 

.213 

25 

.0179 

.020 

.1495 

4 

.20431 

.238 

.209 

26 

.01594 

.018 

.147 

5 

.18194 

.220 

.  .2055 

27 

.01419 

.016 

.144 

6 

.16202 

.220 

.204 

28 

.01264 

.014 

.1405 

7 

.14428 

."180 

.201 

29 

.01126 

.013 

.136 

8 

.12840 

.165 

.199 

30 

.01002 

.012 

.1285 

9 

.11443 

.148 

.196 

31 

.00893 

.010 

.120 

10 

.10189 

.134 

.1935 

32 

.00795 

.009 

.116 

11 

.09074 

.120 

.191 

33 

.00708 

.008 

.113 

12 

.08081 

.109 

.189 

34 

.0063 

.007 

.111 

13 

.07196 

.095 

.185 

35 

.00561 

.005 

.110 

14 

.06408 

.083 

.182 

36 

.005 

.004 

.1065 

15 

.05707 

.072 

.180 

37 

.00445 

.104 

16 

.05082 

.065 

.177 

38 

.00396 

.... 

.1015 

17 

.04525 

.058 

.173 

39 

.00353 

.0995 

18 

.0403 

.049 

.1695 

40 

.00314 

.098 

*Brown  &  Sharpe,  or  American  Wire  Gauge. 
**Birmingham  Wire  Gauge. 


N.  B.- 
by  weight. 


-Parts  as  used  in  this  Denial  Fornvulary  mean  quantities 


INDEX. 


Abscess   209 

Abrasion    209 

Abrasives    156 

Accidents  of  Anesthesia, 

treatment  of   256 

Actinomycosis  211 

Acute    poisoning,    treatment 


of 
Alkai 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy; 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 

ing 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 
Alloy 


^264 

ne  Mouth  Wash 160 

Alger    73 

Alpaca    73 

Aluminum    70 

Ashbury    73 

Argusoid    73 

Berry    74 

Bibra    73 

Bidery    72 

Boudoin    73 

Brophy    74 

for   Cheoplastic    Coat- 

69 

Grouse    74 

Commercial     72 

Dental    70 

Erman    74 

Gauge    72 

Gold    67 

Harjier   74 

Hodgen     74 

Lower    Denture 69 

Low    Fusing 74 

Magnolia   72 


Alloy,  Melotte  ' 74 

Alloy,  Molyneau     74 

Alloy,  Merck    74 

Alloy,  Newton    74 

Alio}^,  Reetz    74 

Alloy,  Richmond    74 

Alloy,  Rose    74 

Alloy,  Ruoltz    74 

Alloy,  Samsioe    69 

Alloy,  Silver   69 

Alloy,  Simpson 74 

Alloy,  Watts     69 

Alloy,  Weston 's    69 

Alloy,  Wood    74 

Alloys,  for  valve  plugs 75 

Alloying  of  Gold  Plate 66 

Almond  Meal  Compound.  .  .  .310 

Alopecia    Ointment 307 

Aluminum    Bronze 70 

Aluminum  Cements 57 

Alveolus,   Fracture    of 223 

Amalgam     Alloy,     Manufac- 
ture  of S2 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Modern   ...   98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Acme    98 

Amalgam,  Alloy,  Ash  &  Son  's  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Black's  ...  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Davis'  ....  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Eureka  ...  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Fellowshiji.  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Fidelity  ...  98 
Amalgam    Alloy,    F  1  a  g  g  '  s 

Submarine    98 

343 


344 


DENTAL  FOBMULABT 


Amalgam    Alloy,    F  1  a  g  g  '  s 
Contour    98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Fletcher's..  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Gibraldar , .    98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Globe    98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Hedstrom's  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Herbst  's  .  .  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Hodgen  's  .  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Justi 's  ....  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Law- 
rence 's    98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Lorenz  's .  .  98 
Amalgam    Alloy,    Odonto- 

graphic    98 

Amalgam    Alloy,    Micromet- 

rie    • 98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Eego    98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Sauer  's  ...  98 
Amalgam     Alloy,     Skoge- 

borg's    98 

Amalgam   Alloy,  Sterion....   98 
Amalgam    Alloy,    20tli    Cen- 
tury       98 

Amalgam    Alloy,    True    Den- 

talloy     98 

Amalgam  Alloy,  Welch 's  . .  98 
Amalgam  Alloy,  Witzel's  ..  98 
Amalgam     Alloy,     Zsig- 

mondy 's    98 

Amalgam  Cement    57 

Amalgam  Compensation    Al- 
loy       99 

Amalgamation    of    Gold,    to 

prevent  .• 99 

Antacids     156 

Antiseptics     156 

Antiseptic  Mouth  Wash....  161 
Antiseptic  Powder,  soluble.  .197 
Antiseptic   Solution,  Dobell.196 


Antiseptic     Solution, 

Thiersch    196 

Anesthetic   for  Exposed 

Pulps    183 

Anesthetic     for     Pyorrhea 

Alveolaris    182 

Anesthetic     Solutions, 

Schleich    180 

Austrian   Tooth   Soaps 177 

Aristol  Oil   Solution 198 

Artificial    Dentine 58 

Artificial  Modeling  Clay 23 

Astringents    157 

Arsenical    Pastes 183 

B 

Babbitt  Metal. 75 

Baked  Clay  Models 26 

Balsam   Analgesique 192 

Base  Plate,  Ideal 31 

Base  Plate,  Wax 36 

Battery   Fluids 318 

Bay  Eum 310 

Beerite    14 

Bergman's  Tooth  Soap 177 

Bismuth    Pastes 187 

Bleaching      Leather,     Ivory, 

Etc 313 

Blue  Print  Paper 290 

Bones,   cleaning   and   bleach- 
ing    298 

Bone  Cavity  Pastes 186 

Bone  Plombe 186 

Brass   Plating   Solution 134 

Bronzing  of  Plaster  Casts..   22 
Burns    211 


Camphor   Tooth    Powder.  ...  169 

Camphorated  Phenol 192 

Capsicum  Bags 191 


DENTAL  FORMULARY 


345 


Capsicum  Plaster 191 

Carbolized   Rosin 63 

Carving   Compound.  .  .  .' 44 

Castings,  Contraction  of.... 118 

Casting  Inlay  Wax 39 

Cavity  Varnishes 63 

Cement,  Amalgam 57 

Cements,   Dental 46 

Cement,  Gutta  Percha 59 

Cement    for   holding   objects 

in    place 61 

Cement  for  Photographs    ...291 

Cement  for  Porcelain 60 

Cement  for  Repairing  Cellu- 
loid       60 

Cement  for  Steam  Fittings.   64 

Cement,  iron  to  iron 64 

Cement   Oxychloride 51 

Cement,  Oxychloride  of  zinc  58 

Cement,  Oxyphosphate   46 

C  e  m  e  n  t  ,  Oxyphosphate  of 

Aluminum    57 

Cement,      Oxyphosphate      of 

Copper   57 

Cement,     Oxyphosphate     o  f 

Gold     58 

Cement,    Oxysulphate 52 

Cement,  Oxysulphate  of  zinc  58 
Cement,     rubber     for     base 

plates    62 

Cements,  Silicate 52 

Cement,    Tin , 59 

Chalk     247 

Chinosol   Mouth   Wash 161 

Chlorinated  Soda  Compound.  195 

Chloroform    Liniment 190 

Chlora-Pereha    28 

Clarifying  Wax  Remnants.  .   41 

Cleansers,  Soap  Powder 312 

Cocaine   Anesthetic    Solu- 
tion, Wyckoff 180 


Cocaine  Anesthetic  Solution.  180 

Cold   Solder 82 

Collodion   Varnish 19 

Coloring  of  Metals 140 

Commonsense  Tooth  Powder.  168 

Compound,  Carving 44 

Compound,  Elastic 44 

Compounds,  Investment 23 

Compound,    Modeling 43 

Condensation,  preventing  on 

mirrors    314 

Continuous    Gum   Enamel   li- 
quid      45 

Copper  Plating  Aluminum.  .140 
Copper  Plating  Solution    .  .  .  183 

Copper,   to   clean 125 

Correctives     158 

Corrosions   of   pulp   canals.. 297 

Counter-die    metals 75 

Counter-irritants    188 

Crucibles,  to  -test 118 

Cysts   213 

D 

Dental  Alloys   70 

Dental  Caries    215 

Dental  Cements    46 

Dental  Liniment   191 

Dental  Rubber,  to  restore.  .  .   32 

Dental  Rubbers    31 

Dental  Silex    19 

Dentition 217 

Depilatory  Compounds 307 

Developing   of   Films 285 

Devitalizing    Compounds.  .  .  .183 

Diagnostic  Hints 282 

Diamond  Cement 60 

Die-Metals    75 

Disinfectant  powder 303 

Disinfection  of  rooms 303 

Drv    Mouth 219 


346 


DENTAL  FORMULARY 


Dry  Plates 289 

Duplicating   Plaster    Casts..    19 

Dusting  Powder 310 

Dyspnea    220 

E 

Eau  de  Botot    161 

Eau  de  Cologne    310 

Eau  de  Quinine    306 

Elastic   Compound 44 

Embalming  Fluid 302 

Emphysema    220 

Emjiyema    221 

English  Odontine 74 

Engine  Burs,  how  to  sharpen  .328 

Engravers  '    Wax 40 

Etching     152 

Etching,    Glass 153 

Eucalyptol  Compound   193 

Eucalyptol  Gutta  Pereha  ...  200 
Eueapercha  Compound.  .28,  200 
Eurof orm   Paste 182 

F 

Fingernail   Bleach 311 

Filtering    Wax 41 

Fire  Bricks    26 

Fire  Extinguish  rs     323 

Fire  Gilding    136 

Fireproofing  of  Paper     324 

Fireproofing  of  Wood    325 

Fitzgerald's  Tooth  Powder.  169 
Fletcher 's    Vegetable    Tooth 

Powder    171 

Fluids,    Polisliing 119 

Fluxes    80 

Formagen     203 

ForniQcresol   194 

Four   Chlorides 302 

Furniture  Wax 41 

Freezing    Mixtures 323 


Freezing  Preventives  for  Au- 
tomobiles     322 

Frosting  of  Window  Glass.. 315 

a 

Geranium-Formol     194 

German    Silver 72 

Gingivitis,      Acute       or 

Chronic   225 

Glass    Etching 153 

Glue,   Liquid 62 

Gold  Alloys 67 

Gold  Fillings,  to  imitate.  .  .  .126 

Gold,  to  make  cohere 126 

Gold  Plate,  to   alloy 66 

Gold  Plate,  to    repair 127 

Gold  Plate,  to  restore  color.  119 

Gold  Plating   Outfit 131 

Gold  Plating  Without  a  Bat- 
tery     135 

Gold  and  Silver,  tests  for.. Ill 

Gold,  Substitutes  for 69 

Gum  Enamel,  Liquid  Contin- 
uous     45 

Gutta  Pereha,   Aluminated..   30 

Gutta  Pereha  Cement 59 

Gutta  Pereha,  Coppered 30 

Gutta  Pereha  Impression 

Compound    31 

Gutta  Pereha  Silver  Nitrate.  30 
Gutta  Pereha,  Solution  of.  .  .  28 
Greaseless   Toilet   Cream.... 308 

H 

Hand    Cleaning    Paste 311 

Hand    Cream 308 

Hair    Dyes 307 

Hair    Tonic 306 

Hair    and.  Scalp,     Remedies 

for     306 

Harlan  's   Tooth   Paste 174 


DENTAL  FOEMULAEY 


347 


Hemorrhage,    Dental 215 

Hemostatic     Solutions 181 

Hectograi^h     Compound.'.  .  .  .315 

Hydrogen     Peroxide 162 

Hydrogen  Peroxide  Solution, 

extemporaneous    19(5 

Hydrogen  Peroxide  Solution, 

to    preserve !■'" 

Hypercementosis    22(3 

Hypertrophy     of     the 

Gingivaj    226 

Hypersensitive      Dentin  e, 
.    Agents  for  reducing 2ij6 

I 

Ideal    Base    Plate 31 

Impervious    Corks 326 

Impression      Material,      Im- 
proved         11 

Impression    Wax,   Inlay 38 

Impression    Varnishes 18 

Impression    Wax 40 

Inlay   Wax,   to   east 39 

Investment    Comi)ounds 23 

Investment    C'om])ounds,    In- 
lays        24 

Indelible    Ink 316 

Inks     316 

Iodine  Caustic 182,  192 

Iodine    Solution    Comiiound.  188 

Iodized    Phenol : 192 

Iodoform,    Aromatized 197 

Iodoform     Emulsion 198 

Iodoform    Liquitl 198 

Iodoform     Wax 198 

lodo-glycerol    188 

J 

Jaws,  Fracture  of 223 

Jeweler  "s     Cement 61 


K 

Kid   Glove   Cleanser 321 

Kobert  's   Tooth   Soap 178 

Koladont    175 

Kolynos    175 

L 

Lacquer,    Metal 150 

Lantern   Slides,   Making   of. 284 

Lantern  Slide   Plates 289 

Lazar 's    Tooth    Powiler 169 

Leucoplakia 228 

Lining  of  Kubber  Dentures.  128 

Liquid    Glue 62 

Liquid     Splint 32U 

Local    Anesthetic     Solution, 

Fischer    179 

Lockjaw   227 

Lower    Denture    Alloy 69 

Lubricant    for    Eubber 

Gloves     319 

Lubricants   for   Syringe   Pis- 
tons    319 

M 

Magnalium     71 

Mandible,   Dislocation    of... 219 

Marble  Slabs,  to  clean 321 

Massing  Fluids 172 

Melting  Point,  to  determine  42 

Metal,  Babbitt 75 

Metals,    Coloring   of 14ii 

Metals,   Counterdie 75 

Metals,  Die 75 

Metal,    Etching 152 

Metals,   Heat   Conducting 

Power   lis 

Metal   Lacquers 150 

Metal      Plate,      Determining 

character    of Ill 

Metals.   Plating   of 128 


348 


DENTAL  FOEMCLABY 


Metal  Polishes,  liquid 120 

Metals,  Eefining  of  Precious.  100 

Metal,    Spence 76 

Metalloid  Compound 44 

Mercuric  Bichloride  Solu- 
tion     195 

Mercury,  Refining  of 104 

Miller  's  Tooth  Paste 175 

Miller's  Tooth  Powder 169 

Miller 's  Mouth  Wash 162 

Model    Cements 16 

Models,  Baked  Clay 26 

Modeling   Composition 43 

Modeling   Wax 41 

Moldine    22 

Moldine,  to  restore 22 

Molding  Sand , 23 

Mono-Chloro-P  h  e  n  o  1    Com- 
pound     105 

Mouth    Cachou 305 

Mouth   Washes 159 

Mouth    Wash    Eczema 230 

Mummifying  Pastes 205 

N 

Necrosis,  Arsenical T. .  .211 

Necrosis     of     the     Alveolar 

Process    230 

Necrosis,    Phosphorous 238 

Neuralgia   231 

Nickel   Plating  Solution.  ...  133 
Nickel    Plating    Without    a 

Battery     138 

Noma     246 

Normal  Anesthetic  Solution.  179 
Novocaine     Compound     Tab- 
lets      181 

Novocaint    Solution 179 

O 

1-2-3   Mixture 194 

Oil    Stone    Lubricant 319 


Oiled    Molding    'Sand 23 

Osteomyelitis    232 

Ostitis  232 

Oxidizing  Tooth  Powder...  170 
Oxpara    204 

P 

Pain,  to  relieve  after  extrac- 
tion     181 

Painting  of  Plaster  Casts...  20 
Paste  for  Mounting  Prints.  .292 

Paste  for  Sealing  Teeth 182 

Paste,    Polishing 122 

Pedley 's  Tooth  Powder 170 

Pericementitis    233 

Pharyngitis,    Dental 216 

Phenol    Compound 192 

Phenosalyl    192 

Phenol    Sodique 193 

Phenol-Sulphonie  Acid 195 

Photographing  Burnt   Manu- 
scripts      291 

Photographic  Developer ...  .284 
Photograjjhs,  to  transfer.  .  .292 
Plaster  Casts,  to   bronze....   22 

Plaster  Casts,  to    clean 22 

Plaster  Casts,  to  duplicate..  19 
Plaster  Casts,  to  make  from 

life 296 

Plaster  Casts,  to    paint 20 

Plaster  Casts,  to  repair 16 

Plaster    of    Paris    Bandages, 

to    remove 16 

to    color 11 

to    dissolve    ' '  set " 15 

encaustic    14 

to    harden 12 

to  hasten  setting 15 

to  increase  cohesion....   11 

marbleized    14 

to  prevent  warpage....   15 


DENTAL  FOUMULAST 


349 


to    separate 17 

to  retard  setting 15 

to  remove  from  plates..    16 

Plating  of  Metals 128 

Plating    Solutions 131 

Platinoid    72 

Platinum  Plating   Solution  ..  134 
Platinum  Plating   of   Instru- 
ments     140 

Plastiline    23 

Polishing  Fluids 119 

Polishes,  Liquid 120 

Polishing  Pastes     122 

Polishing  Powders 118 

Powders,   Polishing 118 

Potassium      Chlorate      Tooth 

Paste   176 

Potassium      Chlorate      Tooth 

Powder     171 

Preparations  for  the  Mouth 

and    Teeth 154 

Preserving   Fluids   for    Ana- 
tomical Specimens 301 

Pruyn  's  Mouth  Wash 163 

Pulp  Capping    61 

Pulp  Capping    Material 206 

Pulp  Digestant    185 

Pulp  Mummifying  Paste.  .  .  .205 

Pulp  Varnishes 62 

Pulpitis    238 

Pyorrhea   Alveolaris 241 

Pyorrhea  Anesthetic     182 

Pyorrhea  Astringent     189 

R 

Ranula  214 

Red  Tooth  Powder 171 

Refining  of  Mercury 104 

Refining  of  Precious  Metals.  100 
Resorcinel   Mouth    Wash....  163 


Restoring    Moldine 22 

Root     Canal     Filling     Mate- 
rials     199 

Root  Filling,  Disappearing.  .205 

Rosin,    Carbolized 63 

Rubber     Cement     for     Base 

Plates    62 

Rubber  Dam,  to  preserve...  34 
Rubber  Denture,  to  line....  128 
Rubber      Gloves,      substitute 

for    320 

Rubber  Goods,  to  conserve..   33 

Rubber  Solution 32 

Rubbers,  Dental 31 

Rust,  to  remove 124 

S 

Saccharin  Mouth  Wash 163 

Saliva   Analysis .  .277 

Saliva  Tubes,  to  clean 321 

Salol  Tooth  Paste 176 

Sandarac    A^'arnish 18 

Saponaceous  Mouth  Wash..  163 
Seal  for  Pyorrhea  Pockets..  187 

Sealing  Wax 327 

Separating   Fluids 17 

Shaving    Cream 312 

Shellac   Varnish 19 

Sheet  Wax,  Making 37 

Silex,  Dental 19 

Silicate    Cements 52 

Silver  Alloy     69 

Silver,  German 72 

Silver  Plating    Paste 137 

Silver  Plating   Solution 132 

Silvering  of  Mirrors    313 

Silvering  Solution    138 

Sizing  for  Lantern  Screen.. 296 

Skin  Food 309 

Skin   Lotion   309 

Skin,  Remedies  for 308 


350 


DENTAL  FOBMULAEY 


Soap  Powder  Cleansers 312 

Solder    76 

Solder,  Aluminum    80 

Solder,  Cold    82 

Solders,  Gold     77 

Solder,  German   Silver 79 

Solder,  Iridio-Platinum    ....    79 

Solder,  Platinum    78 

Solder,  Silver    79 

Solder,  Soft 80 

Solution      of      Cresol      Com- 
pound     193 

Sorel  's  Dental  Cement 58 

Spence   Metal 76 

Sponge   Tin 71 

Stain     for     Laboratory     Ta- 
bles     317 

Stanno-perclia   30 

Steel  Tempering 108 

Steel,  working  of 105 

Steresol     188 

Stimulants   ; .  .  157 

Sterilizer,    Simple 304 

Sterilizing  Fluids  for  Instru- 
ments     ,.  .  .  .304 

Stomatitis,  Aphthous    243 

Stomatitis,  Catarrhal    244 

Stomatitis,  Gangrenous    ....246 

Stomatitis,  Mercurial   246 

Stomatitis,  Scorbutic 246 

Stomatitis,  Ulcerative    246 

Stoppers  for  Chemicals 326 

Straw  Hat  Cleansers 321 

Sticky   Wax 35 

Styptics    185 

Substitutes  for  Gold 69 

Swallowing    Artificial    Den- 
tures     248 

Syncope    249 

Syphilis    249 


T 

Table,   Percentage    Solution. 335 

Table  of  Solubility 337 

Table      of      Thermometric 

Equivalents    340 

Talbot 's    lodo-Glycerol 188 

Teeth,  Fracture    of 224 

Teeth,  Luxation  of 227 

Teeth,  Eemedies    for 304 

Tempering  Broaches     109 

Tempering  Copper    Ill 

Tempering  Fluids  for  Steel.  110 

Tempering  Steel 108 

Tempering  Steel,    Color    Ee- 

action    109 

Temperatures,    Estimating 

High    117 

Temperatures    of    Various 

Flames  117 

Temporary  Stopping 29 

Flagg  's   29 

Hill's     29 

Jacob 's   29 

Tests  for  Gold  and  Silver... Ill 

Thrush 254 

Thymocami:)hene     194 

Thymol  Mouth  Wash    164 

Thymol  Tooth  Soap    178 

Thymophene    194 

Tin,  Sponge ' 71 

Tincture  of  Aconite,  Staple..  189 
Tincture  of  Aconite, 

Stronger   189 

Tincture  of  Cresol,  Sapon- 
ated 193 

Tincture  of  Iodine  and  Aco- 
nite, Aromatic 189 

Tincture  of  Iodine,  Deodor- 
ized     189 

Toothache  Cement  303 


DENTAL  FOEMULABY 


331 


Toothache  Drops    305 

Toothache  Gum    304 

Toothache  Sticks   '. 303 

Tooth  Pastes    171 

Tooth  Polish    306 

Tooth  Powders   16-t 

Tooth  Soaps    177 

Touch  Stone  ami  Its  Use... 112 

Traumaticiue    28 

Tropacocaiue    Solution 181 

Tumors  of  the  Mouth 235 

U 

Urine    Analj'ses 269 

V 

A^'arnishes,  Cavity    63 

Varnishes,  Collodion    13 

Varnishes,  Impression    18 

Varnishes  for  Negatives.  ..  .290 

Varnishes,   Pulp 62 

Varnish,  Sandarac  18 

Varnish,  Shellac     19 

Varnish,  to  Filter 64 

Victoria  Metal 71 

Violet  Tooth  Powder 171 


Vulcanite   Files,  to   clean... 321 
A'ulcanization,  Gold 33 

W 

Waterproofing  of  Boots   ....326 
Waterproofing  of  Paper     ...323 

Watt 's    Alloy 69 

Wax,  Base  Plate .36 

Engravers '   40 

for   Furniture 41 

Impression   40 

Inlay,  to  cast 39 

Molding    41 

to      determine      melting 

point    42 

to  filter 41 

Eemnauts,   to   clarify...    41 

Sticky    35 

Weights  and  Measures.  ....  .329 

Weston  's  Alloy 69 

Wounds    255 

;x 

Xerostomia     219 

Z 
Zinc      Chloride      Solution, 

Black     197 


